Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 538

0

Printday: 2007-01-27

Item

Description

Model No.

Information

JLZ040412.xls

File
1

RANGE 4 HOT PLATES+OVEN

7BTOE2M44

COFFEE MACHINE M-2

CQFS22MM

UNIVERSAL MACHINE KU 2-4E

540101

REFRIGERATOR 300L

MR-300

7, 7-2

WATER BOILER 151

BE3M

DISHWASHER WT38

WT38M

12

COFFEE MACHINE

HD7448

14

IRONING BOARD WALL MOUNTED

620135

15

MICROWAVE OVEN

RE-R40SM

10

16

TILTABLE FRYING TABLE

168032S

11

18

REFRIGERATOR 113L

ER45M

12

19

WASHER-EXTRACTOR

EW402F60

13

20

DRYING TUMBLER EDE 425 M.60

167049

14

ADD

WASHER-EXTRACTOR

W455H

15

ADD

TUMBLE DRYER

T4130

16

1 0 NMBEEii

OS

O-

2069914

^ ^ ' ^

LOi^AMT
Exclusive Sales of
B] E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment

How to contact us...


Loipart AB
P.O. Box 694
S-441 IBAIingss
SWEDEN

Phone:
Telefax:
Telefax spare parts:

+46 322 66 83 60
+46 322 63 77 47
+46 322 66 83 99

E-mail:
Internet:

loipart@loipart.se
www.loipart.conn

LMPA
CUSTOMER INFORMATION

February 2005

Loipart AB took over the marine sales and project organisation of Electrolux
Professional Marine Division on 1^' of November 2003. As a result Loipart AB gained
World exclusivity and became the sole supplier of Electrolux Food and Laundry
Marine appliances and all Spare Parts for these.
Loipart Ltd, with over 25 years of experience, is the largest turnkey supplier of
Catering areas in the World and Electrolux the largest manufacturer of Marine
equipment. This means that all customers, both past, present and future, have the
convenience of a one in-house availability for all Electrolux Food and Laundry Marine
products and Spare Parts, as well as Loipart turnkey Galleys, Pantries and Provision
stores.
In order to help our Customers we have an After Sales Organization placed in
Alingss to whom you are always welcome with Technical Questions and Problems.
You can reach the After Sales People on the following Addresses:
Manager
Jan-Oiof Gustafsson
Tel: +46-322-66 83 68
Fax:+46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: ian-olof.qustafsson(S)lolpart.se

Joe O'Kane
Tel: +46-322-66 83 79
Fax:+46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: ioe.okane^loipart.se

Stefan Engelbrektsson
Tel: +46-322-66 83 89
Fax:+46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: stefan.enqelbrektsson@loipart.se

^ 3

Mssr^^MMJ^wA

CUSTOMER INFORMATION

February 2005

Loipart AB took over the marine sales and project organisation of Electrolux
Professional Marine Division on 1^' of November 2003. As a result Loipart AB gained
World exclusivity and became the sole supplier of Electrolux Food and Laundry
Marine appliances and all Spare Parts for these.
Loipart Ltd, with over 25 years of experience, is the largest turnkey supplier of
Catering areas in the World and Electrolux the largest manufacturer of Marine
equipment. This means that all customers, both past, present and future, have the
convenience of a one in-house availability for all Electrolux Food and Laundry Marine
products and Spare Parts, as well as Loipart turnkey Galleys, Pantries and Provision
stores.
To strengthen our After Sales Service in USA we have founded a new group
company, Loipart LLC, based in Ft Lauderdale, USA. Loipart LLC provides the same
service as Loipart AB in Sweden but is focusing on our American based customers.
For fastest possible service, please assign all Marine Spare Part enquiries
and Purchase Orders to your contact person according to the list below.
The enquiries and orders can be sent by fax or e-mail:
Loipart LLC
Morten Mathiesen

Tel: +1-954-522-8377
Fax: +1-954 522 8376
E-mail: aeneralmaiKaioipartllc.com
Area responsibility: USA
LOIPART AB
Britt-Marie Almberg
Tel: +46-322-66 83 62
Fax: +46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: britt-marie.almberqgiioipart.se
Area responsibility: Norway, Denmark and Finland
Maj Hellberg

Tel: +46-322-66 83 69
Fax: +46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: mai.hellbera(g)loipart.se
Area responsibility: Europe and Africa
(excl. Great Britain, Sweden, Norway, Denmark and Finland)
Anette Smetana

Tel: +46-322-66 83 91
Fax: +46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: anette.smetana@loipart.se
Area responsibility: Great Britain, Sweden, Asia, Far and Middle East, Oceania,
South America and Canada

Bank information

For Loipart AB
Bank: Nordea Bank Sweden AB
P.O Box 340
SE-441 27 Alingss
Sweden

For Loipart LLC


Bank: HSBC Bank USA
1600 SE 17th Str.
Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33316

International Payments:
Account No: 3050 17 04019
IBAN account No:
SE55 3000 0000 0305 0170 4019
Swift Code: NDEASESS

All Payments:
Acc. No. 156717573
Swift Code: MRMDUS33

Domestic Payments:
Postgirot: 111192-1
Bankgirot: 5693-8442
Notice:
Please make sure that the invoice number is
transferred as a reference with your
payment.
No withdrawals for bank charges outside
Sweden are accepted.

For more information, please contact:


For USA
Morten Matiiiessen
Loipart LLC
Tel: +1-954-522-8377
Fax: +1-954-522-8376
E-mail: morten(g)loipartllc.com

For Rest of Tlie World


P-O Nygrdh
Loipart AB
Tel: +46-322-66 83 78
Fax: +46-322-66 83 99
E-mail: Der-olof.nyqardh@loipart.se

^3

PO

CO

iR*

"=si

m
Ol
ES^BSSd

t
PO

^3

W
^

)
Ol

i\D

H Electrolux

Ranges,
electric

, ^

STAINLESS STEEL EXECUTION

COMPACT DESIGN - LARGE


CAPACITY ON A SMALL SURFACE

ADJUSTABLE FLANGED FEET

INCLUDING FRONT HAND RAIL


AND ROLLING RACK

STORAGE CABINET OR OVEN FOR


2/1 GN PANS WITH NON-TILT
GUIDES FOR SAFETY

MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF


VDE/CE

TWO SIZES, SEVEN MODELS

IPX 4

9 8 % RECYCLABLE BY WEIGHT

H ^ H H H J H / - ^ *

(^^c!

Model 7BTSE2M40

/ffi

7ilSE
^9p ^S|

^.s
! -'^
{llp ^m ^ 9 ^ B

Model 16 82 06M

ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL AB
MARINE DIVISION
SE 441 82 Alingss, Sweden
Phone
+46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
pa.marlneinfo@electrolux.se

\ i

These ranges are made entirely of AISI 304


stainless steel with a pressed, one piece top with
sealed hot plates to meet the highest hygiene
standards. Stainless steel control panel with
splash proteCTion to control knob entry points.
Thermostatic plate control with a 6 position
rotary switch for accurate temperature control.
Monobloc models and top units are mounted on
height adjustable feet.
The models with oven are provided with a
thermally insulated cooking chamber, made in
stainless steel, with 3 pairs of non-tilting runners. Thermally insulated, double-walled oven
door mounted on a spring hinge. Stainless steel
handle. Ample sized oven dimensions
530x650x300 mm with grid shelf in chromed
steel with integrated rolling protection. Heating is by means of 2 independent incoloy elements in rustproof alloy for heating to high
temperatures, positioned above and below the
oven floor in easy deanable, stainless steel.
Thermostatic temperature control adjustable
up to 320C with a choice of upper or lower
heating.
Side and rear guard rails are available as optional
extras.
For further specifications and optional extras,
please see overleaf

2-031
DOC.NO.
EDITIONS

2-03 I B M
03.04

Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm

RANGES, ELECTRIC
Model 7BTOE2M40, 7BTOE2M44

Model 7BTSE2M40, 7BTSE2M44

1 C

[
^

oooo
f

"

<^~

l ^ w * ;-:-l

'

1'1

48

6C 4

593

48.

oooooo

OO

oo oooo
^

1
O

593

48

604

I
700

700

&

Model 7BTOE3M40, 7BTOE3M44

^
954

593
700

-112

700

700
Side view, all models:

Model 16 82 06M

58

H75|
Elearical connertion
Rolling rack
Front hand rail
Storage cabinet 680x640x420 mm
(models 16 81 13, 16 82 20 only)
5. Oven 4.7 kW
(not models 16 81 13, 16 82 20)

593

20

850

700
Hotplates

16 82 06M
7BTSE2M40

Oven
4.7 kW

7BTSE2M44
3

7BTOE2M40

7BTOE2M44

Voltage V*

440 3 -60

7BTOE3M44

Loading
kW

Max amps
in phase

15.1

21.8

440 3 -60

9.3

440 3 -60

gross

80

100

45

60

80

100

120

130

52.

12.2

0.740

20.2

400 3 -50

400 3 -50

net

Shipping
volume
m

13.4

400 3 -50

440 3 -60

7BTOE3M40

150' - 0

Weight kgs

0 2 3 0 mm
2.6 kW

14

19.2

18.4
27.7

1.100

25.2
*other voltages available on request

Optional extras
PNC

92
92
92
92

16 01
16 02
16 03
16 61

2-031
Subject to dianges without notice.

M.,

112

Specifications

0155
mm
1.5 kW

700

'
Model

.55

j30

1.
2.
3.
4.

Model

48

'

-112U.

7HRF2
7HRF3
7HRSR
7HRSL

Description
S/s rear h a n d rail, L = 7 0 0
S/s r e a r h a n d rail, L = 1 0 5 0
S/s r i g h t s i d e h a n d rail
S/s left s i d e h a n d rail

mm
mm

Installation
The range is to be bolted to deck Center oflegs see
installation drawing above.

ff
540

^0

-1108!

PR 700
- CUCINE ELETTRICHE
INSTALLAZIONE, USO E MANUTENZIONE

Pag.

- ELECTRIC COOKERS
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Page

- ELEKTROHERDE
INSTALLATION, GEBRAUCH UND WARTUNG

Seite

13

Page

17

Pag.

21

, - FOURNEAUX ELECTRIQUES
' INSTALLATION, EMPLOI ET ENTRETIEN
- COCINAS ELECTRICAS
INSTALACION, USO Y MANTENIMIENTO

- ELEKTRISCHE FORNUIZEN
<^ INSTRUCTIES VOORINSTALLATIE, GEBRUIK EN ONDERHOUD Pagina

25

- SPIS, EL
INSTRUKTIONER FR INSTALLATION OCH BRUK

Sidan

29

- ELKOMFURER
INSTALLATION, BRUG OG VEDLIGEHOLDELSE

Sida

33

- COZINHAS ELECTRICAS
INSTRUCgOES PARA A INSTALAQAO E USO

Pag.

37

- HAEKTPIKEZ KOYZINEZ
OAHriEI TIA THN EFKATAZTAZH KAI TIA THN XPHZH

ZeiSa

41

DOC. NO. 5958 706 03


EDITION 1

9908

DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA
ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL SPA
VialeTreviso 15
33170 PORDENONE
Dichiara sotto la propria autorita che le macchine appartenenti a
questa documentazione, descritta nella targhetta di identif icazione, sono conforme alle seguenti disposizioni legislative:
- European Directive 73/23/CEE (L.V.D.)
- European Directive 89/336/CEE (E.M.C.)
- European Directive 93/68/CEE (Amendment)
- European Directive 90/396/CEE (Gas Directive)
- Approval: VDE
Data: Pordenone 02.03lrt(98
Nome:
Piettt
skbile Stabilimento)

DECLARATIONE OF CONFORMITY
ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL SPA
VialeTreviso 15
33170 PORDENONE
Declares on own authority that the machine present in this
documentation, described in the identification plate, conforms to
the legislative directions of the directive:
- European Directive 73/23/CEE (L.V.D.)
- European Directive 89/336/CEE (E.M.C.)
- European Directive 93/68/CEE (Amendment)
- European Directive 90/396/CEE (Gas Directive)
- Approval: VDE
Date: Pordenone 02
Name:
Pie
(Rd|46frsabne Stabilimento)

(iC)
e)
O
& ^
ID
C:)^:)
3
^
O
^

SCHEMI Dl INSTALLAZIONE
INSTALLATION DIAGRAM
INSTALLATIONSPLAN
SCHEMAS D'INSTALLATION
ESQUEMA PARA LA INSTALACION
INSTALLATIESCHEMA
INSTALLATIONSRITNING
INSTALLATIONSDIAGRAM
ESQUEMAS DE INSTALAQAO
ZXEAIArPAMMATA EfKATAZTAEHZ

iL
b

^pw

.'"4.

450

Jlfijj.

0
0
350

hsrr

IT

Q
54

n =HII

1 1

^ ~

000

700

@@ @@ @@ @

II I

-1-^-

II

000

o
o

ET
52 I |.

1
540

E
fiO

60 .
[op

!| I

13

i;^

MARINE
version

MARINE
version

m
7t)0
1

I. MAIN FEATURES
1.

Do not wash the appliance with water jets.

DESCRIPTION OF APPLIANCE

This booklet describes a number of appliance models.


For more detailed information about the model in your possession, refer to "Technical Data" table.

2.

TABLE TECHNICAL DATA

Installation drawing (see fig. 1)


I - Power supply cord entry
MO0EI.$

IS
top

1p

1
cflblrwt

cabinet

t. ov*n

tM
1Mtf2
1, tmmti t. ovmt
MarfiM
Uartn

POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE (VOLT)

230 3400 3N

230 3400 3N

230 3400 3N

230 3400 3N

230 3400 3 N

400 3440 3-

400 3440 3-

FREQUENCY (Hz)

50/60

50/60

50/60

50/60

50/60

50/60

50/60

5,2

9,3

9,3

14,5

9,3

9,3

14,5

4,95

4,95

4,95

MAXIMUM POWER
COOKING TOP (Kw)
MAXIMUM POWER OVEN
FORNO (Kw)
MAXIMUM POWER
(Kw)
POWER SUPPLY CABLE
SECTION (mm)

5,2

9,3

9,3

14,5

14,25

14,26

19,45

4x1.5
5x1,5

4x2,5
5x1,5

4x2,5
5x1,5

4x10
5x1,5

4x10
5x2,5

4x2,5
4x2,5

4x4
4x4

PLATES (1.5Kw)-(Nr)
PLATES (2,6 Kw) - (Nr.)

i n va

Do not use products containing chlorine (bleach, hydrochloric


acid etc.) even diluted, to clean steel surfaces.
Do not use corrosive substances (i.e. muriatic acid) to clean the
floor under the appliance.
For more information, refer to the chapter on "Care and
maintenance".

4. SAFEGUARDING THE
ENVIRONMENT
4.1.

All the packaging materials used are environmentally friendly.


They may be stored at no risk or burnt at an authorised incineration plant. Plastic materials suitable for recycling are marked with
the following symbols:
/ \

3.

PRECAUTIONS

Before installing or using the appliance, carefully read this


instructions booklet, in as much as it contains important information concerning the safety, operation and maintenance of the
appliance.
o.

Keep this instructions booklet in a safe place for future consultation by other users or purchasers in the event that the appliance
is resold.

Packaging

PE
/ \

polyethylene : external wrapping film, instructions


booklet bag and gas injectors bag
polypropylene: top packaging panels and straps

PP
/ \
PS

expanded polystyrene: protective surround elements

4.2. Use
The appliance has been designed and perfected under laboratory testing conditions to offer exceptional levels of performance.
However, to minimise energy consumption (electricity, gas and
water), we recommend tuming the appliance off when not in use
for long periods and not using it, for example, with the door open
as this may impair the oven's performance. We also recommend
preheating the appliance immediately prior to use.
4.3. Cleaning
To minimise the emission of pollutants Into the environment, we
recommend cleaning the appliance (externally and, where necessary, internally) with products which are at least 90% biodegradable.

Important; Installation and maintenance of tine aDOliance


and its conversiort to a different oas SUDDIV. must onlv be
oerformedfova auatified installer authorised bv the
manufacturer.
This appliance is intended for industrial use only and is specifically designed to cook food. Any other use of the appliance is
deemed improper.
The appliance must only be used by trained staff and must be
supervised at all times when in use.
Switch off the appliance if it breaks down or malfunctions.
Only contact the technical service centre authorised by the
manufacturer for repairs and only use original spare parts.
Failure tocomply with the above requirement may jeopardise
the safety of the appliance and render the guarantee null and
void.

4.4
Disposal
The appliance must be disposed of properly at the end of its
service life.
The appliance is made from 90% recyclable materials (stainless
steel, iron, aluminium, galvanised sheet steel, etc.). These materials may therefore be scrapped in accordance with local waste
disposal regulations at a conventional recycling plant.
Make the appliance unusable by cutting off the power cord. Also
remove any compartment or interior closure device fitted on the
appliance to prevent persons from becoming trapped inside.

rr INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLfiTsj


1.

POSITIONING

Place the appliance under Its extraction hood to insure the


removal of all vapors generated whilst the appliance is working.
Adjust the height and level of each cabinet by regulating the
adjustable feet.
Whenever the appliance is to be placed near external or
dividing walls, kitchen furniture etc., it is recommended that
these be made of uninflammable materials; if this is not the case,
then the same must be covered with uninflammable heat resistant
materials. Close attention must be paid to fire prevention laws
and standards.
Carefully peel off the plastic covering from the external panel,
if some of the glue remains attached it can be easily removed
using a suitable solvent.
Close the holes on the side of the appliance by means of the
plugs supplied.
1.1
ASSEMBLY APPLIANCES (fig. 2)
Remove the spacers from the holes "A" and "B".
Provisionally set side by side the appliances. Level the height
of the appliances and then separate them.
Apply a thin adhesive tape "C" on the edge of the upper top that
goes alongside.
Apply on the upper side of the top a seam "D" of sealant (c.r.
059611).
Set side by side the appliances, fastening them through the
holes "A" and "B" with screws M5x20. Fasten them by means of
nuts and washers.
Clean the sealant in eccess with a special spatule and remove
the adhesive tape.

2.

Before carrying out the electric connection, make sure that the
voltage and frequency rated on the appliance data plate
conform to those of the mains supply.
To accede to the main terminal board you just need to remove
the lower panel of the oven.
The power supply cable must be flexible and of a type matching
at least the qualities of a rubber-type cable H05RN-F and it must
be protected by a stiff plastic pipe.
The cable shall be connected to the main terminal board according to the instructions of the wiring diagram attached to the
appliance and then fastened by means of a cable clamp.
The appliance shall be connected to the mains through a
suitable automatic circuit breaker that leaves a gap of at least
3mm between its contacts.
The maximum leakage current is 1 mA/kW.
The appliance must be earthed. To this purpose, inside the
appliance, near the main terminal board, there is a screw
marked with the symbol + to which must be connected the
earth wire.
The appliance shall be included in a correctly dimensioned
equipotential. The connection is carried out by means of a screw
marked with the symbol "^, which is located near the front left leg.
The manufacturer declines any liability in case of no respect
of this safety rule.
2.1
SAFETY DEVICE
The appliance is equipped with a safety device having automatic
reset, which cuts in whenever the temperature exceeds the
maximum limit as set at factory and it interrupts the power supply
to the resistors.
If the safety device cuts in, it will be necessary to ask for an
authorized technician to eliminate the cause.

Wamina!
The sealatt beains polvmerlz^ion stat^na from the external
surface; rt is recommended not to touch ttje sealant In the first
three hours after application in order to avoid ar^y trimming.

1.2

ELECTRIC CONNECTION

ASSEMBLY OF TOP APPLIANCE ON SUPPORT

See the relative enclosed assembly instructions for the


installation.

10

III. INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE


This appliance is intended for industrial use, and must only
be used by trained staff.

1.

INTRODUCTION

This appliance should be used only for cooking foodstuffs and it


shall not be used for other purposes.
Our appliances have been designed and optimised by means
of laboratory tests to guarantee high levels of performance and
efficiency. However, to save energy (electricity, gas and water)
avoid using the appliance under no-load conditions or conditions
that impair optimal operation (e.g. with the doors/lids open).
Also, when possible, pre-heat the appliance before use.

2.1
SWITCHING ON THE COOKING TOP (fig. 3)
Switch on the main switch installed ahead of the appliance.
Turn control knob "A" of the desired plate so that the Index on
the front panel points towards one of the six available positions,
bearing in mind that position "1" corresponds to minimum power
and that position "6" corresponds to maximum power.
The green pilot lamp lights on to Indicate that the appliance is
live.
In orderte adjust the plates heat, first set the knobs on position
"6"; once the maximum temperature or the boiling point has
been reached, bring the knob on a lower setting.

Warning: during operation the cooking tops become very hot.

2.

HOW TO USE THE COOKING TOP

All plates have a temperature limiting device, which interrupts


the power supply whenever the temperature reaches 450 C.
The temperature limiting device reset is carried out automatically.
In order to ensure correct use and energy saving, you must
observe the following:
- use pots and pans with a flat bottom and a diameter not smaller
than the one of the hot plates;
- turn on the plate only after having positioned the utensil on top;
- do not leave the plates on with no pots or when the pot on top
is empty.
- do not spill cold liquids on the hot plates.

2.2
SWITCHING OFF
Turn the appliance control knobs on "off' position.

11

3.

HOW TO USE THE OVEN

The resistor operating system is controlled by a four-positions


selector, whereas the temperature inside the chamber is controlled by a thermostat.
The selector enables to choose the type of heating by switching
on the most appropriate heating elements:
"off" position
"appliance on" position
upper and lower heating elements
lower resistor
upper resistors
Note:
All cooking processes must be carried out with the oven door
closed.
3.1
TURNING ON THE OVEN (fig. 4)
Turn selector knob "C" for resistor control on one of the
operating positions.
The green pilot lamp lights on to indicate that the appliance is live.
Turn thermostat knob "D" to the setting corresponding to the
desired cooking temperature which ranges between 140 and
320 C. The yellow pilot lamp lights on to indicate that the
resistors are on. Its turning off indicates that the set temperature
has been reached.

4.

CLEANING AND SERVICING

Before proceeding with any cleaning or maintenance operations, make sure that the power supply is disconnected at the
mains.
To reduce the emission of harmful subtances into the
atmosphere, clean the appliance (externally, and internally when
necessary) with products featuring over 90% biodegradability.
Clean the stainless steel surfaces daily with warm water and a
neutral soap, rinse thoroughly and dry carefully.
The cleaning of the said surfaces should never be effectuated
using aggressive detergents, common wire wool, brushes or
similar implements.
Clean the plates with a damp cloth, then turn them on for a few
minutes as to let them dry quickly; finally lubricate them with a
thin layer of alimentary oil.
If the appliance is not going to be used for an extended period
then the following precautions should be observed:
- Disconnect the power supply.
- Apply a protective film of Vaseline oil on the stainless steel
surfaces.
- Make sure that the premises is aired regularly.
CAUTION
Do not wash the appliance with direct or high pressure water jets.
For the cleaning of the appliance do not use products containing
chlorine, bleach, chloric acid etc. even if diluted.
Do not use corrosive substances such as hydrochloric acid
when cleaning the pavement surrounding the appliance.
Do not spray cold liquids onto the hot plates.
When scrapping the appliance, onbserve all regulations
governing waste displosal in the country of installation.
Our appliances are manufactured using more than 90 % metal
(stainless steel, iron, aluminium, galvanaised sheet metal) and
therefore these may be recycled in conventioani waste recovery
sites in compliance with current standards in the country of
installation.
Render the appliance completely inoperative by removing the
power cable and any other closure device (where fitted) to avoid
the risk of children being trapped inside.
4.1
SUGGESTIONS
It is advisable to periodically check the appliance (at least once
a year). To this end we advise you to obtain a maintenance
contract.

3.2
SWITCHING OFF
Turn the appliance control knobs to the "off' position.
Switch off the appliance at the mains.

12

SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE


CATALOGO PARTI Dl RICAMBIO

H] Electrolux
ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL

" MARINE" - ELECTRIC COOKER


CUCINE ELETTRICHE "MARINE"

PR700

Factory PNC
168023
168024
168025
168026

9731

Pag.

1
2
3-4

Model

Ref.

Page

RCF/E2M0
RCF/E2M4
RCVF/E3M0
RCVF/E3M4

a
b
c
d

1,2
1,2
1,3
1,3

Main view
Electric component
Spare parts list

4 hot piates, 400 V


4 hot piates, 440 V
6 hot piates, 400 V
6 hot piates, 440 V

Vista generale
Componentielettrici
Lista ricambi

Brand:
Country:
From ser. nr. / Da Ser. Nr. / 844
Ed. 00-05

Doc. Nr.:

2-04 009

From ser. nr. / Da Ser. Nr. / 844


Pag.: 1

Ed. 00-05

Doc. Nr.:

2-04 009

From ser. nr. / Da Ser. Nr. / 844


Pag.: 2

Ed. 00-05

Doc. Nr.:

2-04 009

Electric cookers
Cucineelettriche
PNC

Ref.

PNC

Ref.

i023
168024

a
b

168025
168026

c
d

Pos

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
32
33
33
34
35
36
37
38
38

51
51
52
52
53
54

Code

004244

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
054111
054113
004266
0A5459

*
*
053339
004586
004584
005369

*
059044

*
004253
004254
025020
004255
050766
052725
058613
054144
005962

*
*
*
054112
301
052220
002449

*
*

003931
003929
003930
004014
051905
051906

Descrizione

Description

Pagina 1: Vista generale

Page 1: Main view

Griglia
Traversa mobile L 370
Ghlera
Traversa mobile L 350
Traversa fissa
Traversa 1,5 m
Colonnina
Ripiano 6 piastre
Ripiano 4 piastre
Tappo
Guarnizione tappo
Supporto corrimano
Guarnizione laterale forno
Guida
Magnete
Cerniera portina
Corrimano 700 mm
Corrimano 1050 mm
Perno
Maniglia
Porta
Maniglia
Supporto scrocco
Molla
Chiusura forno
Cruscotto
Porta
Griglia
Controporta
Cerniera
Copricerniera
Morsettiera
Suola
Piedino 3/4" Marine
Fianco Sx
Fianco Dx
Fianco destro
Guarnizione superiore forno
Tappo
Vite
Confezione tappi ripiano
Schienale
Schienale

Grate
Crosspiece
Ring nut
Crosspiece
Crosspiece
Crosspiece
Column
Top panel
Top panel
Plug
Gasket
Support
Gasket
Runner
Magnet
Hinge
Handrail
Handrail
Pin
Handle
Door
Handle
Support
Spring
Fastening
Control panel
Door
Grate
Inner door
Hinge
Hinge cover
Junction box
Bottom
Foot, Marine
Left panel
Libretto d'uso
Side panel
Gasket mm.596
Plug
Screw
Set of plugs
Rear panel
Rear panel

Pagina 2: Parti elettriche

Page 2: Electric component

Piastra 2600 W, 400 V, Dia. 220 mm


Piastra 2600 W, 440 V
Piastra 1500 W, 400 V, Dia. 145 mm
Piastra 1500 W, 440 V
Staffa per piastra
Staffa per piastra

Electric plate 2600 W,


Electric plate 2600 W,
Electric plate 1500 W,
Electric plate 1500 W,
Hinge, for plate
Hinge, for plate

Ref. / Notes

cd/

cd/
cd/
ab/

cd
cd
ab/
cd/
cd
cd
cd

art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.
art.

516842400
516841100
516842300
516841900
516842100
516841200
870822403
870822304
546811800
546811600
516836200

art. 517856500
art. 517856600

art. 508888200
art. 514886600
art. 516840800

ab/
cd/

art. 521884601
art.0521884501
art.502883302
art. 546811700

400
440
400
440

V
V
V
V

ab /
cd /

art. 502883203
art. 502894604

ac/
bd/
ac/
bd/

2600 W
2600 W
1500W
1500W

o
Q
CO

From ser. nr. / [) a Ser. N r . / 8 4 4


Pag. 3

Ed. 00-05

Doc. Nr.:

2-04 009

Electric cookers
Cucineelettriche
PNC

Ref.

PNC

Ref.

i023
i024

a
b

168025
168026

c
d

Pos

55
56
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72

Code

051907
004552
004558
059257
004269
052099
059238
005370
005011
004274
004270
004271
053816
025245
005010
004268
053342
010227
005377

Descrizione

Description

Pagina 2: Parti elettriche

Page 2: Electric component

Molla per piastra


Cruscotto
Cruscotto
Indice manopola
Limitatore di temperatura
Termostato
Commutatore
Resistenza di caduta
Lampada gialla tonda
Manopola
Manopola x termostato
Manopola
Guarnizione per manopola
Molla
Lampada verde tonda
Commutatore
Molla
Guarnizione
Resistenza forno

Spring, tor plate


Control panel
Control panel
Pointer
Thermostat
Thermostat
Change over switch
Heating
Lamp
Knob
Knob for thermostat
Knob
Gasket, for knob
Spring
Lamp
Change over switch
Spring
Gasket
Heating element

Ref. / Notes

ab
cd

bd

From ser. nr. / Da Ser. Nr. / 844


Pag.: 4

Ed. 00-05

Doc. Nr.:

2-04 009

R12

R14 /^
'^^
/iramI
\^

/^

/iram

j-m-,U]
^

\
RI 1

R13

KU

R14

R12 / ^
"^
/ j ( n o 1 N^

R15

-{D
4

/ ^

/|ramI

R13

/Iram

Hl

MDy
R15

/^

f\rmuiI

\
23 4

HIJLBI

r-%"'
pJzL.
j
'fp pi

B2
P3P: P:

Me],

41]

_,

^J^

/|nan

5ll 2 3 4

B4 p J t i

1t1

=3 P'

^B,y|

=3p

B2
pa

/|ramI

Melj

H 1 JL. PI ^ i

^_F

5ll 2 3 4

B3 r_L_i_ _i
Pi PI p;

B4

*_F

B5 p >. . " ,

B5
pj p'

Pi

ii|j
440V- 3 50/60H2
14.25KW 21A

LII.2L3

"

EQUI POTENT I EL
POT. AUSGLEICH

LAMPADE 440V
PIASTRE 440V

440V~ 3 50/50HZ
14. 25KW 21A
BUB5
\\Z
POS. 5
P3 PI

B7
POS.

0
1
BB

1 2 3|4
C
A B

6 7 8 9
D E F G


^

^

0
5
5
4
3
2
1

3|4
P2

MA

MORSETTIERA ALIMENTAZI ONE


BORNE D'AL I MENTATION

MAIN TERMINAL BOARD


ANSCHLUSSKLEMMEN

B7

COMMUTATORE FORNO
SELECTEUR FOUR
COMMUTATORE
SELECTEUR
RES ISTENZE
RESIETANCES
LAMPADA SEGNALAZIONE
LAMPE TEMOIN
TERMOSTATO
THERMOSTAT
LIMITATORE DI TEMPERATURA
THERMOSTAT DE SECURITE

COMMUTATOR OVEN
WHLER BAKHOFEN
COMMUTATOR
WHLER
RESISTANCES
HE IZKORPER
PILOT LIGHT
SIGNALLAMPE
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
TEMPERATURE LIMITING THERMOSTAT
TEMPERATUR BEGRENZER

B1*B6
R1*R15
HUH2
Fl
F2

Mod.:ELECTRIC COOKER PR700

From s.n.

602847700

rrff

. .-!ga

o^

1-...

- T ^

.J^

Jk

= i

LOiPART
Coffee machines, manual/automatic

Model CQAIM

STAINLESS STEEL

EASYTOUSE

NOZZLE EASILY REMOVABLE FOR


CLEANING

DURABLE ENAMELLED HOT


PLATE WITH ROLLING RACK

Made ofhigh poUshed stainless steel plate.


Available in manual or in automatic version.
They are equipped with one respeaiveiy two
hotplates.
Brews according to the flow through principle guaranteeing fresh oxygen saturated water for each brew, which uses the coffee to its
maximum.
The machines are delivered with one or two
1.8 litre jugs and 25 pes offilter paper. A 1.5
meter longelectrical cord with plug is included.
For further specifications of the different
models and optional extras, please see overleaf

LOIPART AB
P.O. Box694
SE44118 Alingss, Sweden
Phone
+46322668360
Telefax
+46322637747
E-maii
ioipart@ioipart.se

Exclusive Sales of
Sd E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment

5-885
DOC.NO.
EDITION 16

5-885L
03.06

COFFEE MACHINES, MANUAL/AUTOMATIC


Scale 1:10
Dimensions mm

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Hot plate
Upper hot plate (models FS22MM and FS22AM only)
Water fdling with cover (manual models only)
Water conneaion, delivered with 1 meter rubber hose 1/2" (automatic models only)
Electrical connection, 1.5 meter cord with earthed plug type Schuko5
Rolling rack

Specifications
Model

CQFSllMM

No. of jugs
supplied

Water feeding

manual
CQFS22MM

CQAIM

CQFS22AM

Extra hot

Capacity

keeping plate

cups/h

Max amps

in phase
230V
U5V

Weight kgs
net

gross

7.3

2.4

230 1 -50/60
or 115 1-60

150

10

20

2.3
2.4

Optional extras
Model

CQSHP2M
CQSHPIM
FILTERHOLD

Description

Hot keeping plate 0.19 kW for 2 jugs


(dimensions 360x190x60 mm)
Hot keeping plate 0.095 kW for 1 jug
(dimensions 185x190x60 mm)
Extra filter holder

CQACOl

Glass jug 1.8 Itrs

CQAC02

Set of 1000 filter papers

5-885
Subject to changes without notice.

Shipping
volume m^

2.3

automatic

Loading kW

Voltage

Voltage V

230 1-50/60
or 115 1-60
230 1-50/60
or 115 1-60

Weight kgs
net

gross

1.5

Model CQSHP2M

0.130

A TASTE OF THE FUTURE


Manual
c o FFE E

QUEEN;

COFFEE QUEEN
M-1, M-2, DM-2, DM-4
OFFICE TERMOS
SE
Svenska

GB
English

Energisnl kaffebryggare.
Kapacitet 1,8 liter eller 2 x 1,8 liter.
Ltt att installera och anvnda

Power saving coffee machines.


Capacity 1,8 litres or 2 x 1,8 litres.
Simple installation and easy to use.

Din aterfrsljare / Your retail dealer

Rev. 060404

Innehll / Table of contents

1. Installation och igangsttning / Installation and start


2. Bryggning av kaffe / Brewing of coffee
3. Skotselrd / Maintenance
4. Viktigt
4. Important
5. Kontroil/tgrd
5. Possible solution
6. Sprngskiss - Exploded view
7. Reservdelsfrteckning
7. Sparepartlist

3-5
6-7
8-9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

8. Elschema / Electrical diagram


8. Elschema / Electrical diagram
8. Elschema / Electrical diagram
8. Elschema / Electrical diagram
8. Elschema / Electrical diagram

17
18
19
20
21

Garanti och Service

Office
Ml
M2
DM2
DM4

1. Installation och igangsttning / Installation and start


Placera maskinen./ Placing machine.

1 .Placera maskinen p ett plant vattenttt underlag. SE

'-'^-^C:^j

Locate the machine on a flat level and waterproof surface. GB

Elektrisk koppling / Electrical coupling


2.
OBS!
SE
Detta galler endast M-1, M-2 och Office. Anslut stickproppen till ett separat jordat vgguttag.
230 V, 10 ampere.
OBS!
Detta galler endast DM maskiner. Anslut kaffebryggaren till ett 3-fas uttag
Maskinen skall installeras av en behrig elektriker!
Bryggaren r ej omkopplingsbar och fr endast installeras till eintet med den spanning
som r markerad p bryggaren och skall utfras av behrig elektriker. Fast installation.
En huvudbrytare skall monteras fore maskinen, med mer an 3 mm kontaktgap.

CAUTION!
GB
This applies to M-1 ,M-2 and Office machines only. Connect the plug to a separate wall socket.
240 V, 13 amp. (230 V, 10 amp).
CAUTION!
This applies to DM machines only. Connect coffee brewer to a 3-phase socket
All maintenance and installations must be done of an authorized personel.
The brewer is not reconnectable and may only be installed to the electric supply network with a
voltage that is stated on the brewer and shall be carried out by an Authorized Electrician.
A main switch should be assembled before the machine, with a minimum contact gap of 3mm.

1. Installation och igangsttning / Installation and start


Kontrollera vrmeplattor/ Hotplate function
II = ovre vrmeplatta
II = upper hotplate

I = nedre vrmeplatta
I = lower hotplate

S.Koppia p manverbrytare; I for nedre vrmeplattor och II for ovre vrmeplattor.


Kontrollera att lampoma i l<napparna tnds och
att plattorna blir varma. Koppla sedan ifrnmanverbrytama I och II.
SE

Tum on control switches placed on the machines


left and the right side. (I and II).
Ensure that the lamps tum on and that the hot
plates get warm.
Tum off control switches I and II.
GB

Bryggning med endast vatten/ Brewing with water only.

Grfrsta bryggningarna med endast vatten.


(For att rensa och tylla upp vattensystemet).
1. Sattfilterhllaren p plats utan filter och kaffe.
Lyft upp locket och fyll p frskt kranvatten.SE
Do the first brewings with water only.
(To clean and filling up water system).
1. Place filter holder without filter and coffee.
2. Lift up the cover and fill the machine with
fresh tap water. GB

1. Installation och igangsttning / Installation and start

Bryggning med endast vatten/ Brewing with water only.


Stall kannan p plattan under filterhllaren. SE
Vnta i 2 minuter s att systemet avluftas.

I = nedre vrmeplatta
for bryggning

Koppia p manverbrytare I for bryggning.


Bryggindikatorlampan skall nu tndas och vattnet
skall brja rinna ner i kannan.
Bryggningen tar cirka 6 minuter
f fV'fl il!in!!!!!llliiir^!1lilirrrP;Ti|pii

'*'-*'^" A"

Place the pot on the hot plate under the filter holder. GB
Wait two minutes so that the system is aired-out.
Turn on control switch I for brewing.
The control lamp which indicates that brewing is in
progress shall now be lit and the water shall start pouring
through the filter holder into the pot.
Brewing will take about 6 minutes.

I=

lower hotplate
for brewing

2. Bryggning av l<affe / Brewing of coffee.


2.1.
Placera ett 90mm filter i filterhllaren. SE

Place a 90mm filter in the filter holder. GB

2.2.
Hall i en portion kaffe -100/125 gram
s.k.restaurangmalning (malning mellan kokoch
brygg).
Bred ut kaffet jmnt i filtret. SE

Add coffee, restaurant / catering grounded coffee).


Make sure that the coffee is evenly spread. GB

2.3.
Sattfilterhllaren p plats. SE

Place the filter holder. GB

2.4.
Lyft p locket och hall i en kanna (1,8L) frskt
kranvatten. SE

Lift up the lid and pour in a pot of fresh tap water


(1,8L).GB

2. Bryggning av kaffe/ Brewing of coffee.

2.6.
Om Ni vill varmhlla en kanna och samtidigt
brygga en ny:
Placera kannan som skall varmhllas p den
ovre varmhllningsplattan. Koppla p
manverbrytare II. SE

2.5.
Stall kannan under fiiterhllaren och satt p
locket. SE

Place the pot under the


filter holder and close the
cover. GB

II = ovre vrmeplatta
II = upper hotplate

OBS! Detta galler endast modellerna M-2,


DM-4
Koppla p manverbrytare I for bryggning.
SE

I = for bryggning
I = for brewing

Turn on control switch I for brewing. GB


-

- ,

If a second brewing is necessary, keep the


first pot at the required temperature by
placing on the upper hot plate.
Turn on control switch II. GB

Under bryggningen (6 min)


lyser kontrollampan.

II = ovre vrmeplatta
II = upper hotplate

During the brewing.(about 6 minutes) GB


the controll lamp is lit.

Please Note! This applies only to models


M-2,DM-4,A-2andDA-4.

J V.

3. Skotselrd Maintenance
/y^\

Fore varje bryggning. SE


Sklj kannan.

Before each brewing. GB


Rinse the decanter.

y
OBS! SE
Maskinen fr ej verspolas
eller nedsnkas i vatten.

CAUTION! GB
The machine should not be
Submerged in water orWashed in a
dishwasher
(^

Varje dag. SE
Diska kannan och filterhllaren med
rengringsmedel for kaffemaskiner.
Torka rent spridarmunstycket och omrdet runt
detsamma.samtvrmehllen.
Anvnd endast en mjuk trasa och flytande
rengringsmedel som inte repar.

Each day. GB
Wash the pot and the filterholder with liquid solution for coffee machines. Clean the spray
nozzle and the sun-ounding area.
Clean the hot plate.
Use a soft rag and liquid solution that does
not scratch.

3. Skotselrd /Maintenance.
Varje vecka. SE

Each week. GB

Rengring
Hall 50 ml rengringsmedel / avkalkningsmedel for
kaffemaskiner i en kanna och fyll den med kallt vatten.
Hall sedan blandningen av vatten och
rengringsmedel i maskinen och genomfor en
bryggning utan pappersfilter och kaffe i filterhllaren.
Efter detta maste minst 3 bryggningar ske med enbart
rent vatten for att sklja bort alia rester av
rengringsmedlet.
Regelbunden anvndning av rengringsmedelfr
kaffebryggare reducerar uppbyggnaden av kalk dar
detta rett problem.
Kontrollera att halen i spridarmunstycket ej r
blockerade av kalk.
Skruva bort spridarmunstycket och rengr halen vid
behov.
Vid anslutning till vatten med hg kalkhalt
rekommenderas att ett kalkfilter monteras fore
maskinen.
Vid utvndig rengring anvnd mjuk trasa och
flytande rengringsmedel som inte repar.

Descaling and cleaning.


Pour 50 ml descaling / cleaning solution in a pot
and fill it up with cold water.
Pour the mixture in the machine and proceed with
a brewing without a filterpaper or coffee.
Rinse by brewing at least 3 times with clean water
so that the particles from descaling solution
disappear.
Regular descaling/cleaning will ensure optimum
brewing performance and a longer life of the
machine.
Check that the spray nozzle is unblocked.
Dismount and clean if necesserily.
In areas with high level lime problem, a
descaling filter should be mounted.
Surface cleaning. Use a soft rag and liquid
solution that does not scratch.

;i\

Om du ska diska glaskannan i en diskmaskin. SE


Tag av locket och placera glaskannan upp och ned i
diskmaskinen.

When dishing the glasspot in a dishwasher. GB


Dismantle lid and place glasspot up
and down in dishwasher.

4. Viktigt.

Viktigt
Gr inte ingrepp i bryggaren. Felaktiga tgarder kan leda til! personskador och funktionsfel.
Bryggaren bor st p ett plant underlag for att den skall arbeta tillfredsstllande.
Bryggaren skall placeras p ett vattenttt underlag s att eventuellt utickande vatten blir synligt.
Se til! att det inte bildas veck p anslutningsslangen nr bryggaren skjuts p plats.
Bryggarens tillopps och WS-anslutning skall kontrolleras regelbundet. Kontrollera att inte ngon
lcka haruppsttt i samband med installationen.
Vattenanslutningenkanalltidinnebravissriskfrlckageoavsettskerhetsutrustning.
Lmna inte bryggaren helt utan tillsyn nr den r igng. Stang vattenkranen d maskinen inte
anvnds.
Vid alia ingrepp I bryggaren maste denna gras spnningsls t. ex. genom att stickproppen tas ur
vgguttaget, detta galler M-1, M-2, Office termos. Vid arbete med DM-2, DM-4, maste
arbetsbrytaren sls av och lsas.
Allt installationsarbete maste utfras av behrig personal.
VARNING
For att undvika skada p glaskannan eller
att den p annat olmpligt satt grs obrukbar!
Tvtta noggrant fre anvndning.
Vrm inte upp rengringsmedel i kannan
Rengr inte med material som kan orsaka repor
eller sprickor i glaskannan.
Varmhll aldrig glaskannan p spis, vrmehll eller liknande.
Undvik att stta i kannan mot hart material.
Kassera kannor som har en spricka, r repad
eller uppvrmd tom.
Servera inte kaffe i riktning mot en levande.
Br aldrig tv glaskannor i en och samma hand.

10.

4. Important.

Important.
Do not make any alterations to the machine. Such measures may cause personal injury and the
machine to fail.
The machine should stand on a flat surface so that it will function properly.
The machine should be placed on a water-proof surface so that any leakage is easily noticeable,
make sure there is no bendage on the connection tube when machine is pushed into its place.
The tube connections should be regularly checked. Make sure that no leakage has occurred in
connection with installation.
Do not leave the machine unattended while using. Close water connection when not using
machine.
The machine must be disconnected from electrical supply before any maintenance.
This applies to single-phase current machines. Before any maintenance disconnect the plug from
the wall socket.
Before any maintenance with double-machines: Tum off the headswitch andlock it.
All maintenance and Installations must be done of an authorized personel.

WARNING
TO AVOID BREAKAGE
AND INJURY
DO NOT BOIL LIQUIDS IN POT
DO NOT CLEAN WITH MATERIALS THAT SCRATCH.
DO NOT USE ON RANGE TOP OF ANY KIND.
DO NOT BUMP
DISCARD IF CRACKED, SCHRATCHED, OR HEATED EMPTY.
DO NOT POUR TOWARDS PEOPLE.
DO NOT CARRY TWO DECANTERS IN ONE HAND.
WASH BEFORE USING.

11.

5. Kontroll/Atgrd.
Symptom
Kontroll/Atgrd.
(Siffror i parantes hnvisartill detaljnunnmer 1 sprngskissen.)
A. Brytaren () tnds inte.

1. Kontrollera anslutningen tili vgguttaget/arbetsbrytaren.


2. Kontrollera skringen tili vggutaget/arbetsbrytaren
(10 amp).
3. Kontrollera om vrmeplattan biir varm, om s r fallet
byt brytare
4. Kontrollera anslutningen till brytare

B. Vrmeplattan blir ej varm


fastn brytaren tnds.

1. Kontrollera anslutningen tili elementet


2. Trasigt element, om s r fallet byt ut det.

C. Bryggaren ngar kraftigt.

1. Maskinen kan vara i behov av avkalkning.


2. Spridarmunstycket kan vara igensatt.
3. Veck p slangen ?
4. Tilloppet till bryggelementet kan vara igensatt.

D. Byggindikatorlampan
tnds inte, bryggaren brjar
ej att brygga.

1. verhettningsskyddet har lst ut. Aterstlles


med knappen p densamma. Orsak se punkt C.
2. Kontrollera mikrobrytaren.
3. Kontrollera fiottren .

E. Bryggindikatorlampan tnds,
men bryggaren brjar ej att brygga.

1. Kontrollera anslutningen till bryggelementet


2. Bryggelementet kan vara trasigt.

12.

Li^

5. Possible solutions.
Fault
Possible Solution
(Number in brackets refer to the exploded view)
A. Switch does not light.

1. Check plug connection to wall socket.


2. Check fuse in plug.
3. Check if hot plate becomes warm, if so
replace switch.

B. Hot plate does not become


warm although switch is lit.

1. Check connection to element.


2. If element defective, replace.

C. Brewer omits excess steam.

1. Machine may require descaling.


2. Spray nozzel may need unblocking.
3. Hose, may be bent?
4. Inlet to boiler may be blocked. Descale.
machine - if boiler still defective - replace.

D. Brewing lamp does not


light, machine will not brew.

1. Trip-switch has activated - reset with button.


For possible fault / solution see C.
2. Check microswicth.
3. Check float.

E. Brewing lamp is lit but


machine will not brew.

1. Check connection to boiler.


2. Boiler unit may need replacing.

13.

6. Sprngskiss/ Exploded View

M1, M2, DM2, DM4, Office termos

Filterhllare for kaffefilter 90mm


14.

7. Reservdelsfrteckning.

Benmning

Bestaun, nr.

M1, M2, DM2, DM4, Office termos

Detalj.nr.

IVI1

M2

DIVI2

DM4

Office
termos

(an al de laljer)
Vrmehllstallrik
Vrmehliselement
Termos vac 1,9 liter
Lock med sil
Strmstllare enkel
Strmstllare dubbel
Brygg indikator
Plasttank
Spridarmunstycke
Bryggelementkpl.
Backventil
verhettnlngsskydd
Kallvattenslang
Hetvattenslang
Brytpinne
Flottr
Mikrobrytare
Fot
Ntsladd inkl. plint
Ntsladd
Serveringskanna
Lock, serverkanna
Filterhllare/rostfri

120811
160101
1103256 Office
1204041
160801-04
160802-04
160804-03
120400
120427
120501
120612
160212-03
150502
150504
180170
120402
160821
1203202
160522
160523
110303
110402
1102016

1
2
3
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
20
20
21
22
23

2
2
1
0
0

2
2
2
2
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
0
1
2
2
2

4
4
2
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
0
1
2
2
2

Funktlonsbeskrivning
Kaffebryggare fr manuell vattenpfyllning.
I tanken finns en flottr som aktiverar en mikrobrytare nr vatten fylls p.
Mikrobrytaren aktiverar i sin tur bryggelementet och bryggningen startar.
Under bryggningen lyser brygglampan p maskinens hgra sida.
D vattnet rslut i tanken s bryts strmmen tili bryggelementet och brygglampan slacks.
Den nedre vrmeplattan r alltid pkopplad d bryggaren r pslagen.
Den ovre vrmeplattan aktiveras med en separat strmbrytare.
Maskinen rfrsedd med verhettnlngsskydd som aterstlles manuellt efter det att
strmmen har brutits

15.

.
-

7. Spare parts list.

Description

Art. no.

M1, M2, DM2, DM4, Office termos

Detail no.

IVI1

IVI2

DM2

DIVI4

Office
termos

( a m ount ler uni' )

Hot plate
Hot plate heater
Thermos vac 1,9 litr.
Cover and strainer
Main switch single
Main switch double
Brewing lamp
Plastic tank
Spray nozzle
Boiler compl.
Non return valve
Trip switch
Cold water hose
Hot water hose
Pin
Float
Micro switch
Feet
Connection lead
Connection lead
Glass decanter
Lid, glass decanter
Filter holder/stainless

120811
160101
1103256
office
1204041
160801-04
160802-04
160804-03
120400
120427
120501
120612
160212-03
150502
150504
180170
120402
160821
1203202
160522
160523
110303
110402
1102016

1
2
3
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
20
20
21
22
23

2
2
1
0
0

2
2
2
2
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
0
1
2
2
2

4
4
2
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
0
1
2
2
2

.
-

Instructions
Coffee machine for manual water filling.
In the tank there is a float which activates a microswitch when water is filled.
Microswitch activates element unit and brewing starts.
Duhng brewing the brewlamp is lit.
When the tank is empty the current to the boiler is cut and the brewlamp is switched off.
The bottom hot plate is always heated when the machine is switched on.
The upper hot plate is turned on with a separate switch.
The machine is equipped with an overheating protection which is manually restored when the
current has been cut.

16.

8. Elschema/ Electrical diagram

230 V-v-

OFFICE
B1 Huvudbrytare/brytare for element E1
B2 Mikrobrytare for element E2
B3 Aut. verhettningsskydd for element
E2
84 Man. verhettningsskydd for element E2
51 Signallampa for brytare B2
52 Signallampa for element E2
E1 Underhllsvarmeelement (Ej termos)
E2 Bryggelement

B1 Main switch/switch for element E1


B2 Microswitch for element E2
B3Aut. High limit for element E2
B4 Man. High limit for element E2
51 Lamp for switch B1
52 Lamp for element E2
E1 Hot plate element (Exclude termos machine)
E2 Brewing element

17.

8. Elschema/ Electrical d i a g r a m

SI
Q

B?

(b

B3

S2(X)E2'

El

230 V^-

O-

B4
rr

77

M-1

M-1

B1 Huvudbrytare/brytare for element E1


B2 Mikrobrytare for element E2
B3 Aut. verhettningsskydd for element E2
B4 Man. verhettningsskydd for element E2
51 Signallampa for brytare B1
52 Signallampa for element E2
E1 Underhallsvrmeelement
E2 Bryggelement

B1 Main switch/switch for element


E1
B2 Microswitch for element E2
B3 Aut. High limit for element E2
B4 Man. High limit for element E2
51 Lamp for switch B1
52 Lamp for element E2
E1 Hot plate element
E2 Brewing element

18.

8. Elschema/ Electrical diagram

SI
o

&

&

B3

0-

B4

S2
S3(X)E3i

I El PE2

230 V^o-

0ef

BS

rTtn

M-2

M-2

B1 Huvudbrytare/brytare for element E1


82 Brytare for element E2
B3 Mikrobrytare for element E3
B4 Aut. verhettningsskydd for element E3
B5 Man. verhettningsskydd for element E3
51 Signallampa for brytare B1
52 Signallampa for brytare B2
53 Signallampa for element E3
E1 Nedre underhllsvarmeelement
E2 Ovre underhllsvarmeelement
E3 Bryggelement

B1 Main switch/switch for element E1


B2 Switch for element E2
B3 Microswitch for element E3
B4Aut. High limit for element E3
B5 Man. High limit for element E3
51 Lamp for switch B1
52 Lamp for switch B2
53 Lamp for element E3
E1 Bottom hot plate element
E2 Upper hot plate element
E3 Brewing element

19.

8. Elschema/ Electrical diagram

rn'O

-<g)

SI

Bl

B2

B3

El

S2 (X)B2

<^

B4

// // /

s 8-

SI

Bl

B2

B3

S2 (X) Eac

Bl

<5
B4

// //"/

DM-2

DM-2

B1 Huvudbrytare/brytare for element E1-E2


B2 Mikrobrytare for element E2
B3 Aut. Overhettningsskydd for element E2
B4 Man. Overhettningsskydd for element E2
51 Signallampa for brytare B1

Bl Main switch/switch for element E1


E2
B2 Microswitch for element E2
B3 Aut. High limit for element E2
B4 Man. High limit for element E2
51 Lamp for switch B1
52 Lamp for element E2
El Hot plate element
E2 Brewing element

52 Signallampa for element E2


E1 Underhllsvanneelement
E2 Bryggelement

20.

8. Elschema/ Electrical diagram

SI

Bl

B4

B3

B2

S2
S3 (X) E3t

l E l PE2
c

*m

1|

BS
fTTTI

n^

R 8-

SI

Bl

S eN o-

O-

l~J^9

B3

B2

34

S2
S3 CO ES'

iBl EE2
%3

om

i|

B5
^rrn

DM-4

DM-4

B1 Huvudbrytare/brytare for element E1


82 Brytare for element E2
B3 Mikrobrytare for element E3
B4Aut. verhettningsskydd for element E3
B5 Man. verhettningsskydd for element E3
51 Signallampa for brytare B1
52 Signallampa for brytare B2
53 Signallampa for element E3
E1 Nedre underhllsvarmeelement
E2 Ovre underhllsvarmeelement
E3 Bryggelement

B1 Main switch/switch for element E1


B2 Switch for element E2
B3 Microswitch for element E3
B4 Aut. High limit for element E3
B5 Man. High limit for element E3
51 Lamp for switch B1
52 Lamp for switch B2
53 Lamp for element E3
E1 Bottom hot plate element
E2 Upper hot plate element
E3 Brewing element

21.

COFFEE QUEEN
M-l, M-2, DM-2, DM-4
OFFICE
Galler endast Sverige / Sweden only

Garantibestmmelser
2 rs garanti p delar.
Gllerfrbristflligheter i konstruktion, material eller tillverkning.
For att garantin skall galla frutsttes att sktselinstruktionerna har fljts, att sklig
aktsamhet har lakttagits och att felanmlan har gjorts utan drjsmal, samt att berrd
utrustning inte anvnts i awaktan p service om risk finns att skadan eller bristen
skulle frvrras.
Garantin omfattar inte frbrukningsartiklar som glas, normalt underhall som
rensning av silar och filter, fel p grund av froreningar, kalk eller fel spanning,
tryck eller justering av vattenmngd.
Garantin omfattar ej heller fljdskador som orsakats avfel p eller felaktig hantering
av apparaten.
Garantin upphr att galla efter reparation eller liknande ingrepp av foretag annat an
av oss rekommenderat.
Office Queen Termos
2 rs garanti lmnas p felaktiga delar insnda till Coffee Queen AB.
COFFEE

FOR SERVICE

QUEEN
OF

SWEDEN

Vniigen kontakta din aterfrsljare

FOR SERVICE
Please contact your retail dealer

Din aterfrsljare / Your retail dealer

COFFEE QUEEN AB, Box 960,671 29 ARVIKA, besksadress; Korpralsv 1B,


Tel vxl; +46 (0)570-47700, service +46 (0)570-47730, lager +46 (0)570-47720, Fax; +46 (0)570-47719
E-mail: info@coffeequeen.se www.coffeequeen.se
Art. nr/Art.no.1704031

=!L

cn

.^
I

^
n=[k
o = ^

mms^^j?^(;^^ij^,^^..

c=J.

Driving ynitsi

stationary liigh-base casing


continuous electronic
speed control
automatic off-switch according
to DIN ES regulations
driving device for
attachments in front
performance: 800 W a t t
stationary casing
2 working speeds
pulse
two driving devices for
attachments in front and on top

performance; 600 W a t t

llL '

.1

J. ^

RWTiiV

A 2-2

Icy 2-4 E

l^echhicaldata:'p:ge-20'bnWrds

Krefft Grokchentechnik GmbH


Ersatzteilliste Kernstck KU 2-4 E
Spare Part List Motor Unit KU 2-4 E
Liste de Pieces Dtaches Noyau de Base KU 2-4 E
230 V, Art.Nr. 541103, 1/N/PE 50 Hz
Pos. Art. Nr.
Item Art. No.
Pos. No.d'
article
840082
1
840294
2
3
840103
840094
4
5
840099
840100
6
7
840098
8
840085
9
840101
840090
10
11
840091
12
840298
840096
13
14
840083
840299
15
840088
16
840092
17
840295
18
19
O.Abb.
20
840313
21
840143
102162
22
840977
23

Benennung
Denomination
Denomination

Preisgruppe
Price Group
Cl des prIx

Sechskantwelle / Hexagon shaft / Arbre hexagonal


Getriebedeckel oben / Gear cover / Couvre - engrenage
Dichtung fr Getriebedeckel / Gasket for gear cover / Joint p. couvre - engrenage
Radialdichtring / Radial gasket / Bague d' tanchit radiale
Sicherungsring / Safety ring / Circlip extrieur
Nilosring / Nilosring / Bague
Kugellager/ Ball bearing / Roulement billes
Stirnrad / Cylinder gear / Roue dente
Pafeder / Feather key / Clavette parallele
Distanzbuchse / Distance shell / Douille d'cartement
Zweilochmutter / Round nut with holes / Ecrou deux trous
Ritzel komplett / Pinion shaft assembly / Pignon compl.
Kugellager/ Ball bearing / Roulement billes
Ritzelwelle / Pinion shaft / Arbre de pignon
Resitex - Zahnrad / Fibre gear/ Roue dente compl.
Scheibe / Disc / Disque
Sechskantmutter / Hexagon nut / Ecrou hexagonal
Getriebegehuse / Gear housing / BoTte vitesse
Getriebe komplett / Gear compl. / Couvre compl.
Bimetall - Temperaturschalter
Sechskantschraube / Hexagon screw / Vis hexagonale # M 5 x 18 DIN 933
Fcherscheibe / Toothed Washer / Rondelle # A 5,3 DIN 6798
Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrique #
M 5 x 1 2 DIN 84 A2
Bundbuchse / Liner / Douille
Scheibe / Flat Washer / Disque
Filzstck / Felt piece / Piece de feutre
Dichtung fr Getriebedeckel oben / Gasket for gear cover, upper /
Joint p. couvre - engrenage, dessus
Getriebedeckel oben / Gear cover, upper / Couvre-engrenage, dessus
Motor kpl. / Motor compl. / Moteur compl., 230 V, 0,8 kW
Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque / A 5,3 x 14 A2
Zylinderschraube mit Innensechskant / Cylinder socket head cap screw / Vis tete
cylindrique six pans creux# M 5 x 25 DIN 912
Befestigungsleiste / Fastening element / Element de fixation
Drehzahlgeber / Impulse transmitter / Tt transmetteur de vitesse
Federring / Spring Washer # B 3 DIN 127
Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrique #
M 3 x 8 DIN 84
Kohlebrste mit Feder / Carbon brush with spring /
Balai de charbon avec ressort
Rotor kpl. mit Entstrplatine (Pos. 38) / Armature compl. with screening unit / Indult
compl. / 230 V
Entstrplatine fr Motor / Screening unit / 230V

15
12
01
11
01
01
08
16
00
02
02
21
08
13
13
00
00
21
auf Anfrage
08
00
00
00

24
25
26
27

840114
840093
840105
840104

28
29
30
31

840081
840327
840034
840617

32
33
34
35

840150
840128
840140
840152

36

840145

37

840328

38

840329

39
40

840118 0-Ring fr Motorabdichtung / Sealingring /


840106 Getriebefliefett (500g - Tube) / Gear grease, 500 g tube /
Graisse engrenages, tube de 500 g
840331 Feinsicherung fr Steuerplatine MS-1 (Pos 67) / Fine-wire fuse /
840330 Feinsicherung fr Elektronikplatine ROS 55 (Pos 88) / Fine-wire fuse /
841455 Sicherheitsschalter in Aufstecknabe / Savety-switch /

41
42
43

stand Nov. 2002

nderungen vorbehalten.

00
00
03
01
13
36
00
01
01
06
00
00
03
auf Anfrage
by question
auf Anfrage
by question
00
10
00
00
17
Seite 1 von 5

Krefft Grokchentechnik GmbH


Ersatzteilliste Kernstck KU 2-4 E
Spare Part List Motor Unit KU 2-4 E
Liste de Pieces Dtaches Noyau de Base KU 2-4 E
230 V, Art.Nr. 541103, 1/N/PE 50 Hz
Pos. Art. Nr.

Benennung
Denomination
Item Art. No.
Denomination
Pos. No.d'
article
44
840991 Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrique #
M 5 x 2 0 DIN 84
45
840977 Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrique #
M 5 x 1 2 DIN 84 A2
46
840316 Schutzkappe fr -Schalter (Pos 109) / Protecting cap / # (ab Jan. 2002)
47
840161 Potiachse (Einzelteil aus Pos 88) /
Pot wheel shaft / Arbre de la potentiometre
48
840315 berstromschutzschalter 4 A, 230 V / Overload breaker 4 A 230 V /
Interrupteur maximum 4 A 230 V / (ab Jan. 2003)
840141 Isolierung / Insulating material / Isolement phonique
49
50
840140 Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 3,2 DIN 125
51
840783 Zylinder - Blechschraube / # 2,9 x 9,5 DIN 7971
52
840034 Unterlegscheibe / Pot wheel shaft / Arbre de la potentiometre /#
A 5,3x14 A2
840037 Gummifu / Rubber cushion / Amortisseur caoutchouc
53
840011 Bodenplatte / Base plate / Plaque de base
54
55
840320 Netzanschluleitung (3 x 0,75mm') / Connecting cable /
Cable d' alimentation
56
840053 Knickschutztlle / Cable guard / Tuyau de protection p. cables
57
840051 Zugentlastunsschelle / Clip / Collier p. cables
58
840177 Haltemutter / Nut / Ecrou de fixation
840321 Kernstckgehuse / Housing / Carter
59
60
840016 Traggriff / Handle / Poigne
61
840986 Linsen-Blechschraube/Parker screw/Ecrou # B 4,2x16 DIN 7981 A2
62
840323 Dichtung fr Motorentlftung / Gasket / Joint
63
840322 Motorentlftung / Venting for motor /
64
840324 Trgerwinkel fr Steuerplatine / Holding device for control system /
65
840965 Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrique #
M 4 x 25 DIN 84 A2
66
102151 Fcherscheibe/Toothed Washer/Rondelle # A4,3 DIN 6798 A2
67
840319 Steuerplatine MS-1 / Control system /
840317 Strmelder "bertemperatur" / Operational monitoring system for motor /
68
69
840031 Zylinderstift mit Kreuzschlitz / Toothed Washer / Rondelle
70
840029 Linsensenkschraube / Oval countersunk screw / Vis tete fraise bombe
71
840125 Zylinderschraube mit Innensechskant / Cylinder socket head cap screw /
Vis tete cylindrique six pans creux # M 5 x 14 DIN 912 A2
72
840326 Aufstecknabe kpl. vormontiert (ohne Sicherheitsschalter Pos. 43) /
Mounting hub compl. pre-assembled (without pos. 43) /
Moyeu fixer, montage prliminaire complet
73
840296 Dichtung (schwarz) / Gasket (black) / Joint
74
840325 Aufstecknabe (Einzelteil) / Mounting hub (component part) /
Moyeu fixer (element)
75
840013 Klemmhebel / Clamping lever / Levier de blocage
840042 Tellerfeder / Disc spring / Ressort disques
76
77
840012 Lagerzapfen / Trunnion / Tourilion
78
840041 Dichtungsring / Gasket / Bague d' etanchit
79
840030 Anschlagschraube / Stop screw / Vis d' arret
80
840124 Pahlse / Cylindrical tube / Tube cylindrique
81
840132 Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrique #
M 5 x 1 6 DIN 84 A2
82
840138 Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrique #
M 3 x 1 2 DIN 84
stand Nov. 2002

nderungen vorbehalten.

Preisgruppe
Price Group
Cl des prix
00
00
02
02
13
05
00
00
00
01
08
09
02
05
04
22
18
01
02
17
01
00
00
25
18
08
01
01

31
02
26
13
00
08
01
01
01
00
00

Seite 2 von 5

Krefft Grokchentechnik GmbH


Ersatzteilliste Kernstck KU 2-4 E
Spare Part List Motor Unit KU 2-4 E
Liste de Pieces Dtaches Noyau de Base KU 2-4 E
230 V, Art.Nr. 541103, 1/N/PE 50 Hz
Pos. Art. Nr.
Item Art. No.
Pos. No.d'
article
83
840134
84
150167
85
840040
86
840135
87
840136
88
cAbb

840318
840332

89

840137

90
91

840300
840109

92

840046

93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100

840139
840286
840035
840043
840034
840027
840973
840978

Stand Nov. 2002

Benennung
Denomination
Denomination
Zentriemng fr Potiachse / Centering / Bague de centrage
Knebel / Knob / Manette
Sttzfu / Supporting foot / Pied de support
Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 5,3 DIN 125
Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrlque #
M 5 x 1 4 DIN 84
Elektronikplatine ROS 55 / Electronic control / Regulation lectronique
Isolierplatte zwischen Platine und Motor / Isulation between electronik control
and motor/ Isolement p. Regulation lectronique
Steckerleiste / Female multipoint connector /
Douille connecteur multibroche
Kernstckunterteil mit Gewicht / Sode with weight / Socle avec poids
Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis tete cylindrlque #
M 3 x 1 8 DIN 84 A2
berstromschutzschalter 4 A, 230 V / Overload breaker 4 A 230 V #
Interrupteur maximum 4 A 230 V (bis Jan. 2003)
Platinensttze / Standard / Bras - trteau
Zwischenplatte / Plate / Plaque intermdiaire
Scheibe / Disc / Disque /
Bundbuchse / Liner / Douille
Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 5,3 x 14 A2
Gewindebolzen / Threaded bolt / Boulon filet
Sechskantmutter / Hexagon nut / Ecrou hexagonal # M 3 DIN 934 A2
Fcherscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 3,2 DIN 6798 A2

nderungen vorbehalten.

Preisgruppe
Price Group
Cl des prix
02
02
04
00
00
28
02
12
42
00
13
02
05
00
00
00
00
00
00

Seite 3 von 5

Ersatzteilliste KU 2-4 E, 230 V, AN 540103

stand Nov. 2002

Stand Nov. 2002

nderungen vorbehalten.

Seite 4 von 5

Ersatzteilliste KU 2-4 E, 230 V, AN 540103

stand Nov. 2002

Stand Nov. 2002

nderungen vorbehalten.

Seite 5 von 5

.=!k

C=A

om

rr-' i'ijiVS

f r::f .f>>

c .. i-?>i
p-..L,,?\.

gLOiPAMT
Exclusive Sales of
H E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment

Refrigerators & Freezers, MR/MF

Model MR-400

LOIPRT AB
P.O. Box 694
SE 441 18 Aiingss, Sweden
Phone
+46 322 66 83 60
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-maJI
!oipart@loipatlse

This range of refrigerators and freezers intended for storage of refrigerated and frozen
food is specially developed for marine use.
DESIGN
Reliable, easy to clean and durable construction.
Exterior and interior are made of stainless
steel quality AISI 304.
Hygienic top cover is standard (not models MR/MF 120).
Fitted with fan forced air circulation.
CFC and HCFC free R404a refrigerant
and 60 mm thick polyurethane insulation.
EASY TO INSTALL
Removable refrigeration unit evaporator,
condenser, compressor) located on the top of
the cabinet (models 300,400, and 550 only).
Reversible door equipped with lockable
handle and easy removable magnetic door
gasket.
EASY TO USE
GN adapted.
9 Clean cooler air conducted through an
special cold air filter built in to the base of the
cabinet is reducing the compressor running
time and saving power.
Refrigerators fitted with an automatic
defrost and automatic melt water evaporation.
Freezers fitted with a fast and efficient automatic hot gas defrost and frame heater.
9 Thermostatically controlled temperature,
micro processed digital thermostat-thermometer combination.
EASY TO MAINTAIN
Delivered with 2 m cord and plug.
150 respective ly 140 mm high adjustable
marine feet.
Easy removable shelf holders.
Delivered with chromium plated wire
shelves.
Warning alarm for dirty condenser fJter.
For further specifications of the different
models, please see overleaf.

11-860
DOC. NO.
EDITION 3

11-860L
08.04

REFRIGERATORS & FREEZERS MR/MF 120, 300, 400, 550


Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm

MODELS MR/MF 300,400 AND 550:

750 -560-

Detail of marine foot

wy/////////2

^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^

100 mm free space necessary


for ventilation and service
1. Control panel
2. Electrical connection, 2 m cord with plug included
3. Adjustable marine feet (+50/-10)
The unit is to be levelled and bolted to deck.

Specifications - refrigerators (operating temperature: +2 to +8C)


Capacity
litres

Wire
shelves
incl.

MR-300

315

MR-400

404

MR-550

530

Model

Refrigerant

R404A

Voltage V*

Power
kW

0.4

230 1-50/60

Fuse, slow
A

10

Dimensions mm

Weight kgs

Shipping
volume m^

net

gross

1380

830

740

105

135

1.2

1590 1040

950

115

140

1.4

1900

1260

125

155

1.6

1350

' available in 115 1 "60, other voltages available on request


Specifications - freezers (operating temperature: -18 to-25C)
Capacity
litres

Wire
shelves
ind.

MF-300

315

MF-400

404

MF-550

530

Model

Refrigerant

R404A

Voltage V*

230 1-50/60

* available in 115 1-60, other voltages available on request

Power
kW

0.5

Fuse, slow
A

10

Dimensions mm

Weight kgs

Shipping
volutne m^

net

gross

1380

830

740

105

135

1.2

1590

1040

950

115

140

1.4

1900

1350

1260

125

155

1.6

REFRIGERATORS & FREEZERS MR/MF 120, 300, 400, 550

MODELS MR/MF 120:


Detail of marine foot

760

1. Control panel
2. Electrical connection, 2 m cord with plug included
3. Adjustable marine feet (+60/-0)
The unit is to be levelled and bolted to deck.

Operating temperature:
refrigerators +2 to +8C
freezers -18 to-25C

Specifications
Model

Type of cabinet

MR-120

refrigerator

MF-120

freezer

Capacity
litres

Wire
shelves
incl.

Refrigerant

120

R404A

Voltage V*

Power
kW

Fuse, slow
A

Weight ^ s
net

gross

73

92

Shipping
volume m^

0.3
230 1-50/60

' available in 115 1 -60, other voltages available on request

10
0.4

0.710

REFRIGERATORS & FREEZERS MR/MF 120, 300, 400, 550

11-860
Subject to changes without notice.

REV 06/2003

SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860HOLLOLA

TEL +358 3 5520 600


FAX+358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycolcl@skycold.fi

REV 06/2003

lUMiiB

'NMBI J M B

' H I ^ Jjggf' fggg^jgg^

Before use and installation

Receiving the goods

Installation

Start-up

Use

Use SMD12 control unit

Malfunction codes

Cleaning by the user

Malfunction

Guarantee

PRODUCT INFORMATION - TUOTETIEDOT

Type of unit / Tyypi

Serial number / Valmistusnumero

Place and date of purchase / Ostopaikka ja -aika

SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860HOLLOLA

TEL +358 3 5520 600


FAX+358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycold@skycold.fi

REV 06/2003

I ^pf'

J^gjgj^j^^ ^ ^ ^ ^g"

PLEASE READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.


KEEP THESE INSTRUCTIONS FOR FURTHER USE AND OTHER USERS.
FOLLOWING THESE INSTRUCTIONS CONTRIBUTES PROPERAND LONGTERM
FUNCTION OF THE UNIT FOR MAXIMUM EFFICIENCY AND MINIMUM SERVICE
AND REPAIR COSTS.
FOR GUARANTEE, SEE PAGE 8.
THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO UNITS MR, MF AND MRF 2/2

Examine the unit before accepting the delivery.


In case of any damage, please note the waybill and report
to yourfonwarder and supplier immediately.
Guarantee does not cover damages due to transportation.

Unpack the unit at sight.


Remove the protection films on outer surfaces of the unit.
Cabinet shall be fixed to a deck through the three
09 mm bolting holes existing in the flange of each
adjustable stainless steel feet. If necessary feet can be
welded to a deck.
Feet can be adjusted after bolt-mounting.
Ensure the unit is level (use spirit level if needed).
This ensures doors and locks work properly.
Uneven installation may twist the chassis.
Make sure the area below the cabinet is clear to allow
free condenser air circulation.
100 mm free space above the cabinet is necessary for
ventilation and service.

SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860HOLLOLA

TEL +358 3 5520 600


FAX+358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycold@skycold.fi

REV 06/2003

Should the unit still be cold when taken in, humidity will condensate
on its surface In wintertime. Do not plug on the unit until it has dried
and reached the room temperature.
Protect the cabinet from direct sunlight and other objects radiating heat,
such as owen, radiator etc.
The ambient temperature must not rise above +32C or fall below +5C.
Ensure the voltage and frequency band is fitted with the cabinet and
connect the unit to earthed socket protected with a 10 amp. fuse.

Let the cabinet stay on its final place for 2 hours before
starting-up. The time is needed for the machinery
lubrication oil to run into the oil compartment of
compressor.
Clean the unit thoroughly before start-up with mild
dish washing solution or other suitable detergent.
Do not use scouring powder.
Unpack the shelf package and set the shelves in place.

f
:, "
l-, \ \
^i|'.- '
\.^.. j
\
\

'..' '
/
LI' 'p

Do not add any products until the unit has reached


the required operation temperature.

^'\~'
"1 i

Cold Line Marine cabinets are made for storage of chilled and frozen food.
Operating temperature for chiller is + 2C...+ 8C and for freezer - 18C...- 25C.
Food which contains vinegar, such as pickels, sallad dressing and
lingonberry jam, shall be stored in covered receptacles. Vinegar may
damage the evaporator.
Cabinet shall not be used outdoors or exposed to rain.

SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860 HOLLOLA

TEL +358 3 5520 600


FAX+358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycold@skycold.fi

REV 06/2003

4
*

1 ^ * ,

SMD12

/ ; 7 \ ^1

,^1

t LJL

. *

SMD12

1^

-1*11

?S
JI

r^
A
0

1. Electronic thermostat and thermometer


with automatic functions preset at the
factory
2. Display
3. Info menu button and alarm reset button
4. Temperature set button
5. PLUS-button
6. Main switch and MINUS-button

START-UP AND STANDBY


Push the main button 6, and the display shows three parallel
dashes - - for 3 seconds.

1 ^

Pushing the button 6 will start up the unit or put it into standby.
Standby STATUS gives an OFF-indication on display.
To disconnect the unit unplug the cabinet.

TEMPERATURE ADJUSTIMENT
During normal operation, the display shows the inside
temperature of the counter.
Temperature adjustment range for chiller is + 2 C...+15 C
and for freezer - 25 C...+ 5 C.
Pushing the button 4 will indicate the temperature set value.
Should you want to increase the temperature, first push the
button 4 and immediately after that, simultaneously push
the button 5.
Should you want to decrease the temperature, first push the
button 4 and immediately after that, simultaneously push the
button 6.
The button 4 should be kept pushed during the whole operation.
DEFROSTING
The cabinet is provided with an automatic defrosting and melt
water evaporation system. The display will indicate defrosting
with a text dEF.

SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860 HOLLOLA

TEL +358 3 5520 600


FAX+358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycold@skycold.fi

REV 06/2003

^ 8 ^ ^ ^ ^ ' ' jiii|l|ffl'*ffl JS^ SSB^ fSS3&

if the unit fails to work properly, there will be an audible alarm signal and
an alarm flashing on the display. Push button 3 to stop alarm signal.
If the display shows:
E1, there is fault in the temperature sensor. Call for service.
E2, there is a fault in the defrost sensor. The unit will work, but there is no
temperature reading displayed. Defrosting takes place as programmed.
Call for service.
E3, there is a fault in the condenser sensor. Call for service.
Hi, the inside temperature of the cabinet is too high.
LO, the inside temperature of the cabinet is too low.
CLN, it is time to clean the condenser filter. For cleaning instructions
see this page.

Turn the power OFF and unplug the unit from power.
Clean the cabinet with a moist cloth with detergent.
Never use running water to clean the cabinet.
Clean stainless steel surfaces with mild water
blended dishwashing solution or other suitable
detergent. Do not use scouring powder.
Clean the gasket with mild water blended dishwashing
solution or other suitable detergent. Do not use sharp
instruments or solvent of any kind.

After cleaning, spray or wipe the gasket with silicone to make it more pliable
and dirt resistant.
Clean the cooling unit condenser air filter regularly i.e. twice a month. Dusty filter
leads to decreased capasity, continious running of the compressor and the possible
damage of the cooling unit.
Remove the filter and rinse it with running water.
Shake off water and replace.
SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860HOLLOLA

TEL +358 3 5520 600


FAX+358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycold@skycold.fi

,^

REV 06/2003

I ^^s ^ ^

^^^Bji^^y j^CT'*'^ ^^P^^ik ^ ^ ^

^^3 ^^k

The unit does not start


Make sure the operation switch (page 5, button 6) is on.
Check the plug connection.
Check the fuse.
The unit does not reach the required temperature or does not chill at all
Make sure the operation swith (page 5, button 6) is on and the signal
lamp is illuminated.
Check the plug connection.
Check the fuse.
Check the thermostat settings (page 5)
Check the condenser filter (page 6)
Provide free air circulation under and above the cabinet.
For control unit malfunction codes, see page 6.

SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie17
FIN-15860 HOLLOLA

TEL +358 3 5520 600


FAX+358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycold@skycold.fi

REV 06/2003

^^iBniiik ^ r ^ ^ J i i B

II

This guarantee is valid for 12 months from the date of purchase and shall
apply to possible failures in materials or workmanship.
The quarantee is valid only when the unit is used solely for purposes,
stated in this manual.
The quarantee expires if the unit is being used against installation, use
and maintenance manual.
All units are supplied under our terms and conditions of sale, a copy of
which may be obtained upon request.
The quarantee does not apply to
defects caused by faulty installation
defects due to ignoring maintenance and cleaning by the user
defects caused by natural wear
defects caused by improper use of the unit
settings, repairs or spare parts due to negligence, non-attention
or not following these installation, use and maintenance
instructions
The manufacturer Skycold Oy or his selling agents is not at any time or any
circumtances liable for direct or indirect losses of resulting effects caused
by an unfit of badly mantained unit.
Skycold Oy reserves the right to make any changes or improvements
without prior notice.
When claiming for warranty, the serial number of your cabinet is needed.
For further information, please contact the manufacturer SKYCOLD OY.

SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860 HOLLOLA

TEL +358 3 5520 600


FAX +358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycold@skycold,fi

REV 06/2003

p w y ' ' l ^ B y IM88BM ^ ^ ^ M k

\t\

^^Siflfljl^W ^ i ^ g g p i i ' '

BHHBMjdmgB ^ ^ ^ [ lyBgi''

I
F_.-3^

SKYCOLD OY
Keskikankaantie 17
FIN-15860HOLLOLA

BBMBW

TEL +358 3 5520 600


FAX+358 3 5520 612
E-mail skycold@skycold.fi

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MR-300


Part.no
SP4000

Compressor

Kompressori

Condenser
Condenser fan

Lauhdutin
Lauhdutinpuhallin

Condenser, plastic fan shrouds


Condenser fan blade
Evaporator
Evaporator fan

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen suojus
Lauhdutinpuhaltimen siipi
Hyrystin
Hyrystinpuhaiiin

Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Condensing temp, sensor
Accumulator
Filter drier
Service valve
Capillartube

St- ja ohjausyksikl^
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusanturi
Lauhtumisanturi
Pisaranerotin
Kuivain
Huoltoventtiili
Kapillaari

SP4170
SP4180
SP4190

Condensate tube
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp

Haihdutusputki
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja

MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-3
MA1138

Grid shelf
Shelf bracl<et
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gaslcet
Condenser filter

Lankahylly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana

SP4010
SP4020
SP4030
SP4040
SP4050
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4120
SP4130
SP4140
SP4150
SP4160

Part.no
SP4200

Cooling unit MR, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1

Stjalka
Ovitiiviste
Lauhduttimen suodatin

Electrolux
LU-VE
ELCO
LU-VE

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Fermod
Fermod

Cooling unit MR, 115V 60 Hz ~1

ML60TG

SP4210

STVF100
VNP 10-20/563, 10/38W
CF21
0 200, sucking, angle 26
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
ST1K20C3
30x150,3/8"
30 g
1/4"
0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m

SP4220
SP4230
SP4040
SP4050
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4120
SP4130
SP4140
SP4150
SP4160

0 1/4"
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4

SP4170
SP4180
SP4190

Condensate tube
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp

MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-3
MA1138

Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Condenser filter

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304

P1359, 775 x823 mm


10x246x470 mm

Compressor
Condenser
Condenser fan
Condenser, plastic fan shrouds
Condenser fan blade
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Condensing temp, sensor
Accumulator

Electrolux
LU-VE
ELCO
LU-VE

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Filter drier
Service valve
Capillartube

ML60TR
STVF 100 115V 082059103
VNP 10/38 W 115V
CF21
0 200, sucking, angle 26
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
ST1K20C3
30x150,3/8"
30 g
1/4"
0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m
0 1/4"
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4

Fermod
Fermod

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304

P1359, 775 x823 mm


10x246x470 mm

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line IVIF-300


Part.no

Part.no
SP4300

Cooling unit IVIF, 230V 50/60 Hz -1

SP4400

Cooling unit MF, 115V 60 Hz - 1

SP4260

Compressor

Kompresse ri

Electrolux

SP4020

Condenser

Lauhdutin

LU-VE

MP12FG

SP4330

Compressor

Electrolux

STVF 100

SP4220

Condenser

LU-VE

SP4030

Condenser fan

Lauhdutinpuhallin

STVF 100

ELCO

VNP 10-20/563, 10/38 W

SP4230

Condenser fan

ELCO

VNP 10/38 W 115V

SP4040

Condenser, plastic fan shrouds

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen suojus

SP4050

Condenser fan blade

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen siipi

LU-VE

CF21

SP4040

Condenser, plastic fan shrouds

LU-VE

CF21

0 200, sucking, angle 28

SP4050

Condenser fan blade

SP4060

Evaporator

Hyrystin

h=110,d=100, Lmax445

SP4060

Evaporator

SP4070

Evaporator fan

Hyrystinpuhallin

Centaur

CN52B3

SP4240

Evaporator fan

Centaur

CN2B2

SP4270

Control unit

SP4090

Display

St- ja ohjausyl<sikk

Lae

SSD90C65E-C

SP4540

Control unit

Lae

SSD90C65U-C115V

Nytt

Lae

SMD12RU

SP4090

Display

Lae

SP4100

SMD12RU

Temp, control sensor

Lmptila-anturi

Lae

ST1K20C1

SP4100

Temp, control sensor

Lae

ST1K20C1

SP4110

Defrost temp, sensor

Sulatusanturi

Lae

ST1K20C2

SP4110

Defrost temp, sensor

Lae

ST1K20C2

SP4120

Condensing temp, sensor

Lauhtumisanturi

Lae

ST1K20C3

SP4120

Condensing temp, sensor

Lae

ST1K20C3

SP4130

Accumulator

Pisaranerotin

30x150,3/8"

SP4130

Accumulator

30x150, 3/8"

SP4140

Filter drier

Kuivain

30 g

SP4140

Filter drier

30 g

SP4150

Service valve

Huoltoventtiili

1/4"

SP4150

Service valve

1/4"

SP4280

Capillartube

Kapillaari

0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m

SP4280

Capillartube

0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m

SP4170

Condensate tube

Haihdutusputki

0 1/4"

SP4170

Condensate tube

0 1/4"

SP4180

Mains cable and plug

Verkkojohto

3G1,5 3 m

SP4180

Mains cable and plug

3G1,5 3 m

SP4190

Mains cable clamp

Vedonpoistaja

KK-4

SP4190

Mains cable clamp

SP4290

Defrost solenoid valve

Sulatuksen magneettiventtiili

Danfoss

EVR3, 3032F 1206

SP4290

Defrost solenoid valve

Danfoss

E V R 3 , 032F1206

SP4310

Coil for solenoid valve

Magneettiventtiilin kela

Danfoss

EVR3 230V IP67 018Z6732

SP4320

Coil for solenoid valve

Danfoss

E V R 3 115V 60HzlP67 018Z 6710

SP4340

Magnetic door switch

Magneetti ovikytkin

230 V

SP4350

Magnetic door switch

115V

MA1071-3

Frame heater

Ovenkarmivastus

230 V SIL+CUF, L=3700mm

MAI 071-6

Frame heater

115 V SIL+CUF, L=3700mm

MA1070

Grid shelf

Lankahylly

MAI 070

Grid shelf

MA1137

Shelf bracket

Hyllynkannatin

AISI 304

MA1137

Shelf bracket

AISI 304

SP8010

Door Handle

Oven vedin

Type 571

SP8010

Door Handle

Type 571

SP8020

Door Hinge

Oven sarana

Type 402

SP8020

Door Hinge

Type 402

SP8030

Marini. leg

Stjalka

2" round, AISI304

SP8030

Marine leg

2" round, AISI304

MAI 072-3

Door c;asl<et

Ovitiiviste

PI 359, 775 x 8 2 3 mm

MAI 072-3

Door gasket

P I 359, 775 x 8 2 3 mm

MA1138

Condenser filter

Lauhduttimen suodatin

10x246x470 mm

MA1138

Condenser filter

10x246x470 mm

MP12FR

0 200, sucking, angle 28


h=110, d=100, Lmax445

KK-4

IVIarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MR-400


Part.no

Part.no

SP4000

Cooling unit iUR, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1

SP4200

Cooling unit MR, 115V 60 Hz - 1

SP4010

Compressor

Kompressori

Electrolux

ML60TG

SP4210

Compressor

Electrolux

ML60TR

SP4020

Condenser

Lauhdutin

LU-VE

STVF 100

SP4220

Condenser

LU-VE

STVF 100 115V 082059103

SP4030

Condenser fan

Lauhdutinpuhallln

ELCO

VNP 10-20/563, 10/38 W

SP4230

Condenser fan

ELCO

VNP 10/38 W 115V

SP4040

Condenser, plastic fan shrouds

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen suojus

LU-VE

CF21

SP4040

Condenser, plastic fan shrouds

LU-VE

CF21

SP4050

Condenser fan blade

Lauhdutlnpuhaltimen siipi

0 200, sucking, angle 26

SP4050

Condenser fan blade

SP4060

Evaporator

Hyrystin

h=110, d=100, Lmax445

SP4060

Evaporator

SP4070

Evaporator fan

Hyrystinpuhallln

Centaur

CN52B3

SP4240

Evaporator fan

Centaur

CN2B2

SP4080

Control unit

St-ja ohjausyksikk

Lae

SSD90C30E

SP4250

Control unit

Lae

SSD90C30U

SP4090

Display

Nytt

Lae

SMD12RU

SP4090

Display

Lae

SMD12RU

SP4100

Temp, control sensor

Lmptila-anturi

Lae

ST1K20C1

SP4100

Temp, control sensor

Lae

ST1K20C1

SP4110

Defrost temp, sensor

Sulatusanturi

Lae

ST1K20C2

SP4110

Defrost temp, sensor

Lae

ST1K20C2

SP4120

Condensing temp, sensor

Lauhtumisanturi

Lae

ST1K20C3

SP4120

Condensing temp, sensor

Lae

ST1K20C3

SP4130

Accumulator

Pisaranerotln

30x150,3/8"

SP4130

Accumulator

30x150,3/8"

SP4140

Filter drier

Kuivain

30 g

SP4140

Filter drier

30 g

SP4150

Service valve

Huoltoventtiili

1/4"

SP4150

Service valve

1/4"

SP4160

Capiiiartube

Kaplllaari

0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m

SP4160

Capiiiartube

0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m

0 200, sucking, angle 26


h=110, d=100, Lmax445

SP4170

Condensate tube

Haihdutusputki

0 1/4"

SP4170

Condensate tube

0 1/4"

SP4180

Mains cable and plug

Veri^kojohto

3G1,5 3 m

SP4180

Mains cable and plug

3G1,5 3 m

SP4190

Mains cable clamp

Vedonpoistaja

KK-4

SP4190

Mains cable clamp

KK-4

MAI 070

Grid shelf

AISI 304

MA1137

Shelf bracket

Type 571

SP8010

Door Handle

Fermod

Type 571

Door Hinge

Fermod

Type 402

MA1070

Grid shelf

Lankahylly

M M 137

Shelf bracket

Hyllynkannatln

SP8010

Door Handle

Oven vedin

Fermod

SP8020

Door Hinge

Oven sarana

Fennod

Type 402

SP8020

SP8030

Marine leg

Stjalka

2" round, AISI304

SP8030

Marine leg

2" round, AISI304

MA1072-2

Door gasket

Ovitilviste

P1359, 775 x 1 0 3 3 mm

MAI 072-2

Door gasket

P1359, 775 x 1 0 3 3 mm

MA1138

Condenser filter

Lauhduttimen suodatin

10x246x470 mm

MA1138

Condenser filter

10x246x470 mm

AISI 304

IViarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line IVIF-400


Part.no

Part.no
SP4300

Cooling unit MF, 230V 50/60 Hz ~1

SP4260

Compressor

Kompresse ri

Electrolux

MP12FG

SP4330

Compressor

Electrolux

MP12FR

SP4020

Condenser

Lauhdutin

LU-VE

STVF 100

SP4220

Condenser

LU-VE

STVF100

SP4030

Condenser fan

Lauhdutinpuhallln

ELCO

VNP 10-20/563, 10/38W

SP4230

Condenser fan

ELCO

VNP 10/38 W 115V

SP4040

Condenser, plastic fan shrouds

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen suojus

LU-VE

CF21

SP4040

Condenser, plastic fan shrouds

LU-VE

CF21

SP4050

Condenser fan blade

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen slipi

0 200, sucking, angle 28

SP4050

Condenser fan blade

SP4060

Evaporator

Hyrystin

h=110, d=100, Lmax445

SP4060

Evaporator

SP4070

Evaporator fan

Hyrystinpuhallin

Centaur

CN52B3

SP4240

Evaporator fan

Centaur

CN2B2

SP4270

Control unit

St- ja ohjausyksikk

Lae

SSD90C65E-C

SP4540

Control unit

Lae

SSD90C65U-C115V

SP4090

Display

Nytt

Lae

SMD12RU

SP4090

Display

Lae

SMD12RU

SP4100

Temp, control sensor

Lmptila-anturi

Lae

ST1K20C1

SP4100

Temp, control sensor

Lae

ST1K20C1

SP4110

Defrost temp, sensor

Sulatusanturi

Lae

ST1K20C2

SP4110

Defrost temp, sensor

Lae

ST1K20C2

SP4120

Condensing temp, sensor

Lauhtumisanturi

Lae

ST1K20C3

SP4120

Condensing temp, sensor

Lae

ST1K20C3

SP4130

Accumulator

Pisaranerotin

30x150,3/8"

SP4130

Accumulator

30x150,3/8"

SP4140

Filter drier

Kuivain

30 g

SP4140

Filter drier

30 g

SP4150

Service valve

Huoltoventtiili

1/4"

SP4150

Service valve

1/4"

SP4280

Capillartube

Kapillaari

0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m

SP4280

Capillartube

0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m

SP4170

Condensate tube

Haihdutusputki

0 1/4"

SP4170

Condensate tube

0 1/4"

SP4180

Mains cable and plug

Verkkojohto

3G1,5 3 m

SP4180

Mains cable and plug

3G1,5 3 m

SP4190

Mains cable clamp

Vedonpoistaja

KK-4

SP4190

Mains cable clamp

SP4290

Defrost solenoid valve

Sulatuksen magneettiventtiili

Danfoss

EVR3, 3032F1206

SP4290

Defrost solenoid valve

Danfoss

E V R 3 , 032F 1206

SP4310

Coil for solenoid valve

Magneettiventtiilin kela

Danfoss

E V R 3 230V IP67 018Z6732 SP4320

Coil for solenoid valve

Danfoss

E V R 3 115V 60HZIP67 018Z 6710

SP4340

Magnetic door switch

Magneetti ovikytkin

230 V

SP4350

Magnetic door sw/itch

1I5V

MAI 071-2

Frame heater

Ovenkarmivastus

230 V SIL+CUF, L=4100mm

MAI 071-5

Frame heater

115 V SIL+CUF, L=4100mm

SP4400

Cooling unit MF, 115V 60 Hz ~1

0 200, sucking, angle 28


h=110, d=100, Lmax445

KK-4

MA1070

Grid shelf

Lankahylly

MAI 070

Grid shelf

MA1137

Shelf bracket

Hyllynkannatin

AISI 304

MA1137

Shelf bracket

AISI 304

SP8010

Door Handle

Oven vedin

Type 571

SP8010

Door Handle

Type 571

SP8020

Door Hinge

Oven sarana

Type 402

SP8020

Door Hinge

Type 402

SP8030

Marine leg

Stjalka

2" round, AISI304

SP8030

Marine leg

2" round, AISI304

MAI 072-2

Door gasket

Ovitiiviste

P1359, 775 x 1 0 3 3 mm

MAI 072-2

Door gasket

P I 359, 775 x 1 0 3 3 mm

MA1138

Condenser filter

Lauhduttimen suodatin

10x246x470 mm

MA1138

Condenser filter

10x246x470 mm

IVIarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MR-550


Part.no
SP4000
SP4010
SP4020
SP4030
SP4040
SP4050
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090

SP4170
SP4180
SP4190

Compressor
Condenser
Condenser fan
Condenser, plastic fan shrouds
Condenser fan blade
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, ntrol sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Condensing temp, sensor
Accumulator
Filter drier
Service valve
Caplllartube
Condensate tube
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp

Haihdutusputki
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja

MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-1
MA1138

Grid shelf
Shelf bracl<et
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Condenser filter

Lankahylly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste
Lauhduttimen suodatin

SP4100
SP4110
SP4120
SP4130
SP4140
SP4150
SP4160

Part.no
SP4200

Cooiing unit MR, 230V 50/60 H]: ~1


Kompressen
Lauhdutin
Lauhdutinpuhallin
Lauhdutinpuhaltimen suojus
Lauhdutinpuhaltimen slip!
Hyrystln
Hyrystinpuhallin
St- ja ohjausyksil<k
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusanturi
Lauhtumisanturi
Pisaranerotin
Kuivain
Huoltoventtilll
Kapillaari

Electrolux
LU-VE
ELCO
LU-VE

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Fermod
Fermod

ML60TG
STVF 100
VNP 10-20/563, 10/38W
CF21

Cooling unit MR, HSV 60 Hz -1

0 1/4"
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4

SP4100
SP4110
SP4120
SP4130
SP4140
SP4150
SP4160
SP4170
SP4180
SP4190

Compressor
Condenser
Condenser fan
Condenser, plastic fan shrouds
Condenser fan blade
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Condensing temp, sensor
Accumulator
Filter drier
Service valve
Caplllartube
Condensate tube
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI359, 775 x1343 mm
10x246x470 mm

MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-1
MA1138

Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket
Condenser filter

0 200, sucking, angle 26


h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
ST1K20C3
30x150,3/8"
30 g
1/4"
0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m

SP4210
SP4220
SP4230
SP4040
SP4050
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090

Electrolux
LU-VE
ELCO
LU-VE

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

ML60TR
STVF 100 115V 082059103
VNP 10/38 W 115V
CF21
0 200, sucking, angle 26
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
ST1K20C3
30x150,3/8"
30 g
1/4"
01,24mm, L = 4000 m
0 1/4"
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4

Fermod
Fermod

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1343 mm
10x246x470 mm

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MF-550


Part.no

Part.no
SP4300

Cooling unit MF, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1

SP4400

Cooling unit MF, 115V 60 Hz ~1

SP4260

Compressor

Kompressen

Electrolux

SP4020

Condenser

Lauhdutin

LU-VE

MP12FG

SP4330

Compressor

Electrolux

MP12FR

STVF100

SP4220

Condenser

LU-VE

STVF100

SP4030

Condenser fan

Lauhdutinpuhallin

ELCO

SP4040

Condenser, plastic fan shrouds

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen suojus

LU-VE

VNP 10-20/563, 10/38W

SP4230

Condenser fan

ELCO

VNP 10/38 W 115V

CF 21

SP4040

Condenser, plastic fan shrouds

LU-VE

SP4050

Condenser fan blade

CF21

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen siipi

0 200, sucking, angle 28

SP4050

Condenser fan blade

SP4060

Evaporator

Hyrystin

h=110, d=100, Lmax445

SP4060

Evaporator

SP4070

Evaporator fan

Hyrystinpuhallin

Centaur

CN52B3

SP4240

Evaporator fan

Centaur

CN2B2

SP4270

Control unit

St- ja ohjausyksikk

Lae

SSD90C65E-C

SP4540

Control unit

Lae

SSD90C65U-C115V

SP4090

Display

Nytt

Lae

SMD12RU

SP4090

Display

Lae

SMD12RU

SP4100

Temp, control sensor

Lmptila-anturi

Lae

ST1K20C1

SP4100

Temp, control sensor

Lae

ST1K20C1

SP4110

Defrost temp, sensor

Sulatusanturi

Lae

ST1K20C2

SP4110

Defrost temp, sensor

Lae

ST1K20C2

SP4120

Condensing temp, sensor

Lauhtumisanturi

Lae

ST1K20C3

SP4120

Condensing temp, sensor

Lae

ST1K20C3

SP4130

Accumulator

Pisaranerotin

30x150,3/8"

SP4130

Accumulator

30x150,3/8"

SP4140

Filter drier

Kuivain

30 g

SP4140

Filter drier

30 g

SP4150

Service valve

Huoltoventtiili

1/4"

SP4150

Service valve

1/4"

SP4280

Capilliirtube

Kapillaari

0 1 , 2 4 m m , L = 5500 m

SP4280

Capillartube

0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m

SP4170

Condensate tube

Haihdutusputki

0 1/4"

SP4170

Condensate tube

0 1/4"

SP4180

Mains cable and plug

Verkkojohto

3G1,5 3 m

SP4180

Mains cable and plug

3G1,5 3 m

SP4190

Mains cable clamp

Vedonpoistaja

KK-4

SP4190

Mains cable clamp

SP4290

Defrost solenoid valve

Sulatuksen magneettiventtiili

Danfoss

EVR3, 3032F1206

SP4290

Defrost solenoid valve

Danfoss

E V R 3 , 032F1206

SP4310

Coil for solenoid valve

Magneettiventtiilin kela

Danfoss

E V R 3 230V IP67 018Z6732 SP4320

Coil for solenoid valve

Danfoss

E V R 3 115V60HzlP67 018Z6710

SP4340

Magnetic door switch

Magneetti ovikytkin

230 V

SP4350

Magnetic door switch

115V

MAI 071-1

Frame heater

Ovenkarmivastus

230 V SIL+CUF, L=4700mm

MAI 071-4

Frame heater

115 V SIL+CUF, L=4700mm

0 200, sucking, angle 28


h=110, d=100, Lmax445

KK-4

MAI 070

Grid shelf

Lankahylly

MAI 070

Grid shelf

MA1137

Shelf bracket

Hyllynkannatin

AISI 304

MA1137

Shelf bracket

AISI 304

SP8010

Door Handle

Oven vedin

Type 571

SP8010

Door Handle

Type 571

SP8020

Door Hinge

Oven sarana

Type 402

SP8020

Door Hinge

Type 402

SP8030

Marine leg

Stjalka

2" round, AISI304

SP8030

Marine leg

2" round, AISI304

MAI 072-1

Door gasket

Ovitiiviste

PI359, 775 x 1 3 4 3 mm

MAI 072-1

Door gasket

P I 359, 775 x 1 3 4 3 mm

MA1138

Condenser filter

Lauhduttimen suodatin

10x246x470 mm

MA1138

Condenser filter

10x246x470 mm

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MRC-300

Part.no
SP4450

Central cooling unit M RC, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1

SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4390
SP4560
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MAI 070
MA1137

Solenoid valve
Coil for solenoid valve
Sliut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp
Grid sheif
Shelf bracket

SP8010
Door Handle
SP8020
Door Hinge
SP8030
Marine leg
MA1072-3 Door gasi<et

Magneettiventtiiii
Magneettiventtiiiin l^eia
Paiioventtiili
Palloventtiiii
Imupalnesdln
Suiatusvastus
Haihdutusvastus
Hyrystin
Hyrystlnpuhaiiin
St- ja ohjausyl<slkk
Nytt
Lmptlla-anturi
Sulatusanturl
Verkkojohto

Part.no
SP4550
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss

EVR3, 032F1206
EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
230 V/160 W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E

Vedonpolstaja

3G1,5 3m
KK-4

SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190

Lankahyiiy
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste

AiSI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AiSI304
P1359, 775 x823 mm

MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-3

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Fermod
Femnod

SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2

Central cooling unit MRC, 115V 60 Hz ~1


Solenoid vaive
Coil for solenoid vaive
Shut vaive
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp
Grid sheif
Sheif bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket

Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Fermod
Fermod

EVR3, 032F 1206


115V60HzlP67, 018Z6710
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AiSI304
P1359, 775 x823 mm

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MFC-300


Part.no
SP4500

Central cooling unit M FC, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1

Part.no
SP4600

SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4390
SP4560
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MA1071-3

Solenoid valve
Coil for solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp
Frame heater

Magneetti venttiili
Magneettlventtiilin kela
Palloventtiili
Palloventtiili
Imupainesdin
Sulatusvastus
Haihdutusvastus
Hyrystin
Hyrystinpuhallin
St-ja ohjausyksikk
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusantuh
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja
Ovenkarmivastus

EVR3, 032F1206
EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP12 1/2", 034L0023
400 W
230V/160 W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4
230 V SIL+CUF, L=3700mm

MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MA1072-3

Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket

Lankahylly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
P1359, 775 x823 mm

Danfoss
^anfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
l.ae

Fermod
Fermod

Central cooling unit lUFC, 115V 60 Hz - 1

SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190

Solenoid valve
Coil for solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp
MA1071-6 Frame heater

MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030

Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
MAI 072-3 Door gasket

Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Fermod
Fermod

EVR 3, 032F 1206


EVR 3 115V60HZIP67, 018Z6710
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3 m
KK-4
115 V SIL+CUF, L=3700mm

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x823 mm

IVIarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MRC-400

Part.no
SP4450

Central cooling unit M RC, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1

SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4390
SP4560
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190

Solenoid valve
Coil for solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
IVIains cable clamp

IVIagneettiventtiili
IVIagneettiventtiiiin l<ela
Palloventtiili
Palloventtiiii
Imupainesdin
Suiatusvastus
Haihdutusvastus
Hyrystin
Hyrystinpuhallin
St- ja ohjausyl<sil<k
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusanturi
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja

MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MA1072-2

Grid shelf
Shelf bracl<et
Door Handle
Door Hinge
iViarine leg
Door gasket

Lankahylly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
StjalKa
Ovitiiviste

Part.no
SP4550
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Fermod
Fermod

Central cooling unit IMRC, 115V 60 Hz ~1

EVR3, 032F1206
EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
230V/160W
h=110,d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4

SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190

Solenoid valve
Coii for solenoid valve
Shut vaive
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1033 mm

iVIA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-2

Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket

Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp

Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss

EVR3, 032F 1206


115V 60Hz 1P67,018Z 6710
GBC 6 S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4

Fermod
Fermod

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1033 mm

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MFC-400


Part.no
SP4500
SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370

Part.no
SP4600

Central cooling unit MFC, 230V 50/60 Hz -1


Solenoid valve
Coil for solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator

MagneettI venttiili
Magneettiventtillin kela
Palloventtiili
Palloventtiili

SP4380
SP4390
SP4560
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MA1071-2

Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp
Frame heater

Imupalnesdin
Sulatusvastus
Haihdutusvastus
Hyrystin
Hyrystinpuhallln
St- ja ohjausyksikk
Nytt
Lmptlla-anturi
Sulatusanturi
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja
Ovenkarmivastus

MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010

Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle

Lankahyl ly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin

SP8020
Door Hinge
SP8030
Marine leg
MA1072-2 Door gasket

Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste

Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Fermod
Fermod

EVR3, 032F1206
EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400 W
230V/160W

SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570

h=110, d=100, Lmax445


CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4

SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100

Central cooling unit MFC, 115V 60 Hz ~1


Solenoid valve

230VSIL+CUF, L=4100mm

SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MAI 071-5

Coil for solenoid valve


Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp
Frame heater

AISI 304
Type 571

MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010

Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle

Type 402
2" round, AISi304
P1359, 775 x1033 mm

SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-2

Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket

Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Fermod
Fermod

EVR 3, 032F 1206


EVR 3 115V60HzlP67, 018Z6710
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC 10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4
115VSIL+CUF, L=4100mm

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1033 mm

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MRC-500

Part.no
SP4450

Central cooling unit IMRC, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1

SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4390
SP45':-0
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190

Solenoid valve
Coil for solenoid valve
Shut vjlve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp

Magneettiventtllli
Magneettiventtiilin kela
Palloventtiili
Palloventtiill
Imupainesdin
Sulatusvastus
Haihdutusvastus
Hyrystin
Hyrystinpuhallin
St- ja ohjausyksikk
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusanturl
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja

MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MA1072-1

Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasl<et

Lankahyl ly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste

Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Fermod
Fermod

Part.no
SP4550

Central cooling unit MRC, 115V 60 Hz ~1

EVR3, 032F 1206


EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8",009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
230V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K2aC2
3G1,5 3m
KK^

SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190

Solenoid valve
Coil for solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1343 mm

MA1070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-1

Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket

Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Fermod
Fermod

EVR3, 032F 1206


115V60HzlP67, 018Z6710
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3 m
KK^

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
P1359, 775 x1343 mm

IVIarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MFC-550


Part.no
SP4500
SP4290
SP4310
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4390
SP4560
SP4060
SP4070
SP4080
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MA1071-1
MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-1

Part.no
SP4600

Central cooling unit MFC, 115V 60 Hz - 1

3G1,5 3m
KK-4
230 V SIL+CUF, L=4700mm

SP4290
SP4320
SP4360
SP4370
SP4380
SP4410
SP4570
SP4060
SP4240
SP4250
SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4180
SP4190
MAI 071-4

Solenoid valve
Coil for solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan
Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp
Frame heater

Danfoss EVR 3, 032F 1206


Danfoss EVR 3 115V60H2IP67, 018Z6710
Danfoss GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
Danfoss GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
Danfoss KVP12 1/2", 034L0023
400W
115V/160W
h=110,d=100, Lmax445
Centaur CN2B2
Lae
SSD90C30U
Lae
SMD12RU
Lae
ST1K20C1
Lae
ST1K20C2
3G1,5 3m
KK-4
115 V SIL+CUF, L=4700mm

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1343 mm

MAI 070
MA1137
SP8010
SP8020
SP8030
MAI 072-1

Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket

Fermod
Fermod

Central cooling unit IVFC, 230V 50/60 Hz ~1


Solenoid valve
Coil for solenoid valve
Shut valve
Shut valve
Suction regulator
Tubular heater
Condensation heater
Evaporator
Evaporator fan

Magneetti venttiili
Magneettiventtiilin kela
Palloventtiili
Palloventtiili
Imupainesdin
Sulatusvastus

Control unit
Display
Temp, control sensor
Defrost temp, sensor
Mains cable and plug
Mains cable clamp
Frame heater

Haihdutusvastus
Hoyrystin
Hyrystinpuhallin
St- ja ohjausyksikk
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi
Sulatusanturi
Verkkojohto
Vedonpoistaja
Ovenkarmivastus

Grid shelf
Shelf bracket
Door Handle
Door Hinge
Marine leg
Door gasket

Lankahylly
Hyllynkannatin
Oven vedin
Oven sarana
Stjalka
Ovitiiviste

Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss
Danfoss

Centaur
Lae
Lae
Lae
Lae

Fermod
Fermod

EVR3, 032F1206
EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732
GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020
GBC10S3/8", 009G5021
KVP12 1/2", 034L0023
400 W
230V/160W
h=110, d=100,Lmax445
CN52B3
SSD90C30E
SMD12RU
ST1K20C1
ST1K20C2

AISI 304
Type 571
Type 402
2" round, AISI304
PI 359, 775 x1343 mm

^II4CII^I I T

Rev 09 2003

Spare parts - Arctic Coid Line IVIarine IVIR-120


Part.no

Part.no

SP4760

Cooling unit MNCL, 230V 50/60 Hz ~1

SP4470

Cooling unit MNCL, 11SV 60 Hz - 1

SP4580

Compressor R

Kompressori

Electrolux

SP4430

Condenser

Lauhdutin

LU-VE

IVIL40TG

SP4210

Compressor

Electrolux

ML60TR

STFT 14121

SP4220

Condenser

LU-VE

QLZ06/0018-2524
CL180-6mm

SP4230

Condenser fan

SP4040

Condenser, plastic fan shrouds

ELCO
LU-VE

STVF 100 115V 082059103


VNP 10/38 W 115V

SP4440

Condenser fan

Lauhdutlnpuhallin

MVL

SP4460

Evaporator

Hyrystin

ECO

SP4070

Evaporator fan

Hyrystinpuhallin

Centaur

CN52B3

SP4050

Condenser fan blade

SP4080

Control unit

Lae

SSD90C30E

Lae
Lae

SIVID12RU
ST1K20C1

SP4060
SP4240

Evaporator

Display
Temp, control sensor

St- / ohjausyksikk
Nytt
Lmptila-anturi

SP4090
SP4100
SP4110
SP4120

Defrost temp, sensor

Sulatusanturi

Lae

ST1K20C2

Lauhtumlsanturi

Lae

ST1K20C3

SP4130

Condensing temp, sensor


Accumulator

Pisaranerotin

SP4140

Filter drier

Kulvain

SP4150

Service valve

Huoltoventtiili

SP4660

Capiliartube

Kapillaari

SP4490

Condensate tube

Haihdutusputki

SP4510

Connection cable 3x1,0 2,5 m

Kojeliitosjohto 3x1,0 2,5 m

27904-2,5M-801

SP4160

SP4520

Chassis plug standard

Capiliartube
Condensate tube

Mains cable clamp

488-191
KK-4

SP4170

SP4190

Kojeliitin, runko, uros


Vedonpoistaja

SP4190

Mains cable clamp

KK-4

SP8010

Door handle

Oven vedin

Type 571

SP8010

Door handle

Type 571

S10001
S10006

Hinge upper left frame


Hinge upper right frame

Sarana yls vasen karmiin

S10001
S10006

Hinge upper left frame


Hinge upper right frame

Evaporator fan
Control unit

Centaur
Lae

0 200, sucking, angle 26


h=110, d=100, Lmax445
CN2B2
SSD90C30U

SP4090

Display

Lae

SMD12RU

SP4100

Temp, control sensor

Lae

ST1K20C1

30x150,3/8"

SP4110

Defrost temp, sensor

Lae

ST1K20C2

30 g
1/4"

SP4120

Condensing temp, sensor


Accumulator

Lae

ST1K20C3

SP4250

SP4130

0 1,0 mm, L = 2870 mm SP4140


0 1/4"
SP4150
PK-Cables

CF21

Sarana yls oikea karmiin

Filter drier
Service valve

30x150,3/8"
30 g
1/4"
0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m
0 1/4"

SI0002

Hinge lower left frame

Sarana alas vasen karmiin

S10002

Hinge lower left frame

SI 0007

Sarana alas oikea karmiin

S10007

Hinge lower right frame

SI 0004

Hinge lower right frame


Hinge upper door

Sarana yls oveen

Hinge lower door

Sarana alas oveen

S10004
S11004

Hinge upper door

S11004
SI0003

Hinge bushing

Saranaholkki

S10003

Hinge lower door


Hinge bushing

047310

Door right hinged

Ovi oikea

047310

Door right hinged

047300

Door left hinged

Ovi vasen

047300

Door left hinged

SP5530

Gasket, door D4

mIeOOl

Shelf bracl<et

Tiiviste, ovi 04
Hyllynkannatin

mIeOOl

Shelf bracket

LM1302

Grid shelf

Lankahyl ly

GN1/1

Ll\/I1302

Grid shelf

GN1/1

SP8030

Marine leg

Stjalka

2" round, AISI304

SP8030

Marine leg

2" round, AISI304

Primo

135950

DI 66N
jsqijin

miim ^

COOZ'ZO'K

O.Sl+'"O.Z h
yW'lONPnuOo;
^ VlOllOH098SkNld
/^9i)ueei|uei||){S3)|
iuej6e|p6uuij|/

Atnwim

m 'U|u 8snj / i ) \ m

ZH09 '~I 'Agil

Vl 'U|u asnj / mn^ ZH9/0S 'l 'A0E2


Nnwy
-NlinilHIWl

NiiMid

]d

3d| 1 N

Y
1dl

3d
r

i (

/ ^W EV 2VSS IS 3111 8" 61 111 111 211 5151 /l \] i] 1


J
1
J r

, ^

xny 1

fp

i (Hl sn1 EN 2i IN N
VVVVTTTTT

0 0

ii] l^i [i[

]0C306(ISS

3iDH3

mr-\

9^
i

r^

pmiAl^

=Jk

=JV.

=Jk

=.

m \ J^

<=A.

=A

C=A
=!V.

itiiiaiirtMi'iiiir'"'^*jaa^5ig

C=A

-^g

4^

=Jk

LOiPART
Water boilers, electric

Model BE3M

SEMI-AUTOMATIC

STAINLESS STEEL EXECUTION

THERMOSTAT CONTROL

SAFETY CUT-OUT

NON DRIP TAP

WATER FEED ARM WITH VALVE


AS STANDARD

All water boUers are constructed of heavy


gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in
a polished finish. The water fittings are of
chromium plated brass.
Large bore draw-olf tap, water level gauge,
overflow, water inlet connection as well as a
dome cover arefittedas standard.
The boilers are intended for mounting directly on counter or bench top. Alternatively they may be installed on wall or floor,
subject to specially designed brackets respectively stands are provided.
The boilers have an on/ofi^sv^tch with pilot
lamp and auto reset low water level safety
cut-out.
For further specifications and optional extras, please see overleaf.

LOIPART AB
P.O. Box694
SE44118 Alingss, Sweden
Phone
+46322668360
Telefax
+46322637747
E-mail
loJpart@iolpart.se

Exclusive Sales of
BQ E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment

5-996
DOC.NO.
EDITION!

5-996L
11.06

WATER BOILERS, ELECTRIC


Scale 1:10
Dimensions mm
Dimensions mm
Model

BE2M

335

BE3M

420

BE4M

500

BE5M

570

Bullkhead brackets
(optional extra)

1. Gauge glass
2. Water inlet valve
3. Water connection 15 mm
4. Water tap
5. Thermostat
6. Pilot lamp
7. Cable entry
8. Overflow 0 22 mm
9. Suggested securing (not included)
10. Bulkhead brackets (optional extra)
Specifications
Model

BE2M

Optional extras

Capacity
litres

Voltage V

Loading
kW

10

BE3M

15

BE4M

20

BE5M

25

230 1-50/60

Weight kg
net

gross

11

12

10

13

12

15

Shipping
volume
m3

Model

Description

SBOIOA Set of s/s wall brackets


405018 Swivel arm with draw-off tap for el.water boiler

0.080

Installation
The water boilers are delivered with a 1.2 m electric cord.
Connect it to a suitable electrical supply circuit with isolating switch and according to ship's code. Water inlet pipe and valve should be conneaed
to a suitable cold water supply fitted with an isolating stopcock. Secure the unit by fitting angle bars or similar as shown above (not delivered with
the boiler).
For bulkhead mounting:
Set of 2 pes. wall brackets available as optional extra.

5-996
Subject to changes without notice.

MANUAL
Water boilers BE
Introduction

Maintenance

The Burshaw range of water boilers are manufactured


from top quality 304 stainless steel. All models are fitted with a thermostat enabling the customer to determine the required temperature. In addition they are also
fitted with an automatic cut-out.

The efficiency of any water boiler can be impaired if


scale is allowed to build up. Ensure that the scale
deposits are removed periodically from the inside of
the boiler and tap by using a descaling agent. At the
end of a working day the inner and outer surfaces of
the boiler and lid should be wiped dry to avoid the
build up of scale.

Loading and capacity


Model
BE2
BE3
BE4
BE5

Litres
10
15
20
25

Voltage
230V
230V
230V
230V

Hz
50
50
50
50

kW
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0

Warning
This appliance must be earthed!
All boiler are supplied complete with 13 amp. cable and
should be plugged into a suitable 13 amp. supply. In the
event of damage to the main lead, the supply cord should
only be fitted by an authorized service agent.
Water inlet and valve (where applicable) should be connected to a suitable cold water supply fitted with an isolating stopcock.
Model
BE8
BE10
BE12

Litres
36
45
55

Voltage
230V
380/440V
230V

Hz
50
50-60
50

M/V
6.0
6.0
6.0

Please note that the manufacturers guarantee will


be void If faults arise due to the excessive build
up of scale.

Safety
It is dangerous to drape towels or teacloths over
the boiler obstructing the vent hole in the boiler
lid.
Care should be taken when removing the lid to
avoid possible injury from steam.
This appliance should never be cleaned with a
water jet.

Operating instruction
1.

First assuring that the draw off tap is in the OFF


position.
Fill the boiler with cold water to the level, indicated on the front of the boiler. DO NOT OVERFILL.

2.

Switch on the eletrical supply after filling.

3.

Turn the thermostat control knob in a clockwise


direction to the maximum setting. When the
water boils turn the control knob in an anticlockwise direction to the desired retaining
temperature below 100 C.

4.

Draw off water by opening the draw off tap


remembering to REPLENISHTHE BOILER
WITH WATER FROM TIME TO TIME.

Warning
This appliance must be earthed!
Model BE10 must be wired by a qualified electrician
using flexible conduit to 30 amp. supply via a safety
isolating switch with a contact gap of at least 3.0 mm in
all poles. Precautions should be taken during installation regarding the leakage of current.
Although all Burshaw boilers are fitted with manual
reset trip free safety cutouts to protect the heating
elements from the occasional boil dry situation It is
essential that the user ensures that the elements are
covered with at least 25 mm of water at all times.
In the event of the boiler being accidently allowed
to boil dry, the boiler should be allowed to cool down
before refilling with water.The boiler will reset automatically.
Please note this safety feature will not operate until
the boiler has cooled down sufficiently.

In any communication with our service department


please quote model & serial no. of the boiler in question which is quoted on the rear of the appliance,

Installation instruction
*=?

T
140

75

t
<

Gauge glass
Water inlet valve
Water connection 15 mm
Water tap
Thermostat
Pilot lamp
Cable entry
Overflow 0 22 mm
Suggested securing
(not included)
10. Bulkhead brackets
(optional extra)

Voltage V*

BE2M

335

BE5M

Loading kW

Weight kg
net

gross

10

11

BE3M

15

12

BE4M

20

10

13

BE5M

25

12

15

Shipping
volume
m3

0.080

Optional extras
Model

BE4M 500

BE2M

230 1 -50/60

Model

BE3M 420

Specifications
Capacity litres

>

Dimensions mm

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Model

0 292

Description

SB010A Set of s/s wall brackets


405018 Swivel arm with draw-off tap for el.water boiler

570

Installation
The water boilers are delivered with a 1.2 m electric
cord.
Connect it to a suitable electrical supply circuit with
isolating switch and according to ship's code. Water
inlet pipe and valve should be connected to a suitable
cold water supply fitted with an isolating stopcock.
Secure the unit by fitting angle bars or similar as
shown above (not delivered with the boiler).
For bulkhead mounting:
Set of 2 pes. wall brackets available as optional extra.
The boilers are intended for mounting directly on
counter or bench top. Alternatively they may be installed on wall or floor, subject to specially designed
brackets respectively stands are provided.
The boilers have an on/off switch with pilot lamp and
auto reset low water level safety cut-out.

Wiring diagram

Burshaw Boilers BE2-5, 3 kW


with temperature limit
05,08,06

AAA/V^

Voltage: 380-440 3-50/60

WIRING DIAGRAM
MODELS BE 10

MODEL 541 13

?
Z

<

<

lY t _4

K1
O

^
d

3 ; CC
LJ

<

>

i/i
i/j CH

_1

UJ

fO
O
CD L, en

<
X
Lu
0.

<

1
CM UJ

n
V

1-

1T n

CM

CD
Q id
X

(^
COMA
8

1 't./o.O(S

GROUP

BURSHAW Q>0>Les 3r.'Yl


MANUAL AND SEMI AUTOMATIC
EXPLODED PARTS DIAGRAM
DV/G,NO Bg}4ttf

ISSUE

DATE

ORAWtJ

&
GK

BURSHAW
Item No.

Boiler Spares List ( Serial No.400000-t-)

Qty

Code

Lid Knob with finger plate

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1

M808
L713A
L750A
L730
N/A
M823
N/A
L731
L732
SB001

1
1

M822
M820

1
1
1
1
1
1

L722
M802
M802A
N/A
L716
M779

Thermostat Knob
Relay (Used on special voHages only)

20
21
22

Feed Arm Elbow


Feed Arm Tube
Feed Arm Valve
Water Feed Assembly (Parts 9,10,20,21,22)

M781
D224A
L758

1
1

L756
L755

23
24
25

Overflowfitting22mm coupling
Overflow washer 3/4 in BSP
Back Nut 3/4 in BSP
Overflow assembly (parts 23,24,25)
Special Tap for guage glass (parts 5-10)

1
1

SB004
L769A

1
1
1

L771
L770
SB013

1
1
1
1
1
1

SB002
SB700A
SB701A
SB702A
SB703A
L753A

1
1

T651
M834

1/2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

26

Boiler Lid with l<nob (10-25 litre)


Pilot Light (Red) 15mm Diameter
Tap Top Assembly for Standard Tap
Tap Spring (included in part 5)
Washer for Tap (Neoprene)
Standard Tap body
Back Nut
Tap Fibre Washer
Standard Tap Complete (parts 5 -10)
Safety cut-out (included in part 13)
Push button cutout (Used on 1 lOv boilers)
Element 3kw with Cut-Out
Silicone washer for element
Fibre washer for element
Element Nut (included in 13)
Thermostat 3kw
Thermostat 6kw

27

Gauge glass assembly 10 litre (parts 28,29,30)


Gauge glass assembly 15 litre (parts 28,29,30)
Gauge glass assembly 20 litre (parts 28,29,30)
Gauge glass assembly 25 litre (parts 28,29,30)

28

Gauge glass tube


Level indicator ball (red)
Gauge glass olive

29
30

ITEMS NOT SHOWN


Base cover plate (10-25 Litre)
Anti-splash lid (10-25 Utre)
Bulk Head Brackets (10-25 litre)

Cona Limited
Unit 3 Island Farm Avenue
West Moiesey, Surrey, KT8 2UZ
Tel: 020 8941 9922 Fax: 020 8941 9955

M788

1
1

M796
SB010A

206991^

=A

=A.

OU

C=A
c=A.
c==A.

- ^

' . - tiSW-i.^

4^

"

"4

'

-.

d O o V ^^^^^ ^3 aar

KB ^W B8B ^W

Dishwasher WT 38

Model WT38

Model WT38
with stand 16 94 66

HIGH CAPACITY

EASY CLEANING

FOUR WASH PROGRAMMES

SUPERB DISHWASHING RESULT

LOW WATER AND DETERGENT


CONSUMPTION

FULLY AUTOMATIC

EASY INSTALLATION
AND SERVICE

W T 38 is a compact, front loading machine


for undercounter installation with a high
capacityprovidingefficient dishwashing. The
large wash chamber can take tableware up to
a height of30 cm and GastroNorm sizes. The
exterior, door, wash tank, tank filter, washand rinse arms and nozzles are made of
stainless steel, quality AISI304 (SS 2333).
Smooth surfaces and a fully pressed wash
tank with rounded corners facilitate cleaning.
W T 38 has four wash cycles, one for lightly
soiled dishes, one for normally soiled and one
for heavily soiled dishes. For particularly
dirty dishes or for other specific needs a

continuous wash can be chosen. The rotating


wash and rinse arms contribute towards efficient dishwashing with a perfect result. T h e
final rinse only starts when the correct temperature has been reached.
Water consumption is only 3.3 litres of fresh
water per wash. T h e machine is very easy to
operate as all automatic controls are integrated. The machine is equipped as standard with
a detergent pump and rinse aid pump.
The machine can also be supplied with an
optional stand, which raises the working
height to 850-900 mm.
For fiirtherspecifications and optional extras,
please see overleaf.

LOiPART AB
P.O.B0X694
SE 44118 Allngss, Sweden
Phone
+46322668360
Telefax

+46322637747

E-mail

lQipart@ioipart.se

Exclusive Sales of
BD E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment

7-079
DOC.NO.
EDITION 9

7-079L
11.05

DISHWASHER, WT 38
Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm

1. Water connection hose


L=1.0m,ISO-G3/4B
2. Inlet for detergent and rinse aid
hoses
3. Equipotential screw (earth screw)
4. Elearical conneaion, 1.5 m cord
included
5. Drain oudet 0 18 mm int.
6. Working top, depth=620 mm,
possible to remove if necessary
by under counter installation
7. Marine legs
(If necessary to fix machine to a
counter, simple arrangements -not
a part of delivery- are sufficient.)

820 850
750-1000'

1010

Specification:
Water consumption 1/rack
Recommended water hardness
Recommended water pressure (flow)
Rinse water temperatur
Pump output
Sound level

Detail of marine leg


for dishwasher

3.3
max 5 dH
300-600 KPa
80-85C
0,75 kW
< 66 dB

Specification
Loading kW
Model

PNC

Drain
pump

502 346
WT38

*Max.
amps in
phase

Voltage

440 3-60

11.6

400 3-50

12.7

502 019

Capacity
racks/hour

Working cydesis

Rinse
water
heater

Tank

Total

Prog.
1

2.0

6.85

90

Prog.
2

Prog.
3

Weight kgs

Prog.
1

Prog.
2

Prog.
3

net

gross

Shipping
volume
m3

33

20

12

68

75

0.470

120 240

' Other voltages available on request


Optional extras
Model

16 94 66

Description

Stand
52550

Racks - see leaflet 7-605 (1 plate rack,


1 glass rack and 1 cutlery holder are
supplied as standard with the WT 38)

Detail of marine leg for stand

^^-^

f
k

TL t
548

tiU=

-l85l<

-450450

J
wl

Stand - optional extra


Scale 1:25

-r 1 1 +
120V4-^
/ / > ' < ? - ^ 010 (3x)

-05O-
1070'

7-079
Subject to changes without notice.

GB UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER

Page 3

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

DE

UNTERBAUGESCHIRRSPLER
INSTALLATION, BEDIENUNG UND WARTUNG

Seite 19

NL

TAFELMODEL VAATWASMACHINE
INSTALLATIE, GEBRUIK EN ONDERHOUD

Pag. 35

[sTl GOLVDISKMASKIN

Sid 53

INSTALLATION, HANDHAVANDE OCH UNDERHALL

DK

INDBYGNINGSOPVASKEMASKINE
INSTALLATION, DRIFT OG VEDLIGEHOLDELSE

Side 69

Fl

ASTIANPESUKONE
ASENNUS, KYTT JA HUOLTO

Sivu 85
Side 101

NO INNEBYGD OPPVASKMASKIN
MONTERING, BRUKOG VEDLIKEHOLD

MFR
IT
ii ES

PT

LAVE-VAISSELLE
INSTALLATION, EMPLOI ET ENTRETIEN

Page 117

LAVASTOVIGLIE SOTTOTAVOLO
INSTALLAZIONE, USO E MANUTENZIONE

Pag. 133

LAVAVAJILLAS EMPOTRABLE
INSTALACION, USO Y MANTENIMIENTO

Pag. 149

MQUINA DE LAVAR LOIQA DE ENCASTRAR


INSTAU\gO, UTILIZAQO E MANUTENQO

Pag. 165

GR n A Y N T H P I O n i A T Q N

IEX.

E f K A T A I T A I H , XPHZH KAI ZYNTHPHIH

DOC. NO.
EDITION: 1

5956.380.05
06.2005

181

GB !

\ )

Mm

CONTENTS

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS

Pag.

A1

HANDLING

Pag.

A2

UNPACKING

Pag.

A3

DISPOSAL

Pag.

A4

TECHNICAL DATA

Pag.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE INSTALLER/MAINTENANCE PERSON

Pag.

B1

WATER CONNECTION

Pag.

B2

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Pag.

B3

WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE CONTROL PANEL

Pag.

B4

DETERGENT/RINSE-AID DISPENSERS AND SETTINGS

Pag.

10

85

SETTING THE DISPENSERS

Pag.

11

86

MAINTENANCE

Pag.

12

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER

Pag.

13

CI

STARTING

Pag.

13

C2

WASH CYCLES

Pag.

14

C3

OPERATION

...Pag.

14

C4

END OF WORK AND DAILY CLEANING

Pag.

15

C5

UNDERCOUNTER
DISHWASHER
WITH
INCORPORATED CONTINUOUS WATER SOFTENER

Pag.

16

C6

WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE CONTROL PANEL

Pag.

17

TROUBLESHOOTING

Pag.

18

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
WARNING
CAREFULLY READ THE INSTALLATION, OPERATING
AND
MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE INSTALLING THIS APPLIANCE. INCORRECT INSTALLATION, ADAPTATIONS OR ALTERNATIONS
COULD
CAUSE
DAMAGE
TO
PROPERTY OR INJURY TO PERSONS. MALICIOUS
DAMAGE, DAMAGE DUE TO NEGLIGENCE, OR TO
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH INSTRUCTIONS AND
REGULATIONS, OR TO INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR UNAUTHORISED TAMPERING INVALIDATE ANY WARRANTY AND RELIEVE THE
MANUFACTURER OF ALL LIABILITY.
Carefully read this instructions booklet, as it contains important advice for safe installation, operation and maintenance.
Keep this booklet to hand in a safe place for future
reference by other operators.
2. Installation should be carried out by qualified
engineers, in accordance with current regulations and with the manufacturer's instructions.
3. The appliance should only be used by persons specifically trained in this operation.
4. Switch off the appliance in the event of failure or
malfunctioning.
Only have the appliance repaired by a service centre
authorised by the manufacturer and ask for original
spare parts.

Lift the appliance using a lift truck, remove the base


and position the appliance

Rgure2
where it is to be installed.

A1
HANDLING
Use suitable means to move the appliance: a lift truck
or fork pallet trucks (the forks should reach more than
halfway beneath the appliance).
A2
,.;;'>

RgureS
Remove the protective film and ensure that the packaging material is disposed of correctly in compliance
with the regulations in force in the country where the
product is to be used.
A3

All the packaging materials are environment friendly.


They may be kept without danger, recycled or burned
in a special waste incineration plant. Recyclable plastic
components are mari<ed as follows:

UNPACKING

6
PE

" ^

r"

y^^j^

r^

Hi

>

If

Figure 1
Wear protective gloves to unpack.

DISPOSAL

polyethylene
polypropylene
polystyrene
foam

external wrapping film.


Instruction bag.
top packaging panels,
straps
protective surround elements.

Wood and cardboard components may be disposed of


according to local regulations in force. Appliances that
have reached the end of their service life should be
suitably disposed of. The appliance should be dismantled according to regulations in force. AI! metal
parts are in stainless steel (AISI 304) and are removable. Plastic parts are marked with the symbol of the
material.

A4

TECHNICAL DATA
LS6/ET5

MODEL

WT37/WT38

Supply voltage:

400...415-3N-

400...415-3N~

- convertible to

220...240- 3~

220...240-3~

- single-phase version

220...2401N~

220...2401N-

- USPH version

400...440- 3~

400.,.440- 3~

Frequency

Hz

50o60

5 0 0 60

Max. power input

kW

6.85/9.05(*)-9.85/12.05(*)

5.35/7.55{*)-6.85/9.05(*)

Boiler heating elements

kW

6.0-9.0

4.5-6.0

Tank heating elements

kW

2,2

2.2

kPa[bar]

50...700 [0.5.,.7]

50...700 [0.5...71

Wafer supply press, for pressure boiler versions

kPa [bar]

200...300 [2...3]

200...30[2...3]

Water supply temperature

50

50

Water supply hardness for models without


incorporated continuous water softener

fH/dH/cH

14/8/10 max

14/8/10 max

Electric conductivity of water for models without


incorporated continuous water softener

nS/cm

<400

<400

Water supply hardness for models with


incorporated water softener

"iWdWcH

40/22,4/28 max

40/22,4/28 max

Concentration of chlorides in water

ppm

<20

<20

Rinse cycle water consumption

3.8

3.8

Boiler capacity

12

12

Tank capacity

23

23

Standard cycle time with water supply at 50C

sec.

90-120-240

90-120-240/120-180-300/300-420-600

Legal noise level Leq

dB(A)

<65

<65

IPX4

IPX4

Net weight for models without incorporated


continuous water softener

kg

68

68

Net weight for models


continuous water softener

kg

71

71

H07RN-F

H07RN-F

Water supply press, for atmospheric


versions

boiler

Protection rating

with

incorporated

Power supply cable

(*) = If activated by software, coincidence of tank and boiler heating elements.

Tabel 1

400..415V3N

220...240V3

400...440V 3

220...240V1N

5.35 WW

5x2.5

16A3P+N

4x2.5

16A3P

4x4

2GA3P

3x6

30A 1P+N

6.85 kW

5x2.5

16A3P+N

4x2.5

16A3P

4x4

20A3P

3x6

40A 1P+N

7.55 kW

5X4

2SA3P+N

4x2.5

16A 3P

4x6

32A3P

3x10

40A1P+N

9.05 kW

5X4

32A 3P4-N

4x4

20A 3P

4x8

32A3P

3x10

50A1P+N

9.85 kW

5X4

32A 3P+N

4x4

20A3P

4x8

32A3P

3x10

50A1P+N

12.05 kW

5X4

32A 3P+N

4x4

20A 3P

4x8

32A3P

3x10

50A1P+N

C = Power supply cable


8 = On/Oft switch

Tabel 2
Standard cycle time may vary should the inlet water temperature and/or the boiler heating elements be different from
that indicated above.

Figure 4 Installation diagram for models without incorporated continuous water softener
Legend Figure 4
A - Water inlet pipe with 0 3/4" G fittings
C - Outlet pipe l 40 mm (^) - i 20 mm (*).
R|
- Power supply
S - Pipe inlet for detergents
Q - Unipotential screw
C^) - Only for model with free-fall drainage
(*) - Only for model with drain pump

vi)

Figure 5 Installation diagram for models with incorporated continuous water softener
Legend Figure 5
A - Water inlet pipe with 3/4" G fittings
C - Outlet pipe i 40 mm {^) - i 20 mm (*).
I - Power supply
S - Pipe inlet for detergents
Q - Unipotential screw
C^) - Only for model with free-fall drainage
(*) - Only for model with drain pump

B INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE INSTALLER/MAINTENANCE PERSON


Install a disconnecting switch with a capacity at
least equal to that given in the technical data table,
a 30mA residual current circuit breaker and an
overcurrent device (magnetothermal cut-out with
manual reset or fuse) between,the appliance and
the mains power outlet.

- On the model with drain pump:


position the outlet pipe at a height anywhere between
750 and 1000 mm from the floor.
Check that about 4 litres of water flow out of the outlet
pipe during the rinse cycle.

RATING PLATE
The rating plate contains identification and technical
data and is located on the right-hand side panel of the
appliance (Figure 6).

B2

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

(..0,:

Figure 8
CAUTION
THE EARTH AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SHOULD BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH NATIONAL REGULATIONS.

Figure 6
B1
WATER CONNECTION
Position the dishwasher and level the appliance by
turning the relative height-adjustable feet
(Figure 6).
Connect the appliance water supply pipe "A"
(Figure 4) to the mains, fitting a cut-pff coci<, the filter provided and a pressure gauge between the
appliance and the mains (Figure 7).

Before carrying out the electrical connection, check


that the voltage and frequency on the appliance
rating plate correspond to those of the mains electricity supply.
The earth wire at the terminal end must be longer
(max. 20 mm) than the phase wires.
Connect the earth wire of the power supply cable to
an efficient earth clamp. The appliance must also
be included in a unipotential system, the connection being made through the screw "Q" (Figure 4)
marked with the symbol "'^". The unipotential wire
must have a cross section of 10 mm^.

Power
supply
configuration)
f

400...415V

3N

(standard

Figure 7

Checl< that the dynamic water supply pressure,


measured between the appliance and the main, is
between 200 and 300 kPa for machines with pressure boiler and between 50 and 700 kPa for
machines with atmospheric boiler (test while dishwasher tank or boiler is filling with water). If the
pressure is too high, fit a suitable pressure
reducer on the inlet pipe.

- On the model with free-fall drainage:


connect the waste outlet pipe "C" (Figure 4) to the
main drain pipe, fitting a trap, or place the outlet pipe
over an "S" trap set into the floor.

Figure 9
Open the power supply terminal board and insert the
jumpers provided as follows: one jumper between terminals 2 and 4 and another between terminals 4 and 6,
Using a suitable power supply cable (see technical data
table), connect the three phases to terminals 1,3 and 5,
the neutral to terminal 6 and the earth wire to the terminal ^ .

Power supply 400...440V 3

Connections provided for energy control


This appliance Is designed for an external energy consumption control.

Figure 10
Open the power supply terminal board and insert the
jumpers provided as follows: one jumper between terminals 2 and 4 and another between terminals 4 and 6.
Using a suitable power supply cable (see technical data
table), connect the three phases to terminals 1, 3 and 5
and the earth wire to the terminal 4r.
Power supply 220...230V 3

Figure 11
Open the power supply tenninl board and insert the
jumpers provided as follows: one Jumper between terminals 1 and 2, one between terminals 3 and 4 and
another between terminals 5 and 6. Using a suitable
power supply cable (see technical data table), connect
the three phases to terminals 1, 3 and 5 and the earth
wire to the terminal ^ .
Power supply 220...230V 1N

Figure 13
Connect the energy peak controller across terminals 11
and 12.

Safety devices
An automatic reset thermoamperometric protective
device incorporated in the windings of the electric
pump cuts off the electricity supply in the case of
malfunctioning.
In the event of water mains failure, a device prevents water in the boiler from returning Into the
mains.
An overflow pipe, connected to the drainage outlet,
maintains the water in the tank at a constant level.
On models with a drain pump, a supplementary
level control device activates if the main level control device is faulty.
Failure to comply with safety rules and regulations
relieves the manufacturer of all liability.
B3

WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE


CONTROL PANEL

A1

Figure 12
Open the power supply terminal board and Insert the
jumpers provided as follows: two jumpers between terminals 1,3,5 and another two between terminals 2, 4
and 6.
Using a suitable power supply cable (see technical data
table), connect the phase and neutral to terminals 5 and
6 respectively and the earth wire to the terminal ^ .

CAUTION
A normally open (n.o.) contact of the
controller must be connected across
terminals 11 and 12. When this contact
closes the boiler heating elements are
disconnected. Using the dishwasher in
these conditions may increase the cycle
time.

NO WATER

Check that the cock is open.


Check that the water inlet filter is clean.
Check the minimum mains pressure (not less than
50kPa).
Check that the overflow pipe is inserted (for
appliances without drain pump only).
B1

INEFFICIENT DRAINAGE

Check if the overflow has been removed.


Check for obstruction on the waste outlet pipe and
the overflow aperture.
B2

TANK WATER LEVEL TOO HIGH

Checl< for obstruction on the waste outlet pipe and


the overflow aperture.

Connections for automatic detergent dispenser


(Figure 14)

C1..C8 CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE


[E1..E8| CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE
-

The appliance continues to operate, but appropriate checl<s by a technician are recommended.

F21..F22 CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE

B4

DETERGENT/RINSE-AID DISPENSERS AND


SETTINGS
If the appliance is connected to a water softener or
osmotic device, contact the detergent supplier for a
.^specific product.
^ i'eristaltic dispensers (rinse-aid and detergent) require
periodic maintenance. The internal hose of the rinseaid dispenser should undergo periodic maintenance
(at least once or twice a year).
r l | i l . Dishwasher with incorporated detergent disl l i ' penser pump (Figure 14).
Pump "R" dispenses about 0.9 g/s of detergent. When
the appliance Is filled with water for the first time In the
day, it dispenses about 48 g of detergent in 50 sec,
thereby providing a concentration of 2 g/l. Pump "R"
dispenses about 8 g in 8 sec. at each cycle.
Dispenser operating time may be changed, following
the instructions given in the next paragraph.
Insert the hose provided in the kit into the detergent
container.
2. Dishwashers with incorporated peristaltic
rinse-aid dispenser pump (Figure i 4).
Pump "S" dispenses about 0.1 g/s of rinse-aid. It dispenses 0.4 g In 4 sec. at each rinse.
Dispenser operating time may be changed, following
the instructions given in the next paragraph,
insert the hose provided in the kit into the rinse-aid
container (in the versions without Incorporated rinseaid dispenser only).
3. Dishwashers with incorporated rinse-aid
diaphragm dispenser pump (Figure 14).
Pump 'T" is installed in appliances with pressure boiler.
Dispensed amounts may be changed according to the
instructions given In the paragraph below.
Insert the supplied hose Into the rinse-aid container (in
the versions without incorporated rinse-aid dispenser
only).

10

Figure 14
There is a ready-made impression "N" to be perforated
(0 8 mm) for positioning the detergent concentration
measuring sensor.
Inside the tank there is a hole "P" (0 10 mm) closed
with a plug, which may be used for mounting a liquid
detergent injector.
The Ecotemp versions have a hole "N" (0 22 mm) closed with a plug. The sensor and liquid detergent injector should be installed without prejudicing the
watertlghtness of the appliance.
Electrical connections for automatic detergent and
rinse-aid dispensers
Terminals are available on the power supply terminal
board for the electrical connection of external dispensers worthing at 220...240 V. Max. power 30 VA.

RgurelS
Connect the detergent dispenser between terminals 7 and 9. These connection points are live for a
set time during filling of the tank and at the start of

the wash cycle (see paragraph "Setting the dispensers").

Display of programming mode:

Initial amount of detergent:

C*n J .^ L
Setting the activation time:
Figure 16

Connect the rinse-aid dispenser between terminals 8 and 9. These connection points are live
during filling of the tank and at the end of the rinse
cycle for a set time (see "setting the dispensers"
paragraph).

MANUAL ACTIVATION
Whenever the detergent containers are replaced, it
may be necessary to activate the dispensers manually
in order to fill the hoses and eliminate any air.
Simultaneously press the buttons, as shown in the
figures below. If necessary, repeat this operation
several times.

^ ^

Initial amount of rjnse-aid:

Setting the activation time:

Amount of detergent during the cycle:

Setting the activation time:


DETERGENT DISPENSER

DISPENSER RINSE-AID

In the appliances with pressure boiler, the diaphragm


dispenser pump may be manually activated by pressing screw "D" (Figure 14).
B5

SETTING THE DISPENSERS

1) Peristaltic dispensers
All operations should be carried out with the appliance
switched on, the door open and no cycle selected.

Amount of rinse-aid during the cycle:

Setting the activation time:

LEGEND
^

Increase

Decrease

Confirm or select next parameter

Exit from programming mode:


I

SEQUENTIAL START
Press the Indicated buttons simultaneously for 5
seconds:

GEn

Notes for external dispensers:


- \fdEt:
(S / the detergent dispenser only operates during wash pump operation; terminals 7-9
of the main terminal board are powered at the
same time.

11

Close the water supply cock.


Completely drain the tank.
Remove and carefully clean the filters.
Completely drain the incorporated dispenser
hoses, removing them from the containers. Repeat
the procedure described in the paragraph "Manual
activation" at least 3 times.
Completely drain the boiler by simultaneously pressing the buttons as shown in the figure.

the detergent dispenser only operates during filling electrovalve operation for restoring the boiler level; terminals 7-9 of the main
terminal board are powered at the same time.
-

if r j? r r 5 / the rinse^aid dispenser only operates during filling electrovalve operation for restoring the boiler level; terminals 8-9 of the main
terminal board are powered at the same time.

i f ' ' ff r Sc* the rinse-aid dispenser only operates during wash pump operation; terminals 8-9 of
the main terminal board are powered at the same
time.
For connections, see the wiring diagram.

Example:
Supposing that an external detergent dispenser has
been connected with a tank concentration measuring
^ensor, a standard setting could be as follows:
d ln:Q the dispenser is not activated during filling of
the tanlc.
dEt:
'8 1 the dispenser is activated during wash
, pump operation and, thanks to the concentration
measured by the conduction sensor, the correct
amount of detergent is dispensed2) Rinse-aid diaphragm dispenser
'*

To ehange the dispensed amount, turn *(D- on screw


"D" accordingly (Figure 14).
Suggestion: to check the effectiveness of the rinseaid, look at frsshjy washed glasses against the light.
Drops of water remaining on the glass indicate an
insufficient amount while streaks indicate an excess.

Changing the detergent/rinse-aid type


If changing to a different detergent/rinse-aid type
(even one by the same manufacturer), you must rinse
the suction and pressure hoses with fresh water before
ponnecting the new detergent/rinse-aid container,
bthenwise, the mixing of different types of detergent/
rinse-aid will cause crystallisation, which may result In
a breakdown of the dosing pump. Failure to observe
this condition will invalidate the guarantee and product
^|iability.

B6
iUiAINTENANCE
Descale the boiler, the internal surfaces of the tank
and the appliance water piping once or twice a
year.
Descale the rinse and wash jets every month using
vinegar or a descaling agent.
The intemal hose of the rinse-aid and detergent
peristaltic dispenser should undergo periodic maintenance (once or twice a year).
ProSonged period of inactivity
If the dishwasher is not to be used for a long time, proceed as follows:
12

1^ I 1

hjji^

A buzzer indicates completion of drainage.


Spread a thin film of Vaseline oil over all the stainless steel surfaces.

Preventive maintenance
The preventive maintenance call may be activated
(see sen/ice manuals).
Upon reaching the set number of cycles (e.g. 20000),
CAin

appears on the display.

This message advises calling a qualified technician for


a general check-up of the state of the appliance.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER

Our appliances have been studied and optimised to give high performance. This appliance must be used exclusively
for the purpose for which it has been designed, i.e. for washing disheis with water and specific detergents. Any other
use is to be considered improper.
This appliance does not carry out the rinse cycle should there be no supply water; it stops all functions with an error
message "A1" (also see "Warning messages").

_^__

(,::)

I!E

_ _ ^

Carry out a couple of cycles without dishes to flush out any industrial grease which has remained in the
tanl< and piping.
Avoid washing decorated dishes.
Do not allow silvenware to come into contact with other metals.
Do not allow food to dry on the dishes.
Remove large food scraps from the dishes to prevent clogging the filters.
Pre-wash the dishes by spraying them with cold or lukewarm water, without using any detergent.
Use automatic dispensers for the detergent.
If there is no automatic dispenser, pour a non-foaming detergent into the tanl< when the water has reached
the washing temperature.
CONTROL PANEL

LEGEND:
A = on/off
B = drain/self-cleaning cycle
K = display
D = "tank" indicator light

E = "boiler" indicator light


J = wash cycle 1
H = wash cycle 2
F = wash cycle 5

Figure 17
The temperature shown on the display is that of the boiler if the indicator light "E" is on or of the tank if the light "D" is
on. The tank temperature is displayed during the wash cycle and the boiler temperature during the rinse cycle.
CI
STARTING
Open the water supply cock.
Switch on at the mains.
Open the door and check that all the components
are in their correct position.
Close the door and press button "A".

For atmospheric versions only:


Warning, this dishwasher does the first tank filling
through several consecutive hot rinse cycles, while the
display shows the message FILL (flowing).This system
let save up to 30% of time than traditional models.
If the door is opened during this stage the message
"CLOSE" will appear on the display:

The indicator light of button "A" (Figure 17) comes on,


indicating that the dishwasher is powered and that
water is being introduced and heated. The word "FILL"
is shown on the display during the entire filling and
heating stage:

The filling and heating stage has finished when the display shows the tank temperature:

TILL

13

To display the boiler temperature during heating of the


tanl(, open the door and press the button "J"
(Figure 17).

- Cycle III

C2
WASH CYCLES
The wash cycle includes one wash with hot water and
detergent (min 55 C or min 150 F for Marine USPH
versions) and one rinse with hot water and rinse-aid
(min 82 C or min 180 F for Marine USPH versions).

Only for models with incorporated water softener

Table of times
Standard cycle time with supply water at 50 G.

LS6/ET5/WT37

lai \m m
90" 120" 240"

WT38M

120" 180" 300'

WT38MED

300" 420" 600"

A device lengthens the cycle time if the water in the


^Iboiler has not reached the minimum temperature for
correct rinsing.
The cycle times and the temperature may be personalised (e.g. increase of the rinse time and temperature).
The cycle times should only be set by a specialised
technician.
C3

OPERATION

The filling and heating stage has finished when the display shows the tank temperature:

For very dirty dishes: press button "F' (Figure 17) (see
table of times).

n .

if the salt container is empty, the message SRL u IS


displayed at the start of the cycle. Place the salt in the
special container, following the instructions given in
the section "Undercounter dishwasher with incorporated continuous water softener".
To stop the wash cycle, just press the selected
cycle button or open the door.
To continue the wash cycle, just press the selected
cycle button or close the door. The cycle starts
again from where it stopped.
At the end of the wash, the dishwasher emits a
series of beeps and "END" blinks on the display:

, END] % [
Open the door and remove the rack containing the
clean dishes.
WARNING
The appliance will not remove burnt food deposits
from dishes. Dishes with burnt-on food deposits
should be cleaned mechanically/chemically (for
example, pre-wash under running water) before
putting them in the dishwasher.
Change the water in the tank at least twice a day.

The appliance is then ready for use:


Open the door.
Pour the required amount of detergent into the tanl<
I
(in models without automatic dispenser).
Insert the rack containing the dirty dishes.
Close the door and select the suitable wash cycle;
the corresponding indicator light comes on and the
wash cycle starts:

- Cycle I
For lightly soiled dishes: press button "J" (Figure 17)
(see table of times).

Cycle II (recommended)
For normally dirty dishes: press button "H" (Figure 17)
(see table of times).

Type of racks and loading

RgurelS
YELLOW rack: for 18 plates with maximum diameter of 240 mm.

Figure 19
GREEN rack: for 12 bowls with maximum diameter
of 240 mm.

14

END

Switch off the dishwasher by pressing button "A"


(Figure 17).
Figure 20
BLUE rack for glasses: the glasses should be placed upside down.

Switch off at the mains.


Close the water supply cock.
Replace the filters and the overflow.
Remove the top and bottom jets " P and "I", unscrewing the ring nut "H".

Figure 21

YELLOW container for cutlery: insert 15 items, with


the handles pointing downwards, in each container.
Available as accessories: dividers for glasses and
rack for dishes with maximum diameter of 320 mm.
Note: if only one type of dish rack is to be used, it is
advisable to choose the GREEN rack.
C4
END OF WORK AND DAILY CLEANING
The appliance Is designed to carry out an automatic
cleaning cycle to help flush out any residues and to
guarantee greater health and hygiene:
Open the door and take out the rack containing the
clean dishes.
Remove the tank filters and the overflow "W".

Figure 22

Figure 23
Unscrew plugs "L" from the rinse jets and clean
using a water spray. Do not use sharp implements
to clean the nozzle holes, which could othen/vlse be
damaged.
Remove filters "C" and "D" and clean them under a
water spray.
Remove the filter "Z" and clean away any remained
food in order to avoid blocking the draining system.

Figure 24

Close the door.


Select the drain cycle by pressing button "B"
(Figure 17).

Upon completion of cleaning operations, replace the


parts removed previously.

The message "CLE" ("CLEAN") will be displayed


throughout the drain cycle:

Cleaning the exterior surfaces


Before carrying out any cleaning operations, turn off
the power at the mains.
Clean the stainless steel surfaces using warm soapy
water; never use detergents containing abrasive substances nor steel scrapers, common wire wool, brushes or scrapers; rinse thoroughly using a wet cloth and
carefully wipe dry. Clean the control panel using a soft
damp cloth and a neutral detergent if necessary.
Do not wash the appliance using direct or high-pressure water jets. To reduce the emission of pollutants
into the environment, clean the appliance (externally
and where necessary internally) with products having
a biodegradability of over 90%).

After a few minutes, 3 beeps indicate the end of the


cleaning cycle and "END" blinks on the display:

15

C5

UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER WITH


INCORPORATED CONTINUOUS WATER
SOFTENER
These models have a continuous softener in the
dishwasher water circuit. By means of special resins,
this device removes the calcareous substances from
the feed water, supplying decalcified water for
washing.
For the continuous softener to work properly the resins
must be regenerated periodically, with frequency
depending on the hardness of the water and the number of wash cycles carried out.
Unlike conventional water softeners, this continuous
softener does not require machine stops for regenerating the resins.

Pour approx. 1.5 kg of coarse salt [NaCO in container


"A" (an amount sufficient to fill the salt container up to
the rim) using the special funnel supplied (Figure 26).

Salt container
,^The water can only be softened if there is salt in the
^special container. The salt container must be filled
" when the dishwasher is used for the first time and
whenever the message SRL 0 is displayed at the
start of a wash cycle.
^No salt in the container
If the message SRL Q is displayed at the start of a
wash cycle, it means that the salt container is empty.
Wash cycles can be started just the same, even if the
display signals no salt; in which case the water used
for washing is not softened.

IMPORTANT:
Open the salt container only when the
message 5RL 0 is displayed. Opening
the cap when the message SRL
0 is
not displayed can cause spilling of the
saline solution and compromise correct
machine operation.

How to fill the salt container


:f Switch off the dishwasher by pressing button "A"
(Figure 17).

Figure 26

IMPORTANT:
only salt may be placed in the salt container. Do not introduce any other chemical substances such as detergent, rinse
aid or descaling agent, since these
would inevitably damage the appliance.
Such damage invalidates any warranty
and relieves the manufacturer of all liability.

Remove any traces of salt from the filling hole, the


container thread and the closing cap seal.
Refit the cap of container A, turning it clockwise
and making sure it Is tight.
IMPORTANT:
The message SRL
0 may appear for
several wash cycles even after toppinglip the salt, as the salt must circulate in
the entire system. Correct operation of
the dishwasher is not, however, affected.

The salt container always has water in it, therefore it is


normal if water comes out during filling.

i Unscrew cap "A" (Figure 25) of the salt container,


turning it anticlockwise.

Rinse-aid container
In undercounter models with incorporated continuous
water softener, the rinse-aid container is located in the
front panel of the appliance (Figure 27).

Figure 25

Figure 27

16

How to fill the rinse-aid container


Unscrew cap "B" (Figu re 27) turning it anticlockwise.
Pour the rinse-aid in container "B" up to the rim.

IMPORTANT:
Only introduce rinse-aid in the rinse-aid
container. Do not introduce other chemical substances such as detergent,
descaling agent or salt, since these
would inevitably damage the appliance.
Such damage invalidates any warranty
and relieves the Manufacturer of all liability.

Refit the cap of container "B", turning it clockwise


and making sure it is tight.

C6

WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE


CONTROL PANEL

AI

NO WATER

Check that the cock is open


Check that the water inlet filter is clean
Check the minimum mains pressure (not less than
50 kPa)
Check that the overflow pipe is inserted (for
appliances without drain pump only)
B1

INEFFICIENT DRAINAGE

Check if the overflow has been removed.


Check for obstruction on the waste outlet pipe and
the overflow aperture.
B2

TANK WATER LEVEL TOO HIGH

Check for obstruction on the waste outlet pipe and


the overflow aperture.

|C1..C8| CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE


(1..E8| CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE
-

The appliance continues to operate, but appropriate checks by a technician are recommended.

[F21..F221 CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE

17

ifi

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

SERVICE MANUAL

mo

I,.

o TANK
o BaLER

S PJO,
I-

PTANK
0 BOILER

00
0

0
0
.

o TANK
o BOILER

RI
0
0
Q

CONTENTS:

This document contains the instruction to change parameter settings of electronic


board by means of user interface.

EDITION:

03.2006

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P. 1/93

H:

Ell6Ct/I*olllX
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

EleCtPOniC OishWaStier
SERVICE MANUAL

INDEX

f ")

1. KEYBOARDS
1.1 HOODTYP Style
1.2 UNDERCOUNTER Style

3
3
4

2. MANUAL ACTIVATION OF DETERGENT AND RINSE AID DISPENSERS


2.1 Detergent Dispenser Activation
2.2 Rinse Aid Dispenser Activation

5
5
5

3. RINSE PUMP MANUAL ACTIVATION

4. DETERGENT AND RINSE AID DOSAGE

utn
5. COUNTERS
unt

III

General Parameters

Counters

8
8

6. TEMPERATURE SETTING

Factory Parameters

7. CYCLE SETTING
CYCLE DIAGRAM
&. 3 /

dffi

11

Cycle 1 Parameters

13

Cycle 2 Parameters
Cycle 3 Parameters

13
13

Drain/Cleaning Cycle Parameters

13

8. OTHER PARAMETERS
aPn
Dishwashing Parameters

Sil

14
14

*" O n

Read Only Parameters

14

n J. P
r c f
'-ru r

Communication and HACCP Parameters

14

Configuration Parameters

15

Parameters for automatic hood type dishwashers

16

9. SPECIAL FEATURES
9.1 RESIN REGENERATION CYCLE
9.2 MEDICAL LINE DISHWASHER WITH DOOR/HOOD LOCK DEVICE
9.3 DETERGENT AND RINSE AID LEVEL SENSORS ACTIVATION
9.4 dISHWASHER WITH INCORPORATED CONTINUOUS WATER SOFTENER

17
17
17
17
18

10. MAIN BOARD CONFIGURATION


10.1 CODE->Prog. TABLE
10.2 PROGRAMMING SHEETS

19
19
24

11. DEFAULT VALUES

33

12. USER INTERFACE AND MAIN BOARD CONNECTORS


12.1 MAIN MALFUNCTIONS NOT DUE TO THE MAIN BOARD
12.2 CONNECTORS LAYOUT

33
33
33

13. ALARM MESSAGES AND TROUBLESHOOTING

33

1 4 . 1 4 . LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR SUBSEQUENT VERSIONS

33

DOC. NO. abo.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

'

P.2/93

ELI

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn


Electrolux Professional

1. KEYBOARDS
1.1.

HOOD TYPE Style

10] 10]
dIEtl
( ')

dB ti

Fig. 1.1
Detergent dispenser
Manual Activation.

^R,:

5S ^
S
(^
(^y

IQ

MS_M

R,

1 ^ Cl

O
Fig. 1.3
Rinse Pump
Manual Activation
(used to EMPTY BOILERi)

Fig. 1.2
Rinse Aid Dispenser
Manual Activation.

SETTING MODES:
To enter into one setting mode (Fig. 1.4, Fig. 1.5) the appliance should be in stand-by: switch on the
appliance, no cycles selected. Is useful keep door open to avoid start cycle in case of not
simultaneously pressure of the two keys.

ran

fflB
r r

fflrr oo

u c *1

0
BBS'

00
Fig. 1.6
Next Parameter Family OR
Increase Parameter Value
(In setting mode only)
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Fig. 1.5
Enter into Factory Parameters
(Hold down buttons for at least
five seconds).

Fig. 1.4
Enter into General Parameters
(l-iold down buttons for all least
five seconds).

opo "
S8B

ppr"
lu o

mm
888:

mm
888:

OH m
m
-s~^

Fig. 1.7
Decrease Parameter Value
(In setting mode only)

Copyright=2005 by Electrolux Professional

BdB

s m

Fig. 1.8
Confimi Value and go
to next Parameter
(Insetting mode only)

m
Q
3881

( ^
l^fa]

P.3/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE IVIANUAL

EFS ^ Dishwashing Systems Platfoim


Electrolux Professional

1.2.

UNDERCOUNTER Style

o. Q 0

dEh

O.

o TANK
O BOILER

gp

o TANK
O BOILER

Fig.1.1
Detergent dispenser
Manual Activation

Q B S (TflTTsTJ S ^ a
<^
^^^
^

>

S 0 ffl a

Fig.1.2
Rinse Aid Dispensr
Manual Activation

Flg.1.3
RJnse Pump
Manual Activation
(used to EMPTY BOILER)

SETTING MODES:
To enter into one setting mode (Fig.1,4, Fig.1.5) the appliance should be in stand-by: switch on the
appliance, no cycles selected. Is useful keep door open to avoid start cycle in case of not
simultaneously pressure of the two keys.

p H S[Sr,

o]rara

OTANK
O BOILER

r
i,

OTANK
o BOILER

P
O

o TANK
O BOILER

0.

S0

Fig. 1.4
Enter into General Parameters
(Hold down buttons for at least five
seconds).

Fig.1.5
Enter Into Factory Parameters
(Hold down buttons for at least five
seconds).

0 00

B[gii:isrL^R|^ B

ass|ggg:i^^Ria a
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Fig.1.6
Next Parameter Family
OR
Increase Parameter Value
(in setting mode only)

Fig.1.7
Decrease Parameter Value
(In setting mode only)

Fig.1.8
Confimi Value and go to next Parameter
(In setting mode only)

Copyrigiit 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.4/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

2. MANUAL ACTIVATION OF DETERGENT AND REVSE AID


DISPENSERS
When replacing detergents may be necessary activate the dispensers to fill hoses.

2.1.

Detergent Dispenser Activation


Switch on the dishwasher.
Press and hold down CYCLE_2 and CYCLE INFINITE keys, after two Tjeep' the detergent dispenser
starts work for 20 sec.

oEt o
.ii

H0
B m
2.2.

Rinse Aid Dispenser Activation


Switch on the dishwasher.
Press and hold dovm CYCLE_1 and CYCLE INFINITE keys, after two Tjeep' the rinse aid dispenser
starts work for 40 sec.

rsi ,o

3. RINSE PUMP MANUAL ACTIVATION


Use this fimcrion to empty the boiler (if the dishwasher is not to be used for a long time, for maintenance operation: ex. before replacing
main board).
Switch on the dishwasher.
Close the door and press and hold down DRAIN and CYCLE INFINITE keys. A buzzer signal indicates the
rinse pump activation and the display shows three blinkinglines. Three beeps indicate the cycle end.

raraiQ

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 byElectrolirx Professional

P.5/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfoim
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

4. DETERGENT AND RINSE AID DOSAGE


bl this paragraph is explained how to set the working time for the detergent and rinse aid dispenseis.
For each dispenser there are two parameters: the initial time and the time during cycle execution.

Cfn General Parameters


Sym.

d In
r in

Parameter Description

Unit

Min

Factory
Defaolt

Max

Initial Detergent Dosage (during filling tank)

[s]

240

90

Initial Rinse Aid Dosage (starts when tank filled)

ts]

180

10

dt

Detergent Dosage During Cycle Execution (during wash phase)

[8]

182(*)

rR ,

Rinse Aid Dosage During Cycle Execution (when refilling boiler)

[s]

62()

How change the duration:


Switch OFF and switch ON the dishwasher,
Enter into the USER SETTING mode by pressing and hold down ON/OFF and CYCLE_1 keys for at least five seconds the display
shows u f t (Fig.3.1);
Press CYCLE_INFINITE. The display shows alternatively the symbol a i t and the duration in seconds (Fig.3.2 and 3.3);
NOTE: If User Interface v.3.00 tank led is on if value correspond to factoiy default (Default 1, HOOD TYPE).
Use CYCLE_1 key to decrease the duration and CYCLE_2 key to increase (Fig.3.3);
After settled the duration press CYCLE_INFINrrE key to store value, the display shows the next parameter (Fig.3.4) and the
corresponding yahie (Fig.3.5);
In the same way is possible to change the other duration; when fmished switch OFF and switch ON.

Dim
En

Fig.3.1
Enter Into User Mode
(press for 5 sec).

mn

0. S
^v:

10
i n OS
lU o

In

SS

D
Fig. 3.2
Initial detergent dosage

Fig. 3.3
Change duration.
(Tank LED Indicates default).

m 0

Fig. 3.4
Initial rinse aid dosage

dEt

fl.

oo
Cris

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

ass
Fig. 3.5
Change duration

Q 0, a

Fig. 3.6
Cyde detergent dosage

Fig. 3.7
Change time activation
(Tank LED Indicates default)

Fig. 3.8
Cyde rinse aid dosage

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

1
0

Fig.3:9
Change time activation

P.6/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

(*) Note for external dispensers:


. If dBt:

18 I

the detergent dispenser works when WASHING PUMP is being activated; at the same time voltage
is supplied between connectors LI7-LI9 (main terminal box);

. If dEk:

iSi

the detergent dispenser works when LOADING EV is being activated to re-fill boiler level; at the
same tiine voltage is supplied between connectors LI7-LI5 (main terminal box);

. If r/? r S /

the rinse aid dispenser works when LOADING EV is being activated to re-fill boiler level; at the same
time voltage is supplied between connectors Llj-Lls (main terminal box);

. If -/?; S ?

the rinse aid dispenser works when WASHING PUMP is heing activated; at the same time v
supplied between connectors LIj-Lls (main terminal box);

- For electrical connections refer to electric diagram -

Example
Supposefliereis connected an external determent dispenser with a probe into the tank. A typical setting could be:
a in 2

dEt:

'

/S
ta

the dispenser is not activated duringfillingtank;


I

the dispenser is supplied during washing phase and the probe automatically dose the right detergent

afnount.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.7/93

s:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

5. COUNTERS
This Parameter Family collects cycle counters and water consumption counters.
For water consumption counters a flow meter must be installed. See rPi, (calibratioii parameter) into o r n section ( Other Parameters).

Cnb

Counters

Sym.

Parameter Description

^ <^

Cycles performed counter.


3. symbol and two numbers blink consecutively. The cycle number is
obtained by joining the two nvmibers. Ex. L "U ->
means
10042 cycles executed.
Cycle counter (resettable).
This counter is sknilar to
but is resettable by user (see " St parameter
below).
Water Consumption.
(only for dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener).
CountsUl of water consumption.
Water Consumption.
(only for dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener).
Counts litres of water consumption.
The total consumption is given by adding n o c [m^Jandt [1] values.
Water Consumption: resettable counter, [present up to software version 3.12]
Counts the litres of water and is resettable by user ( s e e ' ' 5t parameter below).

f *^j.

ffnr

iii

S t

Min

Max

Factory
Default

[m']

ra
[1]

Reset resettable counters: C


andL >c
To reset put 1 this parameter, switch off and then on again: c"c
and t <t
will show zero. Note that C J C is used to count cycles for t n> > message
(see next parameter, O c J ) .

nuH

Store thousand of cvcles after that i. n > message appears on display.


Ex. If this parameter is settled to 20, . ' > message appears when C J C
reach 20.000 cycles.
Drain/Cleaning cycles performed.
Similar to rar
hut counts Cleaning Cycles.
.
Numbers of cycles that can be made after a regeneration cycle (only for
dishwashers with non-continuous water softener) [See paragraph 9.1 resin
regeneration cycle.].
Regeneration cycle counter (only for water softener dishwasher)
[See paragraph 9.4 Dishwashers with incorporated continuous water
softener].
nrE
only counts efficient regeneration cycles, i.e. those carried
out with salt in the special container (only for dishwashers with incorporated
continuous water softener)
Counter of regeneration cycles done without salt in the special container, (only
for dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener) [See paragraph 9.4
Dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener].

(^C O
^ r y

ff^P

il

Unit

,- ff C

EGIO

20

SSG

uc Oo

n\
Fig.4.1
USER setting mode
(press for 5s)

ass
r uro

Fig. 4.4
CYCLES

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

^n

Fig. 4:3
Counters Fam

OJ PJ 0,

SS

n in"
U

L III. 0

Fig.4.2
Next Family

lUo

g 0 0.
JFig. 4.5 0.
Thousand.

c yco

U TIT o

Dl
Fig. 4.6
Units.

O.PJ Q

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

Rira y

Fig. 4.7
Next counter.
P.8/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

6. TEMPERATURE SETTING
In this paragraph is explained how to change temperature thresholds and all parametersrelatedto boiler and tank.

f/?r
Sym.

Parameter Description

btl

Boiler Temperature: THRESHOLD.


When boiler temperature reaches this value, heaters switch off.
Boiler Temperature HISTERESIS, (represent dead band).
Heater switch on if boiler temperature is below: b t l bkH
Boiler Temperature: HIGH LIMIT.
When boiler temperature reaches this value t t alarm appears.

htH
bH ,
i

Factory Parameters

bio

bfl
bRJ
bP
bSt
bkd
kkl
kkH
kH ,
j. ^ Q

^ P (_

Put 0 to disable t t alarm.


Boiler Temperature: LOW LIMIT.
During boiler warm-up, temperature must increase at least OL O C otherwise
t 3 warning appears.
Put 0 to disable C 3 warning.
Boiler Filling Timeout
If filling time is longer than bFi,R
t alarm appears.
Put 0 to disable fl alarm.
Boiler Temperature Adjust
Boiler Priority (enable boiler wait function)
0=disabled
l=enabled
Booster Function
Overheat gap over Boiler Temperature Threshold
Boiler temperature negative differential: when the dishwasher is in standby,
boiler threshold becomes:
(Used to save e n e r ^ during machine inactivity by keeping boiler water at a
lower temperature).
Tub Temperature: THRESHOLD
When tank temperature reaches this value, heater switch off
Tub Temperature: HISTERESIS, (represent dead band).
Heater switch on iftank temperature is below: C C1. ' CCn
Tank Temperature: HIGH LIMIT.
When tank temperature reaches this value t j alarm appears.
Put 0 to disable . J alarm.
Tank Temperature: LOW LIMIT.
During tank warm-up, temperature must increase at least Dt O C otherwise
c c warning appears.
Put 0 to disable C C warning.
Tank Filling Tmieout.
If fiUiiig time is longer than kr >. ^H i alarm appears.
Put 0 to disable n
< alarm.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

Unit

Min

Max

Factory
Default

[C]

45

95

78

[C]

10

[C]

98

96

[C]

10

[min]

42

[C]

PC]

15

rc]

20

:[C]

40

85

63

PC]

30

PC]

95

75

[C]

10

[min]

42

20

P.9/93

Electrolux
EFS ^ Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

To modify thresholds do the following:


Switch OFF and switch ON the dishwasher;
Enter into the FACTORY SETTING mode by pressing and hold down ON/OFF and CYCLE_2 keys for at leastfiveseconds (Fig,5.1);
PressCYCLEINFINTFE. The display showsaltemativelythesymbol o t t (Fig.5.2) and the corresponding value Q (Fig.5.3);
Use CYCLE_1 key to decrease the value and CYCLE_2 key to mcrease (Fig.4.3);
Press CYCLE INFITE key to confirm. The display shows the next parameter (Fig.4.4) and the corresponding value (Fig.4.5);
In the same way is possible to change the other parameters; whenfinishedswitch OFF and switch ON.

rao
PR[r

btr"L

00

ni

yd

Fig. 5.1
Factory setting mode

000

SOS

0 00

htH

(O o

^^s

&Sfor

000

00

'oH ,

n
Dj

o. g ^

fQ-;

~j.

Fig. 5.5
Change value & Store

^ bu o o

00
Fig. 5.6
Tank temp. High limit.

la

Fig. 5.4
Boiler Temp Hysteresis

Fig.5.3
Change value & Store

Fig. 5.2
reshol
Boiler temp, threshold

Fig. 5.7
Change value & Store

At the end the display will show again 'FAC and by pressing CYCLE_2 key (Fig.4.9) is possible to change cycle duration (see next
paragraph).

ffl
ff^ro(.

mm
r o

FR[

Fig. 5.9
Factory setting mode

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

000

Flg. 5.10
Next Family

[!^ i:

ij ^

Fig. 5.11
Cycle 1 Family: ENTER

Copyright 20U Dy Jilectrolux Professional

P.10/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashmg Systems Platform


Electrolux Professional

7. CYCLE SETTING
In this paragraph is explained how to change cycle phases duration (see Tab.l next page).

Switch on the dishwasher;


Enter into the FACTORY SETTING mode: press and hold down ON/OFF and CYCLE_2 keys for at least 5 seconds (Fig.5.1);

Press CYCLE_2 key to select CYCLE_1 parameters.

Press CYCLE_INFINrrE. The display shows alternatively the symbol (Fig.5.2) and the corresponding value (Fig.5.3);
Use CYCL_1 key to mcrease the value and CYCLE_2 key to decrease (Fig.5.3);
Press CYCt.E_lNFINlTE key to confirm. The display shows the next parameter (Fig.5.4) and the corresponding value (Fig.5.5);

In the same way is possible to change the other parameters;

paB

0
fSf

r
FRC

Fig. 6.1
Factory setting mode.

SSS
tn<'

r ^

t o

Fig.6.2
Select next class.
ass.

SQS

rasa
Fig. 6.3
Cycle 1 Family; ENTER

Lr,

0am
Fig. 6.4
Wasti duration [min].

Q^D
Sh i

Rg. 6.5
Ctiange value & Store.

BS

Cs's
Fig. 6.6
VVash duration [sec].

Fig. 6.7
Change value & Store.

After settled all parameters referring Cycle 1, by pressing CYCLE_2 key is possible to change the Cycle 2 parameters (Fig.5.8,5.9) and so
on.

O O O
ru*"

O O O
i nS \

aQ

mn

Q
FIg. 6.8
Cycle 1 Parameters.

'

Flg. 6.9
Cycle 2 Parameters: ENTER

HS
Fig. 6.10
VVash duration [min].

raoo
LHE\

a 1
n

FIg. 6.11
Cycle 2 Parameters:
next Family
DOC. NO. 5956.446:06

O
H3:

im
FIg, 6.12
Cycle 3 Parameters:
ENTER

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

Ln3l

a
m

Fig. 6.13
Wash duration [min].

P. 11/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE IVIANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn


Electrolux Professional

CYCLE DIAGRAM
CYCLE TYME

WASH

<

IPR

Ln Sh
Pfi
PRE RINSE

')

Pr
RINSE
*

- ^ >

r 1
> COLD RINSE

er
DRAIN

->i

RINSE PAUSE:

PR
FINAL
PAUSE

FP
DETERGENT

dEt
RINSE AID

rH (

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by JEUectrolux Professional

P.12/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Ti//
Syrn.

Lni
ShI
PR 1
Pr i
r ,1

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

Cycle 1 Parameters
Parameter Description

Unit

Min

Max

Factory
Defoult

Wash Phase Long

[min]

20

Wash Phase Short

60

35

Pause

[s]

20

Pre-rinse Duration

30

Rinse Phase Duration

[s]

10

45

16

er \

Cold Rinse Phase Duration

50

dr 1
FPI

Drain

W
W
W

40

16

60

Factory
Defoult

Final Pause at End of Cycle

L'iB Cycle 2 Parameters


Sym.

Parameter Description

Unit

Min

Max

InE
Sh?
PRS
Prd
r ,?
cri
drS
fPS

Wash Phase Long

[min]

20

Wash Phase Short

[s]

60

45

Pause

[s]

20

Pre-rinse Duration

[s]

30

Rinse Phase Duration

[s]

10

45

16

Cold Rinse Phase Duration

[s]

50

Drain

[s]

40

16

Final Pause at End of Cycle

60

Parameter Description

Unit

Min

Max

Factory
Default

In3
Shi
PR3
Pr 3
r ,3

Wash Phase Long

[min]

20

Wash Phase Short

60

40

Pause

[s]

20

Pre-rinse Duration

[s]

30

[s]

10

45

16

cr3

Cold Rinse Phase Duration

50

dr3
FP3
bt3

Drain

[s]

40

16

Final Pause at End of Cycle

[s]

60

[C]

95

Unit

Min

Max

Factory
Defonlt

Ti/J
Sym.

rn

Cycle 3 Parameters

Rinse Phase Duration

Boiler Temperature Threshold: only for Cycle 3.


This parameter allows haying a different rinsing temperature for the
third cycle. Only values above 45C are allowed.

Drain/Cleaning Cycle Parameters

Sym.

Parameter Description

idr
fdr
drk

Initial Drain Phase Duration

[s]

240

40

Final Drain Phase Duration

[s]

240

60

Drain without cleaning cycle

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P. 13/93

S]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

8. OTHER PARAMETERS

dPR Dishwashing Parameters


Sym.

IPff

di^
Pdr
rPR

r f
r ,t
PPL
CdE
!IE
IH5
HE
?HS

Unit

Mm

Max

Factory
Default

Initial Pause before start washing (for ALL cycles)

[s]

10

Delay for the 2' wash pump (PW only)

[s]

10

Active a drain phase at the end of washing phase.

[s]

40

[s]

60

[p/1]

255

255

140

255

SO

.0

255

140

255

SO

Parameter Description

Duration of pause after rinse cycle (valid for dishwashers with door/hood
lock device) [See par. 9.2 Medical line dishwasher with door/hood lock
device].
Celsius/Falffenheit selection
0 .= C e l s i u s
1 = Fahrenheit
Rinse Temperature Display.
Enable rinse temperature probe (if installed).
0 = during rinse phase the display shows boiler temperature;
1 = during rinse phase the display shows rinse temperature;
Pulse Per Litre.
This parameter must be settled in according to flow meter installed
[present up to software version 3.121.
Number of wash cycles perforraable without detergent (only fi?r
dishwashers with external detergent level sensor - par. 9.2.1 Detergent
and rinse aid level sensors activation) [iS: 1]
ftessure sensor threshold ! [present up to software version 2,1!].
Pressuie sensor histeresis I [present up to software version,2.11 ].
Pressure sensor threshold 2 [present up to software version 2,11],
Pressuie sensor histeresis 2 [present up to software version 2.1 i].

Note: f> ir, f^3^ Ci. r , cHji paratneters emulates a two levels pressure switch, keep in mind diat value doesn't correspond to a
physical quantity.

con

Read Only Parameters

Sym.

Parameter Description

rEl
rtS

Main Board Firmware Release

flfr
*"0

Ei\

Min

Max

r. ^
Default

Min

Max

.Default
, < \I

63

,-

Water softener board software version, (only for dishwashers with


incorporated continuous water softener).
Active column: indicates through which of the two continuous water
softener columns boiler filling is being carried out: 0 = column A and 1 =
column B (only for dishwashers with incorporated continuous water
softener).

When V n > < message appears, the parameter value becomes 3.


After maintenance, to clear

f S

Unit

message, insert 0.

WhenT fl alarm appears, the machine isfrozenand this parameter is 3.


After tnaintenance (see alarm codes document), insert 0 to enable the
machine.
This alarm appears in case of malfimctioning in the continuous water
softener. To fecilitate fault-finding, see par. E "Alarm codes that stop the
machine for models with incorporated continuous water softener".

HIP Communication and HACCP Parameters


Sym.

Parameter Description

Sf.

Serial Device
0 = 8N1
1 = PC connection
(DAAS 8E1)
7 = HACCP network
(ECAP 8E1+LK485)
(LK485 board i s n e c e s s a r y )
9 = Dishwashers w i t h i n c o r p o r a t e d continuous
water s o f t e n e r

DOC. NO. 5956.445.G6

Unit

Copyright 2005 by Electrolvix Professional

P.14/93

H]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE IVIANUAL

11 = Machines with incorporated continuous water


softener that communicate with LK485 board
16 = HACCP printer (8N1)
32 = MODEM GSM
(DAAS 8N1)
33 = MODEM GSM
(DAAS 8E1)
48 = Hyper Terminal (8N1)

Hdr
Prn
bt
bH
kk
kH
CF
Sym.
k^P

Address.
This parameter specifies the address of the appliance into the
'HACCP_network'.
Works only if 'HAGCP networic' is selected (see above parameter).
Print parameter table.
HACCP 'Basic' (printer)
Boiler temperature: high limit.
HACCP 'Basic' (printer)
Boiler temperature: gap below high limit.
HACCP'Basic'(printer)
Tank temperature: high limit.
HACCP 'Basic' (printer)
Tank temperature: gap below high limit

255

ra

45

95

90

[C]

20

10

PC]

35

75

[C]

20

10

Unit

Min

Max

Factory
Default

85

75

Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
Dishwasher Model:
b = HOOD TYPE & XJNDERCGUNTER
1 = POT WASHER
2 = AUTOMATIC POT WASHER
3 = MEDICAL LINE DISHWASHER WITH LOCK DOOR/HOOD
DEVICE

hn

Boiler type:
0 = ATMOSPHERIC BOILER
1 = PRESSURE BOILER
2 = EXTERNAL BOILER

doO

Door type:
0
1
2
3

(4 Fl

=
=
=
=

AUTOMATIC HOOD
MANUAL HOOD
;FRONT LOADIHG
POT WASHER

Defmlt mode] (see Default tables):


1 = HOOD TYPE
2 = POT WASHER
3 = UNDEECOUNTER

^ ^

Jj

t
*

^^f

LES
U j

Solid State Relay (TRIAC).


0 = not enabled;
1 = SOFT START enabled;
3 = SLOW SOFT START enabled
(works only on boards with Solid State Relay).
BoilerA'ank heating swap:
0 = boiler heaters and tank heater can work simultaneously;
1 = swap enabled: tank heating starts only boiler temperature is
reached;
(Note: disablmg this fimction changes the global electrical power of
appliance; before enabling this fimction check available power, supply cable
section, fuses in according to User Manual).
Tank FiUing Mode
Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsmgcycles.
Ex: bkf = 75 means that boiler water is heated .at 75C, then follows a
rinse phase and so on imtil tank is full.
Iffat r = 0 the tank isfilledby solenoid valve in the traditional way (mode
not settable on machines with incorporated continuous water softener).
Detergent Level Switches
0 = level switches not enabled;
1 = enable detergent levelSwitches;
USER INTERFACE MODEL
8 = ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 |up to serial nr.
42100099]set to 0)
9 = hood type, under counter (up to version 3.11 [up to serial nr.
42100099]set to 1)
13 = LS5 with atmospheric boiler(up I version 3.11 |up to serial nr.
42100099) set to S)
15 = LS5 with pressure boiler (user interface without display); (np to
version 3.11 [up to serial nr. 42100099] set to 7)

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

[C]

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

15

P.15/93

a:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

.C
f^lf

/?/?c
frO
SrU
bPo

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

See parameter *" c t (family r o O) to check fhe software version


installed in the board.
Enable "regeneration cycle" key (only for dishwashers with non-continuous
water softener) [See paragraph 9.1 resin regeneration cycle].
ALARMS ENABLE
0 = alarms disabled (to disable also warnings see o i. O and C. O);
1 = alarms enabled;
If thisfimctionis disabled, faults can be detected so display do not shows
any alarm code.
Air gap with float level sensor noimally closed (the level sensor is closed
when the boiler is empty). E.g. the boiler level sensor for machines with
incorporated continuous water softener.
Forced start of a resin regeneration cycle (only for dishwashers with
incorporated continuous water softener). [See paragraph 9.4 Dishwashers
with incorporated contmuous water softenerl.
Max. rinse water hardness (only for dishwashers with incorporated
continuous water softener). After modifying, disconnect and reconnect the
machine's main power supply by means of the main switch. [See paragraph
9.4 Dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener].
Boiler heating control.
Defines the max. permissible temperature difference during boiler heating in
a time interval of 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

14

10

25

80

50

Unit

Min

Max

Factory
Default

0.1s

0.0 s.

20.0s

IS

0.1s

0.0 s.

20.0 s

200

0.1s

0.0 s.

20.0 s

IS

0.1 5

0.0 s.

20.0 s

10

0.1s

0.0 s.

20.0 s

20

0.1s

0.0 s.

20.0 s

20

250

100

250

dbG Parameters for automatic hood type dishwashers


Sym.

t 1
t ^
t 3
b H

t S
k 5
RL.
Ikh
Ikh

Parameter Description
DELAY_K1
Time (during hood lifting) within which S3" must return to die rest position.
HOOD_TOUT
TIMEOUT - max. time allowed for complete hood opening/closing.
DELAY_K1_S3
During hood lowering, firstly S3" must cut in and then after a time
t 3 .the bottom limit switch S3.
DELAY_K
Time within which K and K' must be both closed or both open.
DELAY_S3
Time during hood lifting within which the bottom limit switch must return
to the rest position..
DELAY_S5
Time during hood lowering within which the top limit switch must return to
the rest position.
Displays the last alarm code relative to automatic hood type dishwashers.
Parameter only, valid for hood type models.
Hood hfting motor absorption threshold.
(50 units correspond to a current of approx. 1 ampere).
Paiametro valido solo per cappottine.
Soglia limite di assorbimento del mptore di sollevamento della cappotta
(50 Unit corrispondono ad una corrente di circa un ampere).

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

100

P.16/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

9. SPECIAL FEATURES
9.1 RESIN REGENERATION CYCLE
o TANK
O BOILER

The regeneration cycle is activated by pressing the button shown in the figure, for at least 5 seconds.
For this key to be enabled parameter <" C (in family i. r u) must be set to 1.
f - - ,1

At this point you can enter the number of wash cycles that can be performed after each regeneration: parameter <" t 3 in the
counters family L nt.

if ft."

is set to zero the counter is disabled, otherwise after the preset number of cycles the

message <* c u is displayed to confinn that regeneration is possible (this is an Infonnatlon-pniy message vi/lth no effect on
operation of the appliance, so you can continue to use the dishwasher). The message is cleared when the regeneration cyde is
terminated.
The number of regeneration cycles performed can be checked by consulting the parameter HfC in the t H e family of
counter;.
When there are just 15 cycles remaining before the next regeneration cycle, at the end of the wash cyde the display shows the
messages 1 0 followed by 5, at the end ofthe next wash cycle the display shows COO and , and so forth, i.e. the
display informs the user of the number of wash cycles still available before resin regeneration is required.
Before starting the regeneration cyde remove the siphon spillway.
CAUTION: if the regeneration cycle is acddentally started, it can be switched off by pressing the button shown in the figure, for
at least 5 seconds.
The hardness of the water exiting the softener can vary between 3fH -10 "fH /1.7 dH - 5.6 "dH / 2.1 cH - 7 cH.

9.2 MEDICAL LINE DISHWASHER WITH DOOK/HOOD LOCK DEVICE


The medical line dishwasher with door/hood lock device has a device that prevents door/hood opening for the entire duration of
the work cyde.
For the door/hood lock to be active, the parameter
(in the r ^ u family) must be set to .3.
The dishwasher door/hood is locked at the start of a wash cycle and is released at the end of the final pause after rinse. The
wash compartment can be accessed by stopping the work cycle in progress, as the locking device is thus disabled.
A pause at the end ofrinsecan be set by means of the parameter''
family). This parameter is common to all
3 wash cydes. Therinsewater temperature is displayed during this pause. Another final pause in the cyde can be set by setting
the parameters f'
(,r re ,rr 3_ During the final pause the display shows the time remaining for completion of the cycle.
The door/hood lock device will be deactivated at the end of the final p^^seifPifP?fP3l
For coH'ect performance of the wash cycle the pause at the end ofrinseand the final pause must assume the default values
(see Prog 032 - 034 - 035).

9.3 DETERGENT AND RINSE AID LEVEL SENSORS ACTIVATION


By setting the parameter J. t 5 (in the t. r u family) to / , management of the level sensors located inside the external
detergent andrinseaid tanks is enabled. During therinsephase, when therinseaid inside the tank has finished, the message
fnt
u appears on the display.
When the detergent inside the tank is finished, the message

is displayed and after a number of wash cydes equal

to r dE (in the dPf^ family) the dishwasher inhibits the activation of other wash cycles. Therefore the detergent level in the
tank must be restored.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

F. 17/93

EilGCtFOluX
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

EleCtrOnJC D i s h W a s h e P
SERVICE MANUAL

9.4 DISHWASHER WITH INCORPORATED CONTINUOUS WATER SOFTENER


Dishwashers with Incorporated continuous water softener have a continuous softener in the water circuit. By means of special
resins, this device removes the calcareous substances from the feed water, supplying decalcified water for washing.
To activate the continuous water softener, set the parameter
(in the HEP family) to the value 3 or the value / / if the
water softener board is connected to the LK485 board.
For the continuous softener to work properly the resins must be regenerated periodically with a frequency depending on the
hardness of the inlet water, the number of wash cycles carried out and the max. hardness set with the parameter 5 f" u (in the
[Fu
family).
Unlike conventional water softeners, this continuous softener does not require machine stops for regenerating the resins.
To regenerate the resins it is necessary to put kitchen salt in the special container located in the dishwasher.
In particular, the salt container must be filled when the dishwasher Is used for the first time and whenever the message
is displayed at the start of a wash cycle. The salt container holds up to 1.5 kg of salt.

li

IMPORTANT: The message


may appear for several wash cycles even after topping-up the salt, as the salt must
circulate in the entire system. Connect operation of the dishwasher is not, however, affected.
The number of regeneration cycles performed can be checked by consulting the parameter Of C in the i. fit family of
counters.
o r f only counts regeneration cycles carried out with the salt container adequately filled; there is another counter, r E 5 (in the
Cnt family) that indicates the number of regeneration cycles done without salt.
If the parameter JfU
Is set to the value i u , according to the fadory setting, the water softener outlet water hardness can
vary between 3flH - 1 0 fH/ 1.7 "dH - 5.6 "dH / 2.1 cH - 7 "cH.
Maximum outlet water hardness can be modified by setting the S r t / value. The outlet water hardness can be modified from the
value of 4 AH to 14 fH.
NB: To save the aew water hardness value, in addition to the normal parameter modification and saving operations it is necessary to
disconnect and reconnect the machme's main power supply by means of the main switch on the external board.
Water softener operation can be checked by forcing t:he regeneration of resins, without waiting
for t:he outlet water hardness to reach the set max. value ( 3 ^ u ) .
To do this, wait for the water softener to finish previous resin washing or regeneration operations and set the parameter fr
(Cfu family) to ' for regenerating column A or to ? for regenerating column B.
Switch the machine off and on again so that it carries out complete regeneration of the set column. If previous resin washing or
regeneration operations were not completed, the manual request for regeneration is not canried out.
It is possible to check which column is being used for boiler filling by querying the parameter flflf (< oo family): if RUC = 0
column 'A is used, if RRC =1 column "B" is used.
The number of litres used by the machine can be checked by querying the parameters nnc (m3) and i (litres). To calculate the
totalnumberof litres used by the machine, add the nnc andX values.
NB: In machines with incorporated continuous water softener, tank filling cannot be carried out through overflowing (btF=0) hot
only by means of successive rinse cycles (btF=75). Therefore the btF parameter must be set to 75.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.18/93

Electrolux

Eleetronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform


Electrolux Professional

10. MAIN BOARD CONFIGURATION


When receivmg an eleetronic board (spare part) may be necessary to configure it in according to the machine where has to be replaced.
1.
2.
3.

With the machine CODE enter into the following table and read die corresponding Prog, number;
Follow the instructions reported into the corresponding Prog.XXX sheet (next pages).
With the machine CODEfindthe Layout number in Par. 12.2 - Connectors layout.

10.1. CODE->Prog. TABLE


MODEL

CODE Prog. Layout

MODEL

CODE

Prog. Layout

WT4

400007

021

11

LS6EA/60

502041

oil

WT4B

400008

020

WT38DD

502110

Wr4D

400009

021

11

WT37

502111

046
046

WT4DB

400015

020

WT38

502112

046

IWT46

400016

020

WT 37/4.5

502117

046

m4G

400017

022

WT 38/4.5

502118

046

I/VT4DG

400018

022

I/VT37/UK

502122

046

WT4WS1

400019

024

11

WT38C

502125

033

I/VT4BWS

400027

012

WT38C60

502126

033

lT4DWS1

400028

024

11

I/VT38CUK

502127

033

1/VT4BDWS

400029

012

WT38/4.5NW

502129

I/VT4D60

400042

021

WT 38/UK

502217

046
046

LS5/1

400100

021

WT37J60

502218

046

LS5/1 DP

400102

021

WT37J50

502219

046

LS5/1WS

400103

024

LS6AH240U

502312

027

LS5/1WSDP

400110

024

m-30H208U

502313

031

LS5/3

400112

020

WT30H240U

502314

031

LS5/3 DP

400113

020

WT30H208DU

502315

031

LS5/3WS

400114

012

i;\rr30H240DU

502316

031

.S5/3WSDP

400115

012

Wt30H208RU

502317

031

LS5/3WSDPD

400117

012

I/VT30H240RU

502318

031

LB5G

400118

022

LS6H208DU

502319

027

LB5GDP

400119

022

LS6AH208U

502320

027

LS5/1DP60

400124

021

11

WT 38/60

502321

046

LS5/1DPAUS

400125

036

11

WT38/M60

502322

015

LS6EP

S02003

013

WT38MED

502323

014

LS6EP/DD

502004

013

LS6H240DU

502325

027

LS6EA/DD

502005

Oil

1:S6H208RU

502326

027

LS6EA/DD/DP

502006

Oil

LS6H240RU

502327

027

WT38TDE

502007

032

10

WT30M208U

502328

034

10

I/VT38/M50

502008

015

WT30M240U

502329

034

10

LS6EADPWS

502014

044

WT30M208DU

502339

034

10

LS6EADPWSG

502015

044

WT30M240DU

502341

034

10

Wt38WS

502016

048

WT30M208RU

502342

034

10

I/VT38WSG

502017

048

WT30M240RU

502343

034

10

I/VT38MEDWS

502018

045

WT30C208DU

502344

038

WT38PM5q

502019

039

WT30e240DU

502345

038

I/VT37LEV/9

502020

051

WT38PM60

502346

039

WT38M50/4

502029

015

WT38M60/4

502347

015

LS6EA/yK

502030

Oil

LS6EA

502520

Oil

LS6EA/UKDP

502031

Oil

LS6EA/DP

502521

Oil

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P. 19/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform


Electrolux Professional

MODEL

CODE

Prog. Layout

MODEL

CODE

Prog. Layout

LS6EAH

S02S23

011

I/VT60UKCW

504162

001

LS6MCD

502524

033

LS 12 AU

504163

004

LU7PDP

503020

040

LS12UKDPCW

504164

001

LU7ADP

503021

041

ECOTEMP12SW

504165

001

lftn"U40PDP

503023 :

040

lOTeSEBI

504166

001

IOTU40ADP

503024

047

I/VT65EBIA

504167

004

LS 10

504100

002

WT65EIA

504168

004

001

001

LS14EA

504101

001

WTeSEO

504169

LS 10 UK DP

504102

002

WT65EB60

504170

ET12E

504104

003

WT 60 U/400

504171

006

-S 10/60HZ

504105

002

WT 60 U/440

504172

006

LS10CW

504107

002

WT65EBIDG

504173

001

LS 10 INS

504108

002

WT65EBASIA

504174

009

HT 1200 ins DEK

504109

001

WT65EIM50

504175

006

LS14EA/INS

504110

001

WT65EIM60

504176

006

LS I O N

504111

002

WT 60 MX 220/60

504177

001

LS 10 DP

504114

002

LS 12 CW INS

504178

001

LS 10 HD

504115

008

LS14ADP/G

504179

001

4
4

LS14EA/AU

504116

004

WT65MED

504180

010

LS14EA/60

504117

001

WT65EJ50

504183

001

LS 10 UK1

504118

002

WT65EJ60

504186

001

LS 10 UK3

504119

002

LS14AH240U

504187

028

LS 12 INS

504120

001

WT65H208U

504188

028

LS 12

504121

001

WT65H240U

504189

028

LS 12 DP

504122

001

LS12ASIACW

504190

009

LS 12 60Hz

504125

001

WT60ASIACW

504191

009

LS12CW

504128

001

LS 12 ASIANS

504192

00?

HT 1200 DEK

504129

001

WT60ASIANB

504193

009

LS14EA/ASIA

504131

009

LS14H208DU

504194

028

LS14EA/G

504133

001

LS14AH208U

504195

028

I/VT60DP

504134

001

LS14H240DU

504196

028

IWT60

504135

001

LS14H208RU

504197

028

iflfreocw

504136

001

LS14H240BU

504198

028

l/VT 60 UK DP CW INS

504137

001

WT65H208DU

504199

028

I/VT60INS

504138

001

Wr65H240DU

504200

028

lVr60CWINS

504139

001

WT65H208RU

504201

028

m 60 AU CW

504140

004

WT65H240RU

504202

028

IWT60AUN

504141

004

WT65M208U

504203

035

12
12

LS10EA

504142

002

WT65M240U

504204

035

m 60/60HZ

504145

001

WT65M208DU

504205

035

12

IWT60/60HZCW

504146

001

WT65M240DU

504206

035

12

W60N

504151

001

WT65M208RU

504207

035

12

WT 60 N INS

504152

001

WT65M240RU

504208

035

12

LS 12 HD

504153

007

LS14EAWS

504209

042

LS14EA/DD

504155

001

LS14ADPWSG

504210

042

WT65E

504156

001

LS14EAIWS

504211

042

WT65EB

504157

001

WT65EBWS

504212

042

WT65EI

504158

001

WT65BIDWSG

504213

042

WT 60 AU DP

504159

004

WT65EBIWS

504214

042

LS12UK/3CW

504161

001

WT65MEDWS

504215

043

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

4
4

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.20/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn


Electrolux Professional

MODEL
lT65ROW
LS14R0W

CODE Prog. Layout


504219
504220

MODEL

052

UC5/1DP

052

UC5/1WSDP

CODE Prog. Layout


690010

021

11

690011

024

11

020

LS9P

505022

019

LD5DP

690013

LS9P DD

505033

019

LD5

690014

020

LS9A UK

505034

018

FL 620EP

698003

013

LS9P6

505035

019

ET5EDG

698004

023

I/VT55P

505038

019

LV6EP

698006

013

lflrr55P6

505039

019

H3300

698007

029

LS9ADGi

505041

018

H2500

698008

019

OT55ADG1

505042

018

H3500

698009

001

4
8

LS9PAUS

505043

019

ET5EDCW

698010

016

WT55PM50

505044

019

13

LV6EADPWS

698011

048

WT55PM60

505045

019

13

HT1200WS

698012

042

PPW1M

506010

005

HT1200IWS

506011

FL620ADPWS

048

PPW1 60 Hz

506012

005
005

698013
698014

042

PPW1 M UK

H1310SANA

698016

030

PPW1 MH

506013

005

H1510SANA

698017

010

PPW2M

506014

005

LV1200IWS

PPW2 M UK

506015

005

HT900P

698018
698022

042
019

PPW2 60 Hz

506016

005

LV900P

698023

019

PPW2V

506017

005

LD900

698024

019

m'SSO M

506018

005

LU700PDP

698033

040

l/\n"830 M UK

506019

005

LU700ADP

698034

047

IVT830 60HZ

506020

005

PWlOp M

698040

005

WT850M

506022

005

PW200M

698041

005

WT850 M UK

506023

005

PW20 V

698042

005

WT850 60 Hz

506024

005

PW100MH

698043

005

I/VT850V

506025

005

LV100M

698044

005

WT830 MH

506026

005

LV200M

698045

005

m"830EA

506215

017

HT 1200

698050

001

4
4

WT850EA

506216

017

HT 1000

698051

002

I/VT830EAG

506217

017

HT 1000 INS

698052

002

WT850EAG

017
037

5
3

HT 1200 INS

698053

001

IWT830M208U

506218
506029

OT830M240U

506030

037

I/VT830H208U

506031

037

WT830H240U

506032

037

WT850M208U

506033

037

WT850M240U

506034

037

PW1M208U

506035

037

PW1M240U

506036

037

PW1MH208U

506037

037

PW1MH240U

506038

037

PW2M208U

506039

037

PW2M240U

506042

037

FL5

690004

020

FL5DP

690005

020

LV5

690006

020

LV5DP

690007

LV5/3WSDP

690008

FL5/3WSDP

690009

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

HT 1200 DP

698055

001

ET12EIG

698056

026

ET12EI

698057

025

LV1000

698059

002

LV1200INS

698060

001

ET12EICWG

698061

001

ET12EICW

698062

025

ET12EIF

698065

050

FL620EA

698070

046

FL 620EADP

698071

046

ET5E

698076

016

ET5ED

698077

016

FL 620EP/DD

698078

013

FL620EA/DD

698079

046

FL 620EADP/DD

698080

046

020

LV6EA

698081

046

012

LV6EADP

698082

046

012

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.21/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn


Electrolux Professiphal

MODEL

Al

CODE

Prag. Layout

EtSDF

698090

049

LS10INSDP

S36220

LS 10 INS

MODEL

CODE Prog. Layout

HT1200

S47B9i

001

002

LS12UK/3CW

S47BJI

001

S37858

002

LS 12 GW

S47C1Z

001

LS 10

S39968

002

l/VT 60 CW

S47C6B

001

LS 10/fiera

S42549

002

LS 12 GW

S47CCS

001

LS 10 INS

S43062

002

WT 60

S47CCY

001

LS 10

S43327

002

WT 60 GW

S47CEA

001

HT 1000

S475CH

002

WT 60/9

S47CEH

001

LS 10 GW

S47APN

002

WT 60/9

S47CEI

001

LS 10 GW

S47CF5

002

WT60

S47CKD

001

LS 10 CW

S470U4

002

LS 12 GW

D04713

001

LS 10 GW

S47DU7

002

LS 12 CW

S34369

001

LS10CW

S47DUA

002

WT 60 giappone

334377

001

LS 10 GW

S47DUF

002

l/VT 60 giappone

S34378

001

LS 10 CW

S47E17

002

WT 60 giappone

S35178

001

LS 10 CW

S47E2C

002

WT 60 giappone

S35179

001

LS 10 GW

S47E2H

002

LS12CVV

335246

001

LS 10 GW

S47E2M

002

HT1200

335330

001

LS 10 GW

S47E2R

002

WT 60 giappone

336384

001

LS10UK1

S47E50

002

WT 60 giappone

336385

001

LS 10 CW

S47E6M

002

LS 12 GW

336846

001

HT1200

S46002

001

LS 12CW

336847

001

IWT60CW1NS

S46880

001

HT1200

339964

001

HT1000

S4734M

002

HT1200

344)472

001

WT60/9

S47539

001

ECOTEMP12

340785

003

wreora

S4756

001

WT 60/9 INS

341170

001

WT60/9

S4756P

001

HT1200

341185

001

WT60 INS

S47SGJ

001

LS 12 INS

342032

001

WT60 INS

S475GY

001

WT60/60HZ

342170

001

WT60CW

S476HA

001

LS 12/fiera

342550

001

LS 12 HD

S4775E

007

WT60/60HZ

S42617

001

HT1200

S4777U

001

WT 60 N

343119

001

LS 12 CW INS

S477BM

001

LS12GW

343488

001

l/VT 60 AU CW

S477JR

004

LS 12 INS

343563

001

IWT60INS

S477M1

001

LS 12 DP GW

343734

001

WT60INS

S477M1

001

LS12CW

343806

001

OT60NINS

S477MB

001

LS12CW

343830

001

m " 60/60HZ DP

S477QB

001

WT 60 GW INS

S44421

001

LS 12 GW INS

S477V7

001

LS6EA

3477BL

011

WT60DP

847811

001

WT37

S4784U

011

IWT60/9

S4781D

001

LS6EA

34787B

011

l/VT 60/60HZ DP

S4781I

001

FL 620EA

3478BN

011

l/VT 60/9 INS

S4786P

001

WT830 MH

346881

005

WT 60 U/230

S478KF

006

RPW1 M

34758V

005

LS 12 GW INS

S478LV

001

WT830 MH

3476YZ

005

\/VT60GWINS

S478SP

001

PPW1 MH

3477IT

005

LS 12 GW INS

S479VE

001

WT830 M

S479Q3

005

l/VT 60

S479Z3

001

PPW1 M UK

347BKQ

005

OT60

S479Z9

001

WT 60 CW INS

S47CPB

001

WT 60 AU CW

S47AP80

004

WT 60 GW INS

347CQS

001

LS12CW

S47APP

001

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.22/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

MODEL

CODE Prog. Layout

ECOTEMP 12 SW

S47CVG
S47CVH
S47D9Y

ECOTEMP12 SW
WT60CWINS
WT60
LS12CW
LS 12 CW

i/vreo
lT60
OT60
PPW1 MH
PPW1 MH
1/VT850M
PPW2M
PPW2M
PPW2M
PPW2M
WT850M
PPW2M

S47DCA
S47DE0
S47DMM
S47DSK
S47DWC
S47DWD
S47C37
S47DE1
843016
S44099
S44399
S45958
S47BW4
S47CFG
S47CZ1

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
005
005
005
005
005
005
005
005
005

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.23/93

l
10.2.

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux ProfesBional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

PROGRAMMING SHEETS

LS12-LS14/WT60-65
1.
2.

Prog. 001

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[F
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
Hood Type like wotting cycles.
bo f

aOO
tir u
t r c

3.
4.

Manual Hood.

Default values for Hood Type models.

h ^ k

(for this appUanpe SOFT START is NOT possible).


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

ok r

15

LES

Deteigentlevel switches not enabled.

SelectiiserintBrfacehoodtypemodel(upto version 3.11 set to ' ) .

* C

Regeneration cycle disabled.

nLf

Alarms enabled.

Enable filiing tank by means ofrinsingcycles.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
FR[
Factory parameters family
ok L

5.

Atmospheric boiler.

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.24/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Eleetronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS10
1.
2.

Prog. 002

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[FC Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:
tap

Hood Type like working cycles.

OO (

Atmospheric boiler.

do O

Manual Hood.

i
t r c

t '5

3.
4.

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

at'

LES

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U t
r C

s
u

Select userinterfacehoodtypemodel(up to version 3.11 set to f).


Regeneration cycle disabled.

RLr

Alarms enabled.

Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


IVIodify Factory parameters:
FRC
Factory parameters family
Ott.

5.

Default values for Hood Type models.

O t

7O

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

Modify Cycle parameters:


Ca } Cycle 1
Sh

V5

Short Wash Phase [s]

fi/c* Cycle 2
t IC*
She*

6.

/ Long Wash Phase [min]


H

Short Wash Phase [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.25/93

H:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EC0TEMP12
1.
2.

Prog. 003

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


CF
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:
tijP

Hood Type like woiking cycles.

Atmospheric boiler.

a OO

bo

Or L

Manual Hood.
Default values for Hood Type models.

t r c

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

O.. c

Boiler heaters and tank heater work simultaneously. .

hb ^

The tank is filled into the traditional way.

t c S

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U
r E

"
U

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 sei to ' ) .
Regeneration cycle disabled.
Alarms enabled.

3.
4.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
f R[
Factory parameters family
OCL
bRJ

5.

O5
2

Boiler Temperature Threshold.


9oiler Temperature Adjust

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.26/93

a]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS12AU/WT60-65AU

Prog. 004

1. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


2. [fO
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:
k jP

Hood Type like workiiig cycles.

OO

Atmospheric boiler.

doQ

Automatic Hood.

tSr u

trc

O_ t

atr

Default values for Hood Type inodels.


(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).
Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.
Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

t c 5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

cE

Regeneration cycle disabled.

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ')
nt C

Alarms enabled.

3. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


4. Modify Factory parameters:
F R[ Factory parameters family
u c L

5.

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

Modify the other parameters:


Ti? r Cycle 1
FP

fi/c'

tiJi

Final Pause [s]

Final Pause [s]

Final Pause [s]

Cycles
PP3

dPR

Cycle 2
fP?

IO

Dishwashing parameters family.


P/?

Initial Pause

6. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.27/93

a]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

PW 1 - 2 / WT830 - 850
1.
2.

^i^

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


rfu
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:
/ Pot Washer.
t!:IP

bo 1
doo
dfi
trc
b.t
btP
L ES

Ut

3
0

2
?

un

Default values for Pot Washer models.


(for Ais appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

The tank is filled into the traditional way.


Detergent level switches not enabled.
Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ' ) .
Regeneration cycle disabled.

\ Alarms enabled.
Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.
Modify Factory parameters:
PRE Factory parameters family
btT

5.

Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading fimction.

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

Q
Q

rE
Rir

3.
4.

Prog. 005

18

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Protessional

P.28/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE iVIANUAL

WT60 - 65 USPH

Prog. 006

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


t f C

Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:

un
n
u

kp
ho 1

doo
dFL
tre
b.t
bkf
LES

Manual Hood.

Default values for Hood Type models.

i
75

n
u

un

rE
RLr

Atmospheric boiler.

tl 1
U 1

Hood Type like working cycles.

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.
Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.
Detergent level switches not enabled.
Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ()
Regeneration cycle disabled.
Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
f R[

Factory parameters family

bkt

18

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

Modify the cycle parameters:


Enter into Cycle 1 parameters family.
Rinse Phase Duration [s]
dr
C a?

'

c'S

Drain [s]

Enter into Cycle 2 parameters family.


Rinse Phase Diiration [s]
dr^

f i/3

c'S

Drain [s]

Enter into Cycle 3 parameters family.


<" f j

c S

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr3

?S

Drain [s]

Select Fahrenheit:
dPR

Enter into Dishwashing parameter family.

[ f

Select Fahrenheit degrees.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.29/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfoim
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS12HD

Prag. 007

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[Fu

Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:

tHP
bo (
doo
dFL
krc
b^k
bkF
LES
Ui
rE
RLr

k J

0
Q
1
1
n
u
/
75

Hood Type like working cycles.


Atmospheric boiler.
Manual Hood.
Default values for Hood Type models.
(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).
Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.
Enablefillingtank by means of rinsing cycles.
Detergent level switches not enabled.
Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to <)
Regeneration cycle disabled.
Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify the cycle parameters:
Cd I

ri/?
ri/3

Enter into Cycle 1 parameters family.


Pf

CU

Pre-rinse Duration [s]

dr

3S

Drain [s]

Enter into Cycle 2 parameters family.


Pr^

Pre-rinse Duration [s]

dr^

35

Drain [s]

Enter into Cycle 3 parameters family.


Pf3

cO

Pre-rinse Duration [s]

dr3

3S

Drain [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.30/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfoiin
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS10HD
1.
2.

Prog. 008

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[f
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:
tjP

Hood Type like woiking cycles.

OO

Atmospheric boiler.

do O
arL
t r c

Manual Hood.

Default values for Hood Type models.

0_C
at

>

LEJ

r E

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.
Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.
Detergent level switches not enabled.
Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ).

n t *"

3.
4.

Alanns enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify the cycle parameters:
C 1 Enter into Cycle 1 parameters family.

[ ^c*

5h

f 5

Short Wash Phase [s]

Pr

SQ

Pre-rinse Duration [s]

dr

3B

Drain [s]

Enter into Cycle 2 parameters family.


I, n 1
5 A C*

5.

Regeneration cycle disabled.

1
W"

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Pec

Cu

Pre-rinse Duration [s]

dr^

3B

Drain [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.31/93

s:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS12-14/WT60-65ASIA
1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machinery u


Enter into CFG parameterfamilyand set the following parameters.
c jr

Hood Type like working cycles.

f>0 r

Atmospheric boiler.

doO

Manual Hood.

QF U

Default values for Hood Type models.

t r c
_ C

0
<

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).


Tankheaterworksonly if boiler temperature reached.

tJCr

LES

Enable filling tank by means ofrinsingcycles.


Detergent level switches not enabled.

U <
* C

J
U

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ).
Regeneration cycle disabled.
Alarms enabled.

3.
4.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
f R[
Factory parameters family
Boiler Temperature Threshold.
hP

5.

Prog. 009

Boiler Priority Disabled

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.32/93

a]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn
Electrolux Professiomd

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT65MED
1.
2.

Prog. 010

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Cf Enter into CFG parameter family and set the fpilowing parameters:
t j '

Hood Type like worlcing cycles.

OO <

Atmospheric boiler.

do

Automatic Hood.

art,

t r c

0_ C

4.

75
U

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U 1

Selectuserinter&cehoodtypemodel(up to version 3.11 set to <).

* C

U
f

3D

bH

Boiler Temperatur Threshold.

Disable boiler high Temperature alarm ( L

bnu

Boiler Temperature Adjust

bSk

Booster Function.

kkL

5 5

Tub Temperature; THRESHOLD.

t.

S5

Tank high Temperature limit

c ).

Modify the cycle parameters:


L i^ /
Cycle 1 parameters family.
t o
5 h
r

Short Wash Phase [s]

3 J

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

HO

Drain [s]

Final Pause [s]

Cycle 2 parameters family.


t. n C*

[3

Long Wash Phase [min]

fPI

r if c*

3B

i 1

dr

Regeneration cycle disabled.


Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
f RC Factory parameters family
btT

5.

Tank healer works only if boiler temperature reached.


Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

L t S

nu
3.

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

bbf

Default values for Hood Type models.

Long Wash Phase [min]

S^C*

3 ^

Short Wash Phase [s]

3S

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

^5

drS

VO

PPS

l5

Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


L o3

: Sh3
r

,3

dr

1-P3
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Long Wash Phase [min]

3?

Short Wash Phase [s]

35

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

Vu

Drain [s]

(5

Final Pause [s]

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.33/93

H:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

Prog. 010

WT65MED
Set other parameters.
}PR

6.

Initial Pause [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

LS6 6000W ATM


1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


CPU Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
t jP

Hood type like working cycles.

00 <

Atmospheric boiler.

aOO

Front loading.

Ort

Default values for Undercounter models.

t r c

SOFT START ENABLED.

0_ t

Tank heater works only ifboiler temperature reached,

hk r

t c S

Detergent level switches not enabled.

01
r c

3
U

Selectuserinterfacehoodtypemodel(npto version 3.11 set to )


Regeneration cycle disabled.

Wt r

3.

Prog. 011

Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsingcycles.

Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.34/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS5WS / WT4WS TRIPHASE


1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[FO Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
tjr

OO t

Hood Type like working cycles.


Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading door type.

or u

<-x

3.
4.

J
}

SOFT START ENABLED.

O- t

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

hkr

LES

l:|

Select user interface for LSS(np to version 3.11 set to 5 ) .

Regeneration cycle enabled.

RL r

ALARMS ENABLED.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


iVlodify Factory parameters:
F R[ Enter Into FAC parameter family.
OJ

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

Onu

Boiler Temperature Adjust.

bSk

Booster Function.

Modify the cycle parameters:


[3 Cycle 3 parameters family.
1
Vu

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Detergent dosage:
uEn Enter into GEn parameter family.

[nt

d lO

tu

Initial Detergent Dosage [s].

r in

Initial Rinse Aid Dosage [s].

Counters
r t 3

9.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

Sh3

8.

Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsingcycles.

re

Ln J

6.
7.

Default values for Undereounter models.

t r c

b t L

5.

Prog. 012

tu

Number ofcycles allowed before regeneration.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.35/93

H:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolvix Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS6 PRESS

Prog. 013

1. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


2. C fu Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
Hood Type like working cycles.
bo

Front loading.
Or^

t r c

SOFT START ENABLED.

0_t

Tank heater works only if boiler ternperature reached.

hhr

The tank is filled into the traditional way.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

: 1

ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 set t o o ) .

r C

nLf

3.
4.

Default values for Undercounter models.

If

Pressurehoiler.

Regeneration cycle disabled.


Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
f /?L Enter into FAG parameter family and change boiler threshold.
OCi.

So

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

5. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOG. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.36/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT38MED
1.
2.

Prog. 014

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


CF
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
Hood Type like working cycles.
ho

Atmospheric boiler.

tSOQ

Front loading.

t r c

SOFT START ENABLED.

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

Default values for Undercounter models.


Q_t
bt

3.
4.

Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsingcycles.

Lc 5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

ACTIVEfimctiondisabled (up to version 3.11 set to U).

r E

Regeneration cycle disabled

flir

Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
fR[
Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
Boiler Temperature Threshold.
bH

bRJ
bjit

Disable boiler high Temperature alarm ( t

Boiler Temperature Adjust

Booster function not needed.

bed

tu

kt[

5 S

? ).

During stand-by boiler is kept at lowertemperaturethan Temperature Threshold.


Tub Temperature Threshold.
Tank high Temperature limit.

5.

Modify the cycle parameters:


f y / Cycle 1 parameters family.
Ln i
Sh

ID

<i

3 S

dr

Vu

FP

IS

r i/c*

She*
r

6.

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]
Rise Phase Duration [s]
Drain [s]
Final Pause at End of Cycle

Cycle 2 parameters family.


L fIC

C!:I3

iC

5
rG

Long Wash Phsise [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

J 5

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr^

Vfl

Drain [s]

F PS

IS

Final Pause at End of Cycle

Cycle 3 parameters family.


Ln3

5^3

10

Long Wash Phase [min]

<* f J

J 5

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr3

Vfl

Drain [s]

FP3

15

Short Wash Phase [s]

Final Pause at End of Cycle

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.37/93

S]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE IVIANUAL

WT30 USPH
1.
2.

Prog. 015

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[PL
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
c 3r

Hood Type like working cycles.

OO 1

Atmospheric boiler.

do O

Front loading.

t r c

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

O.. t

Default values for Undercounter models.

at

(s

t t 5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U i

ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 set to U).

r E

n {. /

3.
4.

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.


Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

Regeneration cycle disabled.


Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
PR
Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
Boiler Temperature Threshold.
hk a

During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.

b 51

Booster Function not necessary.

ttl

SB

Tank Temperature Threshold.


High limit for tank temperature.

5.

Modify the cycle parameters:


r i/ / Cycle 1 parameters family.
in

Sh

1
S S

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]
Rinse Phase Duration [s]

f i/c*

dr

FP

Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]

Cycle 2 parameters family.


the

C*

Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh^

? C*

Short Wash Phase [s]

^ iC

t 5

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

c / r C*

Vu

F PS

[B

HS

Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


^ n 3

Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh3

S S

Short Wash Phase [s]

?5

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

V"

Drain [s]

,3

dr3
FP3

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Fmal Pause [s]

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.38/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT30 USPH
dr n

Drain parameters family.


idf

dPR

30

Initial Drain Phase Duration [s]

Set other parameters.


iPR
[

6.

Prog. 015

5
i

Initial Pause [s]


Fahrenheit.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.39/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonii
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

ECOTEMP 5
1.
2.

Prog. 016

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[F u Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
t 3r

Hood Type like working cycles.

OO (

Atmospheric boiler.

doO

Front loading.

dFi

t r e

Default values for Undercounter models.


O C
ht

3.
4.

Tank and boiler heaters work simultaneously.

Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

LCJ

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U /

ACTIVEfimctiondisabled (up to version 3.11 set to u ) .

r E

Regeneration cycle disabled.

n j . "
Alarms
enabled.
Switch OFF
and then switch
ON
the machine.
Modify Factory parameters:
F R[ Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
bt L
btd

5.

SOFT START ENABLED.

1
3

Boiler Temperature Threshold.


During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.

Modify the cycle parameters:


CiS 1 Cycle 1 parameters family.
t n

5^ /

ID

r /

c'S

dr

HD

FP 1

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]
Rinse Phase Duration [s]
Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]

r i/c* Cycle 2 parameters family.


t n C*

Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh?

i ?

Short Wash Phase [s]

r iC

CJ

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr^

Vu

Drain [s]

F Pc"

Final Pause [s]

f i ^ 3 Cycle 3 parameters family.


i n3

5^5

?*

Short Wash Phase [s]

r ,3

c'S

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr 3

Vfl

Drain [s]

FP3

Long Wash Phase [min]

Final Pause [s]

dr n Drain parameters family.


Idr

dPR

Initial Drain Phase Duration [s]

Set other parameters.


tPH

6.

Initial Pause [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446,06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux ProfesBional

P.40/93

B]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT830EA / WT850EA
1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


f f G Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
tap

Automatic Pot Washer.

OO (

Atmospheric boiler.

a OO

Automatic Pot Washer

Qr^

DefavUt values for Hood Type models.

t*C

t?

0_C

b t r

The tank is filled into the traditional way.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

HI

U 1

r E

SelectuserinterfacehoodtypemodBl(upto version 3.11 set tc

.').

Regeneration cycle disabled,


Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify the cycle parameter:
Cii 1 Cycle 1 parameters family.
t n
S^ /
FP

r ^?

C
i 3

Sh ?

5
c" s

fPS

r y3

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]
Final Pause [s]

Cycle 2 parameters family.


L nc

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]
Final Pause [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


Un 3
5h3
FP3

5.

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

LES

n t <*

3.
4.

Prog. 017

8
^3

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Final Pause [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.41/93

H:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS9 / WT 55 ATM
1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[f
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
t!iP

Hood Type like workiiig cycles.

bo

Atmosphericboer.

aOQ

Manual Hood.

oft

Default values for Hood Type models.

t r c

0_ t

Ofr

75

t t 5

u
"

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ).
Regeneration cycle disabled.
Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
F RL Enter Into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
3?

Boiler Temperature Threshold.


Boiler Temperature Adjust

Booster Function.

Modify the cycle parameters:


C if c* Cycle 2 parameters family.
5 ^ ^

CUB
dPR

55

Short Wash Phase [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


L n3

Long Wash Phase [min]

Set other parameters.


iPR

6.

Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsingcycles.


Detergent level switches not enabled.

btC

5.

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

re

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

U 1
nur

3.
4.

Prog. 018

hiitial Pause [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.42/93

a]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS9 / WT55 PRESS


1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[F
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
t jP

ho

aOO
dFL
trC
0_t

5.

Pressure boiler.

<

Manual Hood.

Default values for Hood Type models.

fl

Tank heater works only ifboiler temperature reached.

ok r

The tank isfilleduito the traditional way.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

(for this appance SOFT START is NOT possible).

U i

Select user interlace hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to <)

r C

Regeneration cycle disabled.

Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
FR[
Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
hkc

oV

anu

o5t

Boiler Temperature Threshold.


Boiler Temperature Adjust.
Booster Function.

Modify the cycle parameters:


f i^j? Cycle 2 parameters family.
She*

r B

S5

Short Wash Phase [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


i nB

6.

Hood Type like working cycles.

if

n v I*

3.
4.

Prog. 019

Long Wash Phase [min]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.43/93

H:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS5 / WT 4 PRES
1.
2.

Prog. 020

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


CPU
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
k jP

OO <

OOQ

Hood Type like woridng cycles.


Pressure boiler.
Front loading door type.
Default values for Undercounter models.

t r c

SOFT START ENABLED.

0_C

Tank heater works only ifboiler temperature reached.

Okr

The tank isfilledinto the traditional way.

LBS

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U 1

3.
4.

IJ
u

Regeneration cycle enabled.

RLr

ALARMS NOT ENABLED.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
FRC
Enter into FAG parameter family.
8 i

bRJ

Boiler Temperature Adjust

Booster Function.

Modify the cycle parameters:


3
Cycle 3 parameters family.
1

Sh3

Vu

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Detergent dosage:
uf n
Enter into GEn parameter family.
din

ISS

f i n

dEk
rR

8.

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

O51

L ItJ

6.
7.

Selectuserinterfacewitfaoutdisplay (up to version 3.1 Iset to ')

" C

hk U

5.

Initial Detergent Dosage.

hiitial Rinse Aid Dosage.

18^

Detergent dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated.

SI

Rinse Aid dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

(SXJopyright 2005 by Electroliix Professional

P.44/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS5 / WT 4 PRES MONO


1.
2.

Prog. 021

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[ Fu
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
tap

bo

Hood Type like working cycles.

doO

Front loading door type.

Qp L

Default values for Undercounter models.

br C

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

O.. C
lit

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

The tank isfilledmto the traditional way.

LC5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

* C

Regeneration cycle disabled.

Ri r

ALARMS NOT ENABLED.

Selectuserinterfacewithoutdisplay(upto version 3.11 set to )

3.
4.

rnn

6.
7.

8 C

Boiler Temperature Threshold

Onu

Boiler Temperature Adjtjst

o5t

Booster Function.

Modify the cycle parameters:


CUB
Cycle 3 parameters family.
Loj

5h3

*/S

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Detergent dosage:
uEn
Enter into GEn parameter family.
d In

/o5

<* /I
dE t
r/?

8.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
P HE
Enter into FAC parameter family.
Ott

5.

Pressure boiler.

Initial Detergent Dosage.


Initial Rinse Aid Dosage.

i8S

Detergent dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated.

Si

Rinse Aid dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.45/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LB5G/WT4G
1.
2.

Prog. 022

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


r P u Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
Hood Type like working cycles.
bo

Atmospheric boiler.

aOQ

<

Front loading door type.

dFL

Default values for Undercounter models.

krc

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

Q_ e
at

The tank isfilledinto the traditional way.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U 1

<J

f t

3.
4.

as

OnU

Boiler Temperature Adjust.

OS C

Booster Function.

1
HQ

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Detergent dosage:
uEn
Enter into GEn parameter family.
d in

lu

r In

Initial Detergent Dosage [s].


Initial Rinse Aid Dosage [s].

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

EC0TEMP5 EAG
1.
2.

Modify the cycle parameters:


t i / 3 Cycle 3 parameters family.
5h3

8.

Regeneration cycle disabled.


ALARMS ENABLED.

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

V 1J

6.
7.

Select user interface for LSS (up to version 3.11 set to <)

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
f-RC
Enter into FAC parameter family.
bti

5.

'

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

Vf 5

Rir

Prog. 023

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine^

ffC

Enter Into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
n
u Hood Type like working cycles.
tiiP
n
u Atmospheric boiler.
bo I

doo
dfi
trc
b.t
btf
DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

E
3

Front loading door type.


Default values for Undercounter models.
SOFT START ENABLED.
Taiik heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

75

Enable fdling tank by means of rinsing cycles.


Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.46/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn
Electrolux Professional

if 5
UI
rE
Rir
3.

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

Detergent level switches not enabled.

O
U

ACTIVEfifflctiondisabled (up to version 3.11 set to V).


Regeneration cycle disabled.

ALARMS ENABLED.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

LS5WS / WT4WS MONO


1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[F Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
U

Hood Type like working cycles.

OO

Atmospheric boiler.

doO

Front loading door type.

drL

Default values for Undercounter models.

t r c

f)_C

at

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

Js

LEJ

Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.


Detergent level switches not enabled.

* C

Regeneration cycle enabled.

Ri r

ALARMS ENABLED.

83

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

hRd

Boiler Temperature Adjust.

O51

Booster Function.

Modify the cycle parameters:


r y 3 Cycle 3 parameters family.
L tl 3
Sh3

6.
7.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
FR[ Enter into FAG parameter family.
hkC

5.

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

SelectuserinterfaceforLSS (op to version 3.11 set to J ) .

3.
4.

Prog. 024

Vu

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Detergent dosage:
uEn Enter into GEn parameter family.
d In

iQ

Initial Detergent Dosage [s].

r 11

Initial Rinse AidDosage [s].

8.

[nk

9.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

Counters
r J. 3

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

CU

Number ofcycles allowed before regeneration.

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.47/93

R]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systenis Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS12 ECOTEMP (EUROPE)


1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


r F u Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
tjP

OO (

aOQ
tSr u

f
i

Hood Type like working cycles.


Atmospheric boiler.
Manual Hood.
Default values for Hood Type models.

krc

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

O_^

Tank and boiler heaters work simultaneously.

bk ^

75

t C5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

"

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to

r E

Regeneration cycle disabled.

Rir

3.
4.

Prog. 025

The tank isfilledinto the traditional way.

h.

ALARMS ENABLED.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


iVIodify Factory parameters:
f /? r Enter into FAC parameter family.
Boiler Temperature Threshold.
anu

5.

Boiler Temperature Adjust.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.48/93

MJ

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS12EC0TEMPUK
1.
2.

Switcli OFF and tlien switch ON the machine.


r f u Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
kjP

Hood Type like working cycles.

hot

Atmospheric boiler.

doO
dr i
tr C
at

Default values for Hood Type models.


(ibr this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).
Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

The tank isfilledinto the traditional way.

t. C 5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

tf 1

Select user interface hood type model (op to version 3.11 set to <).

CC

U
/

Regeneration cycle disabled.


ALARMS ENABLED.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


IVIodify Factory parameters:
F fff Enter into FAG parameter family.
btt

Qt

hnu

Boiler Temperature Threshold.


Boiler Temperature Adjust.

Modify the cycle parameters:


cat
Cycle 1 parameters family.
dr

Drain [s]

ry?

Cycle 2 parameters family.

CUB

Cycle 3 parameters family.

drd

dr3

Drain[s]

Drain [s]

dr n

Drain parameters family.

dP^

Set other parameters.

jd^

Pd^

6.

Manual Hood.

fli. r

5.

1
0

ir. t

3.
4.

Prog. 026

3u

Initial Drain Phase Dutation [s]

Drain Phase Duration at the end of washing phase, [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DGC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.49/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS6AH
1.
2.

Prog. 027

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[F
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
bjP

bo

Atmospheric boiler.

tSQO

Front loading door type.

dfl

Default values for Undercounter models.

t r c

SOFT START ENABLED.

_t

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

otr

UC5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U )

Selectiiserinterfacehoodtypemodel(upto version 3.11 set to i),

r E

Regeneration cycle disabled.

/?tr

3.
4.

Enable filling tank by means ofrinsingcycles,

ALARMS ENABLED.

bk'C

S V

Onu

Boiler Temperature Adjust

During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.

C*

mSTERESlS of Tank Temperature.

i kC

^8

kkH

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

Tank Temperature Threshold.

Modify the cycle parameters:


r H1
Cycle 1 parameters family.
t n
5^ /
FP

f i/c*

S^c"
f P?

C ^3

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Final Pause [s]

Long Wash Phase [min]

3B

Short Wash Phase [s]

Final Pause [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


L ll3
Sh3

3
3E

FP3

dPR

3B

Cycle 2 parameters family.


L nc

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

'^

Final Pause [s]

Set other parameters.


t,

6.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
F RC
Enter into FAC parameter family.

oka

5.

Hood Type like working cycles.

Fahrenheit.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P:50/93

H:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LS14AH/WT65H
1.
2.

Prog. 028

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[F
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
Hood Type like working cycles.
DO (

U
1

t r c

_C

obr

3.
4.

75

Manual Hood.

default values for Hood Type models.

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).


Tankheater works only if boiler temperature reached.
Enablefillingtank by means of rinsing cycles.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ).

r C

Rir

Regeneration cycle disabled.


ALARMS ENABLED.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
F RC Enter into FAC parameter family.
Onu

8H

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

t k L
tkH

a 8
C*

Boiler Temperature Adjust


Tank Temperature Threshold.
HISTERESIS of Tank Temperature.

Modify the cycle parameters:


[ y ' Cycle 1 parameters family.

r i/c*

Sh

PR

31
3

Pause [s]

FP

Final Pause [s]

ShE

rif5

Hh
H

Short Wash Phase [s]


Final Pause [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


Sh3

3S

FP3

dPR

Short Wash Phase [s]

Cycle 2 parameters family.


fP^

Short Wash Phase [s]

Final Pause [s]

Set other parameters.


t

6.

Atmospheric boiler.

t c S

hh L.

5.

Fahrenheit.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.51/93

H:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwa^hing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

H3300
1.
2.

Prog. 029

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[F
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
U

Hood Type like working cycles.

bo

Atmospheric boiler.

do O

Front loading.

or ^

Default values for Undercounter models.

t r c
0_ C
atr

3.

SOFT START ENABLED.

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

(5

Enablefillingtank by means of rinsing cycles.

t c 5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

u 1

ACTIVEfimctiondisabled (uptoversion 3.11 settoU).

r E

Regeneration cycle disabled.

nLf

Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.52/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

H131 OSANA
1.
2.

Prog. 030

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


'f S
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
Hood Type like working cycles.
OO i

Atmospheric boiler.

aOQ

Front loading.
Default values for Undercounter models.

t r c

SOFT START ENABLED.

O t

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

btr

fS

LC S

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U /

ACnVE function disabled {up to version 3.11 set t o o ) .

r E

nt r

3.
4.

Enable filling tank by means ofrinsingcycles.

Regeneration cycle disabled.


Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
f R[
Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
act.

Sfu

oiler Tempeiatin^ Threshold.

Disable boiler high Temperature alarm ( t

bRJ

Boiler Temperature Adjust

C*).

Booster function not needed.

5.

oka

iu

During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperatuie Threshold.

kh'Z

S5

Tub Temperature Threshold.

k n 1

o 5

Tank high Temperature limit

Modify the cycle parameters:


[^ 1 Cycle 1 parameters family.
i n }
Sh
r

V
!

Iu

1 1

3 5

Vu

dr
fPI

r f/c*

(5

Rinse Phase Duration [s]


Drain [s]
Final Pause at End of Cycle

t i c

SA?

r iC

J S

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr S

Vu

Drain [s]

15

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Final Pause at End of Cycle

Cycle 3 parameters family.


1. n .3
Sh3

S
i

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

<" 3

J S

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr

Vu

Drain [s]

FP3

6.

Short Wash Phase [s]

Cycle 2 parameters family.

fP^

CUB

Long Wash Phase [min]

IS

Final Pause at End of Cycle

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.53/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT30H
1.
2.

Prog. 031

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


t FG
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
ti/P

Atmospheric boiler.

do O

Front loading door type.

or u

Default values for Undercounter models.

hrC

SOFT START ENABLED.

D_ c

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

Otr

tS

Lt S

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U /

ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 set to U).

r f

Regeneration cycle disabled.

8H

h nu

Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

ALARMS ENABLED.

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

ttH

Boiler Temperature Adjust.


During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.

Tank Temperature Threshold.

e* fflSTERESIS of Tank Temperature.

IVIodify the cycle parameters:


CHI
Cycle 1 parameters family.
t. n

r i/c"

5h

FP

5h?

Final Pause [s]

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Final Pause [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


i n 3

5^.3

3B

FP3

dPR

lx)ng Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

3B

fP^

[3

1
3B

Cycle 2 parameters family.


L nC

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Final Pause [s]

Set other parameters.


t

6.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
f f?r
Enter into FAC parameter family.
bt'C

5.

Hood Type like working cycles.

GtO f

3.
4.

Fahrenheit

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.54/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

Prog. 032

WT38 MED
Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.
r Pu

Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
J

bo (
do o
dFL
tre
b.t
bkf
LES

Medical line dishwasher with lock door/hood device.

Atmospheric boiler.

Front loading.

Default values for Undercounler models.

SOFT START ENABLED.

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

II I

u (

rE
HLr

Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsingcycles.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

3
U

ACTFVE function disabled (np to version 3.11 settoU).


Regeneration cycle disabled.

Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


IVIodify Factory parameters:
F R[
Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.

btl
bH ,
bHJ
bSt
btd
ktl

Boiler Temperature Threshold.


U Disable boiler high Temperature alarm (1.
U

Boiler Temperature Adjust.

Booster fiinction not needed.

(0

).

During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.


Tub Temperature Threshold.

BS

Tank high Temperature limit

Modily the cycle parameters:


Cycle 1 parameters family.
t o t
Sh

3 S

f/? }

ri/?

3
I

,}

3S

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]
Pause [s]
Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr

Vfl Drain [s]

EP

Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

Cycle 2 parameters family.


t OC
S ^ C*
PR^
r

fC

Long Wash Phase [min]

. 3 5 Short Wash Phase [s]


S
3 S

Pause [s]
Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr^

V O Drain [s]

f P(?

BO

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Final Pause at End of Cycle[s].

Copyrignt ZV\J6 by Electrolux Professional

P.55/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT38 MED
C ^3

Cycle 3 parameters family.


t n J

5^.3

.35

PR3
r

dPR

,3

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Pause [s]

35

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr3

VG

Drain [s]

FP3

Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

Set other parameters.


rPR

6.

Prog. 032

VS

Duration ofpause after the rinse cycle [s].

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

'^

LS6MCD
1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


CF
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
tUP
ho 1

U
U

Hood Type like working cycles.


Atmospheric boiler.

aOO

Front loading.

dfl

De&ult values for Undercounter models.

t r C
_C
ac>
1. C 5

3.

Prog. 033

SOFT START ENABLED.


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.
Enablefillingtank by means of rinsing cycles.
Detergent level switches enabled.

u >

"

Select user inter&ce hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to <).

" C

Regeneration cycle disabled.

nu f

Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.56/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT30M

Prog. 034

1. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
2. '.f
Medical line dishwasher with lock door/hood device.
OO

aOQ

Atmospheric boiler.

Manual Hood.

Ort

Default values for Hood Type models.

brc

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

D c

b fr r

Lt 5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

il

ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 set to U).

( C

nL f

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.


Enablefillingtank by means of rinsing cycles.

Regeneration cycle disabled.


Alarms enabled.

3. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


4. Modify Factory parameters:
FRC

Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.


bbC

SS

bH

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

U Disable boiler high Temperature alarm ((U

t ).

3oiler Temperature Adjust


bSt
be a
khL
kn

u Booster function not needed.


f U Dimng stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.
S5

Tub Temperature Threshold.

o 5

Tank high Temperature limit.

5. Modify the cycle parameters:


Ca 1

Cycle 1 parameters family.


i O

5^ 1

if 5
5

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

PR

Pause [s]

dr

V C Drain [s]

FP

BS

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

tj?^

FinalPauseatEndofCyclels].

Cycle 2 parameters family.


L nC

ShS

3 S

PR?

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]
Pause [s]

C >C

3S

dr?

VO Drain [s]

fP?

53

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

Final Pause at End of Cycle[s].

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.57/93

H]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT30M
[i^3

Cycle 3 parameters family.


L o3
5h3
PR3
r t3

dPfl

Long Wash Phase [min]

3S

Short Wash Phase [s]

5
3J

Pause[s]
Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr3

*^ Drain [s]

FP3

8Q

Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

Set other parameters.


rPR
f
F

6.

Prog. 034

V5

Duration of pause after therinsecycle [s].


/ Fahrenheit

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

WT65M
1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


rfu
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
k^P
OO 1
doO

Medical line dishwasher with lock door/hood device.


Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading.
Default values for Undercpunter models.

t r c

SOFT START ENABLED.

0_ t

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

at

Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsingcycles.

LES

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ).

re

Regeneration cycle disabled.

RLr
3.
4.

3
U
1

ort

Prog. 035

Detergent level switches not enabled.

Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
FRL
Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.

htx

3^
Threshold. alarm ( i.
U Boiler
DisableTemperature
boiler high Temperature

bRJ

bSt

U Boosterfimctionnot needed.

atd

III During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold

tt'C

SS

Tub Temperature Threshold.

tH,

SS

^ank high Temperature limit

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

C ).

Boiler Temperature Adjust.

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux ProfessioiMl

P.58/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolilx Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT65M
5.

Prog. 035

Modify the cycle parameters:


f i/ '
Cycle 1 parameters family.
t o

Sh

35

PR

dr

Vfl

FP

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]
Pause [s]
Rinse Phase Duration [s]

ry?

Sh^
C iC

Long Wash Phase [min]

5
35

Short Wash Phase [s]


Pause [8]
Rinse Phase Duration [s]

or C

Hu

Drain [s]

fPl?

BO

Final Pause at End of Cycle[s].

Cycle 3 parameters family.


L fl 3
5h3
r

8
35.

PR3

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

i3

Pause [s]

35

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr3

HQ

Drain [s]

fP3

Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

Set other parameters.


rPR
i,

6.

3 S

Pflc*

dPR

Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

Cycle 2 parameters family.


Lie

r i/3

fifl

Drain [s]

H5
r

Duration of pause after the rinse cycle [s].

t Fahrenheit

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOu. NU. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.59/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux ProfesBional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

Prog. 036

LS5/1DPAUS
1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[Fu
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
U
/

do O

Front loading door type.

or i,

Default values for Undercoanter models.

fcrc

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

O-k

3.
4.

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

The tank is filled into the traditional way.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

Select user interface for LS5 (up to version 3.1 Iset to J ) .

r C

Regeneration cycle disabled.

Rir

ALARMS NOT ENABLED.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
PR[
Enter into FAC parameter family.
St

Boiler Temperature Thresholi


Boiler Temperature Adjust

Booster FunctiotL

Modify the cycle parameters:


[ a3 Cyde 3 parameters family.
U O3
Sh3

1
H

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Detergent dosage:
uEn
Enter into GEn parameter family.
d in

/5S

r lO
dE t
rR

8.

atr

6.
7.

Pressure boiler.

LE5

bcL

5.

Hood Type like working cycles.

OO

Initial Detergent Dosage.


u

!8E
1

S 1

Initial Rinse Aid Dosage.


Detergent dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated.
Rinse Aid dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.60/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE iVIANUAL

PW1-PW2 / WT830 -WT850 USA


1.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

ffC

Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.

kHP
bo f

doo
dFL
trc
b.k
bkF
LES
U!
rE
RLr
3.

Prog. 037

i
0
S
E

Pot Washer.

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

n
u

The tank isfilledinto the traditional way.

Q
5

Detergent level switches hot enabled.

n
u

Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading function.
Default values for Pot Washer models,
Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ' ) .
Regeneration cycle disabled.
Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
f SL

Enter into FAC parameter family.

bkl

BH

Boiler Temperature threshold.

biii

38

Boiler Temperature high limit.

bRJ
ktl
kkH

U
70

Tub Temperature Threshold.

C* fflSTERESIS of Tank Temperature.


9

5.

Boiler Temperature Adjust

Tank high Temperature limit.

Modify the cycle parameters:


CHI

Cycle 1 parameters family.


Long Wash Phase [min]
Short Wash Phase [s]

5/T/

r ,I
fP}

rif?

S3

Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

Cycle 2 parameters family.

In?
< I
Shi
r iS S3
fPS S
Ca3

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]
Rinse Phase Duration [s]
Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

Cycle 3 parameters family.

Ln3
Sh3
r ,3

,'V
//
S3

fP3 sn
dPR

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]
Rinse Phase Duration [s]
Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

Set other parameters.


Fahrenheit.

6.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.61/93

Electrolux
EFS Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT30C (Caf Line)


1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


CF
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
kiSP

Hood Type like working cycles.

Atmospheric boiler.

do O

Front loading door type.

iiO

or u

t r c

SOFT START ENABLED.

h^k

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

okF

75

LES

m>.
3.
4.

U f

"

I* C

/?t r

bkl

SW

oka

kkZ

S S

Enable filling tank by means ofrinsingcycles.


Detergent level switches enabled.

Selectuserinterfacehoodtypemodel(ap to version 3.11 sett <).


Regeneration cycle disabled.
ALARMS ENABLED.

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

Boiler Temperature Adjust.

During stand-by boiler is kept at lower teinperature than Temperature Threshold.


Tank Temperature Threshold.

C*

HISTERESIS of Tank Temperature.

Modify the cycle parameters:


r i/ Cycle 1 parameters family.
LO 1
Sh /
FP

L HP

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

unc

Sh^

3B

FmalPause[s]

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Final Pause [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


L n3
Sh3

J
35

FP3

dPR

3B

Cycle 2 parameters family.

F P?

[ if J

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

FinalPause[s]

Set other parameters.


[

6.

Default values for Undercounter models.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
F /?r
Enter into FAC parameter family.

kk H

5.

Prog. 038

Fahrenheit

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.62/93

Electrolux
EFS - Oishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT38PM50 / WT38PM60
1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[F
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
t a "
bo

U
1

1
^

Front loading.

Default values for Undercounter models.

h r c

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

0 _ t

a t r

15

L c 5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

i/

ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 set to U ) .

* C

u
(

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.


Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

Regeneration cycle disabled.


Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
PRC
Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold
b t c

30

a t a

11U
c n

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

tu

O S (T

5.

Hood Type like working cycles.


Pressure boiler.

doo

n L <*

3.
4.

Prog. 039

During stand-by boiler is kept at lwer temperature than Temperature Threshold.

Booster Function not necessary.

OS

Tank Temperature Threshold.

8 J

High Umit for tank temperature.

Modily the cycle parameters:


[ i/ / Cycle 1 parameters family.
in

S^

?*

Long Wash Ptase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]
Rinse Phase Duration [s]

[ i/c'

dr

VG

FP

Final Pause [s]

Cycle 2 parameters family.


L nc

Long Wash Phase [niin]

Sh^

S S

Short Wash Phase [s]

C iC

c 5

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr

H8

Drainjs]

C*

FPd

[ i/J

Drain [s]

Final Pause [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


L 15

Long Wash Phase [min]

5 ^ 5

dd

Short Wash Phase.[s]

dr

H"

Drain [s]

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

FPB

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Final Pause [s]

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.63/93

H]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT38PM50 / WT38PM60
drn

Drain parameters family.


tOr

dPf^

3u

Initial Dram Phase Duration [s]

Set other parameters.


iPB

6.

Initial Pause [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

LU7P / LU700P / WTU40P


1.
2.

Prog. 039

Prog. 040

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Cfu
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
U
OO (

Hood Type like working cycles.

OQO

t r c

at

The tank isfilledinto the traditional way.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

Front loading.
Default values for Hood Type models.

LES
U 1

ACTIVEftmctiondisabled (up to version 3.U set t o " ) .

r C

Regeneration cycle disabled.


Alarms enabled.

3.
4.

8H

Boiler Temperature threshold.

U
OSt

Boiler Temperature Adjust.

Booster Function.

Modify the cycle parameters:


r y ^ Cycle 2 parameters family.

r yJ

Lie

5 ^ ^

/fl

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase ts]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


Ln3

6.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
f HZ Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
hh'C

5.

SLOW SOFT START ENABLED


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

Pressure boiler.

Long Wash Phase [min]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.64/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LU7A
1.
2.

Prog. 041

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[F
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
Hood Type like working cycles,
ho

krc

0_ C

Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading.

Default values for Hood Type models.

SLOW SOFT START ENABLED


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.
Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

Lt 5

U
"

Selectuserinterfacehoodtypemodel(iipto version 3.11 set to ).

ft

Regeneration cycle disabled.

3.
4.

Ot

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

U
a DC

Boiler Temperature Adjust.

Booster Function.

Modify the cycle parameters:


[ )iS Cycle 2 parameters family.
t Oc
Sh^

L H3

(
ID

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


i n3

6.

Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
F R[ Enter into FAG parameter family and change boiler threshold.
ULL

5.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U
HL f

Long Wash Phase [min]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.65/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE IVIANUAL

Prog. 042

LS14WS/WT65WS
1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[F
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
Hood Type like working cycles.
OO (

U
t

Or 1.

tr C

O C

Atmospheric boiler.
Manual Hood.

Default values for Hood Type models.


(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).
Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

ok r

(S

Lc 5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

u
re

3
0

Selectuserinterfacehoodtypemodel(up to version 3.11 set to ' ) .


Regeneration cycle disabled (only for dishwashers with non-continuous water softener).

n t . I"

Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

Alarms enabled.

Air gap withfloatlevel sensor normally closed.

3.
4.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
FRC Factory parameters family

5.

Modify Communication and HACCP parameters:


Wr P Enter into Wf P parameter family and set the following parameters.

OcL

18

Sc r

6.

Boiler Temperature Threshold

Dishwasher with incorporated continuous water softener.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

WT65MEDWS

Prog. 043

1. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


2. CFu Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:
tjP

Hood Type like working cycles.

OO 1

Atmospheric boiler.

OOO

Automatic Hood.

Qr^

t r c

Default values for Hood Type models.


(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible),

0_ t

Otr

Lc3

U <

Select user mterfEice hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ' ) .

r E

Regeneration cycle disabled (only for dishwashers with non-continuous water softener).

n t ""

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.


Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsingcycles.
Detergent level switches not enabled.

Alarms enabled.
Air gap withfloatlevel sensor normally closed.

3. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


DOC. NO. 5956.446.ue

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.66/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE iVIANUAL

Prog. 043

WT65MEDWS
4.

Modify Factory parameters:


FRC

Factory parameters family


hbl.

3U

Disable boiler high Temperature alanti ( t

OnU

Boiler Temperature Adjust

t k [

5 5

Tub Temperature: THRESHOLD.

s s

Tank high Temperature limit

tH
5.

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

C*).

Booster Function.

Modify the cycle parameters:


[ ^

'

Cycle 1 parameters family.


i O f
5^
f

L i/c"

/
t 1

35

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

Vu

Drain [s]

FP

15

Final Pause [s]

Cycle 2 parameters family.


3

Long Wash Phase [min]

5h?

3?

Short Wash Phase [s]

,S

35

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr

Vu

PP?

15

Drain [s]
Final Pause [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


Ln3

5h3

3S

Short Wash Phase [s]

35

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

VO

Drain [s]

i3

dr

fP3
dr n

Long Wash Phase [mm]


Short Wash Phase [s]

dr

11C*

Cii3

C
3^

(3

Long Wash Phase [min]

Final Pause [s]

Drain/Cleaning Cycle Parameters.


drt

Drain without cleaning cycle.

Set other parameters.


IPR
6.

hiitial Pause [s]

Modify Communication and HACCP parameters:


Wr P

Enter into HZP parameter family and set the following parameters.
5c r

7.

Dishwasher with incorporated continuous water softener.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.67/93

Electrolux
EFS -Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

Prog. 044

LS6WS
Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.
[fO

Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
n
kp
u Undercounter like working cycles.

Q
E
3
i

bo 1

doo
dFL
tre
b.k
htf
LES
U 1
rE
RLr

Atmospheric boiler.
Front loading.
Default values for Undercounter models.
SOFT START ENABLED.

Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

75
Q
3

Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsmgcycles.


Detergent level switches not enabled.
Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to )

n
u

nno

Regeneration cycle disabled (only for dishwashers with non-continuous water softener).

1
1

Alarms enabled.

1
t

Air gap with float level sensor normally closed.

Modify Communication and HACGP parameters:


HEP

Enter into ^ t . P parameter family and set the following parameters.

5f.

Dishwasher with incorpotated continuous water softener.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

WT38MEDWS

Prog. 045

1. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
2. EP
Under counter like working cycles.
OO J

Atmospheric boiler.

doo

Front loading.

Default values for Undercounter models.

dr

t r c
>_ t

1
'

SOFT START ENABLED.


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

hikr

iS

Enablefillingtank by means of rinsing cycles.

LES

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U 1
r E

8
U

ACTIVE function disabled (up to versionS.llsettoU).


Regeneration cycle disabled (only for dishwashers wifli non-continuous water softener).

n t <*

Alarms enabled.

nnu

Air gap withfloatlevel sensor normally closed.

3. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.68/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

WT38MEDWS
4.

Prog. 045

Modify Factory parameters:


FRC
Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
Oct

30

Boiler Temperature Threshold.


Disable boiler high Temperature alarm ( t

bSk

ill
5.

Boiler Temperature Adjust.

Booster function not needed.

During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.

hid

ID

tt'u

55

Tub Temperature Threshold.

kH,

S5

tank high Temperature limit.

Modify the cycle parameters:


r if /
Cycle 1 parameters family.
Sh
r

u^^

1
, /

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

35

Rinse Phase Duration [s]


Drain [s]

Ht]

f-P

IS

Final Pause at End of Cycle

Cycle 2 parameters family.


5h^
r

TifJ

dr

L OC

a
10

tC

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

J 5

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr^

Hp

Drain [s]

FPc

tS

Final Pause at End of Cycle

Cycle 3 parameters family.


Ln3

5h3

10

,3

df

f P3

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

BS

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

Drain [s]

Final Pause at End of Cycle

Modify Communication and HACCP parameters:


Wr P
Enter into HC P parameter family and set the following parameters.
St''

7.

c ).

i n 1

6.

Dishwasher with incorporated continuous water softener.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.69/93

H:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

FL620 / LV6 / WT30 6000W ATM


1.
2.

Prog. 046

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[f
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
t 3 r

Hood Type like woridng cycles.

DO (

Atmospheric boiler.

do O

Front loading.

dfl

krc

Default values for Undercounter models.

SOFT START ENABLED.


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

Istr

75

3.

Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsingcycles.

t C5

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U (

ACTIVE fimction disabled (up to version 3.11 set to U).

Cc

n i , <*

Regeneration cycle disabled


Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

LU700A / WTU40A
1.
2.

tjr

Hood Type like working cycles.

DO

Atmospheric boiler.

(SO O

Front loading.

t r c

1
3

0_ t
bkF

1
75

Default values for Hood Type models.


Tank heater works only ifboiler temperature reached.
Enable filling tank by means ofrinsingcycles.

U 1

ACTrVEfimctiondisabled(uptDverslon3.11settoU).

r C

Regeneration cycle disabled.

SLOW SOFT START ENABLED

LES

n t <*

Detergent level switches not enabled.

Alarms enabled

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
F RC Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.
fetr

SI?

anu

OSt

5.

Prog. 047

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[Fu
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.

dFL

3.
4.

Boiler Temperature Threshold.


Boiler Temperature Adjust.
Booster Function.

Modify the cycle parameters:

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.70/93

H:

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

LU700A / WTU40A
C i/c*

Cycle 2 parameters family.


L nC
S^C*

C ^3

Long Wash Phase [min]

/ "

Short Wash Phase [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


L n3

6.

Prog. 047

Long Wash Phase [min]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

FL620WS / LV6WS / WT38WS

Prog. 048

1. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


2. [Fu
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
U

Undercounter like working cycles.

OO f

Atmospheric boiler.

doO

Front loading.

dPL

t r c

0_ C
bkr

1
5

Default values for Undercounter models.


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.
Enablefillingtank by means ofrinsingcycles.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U 1

ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 set to " ) .

re
nL <"

f*l

Regeneration cycle disabled (only for dishwashers with noh-continuous water softener).
Alarms enabled.
Air gap withfloatlevel sensor normally closed.

3. iVIodify Communication and HACCP parameters:


Wf ?

SOFT START ENABLED.

Lc S
C

Enter into HCP parameter family and set the following parameters.
SEr

Dishwasher with incorporated continuous water softener.

4. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.71/93

Electrolux
EFS -Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE IVIANUAL

ET5EDF
1.
2.

Prog. 049

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[f
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
U

Hood Type like working cycles.

Atmospheric boiler.

daO

Front loading.

dr ^

Defeult values for Undercounter models.

t e c

SOFT START ENABLED.

h ^ t

Tank heater works only ifboiler temperature reached.

bo

<

lit

75

Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

3.
4.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

U <

ACTIVEfimctiondisabled (up to version 3-11 set to U).

r E

Regeneration cycle disabled.

nLf

Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify the cycle parameters:
f i/ / Cyde 1 parameters family.
In

5h /

1
5

Long Wash Phase [min]


Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr

FP

3u

Short Wash Phase [s]


1

Drain [s]

Final Pause [s]

f i/ c" Cycle 2 parameters family.


Long Wash Phase [min]
S h ^

35

dr^

Rinse Phase Duration [s]


fPc*

Short Wash Phase [s]


1

Drain [s]

*^

Final Pause [s]

t i / 3 Cycle 3 parameters family.


t. nS

Long Wash Phase [min]

5^.3

3 i

C l3

Cu

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr

Vu

Drain [s]

55

fP3
bt

Short Wash Phase [s]

Final Pause [s]


Boilertemperamre[C]

dr n Drain parameters family.


or

dPR

IPfi

5.

J u

Initial Drain Phase Duration [s]

Set other parameters.


5

hiitial Pause [s]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956,446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.72/93

H]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfotm
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

ET5EDF
6.

Prog. 049

Modify Detergent dosage:


u f n Enter into GEn parameter family.
dEk

18 I

Detergent dispenser works when WASHING PUMP in activated.


Rinse Aid dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated.

7.

ET12EIF
1.
2.

Prog. 050

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


[Fu
Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
k^P

bo

Hood Type like working cycles.


Atmospheric boiler.

doO

Manual Hood.

dr L

Default values for Hood Type models.

k r C

fa_t

bkf

75

LCD

3.
4.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reachedThe tank is filled into the traditional way.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

il 1

ACTIVE function disabled (op to version 3.11 set to U).

f E

Regeneration cycle disabled.

Rlr

ALARMS ENABLED.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
FR[
Enter into FAG parameter family.

bkl

80
Boiler
Boiler Temperature
Temperature Threshold.
Adjust.

5.

Modify the cycle parameters:


[ ^ 1 Cycle 1 parameters family.
Ln I
Sh (
r

t f^?

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

t i

la

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr

IB

Drain [s]

FP

Final Pause [s]

Cycle 2 parameters family.


Lr>C

Long Wash Phase [min]

She*

35

r IC

la

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr ^

IB

Drain [s]

PP^

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Short Wash Phase [s]

Final Pause [s]

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.73/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE IVIANUAL

ET12EIF
[^3

Prog. 050

Cycle 3 parameters family.


t 1 i f

Sh3

3 1

Cu

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

P u

Drain [s]

13

dr3
fP3
bk

"^zJ

Long Wash Phase [min]


Short Wash Phase [s]

H
3

Final Pause [s]

o S

Boiler temperature[C]

6.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

7.

Modify Detergent dosage:


En

Enter into GEn parameter family.


dEt
rf?

8.

18 1
5 /

Detergent dispenser works when WASHING PUMP in activated.


Rinse Aid dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated-

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

WT37LEV/9
1.
2.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


f f u

Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.
t j r

Hood Type like working cycles.

bo

Atmospheric boiler.

do O

Front loading.

dfL

Default values for Undercounter models.

t r c

SOFT START ENABLED.

Q_ C

Tank heater works only if boilertemperaturereached.

ok r

15

J. t S

u '

"

r C

n t **

3.
4.

Enablefillingtank by means of rinsing cycles.


Detergent level switehes enabled.
Select user interlace hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ' ) .
Regeneration cycle disabled.
Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify the cycle parameters:
dr n

Drain/Cleaning Cycle Parameters.


d^ k

5.

Prog. 051

Drain without cleaning cycle.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.74/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfomi
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

L14ROW/WT65ROW

Prog. 052

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


uf

Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.

tiSP
bo (
doo
dfl
krc
b.k
bkP
LE5
rE
Rir
3.

un
1
}

Hood Type like working cycles.


Pressure boiler.
Manual Hood.

1
n
u
1

Default values for Hood Type models.

The tank is filled into the traditional way.

un
3

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).


Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.
Detergent level switches not ei^abled
Selectuser interface hood type model (optoversioD3.il setto ' )
Regeneration cycle disabled.
Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


Modify Factory parameters:
E R[

Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.

bkl
bRJ
bP
bSk

SV
Q

un

Boiler Temperature Threshold


Boiler Temperature Adjust
Boiler Priority Disabled.
Booster Function.

Modify the cycle parameters:


r a^

Cycle 2 parameters family.


S^C*

fi/3

55

Short Wash Phase [s]

Cycle 3 parameters family.


i n j

*?

Long Wash Phase [min]

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.75/93

s:

'"w^

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform


Electrolitx Professional

11. DEFAULT VALUES

Default 1 - Hood Type


ON/OFF +
CYCLE1 keys

Gin

-^

Cnt

33

i
fyr

i
din:
r In:
dit:
rR,:

ON/OFF +
CYCLE2 keys

10

ci/c

a >st
V nfa

i
Fflr
i

->

bkli

70 L n h

btU:

fy/

->

fy?

i
a

^ Sh h 35

InSS/t?.-

->

fyj

drn

i
Q Ln3:

-^

i
1

^Pfl

->

i
Idrz

ys 5h3-

HO fdrz

y P3z

y drkz

ron

->

fp

->

ffC

dbH,

IPRz

;
0 rEL

Birz

1 kHPz

BD dLHz

3 rtS

Rdrz

1 bo iz

a
a

s Pdrz

Prnz

<1 dooz

bk z

90 dFLz

HD

^
t tz
IS
k Sz ?0
k 3z

IS

k Hz

IQ

^a

1 Pr h

Pr S:

Q PrJz

rPRz

a flff
Q f/?/;

bfl 2

5 r , h

IB

r ,S:

IB r ,3z

IB

f Fz

D f S

bH z

in krez

k Bz

bFiJ:

y cf h

crSz

a Cr3z

r ,kz

Q PBI

kk z BB b.kz

k Bz

nr

bP :

/ dr h

drS:

IB

PPLz

kH z

rfS

bSki

IB
n
u

n fP3z

CdEz

bk3z

drn

bH ,2 9B PRh
bio:

^ fPh

PRiz

fPS:

IB driz

ID bkFz

75

RL.z

LBBz

fl
3
a

Ikhz

bkd:

kklz

BB

rE z

RLrz

RR Bz

fl

frCz

kkHz
kH ,:
kia:
kFL:

'di z

75
1
EQ

BrUz
bPoz

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.76/93

SD

a
laa

BH

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform


Electrolux ProfeBsional

Default 2 - POT WASHER


ON/OFF +
CYCLEl keys

ON/OFF +
CYCLE2 keys

i
:nt

C?r

i
d

tni^nn

fRL

i
fyr

btlr

IB

c i/c

btr

dEkz

rSt

bH ,1

hLo:
hf i z
rfy

hRd:

nrE

bP

rES

^^ '

ra?
i

r In:

rR,z

>

IB
S
9S
/
5
H
1

faSt.'
bkd:
0
kklz SB
tkHz
S
tH ,: 75
/
ti o:
tFL: HO

i n h

inSl

->

Pr

r , 1cr

/-

dr

PP h

H PB^z

0
?fl
0

Pr S:
r ,Sz

-^

3H
PR i:

ryj
Ln3z

5h3z

3H

Pr3z
r ,3z

eo

crSz

D cr3z

drdz

dr3z

BO

PPSz

->

PB3z

0
3D

drn

FP3z

bk3z

dPR

->

i
tdrz

fdrz

->

fp

CFG

->

rEL

SErz

dl'dz

ri s

Rdrz

1 bo iz

?.- 300

Pdr:

BCC

Prnz

dooz

3z

15

rPBz

0
n
u

[RI 1

bk

SO

dFL z

k Hz

z a

bH z

to

krcz

10
30

iPBz

fz

PPLz

0
n
u

[dEz

r ,kz

fSi

kk

kH z

kUPz

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

BB b.kz

Iz

5z

15

30

15

RL.z

LE5z

Ikhz

100

Ul

rE

10 bkFz

FrOz

I
0
0

SrUz

10

RLrz
RRZ

P.77/93

1 k Bz

bPoz

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

\ dbL

HO
BO

ron

50

a]

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashmg Systems Platform


Electrolux Professional

Default 3 - UNDERCOUNTR
ON/OFF +
CYCLE1 keys

ON/OFF +
CYCLE2 keys

i
Cnt
i
d In: 50 r y f

i
fatr.-

cHc

btWr

Cfn
i
r

in:

dEk:
rf\,:

FRC

rSk

H nEH
drn

ry.'

->

an
5

Ln

fato.-

5h h
Pr tz

bfiz

r , Iz

bRJ:

er

bP

rES

bStr

:
^

bkd:

kklz

B3
5

tkH:
kH ,:

C3

->

i
il

Ln^z

Pr Bz

crdz

dr iz 30

drdz

fP iz

fPSz

Iz

Sh3z
V PR3z
Pr3z

IB r

->

,3z

dPf\

3a

iPRz

IB

3a dr3z

3a

FP3z

bk3z

ron

>

MCP

ff C

i^bC

rEL

Sfr-

1 kUPz

3 ri S

Rdrz

RCC
[RI t

Prnz

1 dooz

rPRz

n
u
n
u

c Fz

c 8

90 dFlz
bH z ta krcz

a
a
s

F?l

kk z BB b.kz

60 dLHz
Pdrz

->

i
idrz

Fdrz

cr3z

drn

PBSz
IB r ,dz

->

i
1 Ln3z

10 5h^z

SB

nrE

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

cn^

->

,kz

PPLZ

CdEz

bo iZ

'

bk z

kH z

1
t

10 bkFz

Ui

rE

RR Bz

/
n
u

kioz

FrDz

kFL.'

^Q

SrUz

la

bPoz

50

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.78/93

eao

k 3z

/5

k Hz

10

k 5r

so

1 k Bz
15 RL.z

LE5z

RLrz

75

a
a

k iz
k Bz

ikhz

15

so
0
100

81

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE IVIANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn


Electrolux Professional

12. USER INTERFACE AND MAIN BOARD CONNECTORS


12.1

MAIN MALFUNCTIONS NOT DUE TO THE MAIN BOARD

The display sliows CL OSf with door/hood closed


No cycle sterts
A cycle fails to start
After replacing the main board only the Z"' cycle starts
Cycle time longer than that foreseen
Noisy wash pump (only on HT and PP versions)

12.2

CONNECTORS LAYOUT
LS14/WT65(6-9kW)

LAYOUT 1

lODooipniotigEiiDiii rnotmiigiiaiiai
CNt
CN5
9

f 1 17

CN?

iooi iiiDinigiKiBiieaBiiBWiiiiDiiDsieisai
I
CN3i:"
,, CN15

n r_T

I '1^ I 1

IMlO'JOODOShlMODOC
CN5

Check door/hood micro/sensor


Checic the user interface buttons (have they remained
pressed? etc)
Is a user interface button extension missing?
The main board is still configured for L;S5/WT4.
Does the boiler work?
Is the feed water at 50C?
Check the current for single phase during operation.

Ul

SB B W'G^^

2)

i U)
1

T!

IGl

Q
CN8

CNIO

CN12

CNll.

DDJIW D [WWW DtHJiWlflO WO MIHI 000 0001 MM^^^


rr-..v I 3|
TH
3 IE

"nEz

CNIO
CNU
cNia
l Oewe
M a o i leioDiooiDi mgiuiDgiioiiiKiBini looaisiioaoooniioiuiiiiogi

..;0
ttEDODHOfMM
\Z. r:.CIs|:l-&V::...:i.:;::t

iuyuuiMJmjw

KEY
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN8
CN10
CN11
CN12
CN15
CN16

Rinse pump/wash pump/solenoid valve outputs


Pressure/atmospheric dishwasher solenoid valve connection
ECOTEI\/1P transformer and detergent/rinse aid dispenser outputs
Tank/tx)iler temperature sensor inputs
Energy peak controller input
Safety and upper/lower limit switch input
Gear unit current control Input - Gear unit polarity inversion/connection
User interface inputs/outputs
Overflow/tank level/board feed input
User interface inputs/outputs and hood/door sensor input

DOC. NO, 5956.446.06

Copyright 2 0 0 5 by E l e c t r o l u x Professional

P.79/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform


Electrolux Professional

LAYOUT 2

WT65 MARINE

I HD DO till OD to eom go gute DD DP CDI


CN5

iggi I gg ISO HI D i n g l OD Oil g) I lODDDDDODDDI

CN2

CNl

T T E_

HT

'o'WMMWMmW
CN5

CN3

CNl 5

3 10
H
"W&^MlnIfllMlMf3iH^
CN3

CNl

CN15

o
ICt

1
i

t^

flflB o

/ ^

TI
O

3
1

CN8

CNl 2

lilDOD^WDDJI'iMlODaJllIHliDDnmiMlHli DDDODDi MMOaDcqi


I sil

n CN12r

CNS

LAYOUT 3

12

CN16

fl

(lAMAAMMM

> n DD to IS 01 CD 030111

rogggjSHI

DcD Di DD DIP DIMM

EC0TEMP12 UK / LS14AH - WT65H /PW USA


i g g i iggoiDDOSigODIDIOaDI IODOOOOIDODI

I OD 00 OD DO 00 OB DD DO 1100 OD OD OD CH 001

CN5

CN2

CNl

CNS

CN3

T CN15

rri6n
"IWWliWfllllMMfr^

9 ~ r TM
o [HliODOOlliMMIOOflffjr

1 10

CN3

CNl

CN15

flSB o
1
1

:l

II

ICl

Ul

CN8

CN12

MDOfkQWIDIHlPlDOlHtlMiOOOOiDMObOl-DOOOOQa MMODDctn

ECN8
Zl
ODOODDODI

n n
CNl 2

1 o OB CD OD Et C U B

001

IkOOjDDDIlHiaiMM
12 I CN16 " T T

(lAMMMJUlMy

KEY
CNl
CN2
CN3
CN5
CNS
CNl 2
CN15
CN16

RInse pump/wash pump/solenold valve outputs


Pressure/atmospheric dishwasher solenoid valve connection
ECOTEMP transformer and detergent/rinse aid dispenser outputs
Tank/boiler temperature sensor inputs
Energy peak controller input
User interface inputs/outputs
Overflow/tank level/board feed input
User interface inputs/outputs and hood/door sensor Input

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2 0 0 5 by Electrolux Professional

P.80/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwasliing Systems Platform


Rlectrolux Professional

LS14/WT65(10.5kW)

UY0UT4

Igg90g]aoODm09nI limoigg09OliaiI
CN5

I lll7

CN15

CN3

nffT
{ 'te 1 1'
"WWIDMIKWMM"

O MOtOODflRtPODflQffar
CN5

I 10000 nDnagoaoaDiPcm IOOOOODOOOIK

CN2

CN1

tni:

CNl

CN15

CN3

SSB o 0

La

ICl

TI

G>J

CNa

CNIO

CN12

CN11

aooWanjrwfiODfeiiiobQioDaDifliHiiMiii
131 ITCN!0 t i CN12I

DDODDDI
GNU

CNe

MMODiHn

na

WT830EA/WT850EA

i m 19 00 00 00 OD DI 031 IS] CD 03 OD 00 001

| g ; | ! CNI6 -.4::il

fiMMMffiilM

lOVrrrl lODOQOOOQODI nm 8080(1000 OD OB 001100 OD 80 00 OB OB OB OD 00 00601

LAYOUTS

-MiaDOQIMOnHTM,

iggttggOOODOIOOOOOOODOOl lODDOSOOOOl

CN2

CN5
-CNl
1
1 1\I
:.M

. CN3 :--

: ,.CN15

miLMMM~n

I W M Di o iiliffiM"

eolDOOOlBtPOOflflMr
CN5

f-

CN3

CNI:EV":

CNlSi

sLtLa
1

TI

ICl

:
CN7

n:CN7

CNB

CNIQ

O
CNa

CNl 2

QJllMI

IE
GNtO^

rw^W o:
GNIS-

CNl I

DDDDI8
CNIl

DQJn o

nn

100 00 00 00 01 dl OD oo 00 oo dl 00 00 im UKOI Ib 10110100 OD 00 OD 00 aoAggoogg 00 00 OD 00 00 03 BO 01

MlOOOOllMOfMM;
12 1

CNI6"

1 1

(UlMilaMAAMy

KEY
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN7
CN8
CNIO
CNl 1
CN12
CN15
CN16

Rinse pump/wasti pump/solenoid valve outputs


Pressure/atmosptieric distiwasher solenoid valve connection
ECOTEMP transformer and detergent/rinse aid dispenser outputs
Tank/boller temperature sensor inputs
Hand safety system microswitch input
Energy peal^ controller Input
Safety and upper/lower limit switch Input
Hand safety system input - Gear motor current control input - Gear motor polarity inversion connection
User interface inputs/outputs
Overflow/tank level/traard feed input
User interface inputs/outputs and hood/door sensor input

DOC. NO. 5956.446,06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.81/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform


Electrolux Professional

LAYOUT6

LS9/WT55

I OD OD OD a so sg SD os 11 Ol Od oc o OB cm
CNl
CN5

H i l I OD a 00 OD won mi CO I I CI DD og OD UDI
CN3
CN15

CN2

10

11

o
CN5

CNl

Bf

CN3

CN15

laii^G
o

IC1

TI

tiii

v;^

o
Clvl6

CNl 2

O MODDJPIMQMlPlODDJiraDDOOf QcQIHIi DDODOflj MfflHDOMfl "

CN8

LAYOUT?

IMl-fli"
n

lUlAAilMAAMJi

I OD DD og BD as 00 80 SO

PW1/PW2

100 DO Q) 00 Q] 00 00 091 10009 SO BOD] OS I

CN5
9

<g I C N 1 6

CN12

IIDODDOII

MliMflliniMl

1001 ISJODDDOQGOOOOOODOOl igDOOQSSDDOl

CNl

CN2

II

lW'IH!OllUDDDDiliFiiBW~

wiflloDuUJFMoIaW
CNS

CNl 5

CN3

nwT

I lll7

CNl

Si

CN3

CN15

O
O

L
ra

ICl

TI

o
CN8

CNl 2

o
o

CNl I

laflKroaDDoromoDjTianiaDDoroiHi (WluyjlMlLMHlMLE
12
'i
t 91EE
I0D0O0DD3I

CNl 2
CNl I
iBDWMcoogDoogog itugangpooowDoiioiiDiiaciii

MDIOODDiM
12 a CNl6

mU
~J1

UAMMUm

KEY
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN8
CN11
CNl 2
CNl S
CNl 6

Rinse pump/wash pump/solenoid valve outputs


Pressure/atmospheric dishwasher solenoid valve connection
Detergent/rinse aid dispenser outputs
Tank/boiler temperature sensor inputs
Energy peak controller input
Water feed solenoid valve output
User interface inputs/outputs
Overflow/tank level/board feed Input
User internee inputs/outputs and hood/door sensor Input

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.82/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfoim


Electrolux Professional

LAYOUTS}

LS5-WT4 / LS6-WT37-WT38

TEJ

^T

imiQtiiiBSieiiiDgai IIISIUEOKIOII

CNl

CN5

CN2

TW
o lHliDOOOlO,lMOOOMr
CN5

lESi iiiiiiiciaositDiiagggtiigti^iiiiaiiai
CN3
CNl 5

I ite

' 1 10

I II

tlW(fflDilD0flDrDtll{H10=lIiMf 0

CNl

I I

CN3

CN15

3
1

:
:

1
Ul

:i

"

TI

ICI

ISK

CN7

CN8

CN12

CN11

CM9

O woDwiDiuriioowiiiooaoo:!]! oQoooos (uraaDo^ o

ET
1r
CN12

IL

C N 7 1 CNa ,

12
CNlI

ILCN9

naroiaaDBWiB aromaacinanmuiicn iogti>niia<Di

I s m am IB I imaoai

LS6 MARINE / LS6AH - WT30H

LAYOUT 9

TEJ"

>iiao36BiaB30{iCBdai 19301(31 abiaai

CN5

CNl

CNZ

ICH iQCiisiiinaiiiiiaDiitgaiiiiigiiiK
CN3
CN15

I 'l|5 I 1'
JffT
lHHhi[ililQlHMlHliW~

~mMflHMTflwr
CN5

-w

CN3

CNl

CN15

La

ra
La
1a

ICl

,, : GN8

:.',. : : ; . C N 1 2 '

O I H P a a t D B n i H l D i POO OD Di OJlilMIOnMn o
. CN8 ,
loantflii

Tzzr

CNr2
,
llt9)C9(IlfiS006)IDI

KEY
CNl
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN7
CN8
CN9
CNl 1
CN12
CNl 5
CN16
CN17

Rinse pump/w/ash pump/solenoid valve outputs


Pressure/atmospheric dishwasher solenoid valve connection
Detergent/rinse aid dispenser outputs
Tank/boiler temperature sensor inputs
Detergent/rinse aid level sensors input
Energy peak controller input
Salt receptacle drain pump and low pressure solenoid valve outputs
Brine solenoid valve output
User interface inputs/outputs
Overflow/tank level/t)oard feed input
User interface inputs/outputs and hood/door sensor input
Door microswitch connection

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.83/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE IVIANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform


Electrolux Professional

WTSeiDE

LAYOUT 10

'U

'W
e
o

ivBogsa&iiBDaaDsaDt imiiDEi)taiiiBii!]i
CNl

mil iBiiC9B3i)iiiDaomeaGB[ iflDomooQiB


CN2 I II
CN3
T CN15

ItTT

I lll7

I 1te

I ti

"WMOaDODlMBfr

nMlITDlFMflTQW'
CNS

CNIS

CNl

!
fiii
1

:l
ICl

:l
CNS

CM12

CNll

IMriflflmrWHDIfcdGiflllQDDinMIliflll DOODBj MjMjOOlWri o

I DB DB 8 3 IB

LAYOUT n

nm

CNIZ
CNIt
imsiiiiDiiiaDisi lOinsjtgiaciKiiESQiaiiiii

, CIM8

LS5/1-WT4/1

^
poiti tcDiaaicisjoiiBiiffCSt lesaiiouiiai
CN2 I
CN3
CNIS

iCBoaiDiiBEQninisix iisEiinii&iioiiai
CN5
CNl

CNS

ite

lo:

II
I
I lliT
o MlDDDOKJmDDOMT

I |i

TWWMIolrffofSiffT
CN15

CN3

CNl

13
iCl

CN12

CNll

CN9

O MOniHnMDMnMinniHllMilDaeilBlIHllMllflODDODMiMOOttOl o

l i EJ:

CN12
CNll
iiacoigEDCBiisiito I isoBniiiBiioaEiraEiii

ILCN9

OBIIIBIIIII

KEY

CNl
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN7
CN8
CN9
CNll
CN12
CNl 5
CN16
CN17

Rinse pump/wash purhp/solenold valve outputs


Pressure/atmospheric dishwasher solenoid valve connection
ECOTEMP transformer and detergent/rinse aid dispenser outputs
Tank/boiler temperature sensor Inputs
Detergent/rinse aid level sensors input
Energy peak controller input
Salt receptacle drain pump and low pressure solenoid valve outputs
Door lock electromagnet and brine solenoid valve output
User interface inputs/outputs
Overflow/tank level/board feed input
User interface inputs/outputs and hood/door sensor input
Door microswitch connector

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.84/93

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERViCE iVIANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform


Electrolux Professional

WT65M

LAYOUT 12

iilBgDilggaigiloODgOl i go og og Kl im IKK

CNt

CN5

nzzn

I Hl II I HH] tg ug 19 n ID as OD I IOE 01 gt im CD I

CN3

CN2

IV

"TOfimuraMMfr

'WMWMmW
CN5

CNI5

nas

' 1^10 I

CN3

CNl

CN15

aa.Bo

[ 0J

TI

ICl

. O
CN8

CN12

5t

LAYOUT 13

CNtI

CNl 2
looaoEtogcDaicgaiii

IDDIUiDllCI

CNIt

DflifllHlIWi DflOODOn MMI1ML2.


li
I 9i ET
Tl

. CNfl _,

ggjggagggOCagoDDtlCCcpi

MOiDDOSHiBMM
12 i C M b

I li 11

MMJUUliUlMJlU

WT55PM50/WT55PM60
imGocgcocguoDOK iggggiiainiiioDOi
CN5
CNl

CN2

igoi iggooogiootiioogoigoiiiiDgooDoggDi
CN3
CNl 5

r-fWT

11

I ij

IWMMITflHMMfF
CN5

CNl

CN3

CNI5

Hl?
o
3

TI

ICl

o
CN8

CNl2

DDJTPDDJIPiDDDJITOODDQlOlH] M | ODDBDOj M W O IWl


Il
CN8
iGoggggoBi

1 3|
CN12

103 cg 00 CI og CO 00 m i

MffiiMLMl.
12 I CN16

lUWAAMAilAJUl

KEY
CNl
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN8
CNl i
CNl 2
CNl 5
CN16

Rinse pump/wash pump/solenoid valve outputs


Pressure/atmospheric dishwasher solenoid valve connection
ECOTEMP transformer and detergent/rinse aid dispenser outputs
Tankyboiler temperature sensor Inputs
Energy peak controller input
Hood lock electromagnet output
User interface inputs/outputs
Overflow/tank level/board feed input
User interface inputs/outputs and hood/door sensor input

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.85/93

a]

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

13. ALARM MESSAGES AND TROUBLESHOOTING

A Alarms that stop the dishwasher


n

Want of water
Is the water cock open?
Does the water load solenoid valve work?
Is the water feed flow a min. of 5 1/min?
Is the water inletfilterclean?
Is the load solenoid valvefilterclean?
Is the overflow inserted?
Is the main board (ATM-PRES) CN2 connector correctly positioned?
Do the tank/boiler pressure switches work properly?

B Alarms that don't stop the dishwasher


Drain not efficient
Has the overflow been removed?
Is the water drain blocked?
Is the drain pump blocked?
Are the air trap and tank pressure switch clean?
Is there a constriction in the drain tube?
Is the pump breather pipereturningto the tank clogged or constricted?
Does the tank pressure switch work properly?
Is iere a hole m the drain tube (only for versions with drain pump)?

Overflow alarm
Is tlie water drain blocked?
Are the air trap and tank pressure switch clean?
Does the tank pressure switch work properly?
Is the load solenoid vah/e blocked? (El - LOAD_EV)
Is the load solenoid valve relay stuck? (RL8 - LOAD EV)

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.86/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux ProfeBsional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

C Alarms that stop the functioning and suggest to call the service

,'

Boiler temperature rise too fast


Does the boiler level sensorworfc properly? The boiler could be empty.
Are non-original power resistances Installed?

f ?

Boiler temperature too higii


Has the boiler temperature been changed {bkC - Increased above 90C)?
Has the software alarm value been modifieid (bW i)?
Does the boiler level sensor work properly?
Is the boiler relay stuck (see RL2, RL3, RL4)?

Tank temperature too high


is the feed water above 60C?
Has the software alarm value been modified {bH <)?
Is the rinse water temperature too high?
Is the tank relay stuck (RL5 - TUB HEAT)?

Tanic temperature sensor out of order


is the temperature sensor broken or disconnected (NT1)?
Is the temperature sensor connector correctly inserted?

f S

Tank temperature sensor out of order


Is the temperature sensor short-circuited (NT1)?

Boiler temperature sensor out of order


Is the temperature sensor broken or disconnected (NT2)?
Is the temperature sensor connector correctly inserted?

Boiler temperature sensor out of order


Is the temperature sensor short-circuited {NT2)?

During rinse phase boiler doesn't empty


Are the rinse arms clogged?
Does the rinse pump work correctly?
Is there water in the level sensor tube?
Is there scale In the boiler?
Does the boiler level sensor work property?
CAUTION: RESETTING THIS ALARM WITHOUT FIRST ELIMINATING THE CAUSE IS
DANGEROUS; THE BOILER HEATING ELEMENTS COULD WORK DRY, FURTHER DAMAGING
THE INTERNAL PARTS OF THE DISHWASHER.
CAUTION: C8 IT MUST BE MANUALLY RESET AFTER ELIMINATING THE CAUSE OF THE
MALFUNCTION.

f 9

Automatic hood out of order


See par. C I - Alann codes for automatic hood type dishwashers.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.87/93

m
Cl

Electrolux

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform


Electrolux Professional

Alarm codes for automatic hood type dishwashers

When the alarm L 3 appears, to facilitate fault-finding another parameter providing a more detailed indication has been
introduced.
The parameter is n L and is found in the
u family.
The possible cause of the anomaly can be found (see table below) according to the value of the parameter n L .
With pot washers the cause that generated afai type alarm can also be found.
E.g.: With an automatic hood type the alami f 9 appears.
Access the parameter n u in the db u family.
Hi. ^ a

=> the top limit switch could be disconnected or intenrupted.

Hood

Pot Washer

FC_DW

S5:FC_UP\

Choex CLOSE]

MOPao

S1: D00R_C1.0SE

f^i.

Appears with hood closed if the top


limit switch (FC_UP) cuts:in.

During lifting, the bottom limit switch (FC_DW)


has not retumed to the rest position.
The limit switch must retum to the rest position
within a time given by the parameter t . 5 :
a) checl< that the motor works.

- the bottom limit switch (S3) returns to the rest


position;
- the top limit switch (S5) cuts in;
- S3" does not cut in.

During the initial lifting phase the bottom limit switch


(S3) must retum to the rest position within a time given
by the parameter t . 5 othenwise the alarm b 3
appears.
-S3 could be stucl(.
- S5' could be disconnected.
On installation this alarm can occur due to incorrect
sequence of the phases: Invert the two phases on the
power supply terminal board.
Appears if during lifting S3" does not return to the rest
position within a time t 1.

3
RL^^

Appears with hood closed, if:

Appears if the bottom limit switch (FC_DW)


cuts in during lifting.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

b 3

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.88/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfomi
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

(Polarity/motor rotation direction inverted?!).

Appears If the bottom limit switch (S3) cuts in during


lifting.
On installatton this alarm can occur due to incon^ct
sequence of the phases: invert the two phases on the
power supply terminal board.

RL. 5

RL.B

BL.l
Bi. 8

TIMEOUT- The time taken for hood lifting was


more than the time fixed by parameter t ^^ :
a) check that the motor wori<s.

TIMEOUT- The time taken for lifting was more than the
time fixed by parameter t c*.
Check conect operation of the:
a) motor (thermal protection N7);
b) top limit switch (S5 and S5').

The hood is open but the bottom limit switch


(FC_DW) has cut in.

Appears with hood fully open, if:

Appears if with hood fully open the "door


closed" microswitch cuts in.

Appears if with hood fully open the "door closed'


microswitch cuts in.
- 85 could be disconnected.

During lowering, the top limit switch (FC_UP)


has not returned to the rest position.
The limit switch must return to the rest position
within a time given by parameter t - fi:
a) check that the motor wori<s;
b) (Polarity/motor rotation direction inverted?!).

- the limit switch (35) returns to the rest position;


- the bottom limit switch (S3) cuts in;
- S3" cuts in.

b 3
During the initial lowering phase the top limit switch
(S5) must return to the rest position wifhin a time given
by the parameter t . 6 othenwise the alarm t 3
appears.
- S5 could be stuck.
- S3' could be disconnected.
On installation, this alarm can occur due to incorrect
sequence of the phases: invert the two phases on the
powersupply terminal board.

RL ^9
RL. i

Appears if the bottom limit switch S3 cuts in before 53


during lowering.
Appears if the top limit switch (FC_UP) cuts in
during lowering.
(Polarity/motor rotation direction inverted?!).

b 3
Appears if the top limit switch (S5) cuts in during
lowering.
On installation, this alarm can occur due to incorrect
sequence of the phases: invert the two phases on the
power supply terminal board.

RL. il

TIMEOUT- The time taken for hood closing


was more than the time fixed by parameter

TIMEOUT- The time taken for towering was more than


the time fixed by parameter t
.^.
- S3' could be disconnected.

a) check that the motor works.

RL. .V
RL. 13

Appears during hood lowering if, after S3" cuts in, the
bottom limit switch S3 does not cut in vwthin the time
fixed by parameter t
J.

The two hand safety contacts K and K'


must be both closed or both open. If this
does not occur the alarm appears.
- One of the two relays (K or K) could be stuck or
disconnected. (See parameter t
V)

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.89/93

Electrolux
EFS - Disliwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

/?L. iH

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

Limit switch combination not allowed:


top limit switch (FC_UP) and bottom limit
switch (FC_DW) activated at the same time!

Limit switch combination not allowed.


Appears If one of the following
combinations occurs:
- top limit switch (S5) and bottom limit switch (S3) both
activated (S3 and S5 could be discornected);
- top limit switch S5 and S3" both cut in;
- bottom limit switch (S3) cut in but not S3".

/?t.?

ni.E r

Bi. SS
Ri. s 3
Hi.iH
Bi. SS

During lifting, the cun^nt absorbed by the


lifting motor has exceeded the threshold (see
parameter ikh):
a) excessive mechanical force during lifting.
During lowering, the cuaent absorbed by the
lifting motor has exceeded the threshold (see
parameter \kh):
a) excessive mechanical force during
lowering.
The hood should be stopped but the card
detects a high current absorption by the lifting
motor:
a)
b)

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

the relay RL18/RL19 could be stuck;


feeder connector CN32 could be
disconnected.

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.90/93

SJ

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolux Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

D Alarms that don't stop the functioning, but suggest to call the service

Communication error
Is the connection Ijetween main tward and control panel correct? Are the connectors conectly
connected?
Are connector contacts clean?

E ?

Tank temperature low


Does the tank heating element work properly?
Are the connectors conectly connected?
Are the dishwasher feed voltage and current correct?
Is the relay RL5 on the board disconnected or faulty?

i 3

Boiler temperature low


Does/do the boiler heating element/s work properly?
Are the connectors correctly connected?
Does the possible remote control switch connected to the heating element work correctly?
Is there power at the remote control switch Input terminals?
Does relay RL2 on the board work properly?
CAUTION: IF THERE IS A MALFUNCTION ON RELAY RL2 AND THE BOILER HEATING
ELEMENTS ARE FED BY MEANS OF A REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH, THE BOARD DOES
NOT HAVE TO BE REPLACED; JUST MOVE THE BOILER HEATING ELEMENT CONNECTOR
TO ONE OF THE TWO FREE POSITIONS ON THE BOARD.
CAUTION: WHEN ONE BRANCH OF THE HEATING ELEMENT DOES NOT WORK AND THE
OTHER TWO CONTINUE TO FUNCTION, ON REACHING THE SET TEMPERATURE VALUE,
ALARM 3 DISAPPEARS AND REAPPEARS IN THE SUBSEQUENT RINSE PHASE. THIS ALSO
OCCURS WHEN A PHASE IS MISSING.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.91/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electrolirx Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE MANUAL

E Alarms that stop the dishwasher for models with incorporated


continuous water softener

p?i

Water softener operation errors


This alarm appears in case of malfunctioning in the continuous water softener.

Communication errors between the mother board and


softener board

f??

This alarm appears in case of problems in communication between the mother board and water softener
board; check the connection between mother board connector Jl and water softener connector ST8.

(.f)

To facilitate the finding of faults signalled by alarm

.another parameter providing a more detailed indication of the possible cause of

malfimctipn has been introduced in the <" O O family (see table below).

f?i

Water softener conductivity sensor short-circuit


Two or more water softener conductivity sensors are short-circuited. Check the connections between the
water softener board and sensors, replacing the connection wiring if necessary.

F^l ^

Water softener conductivity sensors open


One or mote water softener conductivity sensors are disconnected. Check the connections between the
water softener board and sensors, replacing the connection wiring if necessary.

P^t

Resin temperature sensor malfunction


Replace the watersoftener electronic board.

f?', '-i

Water softener electronic board malfunction


Replace the water softener electronic board.

F^l 3

Salt water filling malfunction


The salt water container in the water softener was not completely filled within the set max. filling time.
Make sure;
the water cock is open
^
the water filling solenoid valve works correctly
the salt container solenoid valve works correctly
the feed water pressure is at least 50 kPa / 0.5 bar
the water inlet filter is clean
the filling solenoid valve filter is clean
the salt container cap is properly closed
the mother board (ATM-PRES) connector CN2 is cprrecdy positioned
the water softener board connector ST5 is correctly positioned.

PS t tu

Inefficient resin washing


After carrying out the maximum permissible nuniber of resin washes, the resins are not sufficiently cleaned
by the salt water used to regenerate them.
Make sure:
the water filling solenoid valve works correctly
the feed water pressure is at least 50 kPa / 0.5 bar
the water inlet filter is clean
the filling solenoid valve filter is clean
the mother board (ATM-PRES) connector CN2 is correctly positioned.

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.92/93

Electrolux
EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform
Electroltix Professional

Electronic Dishwasher
SERVICE IVIANUAL

14. LIST OF PARAMETERS FOR SUBSEQUENT VERSIONS


The parameters listed below, even if present inside the software, caimot be used in appliances currently in production.
Family u t O :

parameter n t a

value e ^ f t

iS3

Family S t .

iil

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.93/93

CATALOGO PARTI Dl RICAMBIO


SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE

B] Electrolux
ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL

LAVASTOVIGLIE SOTTOTAVOLO
UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER

WT37 / WT38
Code

Type

PRESSIONE
502019
WT38PM50
502346
WT38PM60
ATMOSFERICA
502007
WT38TDE
502008
WT38/M50
502020
WT37LEV/9
502029
WT38M50/4
502110
WT38DD
502111
WT37
502112
WT38
502117
WT37/4.5
502118
WT38/4.5
502122
WT37UK
502125
WT38C
5021 i26
WT38C60
502127
WT38CUK
502129
V\n"38/4.5NW
502217
WT38UK
502218
WT37J60
502219
WT37J50
502321
WT38/60
502322
WT38/M60
502323
WT38 MED
502347
WT38M60/4

E Pag.
CL
2
to
o
3
CO
4
5
6
Lu
7-12
o

Ref.

Page

t
s

2356
2 3 56

u
q
a
b
c
d
e
f
V
X

y
a1
g
n
o
h
k
m
r

2 3 46
2346
2346
2 34 6
2346
2 3 46
2 3 46
2346
2346
2 3 46
2 3 46
2346
2346
2346
2346
2346
2346
2 3 46
2346
23 4 6
2346

Index
Main view
Hydraulic components
Hydraulic circuit/Atm.
Hydraulic circuit/ Pres.
Electrical components
Spare parts list

Indice
Vistagenerale
Componentiidraulici
Circuitoidraulico/Atm.
Circuitoidraulico/Press.
Componenti elettrici
Lista ricambi

CO

Q. Marchio/Brand:
J
Paese/Country:

E
Tutti / All

ijj

EC I

e
^\

DaSer. Nr. / From ser. nr.: 7214....


Page: 1

Ed. 06-02

Doc. Nr.:

6-11 803

e
Q.

om
00

UJ

Marine Version

CO

CO
CO

at

a.
CO

(D

E
LU
CQ

Ill.611803p2
Da Ser. Nr. / i=^rom ser. nr.: /214,
Page: 2

Ed. 04-04

Doc. Nr.: 6-11 803

n
E
Q.
<rj

00

o
(O
CO

I
1=
LU
DC

ill.611803p3
Da Ser. Nr. / From ser. nr.: /214.
Page: 3

Ed. 02-10

Doc.Nr.: 6-11 803

-itt^)

373

302
CD
CO

._!
m
o
a.
CO

ill.611803p4

UJ

tr
m

Da Ser. Nr, / From ser. nr.: /214....


Page: 4

Ed. 06-02

Doc. Nr.: 6-11 803

461

465

464

T3

E
Q.
ei
o
00

(O
CO
_j

(5
o.

ill.611803p5

CO

Da Ser. Nr. /From ser. nr.: /214.


LU

oc "
CD

Page: 5

Ed. 05-06

Doc.Nr.: 6-11 803

523

' Cablaggio/Wiring hardness: 590

504

51

,/^,i^

E
Q.
CO
O

522

00

526
Lii

O
CO

516 515

514

CO
CO

(0

a.
to
LU

ill.611803p6

tr '
m Da Ser. Nr. /From ser. nr.: /214 .
Page: 6

Ed. 03-12

Doc. Nr.: 6-11 803

LavastovigliesottotavotoWT37/WT38
UndercounterdishwaslierWT37/VVT38
Pos

Code

E
n
C
O
00

Description

Pagina 2: Vista generale

Page 2: Main view

101

046407

Piedinp regolabile

Adjustable foot

101

049393

Piedino regolabile

Adjustable foot

101 0L0118
102 049906
102 0L0105
103 049907
103 0L0106
104 049911
105 OL0532
106 0L0533
108 0L0187
108 0L0534
110 ; 048813
110 0L0717
111 048814
111 : 0L0718
112 048812
113 048815
114 : 049871

Descrizione

Plede a rullo
Pannello laterale;
Pannello laterale;
Pannello laterale;
Pannello laterale;
Pannello frontale
Femio porta
Tappo
Porta elux
Porta
Ass. Leva DX
Ass. Leva DX
Ass. Leva SX
Ass. Leva SX
Bronzina
Molla Porta
Schienale

Ref. / Notes

a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m ,n,,p,u,a1
Up to ser. nr.: 244
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m ,n,o,p,u,a1
From ser. nr.: 245
k,l,p,q,r,s,t,u,v,x,y
Up to ser. nr.: 244
From ser. nr.: 245
Up to ser. nr.: 244
Fromser. nr.: 245

Roller
Side panel; left
Side panel; left
Side panel; right
Side panel; right
Front panel
Door catch
Plug
Door
Door
Assembly Lever right
Assembly Lever right
Assembly Lever left
Assembly Lever left
Bushing
Door spring
Rear panel

sx
sx
dx
dx

114

0L0115

Schienale

Rear panel

114
114
115
116
116

0L0109
0L0476
049872
049929
0L0108

Schienale
Schienale
Traverslno
Coperchio
Coperchio

Rear panel
Rear panel
Lower rear cover
Top panel
Top panel

116
117
117
117
118
119
119
119
119
120
120
121
122
123
124
124
124
125
126
127

0L0107 Coperchio
049875 Protezione superiore
0L0104 Protezione superiore
0L0535 Protezione superiore
047511 Piolino
049493 Ass. supporto Cesto sx
0L0516 Ass. supporto Cestp
048466 ; Ass. supporto Cesto dx
0L0516 Ass. supporto Cesto
049930 Profile adesivo 15x3
0L0113 Profilo adesivo
049931 Velcro Autoad. Maschio su vasca
0L0114 Pannello di rinforzo
0E5559 Guarnizione
049932 Guarnizione; cornice vasca
049892 Guarnizione; cornice vasca
0L0536 Guarnizione; cornice vasca
OL0531 Prot.Poliest.Trasp. 520X320
0L0112 Copertura passatubi
049931 Velcro Autoad. Femmina PVC

P
P
not for"p"
P
Up to ser. nr.: 526
From ser. nr.: 527
Up to ser. nr.: 526
From ser. nr.: 527

not for "s,t,u"


Up to ser. nr.: 244
notfor"s,t,u"
From ser. nr.: 245
s,t
u,v,x,y
Up to ser. nr.: 244
Up to ser. nr.: 244
Not for " a l "
From ser. nr.: 245
al
Up to ser. nr.: 244
Fromser. nr.: 245
P

Top panel
Upper protection
Upper protection
Upper protection
Pin
Support; for basket
Support; for basket
Support; for basket
Support; for basket
Gasket
Gasket
Stik
Insulation
Gasket
Gasket door
Gasket door
Gasket door
Gasket
Hoses protection
Stik

Up to ser. nr.: 413


Fromser. nr.: 414
Up to ser. nr.: 413
Fromser. nr.: 414
Up to ser. nr.: 244
From ser. nr.: 245
k,i,p,q,r,s,t
From ser. nr.: 245
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m,n,o,u,v,x,y,a1
k,l,q,r,s,t
P
k,l,p,q,r,s,t
From ser. nr.: 245
k,l,p,q,r,s,t

(D
Lil

z
CO
201

?
CO
"
(0
O)

ai

o:
m
2

202
202
202
202
202
202
203

GA2914
049885
049916
049876
0L0342
0L0345
049896
046878

Pagina 3: Component! idraulicl

Page 3: Hydraulic components

Condensatore per pompa lavaggio


Pompa Lavaggio
60Hz
Pompa Lavaggio
60Hz
Pompa Lavaggio
50Hz
Pompa Lavaggio
Pompa Lavaggio
Pompa Lavaggio
Fascetta 38-50

Capacitor; 16mF
Wash pump
60Hz
Wash pump
60Hz
Wash pump
50Hz
Wash pump
Wash pump
Wash pump
Hose clamp 38-50

Da Ser, Nr. / Fronnser. nr.:

/214....

h,x
k,r,s
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,m,p,u,v,y,a1
n-60Hz
0 -50Hz
l,q,t
50Hz

'^

Page: 7

Ed. 06-02

>

Doc. Nr.:

^ ^

dA

mJt

tf^^^tf%h

6-11 803

Lavastoviglie sottotavolo WT37 / WT38


Undercounter dishwasher W t 3 7 / W T 3 8
Pos

Code

Descrizione

Description

204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
212
213
214

045768
048325
049828
046596
049894
046799
048326
048324
048323
048842
046257
048844

Tubo Gomma 45x55


Coll. Asp. Scafico
Guarnlz. Tappo Ter. Sc.
Tappo Terminale Sc.
OR 4*110 Asp Sc.
OR Troppo Pleno
Ghlera collettore Asp. Sc.
Filtro Asp. Pompa
Troppo pleno
Troppo pleno
Tubo 42x52
Pompa scarico

Hose
Drain manifold
Gasket
Plug; for manifold
0 Ring
0 Ring
Ring nut; for manifold
Filter; for pump
Overflow pipe
Overflow pipe
Hose
Drain pump

214

0L0690

Pompa scarico

Drain pump

214

048939

Pompa scarico

Drain pump

214

0L0527

Pompa scarico

Drain pump

215
216
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
228
229
230
231
232
233
235
235

049877
049933
049878
049856
049878
049445
049934
049470
OL0078
049908
049935
049936
047578
046878
048853
049268
068642
046946
048822
OL0095

Manicotto asp. scarico


Tubo Scarico
Tubo Scarico
Tubo Scarico
Tubo Scarico
Fasc.Torro 16-27/9
Raccordo coll.tubo marine
Tubo Pvc
Supporte Filtro
Ass. Filtro Vasca
Supporte Centr. Flltri
Supp. Ant. Flltri
Fascetta 26-38 9MM
Fascetta 28-50
Nasello per vasca
Dado ES.M14X1,5
OR 3062; 2,62X15,54
Fase. Torro. W2 8-12/7,5 1VP
Ass tubo Lavagglo
Ass tubo Lavagglo

Coupling; drain
Drain pipe
Drain pipe
Drain pipe
Drain pipe
Clip
Connection
Pipe
Filter support
t a n k filter
Support; filters
Support; filters
Hose clamp 26-38
Hose clamp 38-50
Spigot; air relief
Nut; M14x1,5
0 Ring
Hose clamp 8-12
Hose
Hose

Pagina 4: Circuito jdraullco/Atm.

Page 4: Hydraulic circuit / Atm.

not for "s,t"


notfor"u,ar
Up to ser. nr.: 521
notfor"u,a1"
From ser. nr.: 522

301

049625

Pompa perist. Brlllantante

Pump; rinse aid

301

0L0697

Pompa perist. Brlllantante

Pump; rinse aid

302
303

049905
049624

Tubo mandata; rigldo (blanco)


Pompa perist. Detergente

Delivery hose; rigid (wtiite)


Pump; detergent

303

0L0696

Pompa perist. Detergente

Pump; detergent

304
308
308
309
311

OL0478
049902
0L0283
048447
049310

Connessione
Boller atmosferico
Boller atmosferico
Isolante per boiler
Pompa rise. 230V 50Hz

Connection
Boiler
Boiler
Insulation; for boiler
Rinse pump

311

0L1079

Pompa rise. 230V 50Hz

Rinse pump

311
311

0L0020
0L1099

Pompa rise. 2P0V60Hz


Pompa rise. 20PV 60Hz

Rinse pump
Rinse pump

-a

E
Q.
CO

O
00

<
111

6CO

^
CO

_!
o
Q.
(0

Ref. / Notes

b,d,f,n,o,u
a,c,e,g,h,k,m,p,r,SiV,x,y,a1
a,c,e,gil,m,p,q,t,v,y,a1 -50hz
Up to ser. nr.: 518
a,c,e,g,l,m,p,q,t,v,y,a1 - 50tiz
From ser. nr.: 519
h,k,r,s,x - 60fiz
Up to ser. nr.: 520
ti,k,r,s,x-60tiz
From ser. nr.: 521
a,c,e,g,h,k,m,p,r,s,v,x,y,a1
k,l,q,r
s,t
b,d,f,n,o,u
a,c,e,g,h,m,p,v,x,y,a1

a,c,e,g,fi,m,p,v,x,y,a1
a,c,e,g,fi,m,p,v,x,y,a1
a,c,e,g,h,m,p,v,x,y,a1
a,c,e,g,h,m,p,v,x,y,a1
Up to ser. nr.: 244
From ser. nr.: 245

a,f,g,l,k,p,q,r,v,x,y
Up to ser. nr.: 521
a,f,g,l,k,p,q,r,v,x,y
From ser. nr.: 522
u,v,x,y
Up to ser. nr.: 317
From ser. nr.: 318
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,m,p,u,v,y,a1
Up to ser. nr.: 607
a,b,e,d,e,f,g,m,p,u,v,y,a1
From ser. nr.: 608
n - Up to ser. nr.: 607
n - From ser. nr.: 608

tu
CC

Da S er. Nr. / F rom ser. nr.:

/214....
Page: 8

Ed. 06-02

Doc. Nr.: 6-11 803

Lavastoviglie sottotavolo W T 3 7 / W T 3 8
Undercounter dishwasher W T 3 7 / W T 3 8
Pos

Code

311
311
311
311
311
311
312
312

Descrizione

Description

Ref. / Notes

049965
O U 102
049612
OLI100
049813
OL1101
049260
083406

Pompa rise. 200V 50Hz


Pompa rise. 200V 50Hz
Pompa rise. 220V 60Hz
Pompa rise. 220V60Hz
Pompa rise. 440V 60Hz
Pompa rise. 440V60Hz
Condensatore per pompa rise.
Condensatore per pompa rise.

Rinse pump
Rinse pump
Rinse pump
Rinse pump
Rinse pump
Rinse pump
Capacitor
Capacitor

0 - Up to ser. nr.: 607


0 - F r o m ser. nr.: 608
h,x - Up to ser. nr.: 607
h,x - From ser. nr.: 608
k,r - Up to ser. nr.: 607
k,r - From ser. nr.: 608
6,3pF - k,r,n,o
5,0(jF-a,b,c,d,e,f,g,m,p,
u,v,y,h,x,a1

313
314
314
316
316
318
318
319
320
320
321
321
322
323
324
325
326
326
327
328

0L0481
049880
OL1108
049289
0L0365
049628
0L0098
049287
049772
0L0367
049773
OL0117
046878
048824
048126
048531
048823
0L0110
047578
049459

Tubo brillantante (blu)


Manieotto asp. Risciaquo
lUlanicottoasp. Risciaquo
Raccordo 3 vie d.27
Raccordo 3 vie d.27
Trappola D'aria; boiler
Trappla D'aria; boiler
Tubo EPDM 25.5x32
Fascetta ElastiCa
Fascetta Cobra
tubo 26x37
tubo 26x37
Fascetta a vite 35 -50
Ghiera Supp. Getti Sup.
Fascetta a vite 13-20
Tubo EPDM 12x19.5
Guarnizione Supp. GettI Sup.
Guamizlone Supp. GettI Sup.
Fascetta 26-38
AirGapstd

Rinse aid pipe (blue)


Coupling; rins
Coupling; rins
Connection 3 way; diam 27-12
Connection 3 way; diam 27-12
Air trap; boyler
Air trap; boyler
Hose; diam 25
Hose clamp
Hose clamp
Hose
Hose
Hose clamp 35-50
Ring nut
Hose clamp 13-20
Hose
Gasket
Gasket
Hose clamp 26-38
Air gap

328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
343

049481
049828
049460
049480
048290
048716
0L0598
048714
048632
048401
048330
048236
048979
048820
048819
049452
0L0121

Air Gap UK
Guamizlone per AG
OR per Ghiera AG
Gtiiera per A.G.
Remo risciaquo
Ass. Portagetti Rise.
Ass. Getti Lavavaggio
Tappo Getti rise.
Rondella di Fermo Lavaggio
Mozzo per Getti Lav.
Ghiera Fiss. Supp. Getti
Guarnizione LS7 e 8
Seger
Parzializzatore
Supp. Getti Inf.
Elettrovalvola; 5,5 l/min
Elettrovalvola; 5,5 l/min

Air gap; WRC


Gasket
0 Ring
Ring nut
Pin; for rinse jets
Rinse jet
Washing arms assembly
Plug
Lock washer
Hub
Ring nut
Gasket
C-Clamp
Flow reducer
Jets support; lower
El.valve; 5,5 l/min
El.valve; 5,5 l/min

343
343

0LO567
049626

Elettrovalvola; 5,5 l/min


Elettrovalvola; 10 l/min

Electric valve; 5,5 l/min


Electric valve; 10 l/min

343

0L0568

Elettrovalvola; 10 l/min

Electric valve; 10 l/min

344
345

049201
049540

Guarnizione
Ass. Tubo alim. D.

Gasket; diam 3/4


Water inlet pipe, 2100mm

345
346
c6 350
m
-j
351
o 352
o. 355
356

049378
049801
048308
068642
049268
0L0082
049477

Ass. Tubo alim. UK


Iniettore Det. AISI304
Trappola d'aria per pressest.
OR 2062x15.54
Dado M14x1.5
Fascetta Elastica su Main Board
Manometre

Water inlet pipe, WRC, 2100mm


Injection spigot
Air trap
O Ring
Nut;M14x1,5
Hose clamp
Manometer

1
Q.

Up to ser. nr.: 607


From ser. nr.: 608
Up to ser. nr.: 329
From ser. nr.: 330
Up to ser. nr.: 244
From ser. nr.: 245
Up to ser. nr.: 329
From ser. nr.: 330
Up to ser. nr.: 244
From ser. nr.: 245

Up to ser. nr.: 244


From ser. nr:: 245
a,b,c,d,e,h,l,k,
m,n,o,q,r,u,v,x,a1
f.g.p.y

f,g - Up to ser. nr.: 237


f jg - From ser. nr.: 238
Up to ser. nr.: 427
f,g - From ser. nr.: 428
a,b,c,d,e,h,k,l,m,q,r,u,a1
Up to ser. nr.: 427
a,b,c,d,e,h,k,l,m,q,r,u,a1
From ser. nr.: 428

CO
O

00
1

CO

LU

a,b,c,d,e,h,k,l.
m,n,o,q,r,u,v,x,a1
f.g.y

z.
O.
CO

t
lli
DC
CD
_1

Da Ser. Nr. / F rom ser. nr.:

/214....

v..^

Page: 9

Ed. 06-02

k,l,q,r

A >

Doc. Nr.:

^ ^

-Jl

-M

^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^

6-11 803

Lavastoviglie sottotavolo W T 3 7 / W T 3 8
Undercounter dishwasher WT37 / WT38

li

'

Pos

Code

Descrizione

Description

Ref./Notes

357
358
359
360
361

049543
049541
072457
068121
048834

Nipplo3/4G
Valvola antiflusso
Raccordo 3/4X3/4MM OT
Filtro acqua 3/4
Ass.filtro 3/4 G

Nipple
Valve
Nipple
Filter
Filter

k,l,q,r
k,l,q,r
k,l,q,r
k,l,q,r
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m,p,u,v,x,y,a1

362
364
365
368
369
370

049201
048883
049881
048531
072393
048531

Guamizione; diam 3/4


Tubo 5x12 gomma
Pressostato
Tubo EPDM 12x19.5
Tubo EPDM 4x7.4
Tubo EPDM 12x19.5

Gasket; diam 3/4


Hose; 5x12
Pressure switch
Hose
Hose
Hose

a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m,j3,uv,x,y,a1 :

370
371
372
373
379
380
381
382
382
383
383
383
384
384
385
385
385
386
386
386
387
387
388
389
390

049379
0L0349
049419
049418

Tubo gomma 11.5x19.5 WRC


Assieme tappo
Tubo; interno, pompa det.
Tubo; interno, pompa brill.

Hose; WRC
Plug assembly
Hose; internal, del. Punfip
Hose;internal, rin. aid pump

072457
068121
049650
049510
072457
049508
0L0477
0L0477
0L0318
0L0570
049473
0L0479
0L0479
0LO17O
049650
049650
0L0537
0L0423
0L0602
0L0528
0L0529

Raccordo
Assieme filtro acqua
Parzializzatore 16 l/min
Nipplo ottone 3/4"
Nipplo ottone 3/4"
Portagomma
Portagomma
Portagomma
Elettrovalvola
Elettrovalvola
Nipplo ottone 3/4"- 3/8"
Nipplo ottone 3/4"- 3/8"
Nipplo ottone 3/4"- 3/8"
Parzializzatore 5.5 l/min
Parzializzatore 10 l/min
Parzializzatore 10 t/min
Elettrovalvola
Elettrovalvola
Connettore elettrovalvola
Snsor di livello detergente
Sensore dl livello brillantante

Nipple
Assembly filter
Hydraulic shutter 16 l/min
Brass nipple 3/4"
Brass nipple 3/4
Fitting
Fitting
Fitting
Electric valve
Electric valve
Brass nipple 3/4"-3/8"
Brass nipple 3/4"- 3/8"
Brass nipple 3/4"-3/8
Hydraulic shutter 5.5 l/min
Hydraulic shutter 10 l/min
Hydraulic shutter 10 l/min
Electric valve
Electric valve
Electric valve connector
Detergent float switch
Rinse aid float switch

P
n,o - From ser. nr.: 428
v,x,y
P.v,y
x
P.v,x,y
u,v,x,y
u,v,x,y

Pagina 5: CIrculto Idraulico / Press

Page 5: Hydraulic circuit / Pres.

only for "s,t"

a,b,c,d,e,h,k;l,m,
n,o,q,r,u,v,x,a1
f.g.p-y

n,o
n,o
n,o - Up to ser. nr.: 427
n,o - Up to ser. nr.: 427
n,o - From ser. nr.: 428
n,o - Up to ser. nr.: 427
n,0 - From ser. nr.: 428
P,v,x,y
n,o - Up to ser. nr.: 427
n,o - From ser. nr.: 428
n,o - Up to ser. nr.: 427
n,o - From ser. nr.: 428
P.v,x,y

"'}

._ /

402 049360 Tubo mandata; rigido


403 0L0696 Pompa perist. Detergente
408 0L0734 Boller a pressione
409 048447 Isolante per boiler
o
423 048824 Ghiera Supp. Getti Sup.
E
o. 424 048126 Fascetta a vite 13-20
ri 425 048531 Tubo EPDM 12x19.5
o
00
426 048823 Guamizione Supp. Getti Sup.
\CO 432 048290 Perno risciacquo
433 048716 Ass. Portagetti Rise.
434 0L0598 Ass. getti lavaggio
LU
5 435 048714 Tappo Getti rise.
& 436 048632 Rondelia di Fermo Lavaggio
ro 437 048401 Mozzp per Getti Lav.
c6 438 048330 Ghiera Fiss. Supp. Getti
05
439 048236 Guamizione
1
(5 440 048979 Anello elastico
o 441 048820 Parzializzatore
CL
442 048619 Supp. Getti Inf.
443 0L0566 Elettrovalvola; 20 l/m
444 049201 Guamizione
ir
m Da Ser. Nr. / From ser. nr.: /214 ....
Page: 1 0

Delivery hose; rigid


Pump; detergent
Boiler
Insulation; for boiler
Ring nut
Hose clamp 13-20
Hose
Gasket
Pin; for rinse jets
Rinse jet
Washing arms assenibly
Plug
Lock washer
Hub
Ring nut
Gasket
Retaining ring
Flow reducer
Jets support; lower
Solenoid valve; 20 l/m
GASKET; DIAM 3/4
Ed. 06-02

Doc. Nr.:

6-11 803

Lavastoviglie sottotavolo W T 3 7 / W T 3 8
Undercounter dishwasher W t 3 7 / W T 3 8

Jlk

Pos

Code

445
446
450
451
452
461
462
464
465
466
467
471
472
473
474
475
476

048816
049801
048308
068642
049268
048834
049201
049904
049881
048195
049332
0L0349
049419
049026
046946
048883
L0094

Descrizione

Description

Ref. / Notes

Ass.Tubo alimentazione
Iniettore Det. AISI304
Trappola d'aria per pressost.
OR 2062x15.54
Dado M14X1.5
Ass.filtro 3/4 G
Guarnizione; diam 3/4
Tubo
Pressostato
Raccordo 3 vie
Valvola DVGW
Assieme tappo
Tubo; interno, pompa det.
Portagomma Brill.
Fase. Torro W2 8-12/7,5 IVP
Tubo gomma 5X12
Dosatore idraulico

Pipe; straight + 90 degr, 2100mm


Iniection spigot
Air trap
0 Ring
Nut; Ml 4x1,5
Filter
Gasket; diam 3/4
Hose
Pressure switch
Connection 3 way; diam 12
Solenoid valve
Plug assembly
Hose; internal, det. Pump
Rubber holder
Hose clamp 8-12
Hose; 5x12
Dispenser; for rinse aid

Pagina 6: Componenti elettrici

Page 6: Electrical components

501
501

049897
0L0279

Interfaccia utente
Interfaccia utente

User Interface
User Interface

Up to ser. nr.: 317


From ser. nr.: 318
Up to ser. nr.: 330
From ser.nr.: 331
Up to ser. nr.: 421
not for "p"
From ser. nr.: 422
Up to ser. nr.: 523
not for "p"
From ser. nr.: 524
p - From ser. nr.: 422
Up to ser. nr.: 523
p - From ser. nr.: 524

501

0L0047

Interfaccia utente

User Interface

501

0L0552

Interfaccia utente

User Interface

501

OL0726

Interfaccia utente

User Interface

501

0L0538

Interfaccia utente

User Interface

501
502
503
504
504
505

0L0726
002670
049621
049937
0L0539
0L0032

Interfaccia utente
Prolunga pulsante
Snsore reed
Assieme cruscotto E.lux
Assieme cruscotto
Membrana adesiva

User Interface
Extension
Sensor
Control panel
Control panel
Stick membrane

505
505
505
506
506
507
T3
508
E: 508
o.
ri 509
o 509

0L1116
0L0681
0L0281
049883
0L0540
048888
048736
048736
049910
0L0045

Membrana adesiva
Membrana adesiva
Membrana adesiva
Trasform. 80VA 400..440/230V
Trasform. 30VA 180/254V
Rel
Contattore K209
Contattore K209
Scheda mad re
Scheda mad re

Stick membrane
Stick membrane
Stick membrane
Transform. 80VA 400..440/230V
Transform. 30VA 180/254V
Relay; 230v, 2 cont, step 5
Contactor; 200V, 50/60H2, 25A
Contactor; 200V, 50/60H2, 25A
Main board
Main board

Scheda madre

Main board

00
t

<D

509

0L0541

UJ

509
510
511
511
512
513
513
513
513

0L0705 ! Scheda madre


049303 Filtro RFI trifase
049618 Morsettiera Princ.
0L0111 Morsettiera Princ.
048429 Fissaggio Res. Vasca
049954 Res. Vasca 2kW-230V
048924 Res. Vasca 2.2kW-230V
048925 Res. Vasca 2.2kW-200V
048998 Res. Vasca 2.2kW-440V

z
CO

CO
O
Q.
(0
(D

Main board
RFI filter; three phase
Junction box
Junction box
Bracket
Heating
Heating
Heating
Heating

element;
element;
element;
element;

230V,
230V,
200V,
440V,

not for "p"


P
Not for "m,p,u,v,x,y,a1"
Electrolux
al
u,v,x,y - Cafe Line
m,p - Medical Line
k,l,q,r,s,t
P
k,l,q,r,s,t
k,r,s
l,q,t
Uptoser. nr.: 220
From Ser. nr.: 221
Up to Ser. nr.: 421
From Ser. nr.: 422
Uptoser. nr.: 523
From Ser. nr.: 524
Uptoser. 244
From ser. 245

2,0kW
2,2kW
2,2kW
2,2kW

f.g.y
a,b,c,d,e,h,m,p,u,v,x,a1
n,o
k,r,s

LU

CD

Da Ser. Nr. / From ser. nr.:

/214....

^^

Page: 11

Ed. 05-06

Poc. Nr.:

-JS - ^

^ ^ ^ ^

dl%

6-11 803

Lavastoviglie sottotavolo W T 3 7 / W T 3 8
Undercounter dishwasher W T 3 7 / W T 3 8
Pos

Descrizione

Description

Ref. / Notes

513 048990
514 049580
514 0L0366
515 046376
516 049643
518 0E5037
519 049898
519 049992
519 049899
519 049900
519 0L0343
520 067898
520 046376
521 067899
521 0L0280
522 049884
522 : 049643
523 049939
524 049940
526 049901

Res. Vasca 2.2kW-400V


Supp Sensore NTC
Supp Sensore
OR 2037
Sensore NTC
OR 6225
Res. Flangiata 6kW 230V
Res. Flangiata 9kW 230V
Res. Flangiata 4.5kW 230V
Res. Flangiata 6kW 254V
Res. Flangiata 4.5kW 200V
OR 2025-1,78X6,07
OR 2037
Premistoppa
Prennistoppa
Sonda di Temperatura
Sonda di Temperatura
Guamizione DX Crusc. El.
Guamizione SX Crusc. El.
Filtro induttivb-cap.; monofase

Heating element; 400V, 2,2kW


Support; sensor
Support; sensor
0 Ring 2037
Sensor
O-Ring
Heating element 6kW 230V
Heating element 9.0kW 230V
Heating element 4.5kW 230V
Heating element 6kW 254V
Heating element 4.5kW 200V
0 Ring
0 Ring
Stuffing box
Stuffing box
Temp, sound
Temp, sound
Gasket right
Gasket left
filter; single phase

l,q,t
Up to ser. nr.: 329
From ser. nr.: 330

527
528
529
590
590

0L0542
0L0543
0L0544
0L0049
0L0050

Elettromagnete
Guarnizione elettromagnete
Guamizione cruscotto
Cabiaggio
Cablaggio

Electromagnet
Electromagnet gasket
Control panel gasket
Wiring hardness
Wiring hardness

590

0L0465

Cabiaggio

Wiring hardness

590
590

0L0545
0L0530

Cablaggio aggluntivo
Cabiaggio aggluntivo

Additional wiring harness


Additional wiring harness

Code

a,b,c,f,g,h,l,m,p,q,t,y
u,v,x
d,e,a1
k,r,s
n,o
Up to ser. nr.: 317
From to ser. nr.: 318
Up to ser. nr.: 317
From to ser. nr.: 318
Up to ser. nr.: 317
From to ser. nr.: 318

a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,
m,n,o,p,u,v,x,y,a1
P
P
P
notfor"l,k,q,r,s,t"
l,k,q,r,s,t
Up to ser. nr.: 237
l,k,q,r,s,t
f r o m ser. nr.: 238
P
u,v,x,y

x>
E

o.
cj
o
m
1
T;
1

(O

LU

6
CO
(O
CO

_i
ri
(0

o
a

IB
0)

UJ

oc
m

Da S er. Nr. / From ser. nr.:

/214 ....
Page: 1 2

Ed. 05-06

Doc. Nr.: 6-11 803

r)

ru
CC

a:

(.)

ZX

:x

CJ

cC
ro

CD

CC

>

r*

LU

CC

i.

_J

C_> CE

o
o
CC
2 : 2 : 2 :
O

Q-

LU

cr

0
0

tn

n
r

i n

CC

^s.

rf'

r r

_ j

(>

_!.

r*

LU

til

h l

2 :
0
e j

i n
IH
fi

111

CT

f^

. ^_ '^

^-

i -

U)
OL

i."

CD

i r

ri

tn

i r

Ilt

rxLuo
L
n_j_i
u-

1
fTl

7"

cr
1

-r

c/l

--- .^

CLQ-Q.

Q:c\j

o : 2 : LU
rDcx>-

IH

CC
LU
CC
i a-

V
7-

re
n

f 1
h-

z:

:^

H
CC

^1

r~~

i n

CT

11

Il 1

Ml
(1
en

IH

LJ

1
2:
III

a)il

r-j

ca

CC

f )

rr
ht
a:

rr

2 :

t )

o:

CO
LJ

f^

in

1,1

'

'

I 5006 263 00 2/3


I
I I

"

- I M

il

I I

11

1 .

.-n-

^ '

-I

II

II

i> . 1

II

>

xi>>

P.

RINSE AID
DISPENSER
MAX. 30 VA

. ENERGY
MANftGHENT
SWITCH

DETERGENT
DISPENSER
MAX. 30 VA

THREE PHASE WITHOUT


NEUTRAL CONNECTION
400-440 V 50/60 Hz

iL

"

-JT-

iv

re-

~r-

'

--

'

. 1

1 .

I-

I .1 ' ^ ^

I .j':-a/V

=.
r.^.^

^-JV

Philips HD7448 Coffee Maker

Special features:
Good value for money. The Philips HD 7448 makes good hot coffee
quickly and easily. Translucent water reservoir. The distinctive water
reservoir looks good and improves visibility of the water level. Water
level indicator on jug. Markings on the jug ensure that you use the exact
amount of water that you need.
Technical specifications:
Brewing time: 7 minutes for the full jug.
Capacity: Holds 1.31. Makes from 10-15 cups
Coffee temperature after brewing: 82- C
Colour: White/blue
Filter size: 1 x 4
Material appliance: Polypropylene
Power consumption: 1100W
Voltage: 100V,120V,230V/50-60Hz
Weight: 1.37kg
Standard features
Cord storage: at rear for safety and a neat and tidy countertop. Swing
filter. Drip-stop function. Pilot lamp for safety. Lets you know when the
coffee maker is on.

HD7448, HD7446

.^

PHILIPS

t i

II

^'-'V^
46

46
I

ENGLISH 6
DEUTSCH 13
FRANCAIS 20
NEDERLANDS 27
ESPANOL 34
I T A L I A N 0 4I
PORTUGUES 48
NORSK 55
SYENSKA6i
SUOMI 67
DANSK 73
EAAHNIKA 79
TRKQE 87
INDONESIA 94
1111*1 m a 101

Q
Z
CO

o
Z

^_HJ^

112

^j\3\\Q

Important
Read these instructions for use carefully before using the appliance and
save them for future reference.
Check if the voltage indicated on the appliance corresponds to
the local mains voltage before you connect the appliance.
Do not use the appliance if the mains cord, the plug or the
appliance itself is damaged.
If the mains cord is damaged, it must be replaced by Philips, a
service centre authorised by Philips or similarly qualified persons
in order to avoid a hazard.
Do not place the appliance on a hot surface and prevent the
mains cord from coming into contact with hot surfaces.
Keep the appliance and its cord out of the reach of children. Do
not let the mains cord hang over the edge of the table or
worktop on which the appliance is standing.
Never immerse the appliance in water or any other liquid.
Unplug the appliance before cleaning it and if problems occur
during brewing.
Preparing for use
Clean the jug and the filter holder (see chapter 'Cleaning').
Put the appliance on a flat and stable surface.
Put the plug in an earthed wall socket.
I

You can store excess cord by pushing it into the opening at the
back of the coffee maker (fig. I).
Prevent the cord from coming into contact with hot surfaces.
Flushing the appliance
Open the lid (fig. 2).
Fill the water tank with cold fresh water and put the jug in place
(fig. 5).
Do not put a filter and ground coffee in the filter holder.

ENGLISH
I Switch the appliance on by pressing the on/off switch (fig. 4).
The light goes on (HD7448 only).
Let the appliance run until the water tank is completely empty.
Switch the appliance off when all the water is in the jug.
Let the appliance cool down for at least 3 minutes before you
start brewing coffee.
Using the appliance
Brewing coffee
Open the lid (fig. 2).
Fill the water tank fresh cold with water (fig. 5).
The graduations on the left are for large cups (120 ml).
The graduations on the right are for small cups (80 ml).
Close the lid.
Place the jug on the hotplate.
Make sure you place the jug properly on the hotplate.

If you don't place the jug properly on the hotplate, the drip stop will
prevent the coffee fronn flowing into the jug and the filter may overflow
as a result.
Open the filter holder (fig. 6).

I Take a paper filter (type 1x4 or no. 4) and fold the sealed edges
to prevent tearing and folding.
In some countries this coffee maker comes with a permanent filter In
that case you should not use paper filters.
Put the filter in the filter holder.
Put pre-ground coffee (filter-fine grind) in the filter (fig. 7).
For large cups: use one heaped measuring spoon of ground coffee for
each cup.

ENGLISH

For snnall cups: use one level measuring spoon of ground coffee for
each cup.
Close the lid.
LjJ Switch the appliance on by pressing the on/off switch (fig. 4).
The light goes on (HD7448 only).
When all the water has passed through the filter, you can
remove the jug from the appliance.
Switch the appliance off after use.
Let the appliance cool down for at least 3 minutes before you
start brewing coffee again.
3 Remove the filter holder and throw the paper filter away.
If you have used the permanent filter, empty and rinse it.
Cleaning
Always unplug the appliance before you start cleaning it.
Never immerse the appliance in water.
I Clean the outside of the appliance with a moist cloth.
Detach the filter holder.
Clean the jug and the removable filter holder in hot water with
some washing-up liquid or in the dishwasher (fig. 8).
After cleaning, rinse the jug with fresh hot water.
Descaling
Regular descaling will prolong the life of the appliance and will
guarantee optimal brewing results for a long time.
In case of normal use (two full jugs of coffee every day), descale the
coffee maker
- 2 or 3 times a year if you are using soft water;

ENGLISH
- 4 or 5 times a year if you are using hard water.
Turn to your local water board for infomnation about the water
hardness in your area.
Fill the water tank with white vinegar. Do not put a filter and
ground coffee in the filter holder.
Let the appliance complete two brewing cycles.
See chapter 'Using the appliance'. Let the appliance cool down before
you start the second run.
KJLet the appliance complete two more brewing cycles with fresh,
cold water to remove all vinegar residues.
I

You can also use an appropriate liquid descaler. In this case,


follow the instructions on the package of the descaler.

Do not use a descaling powder.


Clean the separate parts (see chapter 'Cleaning').
Accessories
You can order a new jug from your Philips dealer or a Philips
service centre under type number HD7983/70 (white) or
HD7983/20 (black).
You can order a permanent filter from your Philips dealer or a
Philips service centre under reference number 4822 48050 479
(permanent nylon coffee filter).
Environment
Do not throw the appliance away with the normal household
waste at the end of its life, but hand it in at an official collection
point for recycling. By doing this you will help to preserve the
environment (fig. 9).

10

ENGLISH
Guarantee & service

If you need information or if you have a problem, please visit the Philips
website at www.philips.com or contact the Philips Customer Care
Centre in your country (you will find its phone number in the
worldwide guarantee leaflet). If there is no Customer Care Centre in
your country, turn to your local Philips dealer or contact the Service
Department of Philips Domestic Appliances and Personal Care BV.

ENGLISH

II

Troubleshooting
Problem

Solution

The appliance doesn't work.

Check if
- the appliance is plumed in,
- the voltage indicated on the
appliance corresponds to the local
mains voltage.
- the appliance is switched on.
- in all other cases, contact the Philips
Customer Care Centre.

Water leaks out of the appliance.

Check if:
- the water tank has not been filled
beyond the MAX level.
- in all other cases, contact the Philips
Customer Care Centre.

The appliance takes a long time to


brew coffee.

Descale the appliance (see chapter


'Descaling').

The appliance produces a lot of noise Check if


and steam during the brewing process.
- the water tank has been filled with
COLD water
Descale the appliance (see chapter
'Descaling').
Coffee grounds end up in the jug.

Check if
- the filter holder hasn't overflowed
because there is too much ground
coffee in the filter.
- the filter holder hasn't overflowed
because the jug jas not been placed
correctly under the filter holder

ENGLISH

Problem

Solution
- the opening in the bottom of the
filter holder isn't clogged.
- the right size of paper filter has been
used.
- the paper filter isn't torn.

The coffee is too weak

Check if:
- the right proportion of coffee to
water has been used.
- the paper filter hasn't collapsed.
- the right size of paper filter has been
used.

The coffee doesn't taste good.

Don't leave the jug with coffee on the


hotplate too long, especially not if it
only contains a small amount of coffee.

The coffee isn't hot enough.

Check if:
- the jug has been properly placed on
the hotplate.
- the hotplate and the jug are clean
(see chapter 'Cleaning').
W e advise you to brew more than
three cups of coffee to ensure that the
coffee has the right temperature.
Tips:
- use thin cups, because they will
absorb less heat from the coffee than
thick cups.
- don't use cold milk from the fridge.

There is less coffee in the jug than


expected.

Check if the jug has been properly


placed on the hotplate. If this isn't the
case, the drip stop will prevent the
coffee from flowing out of the filter.

l\3

O B

= j .

206991-

=4

=JV.

en

,A.

c=A
c==!ls

^ -_jM*f:Li

C-

^j^^i^fa- K'feL'S^.-. V^h;^-^ kaaai:^^

=^

_jiiaetai1>id

Ol

S] Electrolux
Ironing boards,
wall mounted/free-standing

'\

Model 62 05 72

Model 62 Ol 35

WALL MOUNTED:

SPACE SAVING

FOLD-UP EXECUTION

ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT

FREE-STANDING:

ROBUST CONSTRUCTION

SLEEVE BOARD INCLUDED

ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT

ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL AB
MARINE DIVISION
SE 441 82 Alingss, Sweden
Phone +46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
pa.marineinfo@electrolux.se

The wall mounted ironing board is easily


adjustable in ergonomically right working
height. When not in use, the board can be
folded up in up-right position with minimal
space need.

The robust, free-standing ironing board is


easily adjustable in ergonomically right
working height. The board is provided
with fold-away iron tray and can be
completed with a sleeve board included in
the delivery.
For further specifications of the different
models, please see overleaf.

19-040
DOC.NO.

EDITIONS

19-040BM

01.01

IRONING BOARDS, WALL MOUNTED/FREE-STANDING

Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm

1590

max 900

ja_

\
<\
Ironing board, wall mounted, model 62 01 35

Ironing board, firee-standing, model 62 05 72

Specification
Weight kgs
Model

Execution

62 0135
62 05 72

wall mounted
free-standing

Shipping

net

gross

volume m^

10

0.050
0.080

Ironing board, wall mounted, installation:

6 Hote dia=o6

Max. 950

420

Up-right
position

,>-

19-040
Subject to changes without notice.

"Adjustable min/max working height


over fit flor level.

o:
o-

>02

c==A

2069914

,!k

=A

om

c=A.

4^

c=A,

=?.

=A
^

=^

. ^-jik.l>satiju&

Ol

i\3

M LOiPART
Exclusive Sales of
8] E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment

Microwave oven RE-R40SM

Model RE-R40SM

STEEL CONSTRUCTION

UNIFORM HEATING

DIGITAL DISPLAY WITH TIMER

CONTROL BUTTONS

WARMING, STERILIZING, THAWING, DEODORIZATION

LARGE CONVEX SEE-THROUGH


WINDOW

INTERIOR LIGHT

EASYTO CLEAN

LOIPRT AB
P.O.BQX694
SE 44118 Aiingss, Sweden
Phone
+46322668360
Telefax
+46322637747
E-mail
lQipart@ioipart.se

The RE-R40SM is a domestic type ofmicrowave oven.


The revolutionary space saving design of
"round" microwave oven features an exterior
diameter that is 10% smaller than other ones
with same capacity ofmicrowave ovens.
It is easy to clean the inside of equipment
owing to the "round" cooking area.

The oven provides 'quick thawing', 'auto


cooking', 'manual cooking', 'convenient cooking' and 'deodorization by one-touch' in
ability.
Standard supply includes 1.7 m cable with
earthed plug.
For further specifications, please see overleaf.

6-926
DOC.NO.
EDITION 1

6-926L
08.04

MICROWAVE OVEN RE-R40SM


Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm

OOOO [EBIoQOQQ

320

1.

Electrical connertion, 1.7 m cable


with earthed plug included

Specification
Model

RE-R40SM

Capacity
krs

27

6-926J
Subject to changes without notice.

Dimensions mm
Voltage
A

422

437

320

230 1 -60

Microwave
power kW

Power consumption
at fill! power
kW

Fuse
A

0.7

1.1

10

Weight kgs
net

gross

13.5

15

Shipping
volume m '

0.080

Instruction & Operation Manual

Microwave Oven

RE-R40S/RE-R40SIV!

- PREPARATION I. Suggestions for the safety.


1. Please don't take out the plug by plucking out the cord.
-/'.

Don't touch the plug with wet hands.

2. Don't put the candle-light and the light of a


cigarette on the microwave oven.

Don't

install the microwave oven near the heat


machines.
3. Please don't operate the vacant microwave oven
except "DEODORIZATION".

4. Don't operate the thick peel of the fruit


and the bottle with a cap.
5. Don't hold the food and the container
right after cooking.

Please use the

gloves from the burns.

6. Please don't use metal bowl.

7. When you clean the microwave oven,


please take out the plug.

Don't spray the

water to the machine directly.


Cleaning by benzene, alcohol and thinner is not allowed.

mi

8. Please don't lay the bowl including water,


medicine and metal.

9. Please don't use and preserve the


inflammable spray and material around the

^S'

microwave oven.

10. Please don't wrap the food with paper.


'^^^

Interior light

Operating board

Exhaust pipe
II. Introduction
Window

^
^
^
^
i
-^
'i

/
Rotation dish

Spindle

Door opening safety device


Rotation base

Handle

~^^^ V ^ t = - - ^ .

* Installation of the components: Insert the "rotation base" inside of oven and put the
rotation dish on the "rotation dish".
III. Installation
Please l<eep tiie space as per tiie beiow.

_ ^___ , - "

"

20Cm..
'

45Cm
10Cm

i>-^

OPERATION < The kinds of usable bowls >


I. The Usable Bowls.
Heat-resisting Glass

i-'i

Heat-resisting Plastic(120C)

Ceramics

^ ^ ^

K:^

*'sa!^'"

II. The below bowls needs caution.


1. Usual glass. Only for warming water and milk lightly.

2. Usual plastic. Only for warming the cold food lightly.

^j^.-i

3. Paper dish and paper bowl. ~~ Only for warming the water slightly.

.-*JL

.J* S

III. The below bowls are prohibited.


The bowl including gold and silver line

Metal bowls.

dkf^

'f

^^^O^

IV. Using method of Wraps and Vinyl bag.


1. Wraps
You can use the wraps in warming of freezing food and stew.
You can use wraps instead of cover

'"^s> '.^^^-V^'

.<-mmf

k Notice ~~ Please don't use the wraps on fried food.


2. Vinyl Bag
You can use the vinyl bag in boiling the vegetable slightly.
Please make holes the vinyl bag in boiling the vegetable without fail.

^%Jd

<Control Panel>

Cancel
For cancel cooking

Deodorization ~
Lief intelligence ~

For removing the smell

For setting the cooking time

inside of ovens.

(1MIN: For setting the

For sterilizing the baby


bottle and

present time

steaming towel

Time ~
warming ~
For warming cooked rice
stew, steaming eggs.

This button is used


together with the button

Thawing ~
For thawing meat,
the fowls, and fishes.

"1MIN"

when setting

the present time.

START/+30SEC.~
Indication ~
The progress of
cooking is indicated.

For warming beverages.

In order to set the present time. ~ Operation: ex)ln order to 10:25

Press "time" once.


TIME

Press " I M I N " lOtimes and set 10.

IMIN

Press "time" once.

TIME

IMIN

II

Press " I M I N " 25times and set 25.

Press "time" once.

Time was set.

TIME
'W'

I) Light warming(For warming food lightly)


* If you want to warm one(1) cup of coffee, ~
1. After insert the coffee,

2,

Press the button "START"


Whenever

you

press

the

button "START", SOseconds


is added.

S'lARl/tSOShC.

3. If you want to cancel the warming,


press the button "CANCEL"
CANCEF.
s MB ' "'

kr
li) WARMING
* If you want to warm cooked rice.
1. After insert the cooked rice.

2. Press "1.COOKED RICE" once


and select No. " 1 " .
1. Cooked nee 2 Stew 3. Steamed eggs

vm
A

3. It starts automatically after 2 seconds.

Ill) STERILIZING
* If you want to sterilize the baby bott
1. Insert the baby bottle including
50ml of water.

2. Press the button"1.STERILIZING"


once and select no. "1".
1. Baby bottle 2. Steaming towl

2. It starts automatically after 2 seconds


*

Notice: Don't operate the vacant baby bottle

IV) THAWING.
* If you melt the meat, 300g
2. Press the button "THAWING" 2

1. After inserting the meat

times and select SOOg. 100g is


added every press.
THAWING
.S'S

^"

3. It starts automatically after 2 seconds


4. If the bell is ringing 10 times during thawing, open the door and turn over the meat
5. Close the door and press the "START"
START/+30SEC.

V I ) For setting the cooking time.


* If you want to warm the food for 2 minutes and 30 seconds
1. Insert the food.

2. Please press the button "1MIN"


twice

"

and press

the

button

"10SEC"3times.
1IVIIN

10SEC " ~

fej
3. Press the "START".

START/+30SEC.

"

V) DEODORIZATION
1. Press the button "DEODORIZATION". It operates for 5 minutes
DEODORIZATION

=A

c=JV.

=5b

ars

c=!V.

B\3

=Jk

-^

4^

c=Jk

Tilting frying tables

Model 16 80 35S

ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL AB
MARINE DIVISION
SE 441 82 Alingss, Sweden
Phone +46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
pa.marineinfo@electrolux.se

STURDY AND HEAVY DUTY


DESIGN

CAST IRON PAN

THERMAL-INSULATED

HIGH CAPACITY

EASY TO MAINTAIN AND TO


CLEAN

4 DIFFERENT SIZES

The frying pan, made of cast iron, is carefiilly designed for a perfect frying result.
The casing is thermal-insulated and has a
polished stainless steel exterior. The counter-balanced lid is entirely made of polished
stainless steel.
Powerfiil, embedded heating elements and
a thermostat control provide an even and
rapidly reached surface temperature up to
300C.
The gently tilting action, possible to set in
any desired position, is operated by a reliable hand wheel gear mechanism.
The heavy column is made of polished
stainless steel. Special bolts in top facilitate
a perfect pan levelling.
Four different pan sizes are available.
For further specifications and details of the
different models, please see overleaf.

3-563
DOC.NO.
EDITIONS

3-563BM
02.04

TILTING FRYING TABLES


Dimensions mm
Scale 1:20

[SB

1.
2.
3.
4.

Thermostat control
Pilot lamp
Cable entry for power loading
Foundation frame, optional extras
- not included
5. Floor gully, optional extras
- not included

=0,50

H75

Installation
Steel foundation to be welded to deck as per measures.
To be in level in all direaions and in height. Top of foundation to be at least 5 mm
over fit floor to avoid seepage. Fill the foundation frame if possible to reduce risk of
fiirther seepage.
Bolting holes (4 pes. 0 10) are symmetrically positioned.

e
t

Dimensions mm

a
c ; M

a*

4
\

b*

320

255

278

180

37

370

305

328

200

52

dim. a and b correspond to dim. G and K


on installation drawing
Dimensions mm
Model

16 80 32S

630

550

16 80 33S

870

16 80 34S

1170

16 80 35S

870

1600
300

700

870
1650

I*

200

320

300

150

210

300
450

75

255

630

65

175

305

780

110

400
370

300

550
400

* with removable equipment - 140 mm

Specifications
Frying area
mm

Depdi
mm

16 80 32S

500x450

60

16 80 33S

700x560

Model

90
16 80 34S

1000x560

16 80 35S

700x560

3-563
Subjact to changes without notice.

180

Voltage V

440
400
440
400
440
400
440
400

3-60
3-50
3-60
3-50
3-60
3-50
3-60
3-50

Loading
kW

Max amps
in phase

5.5

Weight kgs

Shipping
volume m^

net

gross

7.2

130

145

1.050

10

13.1

180

220

1.650

14

18.4

210

265

1.700

10

13.1

190

240

1.650

Handbok
Ksikirja
Hndbok
Hndbog
Handbook

Stekbord
Paistinpannu
Stegebord
Stekebord
Frying table

3-563
DOG. NO. 520 56 85-25
EDITION 1 M 04.97

SE;

Sida.

4-6,7-9

(FU

Sivu.

4-6,10-12

(NO)

Side.

4-6,13-15

(DK)

Side.

4-6, 16-18

GB^

Page

4-6,19-21

Model
168032
168033

630
870

168034

1170

168035

870

Model

167800

320
370

167801

1600

550
700
700
700

300

b
254
304

c
278
328

1650

d
180
200

200
300
450
300

e
37
52

fig.1

320

300

150

75

255

630

65

370

400
550
400

210

175

305

780

110

15
1. Termostat
2. Signallampa
3. Kabelintag, effektledning. Ledning uppdrages 0,75
m. over frdigt golv.
4. Jngjutningsfundament (Tillbehr, ingr ej i leveransen.)
5. Golvgrop (Tillbehr, ingr ej i leveransen.)

1. Termostaatti
2. Merkkivalo
3. Kaapeliliitnt, tehonsyttkaapeli. Kaapeli vedetn 0,75 m valmiin lattian ylpuolelle.
4. Valujalusta (Lisvaruste, ei sislly toimitukseen)
5. Lattiakaivo (Lisvaruste, ei sislly toimitukseen)

1. Termostat
2. Signallampe
3. Kabelinngang, effektledning. Ledning trekkes opp
0,75 m. over ferdig gulv.
4. Innstpningsfundament (tllleggsutstyr, ikke del av
leveransen).
5. Gulvgrop (tilleggsutstyr, ikke del av leveransen).

1. Termostat
2. Signallampe
3. Kabelindgang, effektledning. Ledning ophnges
0,75 m over frdigt gulv.
4. Indstbningsfundament (tilbehr, indgr ikke i leverancen.)
5. Gulvaflb (tilbehr, indgr ikke i leverancen.)

1. Thermostat
2. Signal lamp
3. Cable access point, power cable. The cable is
drawn 0.75 m over a finished floor.
4. Base for cementing into place (Accessory, not in
eluded).
5. Recessed floor drain (Accessory, not included).

Elschema
Shkkaavio
Elskjema

Ledningsdiagram
Wiring diagram
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

16 80 32
L3 12 LI

Kontaktor
Element
Termostat
SIgnallampa
Transformator
Skring

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Kontaktori
Lampelementti
Termostaatti
Merkkivalo
Muuntaja
Sulake

NO)

-%TTO

16 80 33
16 80 34
16 80 35
L3 12 LI

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Kontaktor
Element
Termostat
Signallampe
Transformator
Sikring

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Kontaktor
Varmeelement
Termostat
Signallampe
Transformator
Sikring

(GB)
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

fig.4

Contactor
Heating element
Thermostat
Signal lamp
Transformer
Fuse

SE

Tekniska specifikationer
Modeli

168032

168033

168034

168035

Stekyta (mm)

500x450

700x560

1000x560

700x560

Stekpannans djup (mm)

60

90

90

180

Max fasstrm (A)

10

16

25

16

Effekt (kW)

5,5

10,0

14,0

10,0

Vikt (kg)

165

180

200

190

Ansiutningsspnning 1680320801 (V, Hz)

400 3-50

Anslutningsspnning 1680320501 (V, Hz)

440 3-60

Kapslingsklass

IPX4

Alimanna anvisningar
Om foreskrifter i detta och utrustningens vriga dokument inte fijs, kan dess skerhet ventyras och
leverantrens garanti- och produktansvar upphra.

Ls noggrant freskrifterna i detta dokument, eftersom det inneliller viktiga skertietsupplysningar betrffande installation, driftsskerhet, anvndning och
underfill av Produkten. Frvara handlingen s att den
r tillgnglig for alia anvndare.
Installation och testkrning maste gras av en for
andamlet utbildad tekniker och enligt tillverkarens
instruktioner. Se Installationsanvisning.
Installation av produkten, sval som dess anslutningar, skall utfras enligt gallande normer och foreskrifter.
All service, underhall samt reparation skall ske av
en for andamlet utbildad tekniker. Endast originalreservdelar fr anvndas vid utbyte. Se Reservdelskatalog*.
Handhavande och sktsel skall enbart ske av p denna produkt utbildad personal (operator).
Innan utrustningen tas i bruk skall operatoren
infrskaffa goda kunskaper i handhavande och
sktsel.
mycket noggrant g igenom skerhetsinstruktioner
och varningstexter.

Fore uppstllning
Rengr ingjutningsramen frn betongrester. Rensa de fyra
skruvhlen med en MIO gngtapp.

Uppstllning
Tag bort emballaget.
God luftcirkulation r viktig runt stekbordet. Placera
stekbordet enligt fig.1.
Stall stekbordet plant.
Montera och drag t de med brickor frsedda fstskruvarna.
Avigsna skyddsplasten frsiktigt. Eventuella limrester avigsnas med ett lmpligt lsningsmedel.
Stekhllen r vid leverans rostskyddsbehandlad med
rostskyddsolja. Rengr hallen, samt vriga delar och
tillbehr med varmt vatten och ett neutralt disk/rengringsmedel. Sklj drefter noga.

Justering av lutning

Kontrollera att stekbordet r plant.


Lutning i sidled justeras med tv insexskruvar. Dessa
r placerade undertill p upphngningsbalken som haller stekpannan, p vardera sidan om upphngningbalkens infstning i pelaren.
Lutning framt eller bakt justeras enligt fljande: Tag
loss vnster sidoplt. Horisontallaget regieras med
justerskruven vid upphngningsbalken.

Elektrisl( anslutning

Medlevereras ej. Kan bestllas frn tillverkaren eller


via tillverkarens representant.

Installationsanvisning
CE- Direktiv
Stekbordet r tillverkat i verensstmmelse med EG-direktiv LVD 73/23/EEC, EMC 89/336/EEC och r som enskild enhet CE-godknd och markt CE.

Den elektriska anslutningen mste uHras enligt gllande normer och foreskrifter.
Effektledning 3-fas + jord anslutes i kopplingsboxen i
pelaren av behrig person.
Kontrollera p stekbordets dataskylt att rtt effektspnning erhllits. Stekbordets anslutning skall utgras av
en fast installation.
Stekbordet anslutes tili ntet genom inkoppling via
anlggningens central.

Kontrollera att ntet r frberett, eller kan belastas


med den aktuella strmmen och att det r frsett med
ordentlig skyddsjordning.
Svi effekt- som manverstrm skall vara avskrade. Skringen skall ha tillrcklig mrkstrm for att
kunna leverera erforderlig kraft til! stekbordet.
Stekbordet bor anslutas till eintet over en allpolig
brytare (leverantrens rekommendation), med vilken
strm-tillfrseln till stekbordets effekt- och manoverledning kan brytas.
Stekbordet r frsett med en yttre ekvipotential jordklmma, som finns placerad p baksidan av pelaren.

Tillbehr
Modell
16 78 00
16 78 01
GGS 460
GGM 460
GGP 460

Benmning
Ingjutningsram till modeil 16 80 32
Ingjutningsram till modeil 16 80 33, -34, -35
Golvbrunn tili stengolv
Golvbrunn tili massagolv
Golvbrunn tili plastmatta

Bruksanvisning
Anvndningsomrade
stekbordet r avsett att anvndas tili matlagning i alia
typer av storkk. Ngot annat anvndningsomrade an
matlagning r ej tilltet. Stekbordet fr ej anvndas som
frits.

Produktbeskrivning
stekbordet har jmn stektemperatur over heia stekytan,
stor kapacitet, arbetsbesparande, god ekonomi, och r
stjipbart.
Stekpannan r tillverkad av frstklassigt gjutjrn. Stekbordets yttersidor, pelare samt lock r tillverkad av sllpad
rostfri plat. Stekbordet r omsorgsfullt vrmeisolerat. Locket r uppfllbart och vl balanserat.
Regieringsorganen utgrs av kombinerad brytare och termostat i kombination med en kontakter. Kontaktorn r placerad i pelaren.
En signallampa indikerar nr strm r tillslagen. Med termostaten regleras varmen p stekytan steglst frn 100C
upp till 300C.
Framfr stekbordet kan golvgrop med galler placeras. Djup
minst 150 mm for att i mjligaste mn eliminera risken for
stank och verskljning vid en for hastig tmning av stekbordet. Golvgaller med ram eller golvgrop komplett med
ram avsedd att ingjutas i golvet, kan levereras mot srskild bestllning. Gallret r specieilt utformat for att undvika halkning.

Skerhetsinstruktioner
Spnningsfrande delar ! Vattenstrle fr ej riktas direkt mot kontrollpanelen eller dess nrhet. Vatten i kontakt med spnningsfrande delar medfr direkt livsfara.
Lt aldrig vatten komma i kontakt med uppvrmd stekbordshll. Detta kan leda till sprickor i gjutgodset med
kortslutning som fljd.

Hga temperaturer! Bordets stekande yta kan med termostaten regleras steglst frn 100C upp till 300C. Vid
dessa hga temperaturer skall stekspade anvndas vid
narkontakt med den stekande matrtten.
Eldslga ! Stektillsatser med lg flammpunkt kan innebra att eldslga uppstr. Anvnd alltid godknda stektillsatser. Om eldslga uppstr minimerar man syretillfrelsen genom att stnga locket. r inte detta tillrckligt stanger man av stekbordet och tcker springorna mellan hallen, locket och pipen med en brandfilt. Vid detta slckningsarbete skall skyddshandskar med handledskrage
anvndas.
Obs ! Vid ovanstende tillbud: Anvnd aldrig vatten.

Tekniska data
En dataskylt med stekbordets tekniska uppgifter finns placerad p pelarens nedersta vnstra de! (fig.3).

Om utrustningen inte anvnds


Om utrustningen inte skall anvndas under lngre tid
mste fljande instruktioner fljas:
Bryt effekt- och manverstrmmen tili Stekbordet, genom huvudstrmbrytaren eller i anlggningens central.
Rengr Stekbordet och alia tillbehr.
Lt locket st ppet s att luft kan cirkulera i utrymmet
och p s satt hindra att mgel och dlig lukt utvecklas.

Instekning
Stek in stekbordet. Anvnd drvid ett tunt lager matolja.

Anvndning (fig.2)

stall in termostatvredet (1.) p nskat lge. Signallampan (2.) tands.


Prova med en Ilten mngd stekfett att stekbordet har
rtt temperatur. Vid behov ndras termostatlaget. Var
noga med att ha stekytan i horisontallge.
Stekbordet r klart att anvndas.
Skrapa vid behov stekbordet under stekningen, t.ex.
fore ny pfyllning.
Vid avslutad stekning stall termostatvredet (1.) p lge
0. Signallampan (2.) slocknar.

Beredskapsvrme (fig.2)
Lt termostatvredet (1.) st p lge 5. Stekbordet kan
sedan snabbt komma upp i varme d det skall anvndas.

Rengring
Produkten skall vara avstngd och avsvalnad d rengring
sker. Anvnd varmt vatten och ett neutralt disk/
rengringsmedel. Anvnd inte stlull eller slipande
rengringsmatrial vid rengring av rostfria ytor. Om
rengringsmedel innehllande klor (t.ex. klorin) anvnts
mste skljningen gras extra noggrant. Klor och
klorfreningar i kontakt med rostfritt stl kan frorsaka
korrosionsangrepp. Fasta inbrnda stekrester i stekhllen
skrapas bort med stlborste, pimpsten eller i svrare fall
med stlspackelspade.

OBS ! Vattenstrle fr ej riktas direkt mot kontrollTag varsamt bort isoleringen som ligger under botpanelen eller dess nrhet. Vatten i kontakt med spntenplten och spara denna.
ningsfrande delar medfr direkt livsfara. Lt aldrig 7. Under isoleringen ligger presspltar som har till uppvatten komma i kontakt med uppvrmd stekbordsgift att hlla elementen p plats.
hall. Detta kan leda till sprickor i gjutgodset med kortLossa elledningarna, som kommer fram ur presspltslutning som fljd.
ens hl, vid kopplingsldan. Obs ! Spara steatitprlorna till de nya elementen. Lyft bort och renskrapa
Finns i anlggningen mer an ett stekbord till frfogande
pressplten (presspltarna).
br dessa delas upp mellan ktt och fisk, for att slippa 8. Under pressplten ligger en keramisk fiberplatta som
arbetsam och tidsdande rengring. Finns bara ett bord
ej gr att teranvnda. Rensa ren stekpannan frn
maste en noggrann rengring gras mellan dessa
denna och kasta den. Ny isolerplatta frn leverantmatsorter, annars kan de ta smak av varandra.
rens reservdelslager br bestllas tilisammans med
elementen.
9. Lyft bort elementen. Obs ! Glimmerbrickorna som r
vriga dokument:
placerade vid avslutningen av elementet skall teranReservdelskatalog (medlevereras ej)
vndas. Renborsta elementsparen.
EG-frskran (medlevereras ej)
10. Kontrollera att rtt elementspnning erhllits. Elementen monteras enligt ilggningsschemat. I vissa fall kan
elementen behva justeras med cirka plus minus tre
parlor.
r spiralen for lang krossar man lampligt antal parlor.
Spiralen fjdrar d tillbaka av egen kraft och blir korFel, orsak, tgard
tare.
r spiralen for kort lossar man ndsteatiten och komOjmn stekning
pletterar med parlor frn de gamla elementen.
1. Stekbordet r ej plant.
Obs 1 Glm ej glimmerbrickorna.
Flj instruktionerna 'justering av lutning' i installaElementndarna forses med de sparade prlorna och
tionsanvisningen.
anpassas till kopplingsbultarna. Obs I Var noggrann
2. Fastbrnda matrester.
vid fastdragningen tili kopplingsbultarna.
Se bruksanvisning: Rengring.
11. Omvand termontering sker.
Obs I Drag ej t presspltarna for kraftigt. Risk foreOjmn eller svag varme
ligger d att elementparlorna spricker.
1. Defekta skringar
2. Defekta elledningar
Byte av termostat
3. Element fungerar ej
Tilise att stekbordet r avstngt.
Kontrollera att presspltarna ligger an mot elemen- Bryt effekt- och manverledningen till stekbordet.
ten och att inte skruvarna lossnat.
Lossa termostatvredet och bakomvarande frontplt.
Flj Serviceinstruktionerna 'byte av element'.
Skruva loss termostaten. Tag bort elledningarna och
4. Termostat fungerar ej
drag fram termostaten endast ngon bulblngd. Klipp
Flj Serviceinstruktionerna 'byte av element.
av knseltrden s nra termostathuset som mjligt.
Linda, gia och tejpa fast knseltrden ordentligt kring
den nya termostatens bulb s att knseltrden gr att
Serviceinstruktioner
an Vanda som dragtrd.
Byte av element
Tippa stekpannan till max. Lossa luckan i stekbordets bottenplt och den lilla isoleringsbiten, s att terVid byte och bestllning av element las forst punkt 8.
mostatbulben blir synlig. Lossa bulben och drag fr1. Tilise att stekbordet r avstngt.
siktigt fram den nya.
2. Bryt effekt- och manverledningen till stekbordet.
3. Lossa effekt- och manverkablarna, som gr mellan Omvand termontering sker.
pelarens kopplingslda och stekbordets kopplingsutrymme, frn kontaktorn och kopplingsplinten. Tippa Allmant
bordet. Lossa spiralslangen i balken och drag ur de
Var noggrann med att stta tillbaka lsbrickorna p
redan lossade effekt och manverkablarna. Tippa tillsin rtta plats, eller byt ut dom emot nya. Vissa muttbaka bordet till arbetslge.
rar kan vara brnda och har drmed ftt en utmattad
4. Tag bort stekbordslocket och konsolen.
kvalitet. Byt ut dessa mot nya. Viktigt r ocks att alia
delar rengres val frn fastbrnt fett. Dar popnitar har
5. Lossa sidopltarna, samt de fyra skruvarna p vardera pelarsida vid upphgningsbalken. Pannan r nu
suttit kan man stta skruvar for att underltta for framklar att lyftas frn pelaren. Obs! Till detta lyft erfordas
tida arbete.
tv personer. Lgg pannan p ett underlag s att ratten kan rra sig fritt ovanfr golvet och s att vare sig
golv eller panna kommer till skada. Upphgningsbalken kan nu genom att vrida ratten, placeras dar den
r minst ivgen.
6. Lossa bottenplten. Luckan i platen skall sitta kvar.

Serviceanvisning


Tekniset tiedot
Malli

168032

168033

168034

168035

Paistopinta (mm)

500x450

700x560

1000x560

700x560

Paistinpannun syvyys (mm)

60

90

90

180

Maks. vaihevirta (A)

10

16

25

16

Teho (kW)

5,5

10,0

14,0

10,0

Paino (kg)

165

180

200

190

Liitntjnnite 1680320801 (V, Hz)

400 3-50

Liitntjnnite 1680320501 (V, Hz)

440 3-60

Suojausluokka

IPX4

Yleiset ohjeet
Jos tss ohjeessa ja tuotteen muissa asiakirjoissa
annettuja mryksi ei noudateta, saattaa sen turvallisuus vaarantua ja toimittajan takuu- ja tuotevastuu lakata olemasta voimassa.

Lue huolellisesti tss asiakirjassa annetut mrykset, koska niihin sisltyy tuotteen asennusta, kyttturvallJsuutta, kytt ja huoltoa koskevia trkeit
turvaohjeita. Silyt asiakirja niin, ett se on kaikkien kyttjien saatavilia.
Tuotteen asennus ja koekytt on annettava siihen
koulutetun asentajan suoritettavaksi valmistajan
ohjeiden mukaisesti. Katso alia olevat ohjeet sek
Asennusohje.
Tuotteen asennus, samoin kuin sen llitnnt, on suoritettava soveltuvan standardin ja mrysten mukaisesti.
Kaikki tuotteen huolto-, kunnossapito- ja korjaustyt
on annettava siihen koulutetun asentajan suoritettaviksi. Tuotteeseen saa vaihtaa vain alkuperisi varaosia. Katso Huolto-ohje* ja Varaosaluettelo*.
Tt tuotetta saa kytt ja huoltaa vain siihen koulutettu henkilo (kyttj).
Ennen tuotteen kyttnottoa on kyttjn:
hankittava hyvt tiedot sen kytst ja huollosta
luettava huolellisesti turvaohjeet ja varoitustekstit.
Eivt sislly toimitukseen. Tilattavissa valmlstajalta
tai valmistajan edustajalta.

Ennen asennusta
Puhdista valukehys betonijnteist. Puhdista kaikki nelj ruuvinreik MIO-kierretapilla.

Asennus
Poista pakkaus.
Huolehdi siit, ett ilma psee kiertmn esteett
paistinpannun ymprill. Sijoita paistinpannu kuvan 1
mukaisesti.
Aseta paistinpannu vaakasuoraan.
Asenna ja kirist aluslevyill varustetut kiinnitysruuvit.
Poista suojamuovi varovasti. Mahdolliset liimajnteet poistetaan sopivalla liuotteella.
Paistolevyt toimitetaan ruosteenestoljyll ruostesuojattuina. Puhdista levyt sek muut osat ja lisvarusteet lmpimll vedell ja neutraalilla astiapesu/puhdistusaineella. Huuhtele huolellisesti puhdistuksen
jlkeen.

Kaltevuuden st

Shkliitnt

Asennusohje
CE-direktiivi
Paistinpannu on valmistettu EY-direktiivien LVD 73/23/
EEC ja EMC 89/336/EEC mukaisesti ja se on erillisen
yksikkn CE-hyvksytty ja CE-merkitty.

10

Tarkasta, ett paistinpannu on vaakasuorassa.


Kaltevuutta sdetn sivusuunnassa kahdella kuusioruuvilla. Nm sijaitsevat paistinpannua kiinnipitvn kiinnityspalkin alia, palkin pilarikiinnityksen molemmilla puolilla.
Kaltevuutta eteen ja taakse sdetn seuraavasti:
Irrota vasen sivulevy. Vaaka-asento sdetn kiinnityspalkin luona olevalla struuvilla.

Shkliitnnt on suoritettava aina voimassa olevien


normien ja mrysten mukaisesti.
Verkkokaapeli 3-vaihe + maa liitetn pilarissa olevaan kytkentrasiaan ptevn asentajan toimesta.
Tarkasta paistinpannun arvokilvest, ett liitntjnnite on oikea. Paistinpannun shkliitnt on tehtv
kiinten asennuksena.

Paistinpannu liitetn verkkoon slikkeskuksen kautta.


Tarkasta, ett verkkoa voidaan kuormittaa kytettvll virralla ja ett se on varustettu kunnollisella suojamaadoitukseila.
Verkko- ja ohjausvirta on suojattava sulakkeilla. Sulakkeen nimellisvirran on oltava riittv, jotta paistinpannuun voidaan sytt tarvittava jnnite.
Paistinpannu on liitettv shkverkkoon moninapaisen katkaisimen kautta (toimittajan suositus), jolla virransytt paistinpannun verkko-ja ohjauskaapeliin voidaan katkaista.
Paistinpannu on varustettu ulkoisella jnnitteentasausruuvilla, joka on sijoitettu pilarin taakse.

Korkest lmptilat! Termostaatilla paistopinnan lmptilaa voidaan st portaattomasti vlill 100-300G.


Kuumalla paistopinnalla valmistettavaa ruokaa on ksiteltv paistinlastalla.
Liekit! Alhaisen leimahduspisteen omaavat paistoaineet
saattavat sytty palamaan. Kyt aina hyvksyttyj paistoaineita.
Liekit tukahdutetaan sulkemalla kansi. Jos tm ei riit
tukahduttamaan liekkej, paistinpannun virta katkaistaan
ja paistolevyn, kannen ja nokan vliset raot peitetn
palohuovalla. Sammutustyss on kytettv pitkvartisia suojaksineit.
Huom! Sammuttamiseen ei koskaan saa kytt vett.

Lisvarusteet

Tekniset tiedot

Malli
16 78 00
16 78 01
GGS 460
GGM 460
GGP 460

Pilarin vasempaan alaosaan on sijoitettu paistinpannun


tekniset tiedot sisltv arvokilpi (kuva 3).

Nimitys
Valukehys malliin 16 80 32
Valukehys malliin 16 80 33, -34, -35
Lattiakaivo kivilattiaan
Lattiakaivo valulattiaan
Lattiakaivo muovimattoon

Kyttohje
Kyttkohteet
Paistinpannu on tarkoitettu ruoanvalmistukseen kaikentyyppisiss suurkeittilss. Kytt muuhun tarkoitukseen
kuin ruoanvalmistukseen on kielletty. Paistinpannua ei saa
kytt rasvakeittimen.

Tuotekuvaus
Kallistettava paistinpannu on tehokas, tyt sstv ja
taloudellinen ja sen paistolmptila on tasainen koko paistopinnalla.
Paistinpannu on valmistettu ensiluokkaisesta valuraudasta. Paistinpannun ulkosivut, pilari ja kansi on valmistettu
hiotusta ruostumattomasta levyst. Paistinpannu on
lmperistetty huolellisesti. Paistinpannussa on avattava
ja hyvin tasapainotettu kansi.
Pydn stlaitteistoon kuuluvat katkaisin ja termostaatti
sek kontaktori. Kontaktori on sijoitettu pilariin.
Merkkivalo syttyy, kun virta on kytkettyn. Termostaatilla
paistopinnan lmptilaa voidaan st portaattomasti
vlill100-300C.
Paistinpannun eteen voidaan tehd ritilll varustettava
lattiakaivo. Kaivon on oltava vhintn 150 mm syv liian
nopeasta paistinpannun tyhjentmisest johtuvien roiskeiden ja ylitulvimisen vaaran eliminoimiseksi. Lattiaan valettavaksi tarkoitettu kehyksell varustettu lattiaritil tai
tydellinen kehyksell varustettu lattiakaivo on saatavana erikoistilauksesta. Ritil on erikoismuotoiltu liukastumisen estmiseksi.

Jos laitetta ei kytet


Jos laite on pitkn kyttmttmn, on noudatettava
seuraavia ohjeita:
Katkaise paistinpannun tehonsytt- ja ohjausvirta
pvirtakytkimell tai laitoksen keskuksesta.
Puhdista paistinpannu ja kaikki sen lisvarusteet.
Jt kansi auki nun, ett ilma psee kiertmn tilassa ja estmn homeen ja pahan hajun muodostumisen.

Sisnpaisto
Kuumenna paistinpannussa ohut kerros ruokaljy ennen ensimmist ruoanvalmistuskertaa.

Kytt (kuva 2)

Knn termostaattivnnin (1) haluttuun asentoon.


Merkkivalo (2) syttyy.
Kokeile pienell mrll paistinrasvaa, ett paistinpannun lmptila on oikea. Muuta tarvittaessa termostaatin asentoa. Varmista, ett paistopinta on vaakasuorassa.
Paistinpannu on kyttvalmis.
Kaavi paistinpannua tarvittaessa paiston aikana, esim.
ennen uutta tytt.
Aseta termostaattivnnin (1) paiston jlkeen asentoon 0. Merkkivalo (2) sammuu.

Valmiuslmp (kuva 2)
Knn termostaattivnnin (1) asentoon 5. Tst asennosta paistinpannu kuumenee nopeasti seuraavaa kytt
vrten.

Puhdistus
Paistinpannun virta on katkaistava ja paistinpannun annettava jhty ennen puhdistusta.Kayta lmmint vett
ja mietoa astianpesu-Zpuhdistusainetta. l kyt tersvillaa tai hankaavia puhdistusaineita ruostumattomien pintojen puhdistukseen. Jos kytetn klooria (esim. kloriTurvallisuusohjeet
Jnnitteiset osat! Vett ei saa suihkuttaa suoraan kytt- Ini) sisltv puhdistusainetta, huuhtelu on suoritettava
paneeliin tai sen lheisyyteen. Vesi aiheuttaa jnnitteislin erityisen huolellisesti. Joutuessaan kosketuksiin ruostuosiin pstessn vlittmn hengenvaaran. l koska- mattoman terksen ksnesa kloori ja klooriyhdisteet saatan pst vett kuumalle paistolevylle. Vesi vol aiheuttaa tavat aiheuttaa korroosiovaurioita. Paistolevylle kiinnipalaneet ruoanthteet kaavitaan irti tersharjalla, hohkakivalutavaran halkeamisen ja oikosulun.
11

vell tai valkelssa tapauksissa terskaapimella.


HUOM! Vett ei saa suihkuttaa suoraan kyttpaneeliin tai sen lheisyyteen. Vesi aiheuttaa jnnitteisiin
osiin pstessn vlittmn hengenvaaran. l koskaan pst vett kuumalle paistolevylle. Vesi voi
aiheuttaa valutavaran halkeamisen ja olkosulun.
Jos laitoksessa on kytss useampia paistinpannuja,
llha- ja kalaruoat on valmistettava eri palstinpannuissa
tyln ja alkaavlevn puhdistuksen vlttmiseksl. Jos
pyti on vain yksi, se on puhdistettava huolelllsesti nlden ruokalajien vlill, muussa tapauksessa ruoat volvat
saada makua tolslstaan.

Muut asiakirjat:
Varaosaluettelo (el sislly toimltukseen)
EY-vakuutus (ei sislly toimltukseen)

Huolto-ohje
Vika, syy, toimenpide
Eptasainen paisto
1. Palstlnpannu el ole vaakasuorassa.
Noudata asennusohjeessa kalllstuksen sdst
annettuja ohjeita.
2. Kilnnipalaneet ruoanthteet
Katso kyttohjeen kohta: Puhdistus.
Eptasainen tai heikko lmp
1. Vlalliset sulakkeet
2. Vlalliset shkjohdot
3 Lmpelementtl el tolml
Tarkasta, ett purlstuslevyt palnuvat lmpelementtej vasten ja ettelvt ruuvlt ole Irronneet.
4. Termostaatti ei toimi
Noudata huolto-ohjelden kohdassa "Lmpelementin valhto" annettuja ohjeita.

Huolto-ohjeet
Lmpelementin vaihto
Ennen lmpelementin valhtamista ja tilaamlsta lue kohta 8.
1. Varmista, ett palstlnpannu on kytketty tolminnasta.
2. Katkaise paistlnpannun tehonsytt- ja ohjausvlrta.
3. Irrota pllarin kytkentraslan ja paistlnpannun kytkenttllan vliset tehonsytt- ja ohjauskaapellt kontaktorlsta ja llittimest. KIppaa pyt. Irrota klerreletku
palkista ja ved Irrotetut teho- ja ohjauskaapellt Irtl.
KIppaa pyt takalsln tyasentoon.
4. Irrota paistlnpannun kansi ja konsoll.
5. Irrota sivulevyt sek kaikki nelj ruuvia molemmilta
pilarislvullta kilnnltyspalkin kohdalta. Pannu voldaan
nyt nostaa pllarlsta. HuomI Nostamlseen tarvitaan
kaksi henkil. Aseta pannu alustalle nun, ett kslpyr psee lilkkumaan esteett lattian ylpuolella
ja ettel lattla tai pannu vaurloidu. Kiinnityspalkkl voldaan nyt sljoittaa ksipyr pyrittmll palkkaan,
jossa se on mahdollisimman vhn tiell.
6. Irrota pohjalevy. Levyn luukku on jtettv paikalleen.
Irrota pohjalevyn alapuolella oleva eriste varovasti ja
12

pane se talteen.
7. Eristeen alia on purlstuslevyt, joiden tehtvn on plt lmpelementlt paikallaan.
Irrota shkjohdot, jotka tulevat puristuslevyn relst
kytkentraslan kohdalta. Huom! Sst steatlittihelmet uusille lmpelementeille. Nosta pois ja kaavi puhtaaksl puristuslevy (purlstuslevyt).
8. Puristuslevyn alia on keraaminen kuitulevy, jota ei vol
kytt uudelleen. Puhdista palstlnpannu puhtaaksl
kuitulevyst ja hvit levy. Toimlttajalta on tllattava
lmpelementtej tilattaessa mys uusi eristelevy.
9. Nosta lmpelementlt pois. Huom! Lmpelementtlen phn sljoitetut klillealuslevyt on kytettv uudelleen. Puhdista lmpelementtien urat.
10. Tarkasta, ett lmpelementin jnnite on oikea.
Lmpelementlt asennetaan sijoituskaavion mukaisesti. Jolssakin tapauksissa on lmpelementtej sdettv noin +/- kolmella helmell.
Jos klerukka on liian pitk, murskataan soplva mr
helml. Klerukka joustaa silloin taaksepln omasta voimastaan ja lyhenee.
Jos klerukka on liian lyhyt, irrotetaan ptysteatiitti ja
llstn helml vanhasta lmpelementist.
Huom! l unohda klillealuslevyj.
Lmpelementin hampaat varustetaan talteen otetulllahelmllljasovitetaan klinnityspultteihin. Huom! Suorlta kiristys klinnityspultteihin huolelllsesti.
11. Takaisinasennus suorltetaan pinvastaisessa jrjestyksess.
Huom! l kirist puristuslevyj liian tlukalle. Muussa
tapauksessa elementtihelmet saattavat rikkoontua.
Termostaatin vaihto
Varmista, ett palstlnpannu on kytketty tolminnasta.
Katkaise paistlnpannun tehonsytt- ja ohjausvlrta.
Irrota termostaattivnnln ja takana oleva etulevy.
Kierr termostaatti Irtl. Irrota shkjohdot ja ved termostaattia esiin vain muutaman termostaattikuvun
pituuden verran. Katkaise tunnistinlangat mahdollisimman lhelt termostaattikoteloa. Kri, silmukoi ja
teippaa kiinni tunnistinlangat kunnolla uuden termostaattikuvun ymprille nun, ett tunnistinlankoja voldaan kytt vetmiseen.
KIppaa palstlnpannu riasentoonsa. Irrota luukku
paistlnpannun pohjalevyst ja pieni eristepala nun, ett
termostaattikupu tulee nkyviin. Irrota kupu ja ved
uusi varovasti esiin.
Takaisinasennus suorltetaan pinvastaisessa jrjestyksess.
Yleist
Aseta lukkolaatat huolelllsesti takalsln oikeille paikollleen
tai vaihda ne uusiin. Jotkut mutterit ovat saattaneet palaa, mik on volnut vsytt nilden materiaalin. Vaihda
ne uusiin. Trke on mys puhdistaa kaikki osat hyvin
kiinnipalaneesta rasvasta. Pop-niittien palkalle voldaan
asentaa ruuvlt huoltotiden helpottamiseksi.


Tekniske spesifikasjoner
Modeli

168032

168033

168034

168035

Stekyta (mm)

500x450

700x560

1000x560

700x560

Stekpannans djup (mm)

60

90

90

180

Maks. fasestrm (A)

10

16

25

16

Effekt (kW)

5,5

10,0

14,0

10,0

Vekt (kg)

165

180

200

190

nikoplingsspenning 1680320801 (V, Hz)

400 3-50

nikoplingsspenning 1680320501 (V, Hz)

440 3-60

Beskyttelsesklasse

IPX4

Generelle anvisninger
Hvis forskriftene i dette og utstyrets vrige dokumentasjon ikke flges, kan sikkerheten settes p spill
og leverandrens garanti- og produktansvar opphre.

Les nye forskriftene i dette dokumentet, eftersom


det inneholder viktige sikkerhetsopplysninger vedrrende installasjon, driftssikkerhet, bruk og vedlikehold av produktet. Oppbevar dokumentet slik at det
er tilgjengelig for alle brukere.
Installasjon og testkjring m foretas av en tekniker
med relevant opplring og etter fabrikantens anvisninger. Se nedenfor samt Installasjonsanvisning.
Installasjon av produktet, samt dets tilkoplinger, skal
utfres iflge gjeldende normer og forskrifter.
All service, vedlikehold og reparasjon skal utfres av
en tekniker med relevant opplring. Det m kun benyttes originaldeler ved utskiftinger. Se Serviceanvisning* og Reservedelkatalog*.
Betjening og stell skal kun utfres av personale (operatr) med opplring p dette produktet.
Fr utstyret tas i bruk skal operatren
tilegne seg gode kunnskaper om betjening og stell.
g svrt grundig gjennom sikkerhetsinstruksjoner og
varseltekster.
Flger ikke med. Kan bestilles fra fabrikanten eller
via fabrikantens representant.

Fr montering
Rengjr stperammen for betongrester. Rens de fire skruehullene med en MIO gjengetapp.

Montering
Ta av emballasjen.
Det er viktig med god luftsirkulasjon rundt stekebordet. Sett stekebordet som vist p Fig. 1.
Sett stekebordet plant.
Monter og trekk til festeskruene som er utstyrt med
skiver.
Lsne den beskyttende plasten forsiktig. Evt. limrester fjernes med et passende lsningsmiddel.
Stekehellen er ved leveranse antirustbehandlet med
antirustolje. Rengjr stekehellen samt vrige deler og
tilbehr med varmt vann og et nytralt oppvask/vaskemiddel. Skyll godt.

Justering av heiling

Elektrisl( tiil(opling

Installasjonsanvisning

CE-direktiv

Stekebordet er fremstilt i henhold til EU-direktiv LVD 73/


23/EF, EMC 89/336/EF og er som separat enhet CEgodkjent og CE-merket.

Kontroller at stekebordet str plant.


Heiling mot sidene justeres med to sekskantskruer.
De er plassert p undersiden av opphengsbjelken som
holder stekeplaten, p hver side av opphengsbjelkens
feste i sylen.
Heiling forover eller bakover justeres p flgende
mate: Ta ls venstre sideplate. Stekebordets vannrette stilling justeres med justeringsskruen ved opphengsbjelken.

Elektriske tilkoplinger m kun utfres i samsvar med


alle gjeldende normer og forskrifter.
Effektledning 3-fase + jord koples til koplingsboksen i
sylen av en kvalifisert person.
Stekebordets tilkopling skal utfres som fast installasjon.

13

Bde effekt- og merkestrm skal sikres. Sikringen skal


ha hy nok merkestrm til levere ndvendig kraft til
stekebordet.
Stekebordet br koples til strmnettet over en flerpolet bryter (leverandrens anbefaling), som kan brukes for bryte strmtilfrselen til stekebordets effekt- og styreledninger.
Stekebordet er utstyrt med en ytre ekvipotensial jordingsklemme p baksiden av sylen.

Tekniske data

Tilbehr
Model!
16 78 00
16 78 01
GGS 460
GGM 460
GGP 460

Betegnelse
Stperamme til modell 16 80 32
Stperamme til modell 16 80 33, -34, -35
Gulvgrop til stengulv
Gulvgrop til stpt gulv
Gulvgrop til plastmatte

Bruksanvisning
Bruksomrde
Stekebordet er beregnet p bruk til matlaging i alle typer
storkjkken. Andre bruksomrder enn matlaging er ikke
tillatt. Stekebordet skal ikke brukes til frityrsteking.

Produktbeskrivelse
stekebordet har en jevn temperatur over hele stekeflaten
og stor kapasitet, den er arbeidsbesparende, konomisk
og kan tippes.
Stekebordet erfremstilt av frsteklasses stpejem. Stekebordet utside, syle samt lokk er fremstilt av slipte, rustfrie piater. Stekebordet er omsorgsfullt varmeisolert. Lokket kan feiles opp og er godt balansert.
Stekebordet reguleres ved hjelp av en kombinert bryter
og termostat i kombinasjpn med en kontaktor. Kontaktoren er plassert i sylen.
En signallampe lyser nr strmmen er p. Med termostaten reguleres varmen p stekeflaten trinnlst fra 100 C
opptil 300 C.
Foran stekebordet br det plasseres gulvgrop med rist.
Dybden skal vre minst 150 mm for eliminere faren for
sprut eller overflom ved en rask tmming av stekebordet.
Gulvrist med ramme eller gulvgrop komplett med ramme
klar for innstping i gulvet kan leveres som egen bestilling. Gitteret er spesielt utformet for vre sklisikker.

Si kkerhetsinstru kser
strmfrende deler! Vannstrler skal ikke rettes direkte
mot eller i nrheten av kontrollpanelet. Vann i kontakt
med strmfrende deler medfrer direkte livsfare. La aldri
vann komme i kontakt med oppvarmet stekebordshelle.
Dette kan fre til sprekker i stpegodset og fre til kortslutning.
Hye temperaturer! Bordets stekeflate kan reguleres
trinnvist med termostaten fra 100 C opptil 300 C. Ved
disse hye temperaturene skal det brukes stekespade
ved nrkontakt med den stekende matretten.
14

Flammer! Steketilsetninger med lavt flammepunkt kan


fre til at det oppstr flammer. Bruk alitid godkjente steketilsetninger.
Hvis det skulle oppst flammer minimerer man lufttilfrselen ved lukke lokket. Hvis dette ikke er tilstrekkelig
slr man av stekebordet og dekker pningene mellom
hellen, lokket og helletuten med et brannteppe. Ved slukningsarbeidet skal det brukes egnede vernehansker med
mansjetter.
NB! Ved brann skal man ALDRI bruke vann.

Et dataskilt med tekniske detaljer om stekebordet er plassert nederst til venstre p sylen (Fig. 3).

Hvis utstyret ikke er i bruk


Hvis utstyret ikke skal brukes p lengre tid m flgende
instrukser flges:
Bryt effekt- og styrestrmtilfrselen til stekebordet
gjennom hovedstrmbryteren eller i anleggets sentral.
Rengjr stekebordet og alt tilbehr.
La lokket st pent slik at luft kan sirkulere fritt og
dermed hindre utviklingen av mugg og vond lukt.

Innsteking
Stek inn stekebordet. Bruk et tynt lag matolje.

Bruk (Fig. 2)

Sett termostatbryteren (1) p nsket innstilling. Signallampen (2) fennes.


Prv med en liten mengde stekefett om stekebordet
har riktig temperatur. Ved behov justeres termostatinnstillingen. Pse at stekeflaten alltid er plan.
Stekebordet er klart til bruk.
Skrap av stekebordet under steking ved behov, f.eks,
fr ny pfylling.
Ved avsluttet steking stilles termostatbryteren (1) p
0. Signallampen (2) slukkes.

Beredskapsvarme (Fig. 2)
La termostatbryteren (1) st p innstilling 5. Stekebordet
kommer da raskt opp i riktig temperatur nr det skal brukes.

Rengjring
Produktet skal vre sltt av og avkjlet fr rengjring.
Bruk varmt vann og nytralt oppvask/vaskemiddel. Bruk
ikke stlull eler slipende materialer ved rengjring av rustfrie fiater. Hvis det er brukt rengjringsmidler som inneholder klor (f.eks, klorin), s m skyllingen utfres ekstra
grundig. Klor og klorforbindelser i forbindelse med rustfritt stl kan forrsake korrosjonsangrep. Fastbrente matrester p stekehellen skrapes bort med stlbrste, pimpsten eller stlspatel.
NB! Vannstrler skal ikke rettes direkte mot eller i
nrheten av kontrollpanelet. Vann i kontakt med
strmfrende deler medfrer direkte livsfare. La aldri
vann komme i kontakt med oppvarmet stekebordshelle. Dette kan fre til sprekker i stpegodset og fre
til kortslutning.

Hvis kjkkenet har mer enn ett stekebord til disposisjon


br disse fordeles p kjtt og fisk for unng arbeidskrevende og undvendig rengjring. Hvis man bare har et
bord m man foreta en grundig rengjring mellom disse
matsortene, ellers kan de ta smak av hverandre.

vrige dokumenter:
Reservedelliste (flger ikke med)
EF-forsikring (flger ikke med)

Serviceanvisning
Feil, rsal(er, utbedring
Ujevn staking
1. Stekebordet er ikke plant.
Flg instruksjonene under Justering av helling i
installasjonsanvisningen.
2. Fastbrente matrester
Se under Rengjring
Ujevn eller svak varme
1. Defekte sikringer
2. Defekte strmledninger
3. Elementet fungerer ikke
Kontroller at pressplatene ligger mot elementet og
at skruene ikke har lsnet.
Flg serviceinstruksjonene under Bytte element
4. Termostaten fungerer ikke
Flg serviceinstruksjonene under Bytte element

Servicelnstruksjoner
Bytte element
Ved bytte og bestilling av element, les frst punkt 8.
1. Pse at stekebordet er sltt av.
2. Bryt effekt- og styreledningen til stekebordet.
3. Lsne effekt- og styrekablene som gr mellom sylens koplingsboks og stekebordets koplingsboks, fra
kontaktoren og kontakten. Tipp bordet. Lsne spiralslangen i bjelken og trekk ut de allerede lsnede effekt- og styreledningene. Sett bordet tilbake i arbeidsstilling.
4. Ta bort stekebordslokket og konsollen.
5. Lsne sideplatene samt de fire skruene p hver side
av sylen ved opphengsbjelken. Pannen er n klar til
lftes fra sylen. NB! Lftingen m utfres av to
personer. Legg pannen p et underlag slik at det er
tilgang til bryteren og slik at hverken gulvet eller pannen skades. Opphengsbjelken kan n plasseres der
den er minst i veien ved vri p bryteren.
6. Lsne bunnplaten. Luken i piaten skal ikke fjernes.
Ta forsiktig bort isolasjonen under bunnplaten og legg
isolasjonen til side.
7. Under isolasjonen ligger det pressplater som skal
holde elementet p plass.
Lsne strmledningene, som stikker ut av pressplatens hull, ved koplingsboksen. NB! Spar p steatittperlene til det nye elementet. Lft bort preisplaten(e)
og skrap den (dem) ren.

8. Under pressplaten ligger det en kjeramisk fiberplate


som ikke kan brukes p nytt. Rens stekeplaten for
denne og kast den. Ny isolasjonsplate br bestilles
fra leverandrens reservelager samtidig med elementet.
9. Lft av elementet. NB! Glimmerskivene som er plassert ved avslutningen av elementet skal brukes p
nytt. Brst elementsporene rene.
10. Kontroller at spenningen p det nye elementet stemmer overens med strmnettet. Elementet monteres
som vist p ileggingsskjemaet. I visse fall m man
justere elementet med (pluss minus) ca. tre perler.
Hvis spiralen er for lang slr man i stykker passe antal! perler. Spiralen trekker seg da tilbake av egen kraft
og blir kortere.
Hvis spiralen er for kort, lsner man endesteatitten
og kompletterer med perler fra det gamle elementet.
NB! Ikke glem glimmersklvene.
Elementendene utstyres med perlene som er til overs
og justeres etter koplingsboltene. NB! Vr nye ved
tiltrekkingen av koplingsboltene.
11. Montering utfres i omvendt rekkeflge.
NB! Ikke trekk til pressplatene for kraftig. Elementperlene kan sprekke.
Bytte av termostat
Pse at stekebordet er sltt av.
Bryt effekt- og styreledningene til stekebordet.
Lsne termostatbryteren og frontplaten bak den. Skru
ls termostaten. Ta bort strmledningene og trekk
termostaten noen flerlengder frem. Klipp av flerledningen s nr termostathuset som mulig. Flertrden skal s vikles, tres inn i og teipes godt fast
rundt fleren p den nye termostaten slik at man kan
trekke i flertrden.
Tipp stekeplaten maksimalt. Lsne luken i stekebordets bunnplate og den lille isolasjonsbiteh, slik at termostatfleren blir synlig. Lsne fleren og trekk forsiktig frem den nye.
Montering utfres i omvendt rekkeflge.
Generelt
Vr nye med sette lseskivene tilbake p riktig plass,
eller bytt dem ut med nye. Noen muttere kan ha blitt brent
og nedslitt. Bytt ut disse med nye. Det er ogs viktig at
alle deler rengjres godt for fastbrent fett. Der det har
sittet popnitnagler kan man erstatte disse med skruer slik
at fremtidig vedlikeholdsarbeid blir enklere.

15

DK

Tekniske specifikationer
Model

168032

168033

168034

168035

Stegeflade (mm)

500x450

700x560

1000x560

700x560

Stegepandens dybde (mm)

60

90

90

180

Max. fasestrm (A)

10

16

25

16

Effekt (kW)

5,5

10,0

14,0

10,0

Vgt (kg)

165

180

200

190

Tllslutningsspnding 1680320801 (V, Hz)

400 3-50

Tlislutningsspnding 1680320501 (V, Hz)

440 3-60

Kapslingsgrad

IPX4

Generelle anvisninger

Opstilling
Fjern emballagen.
En god luftcirkulation er vigtig omkring stegebordet.
Anbring stegebordet som vist i fig. 1.
Anbring stegebordet plant.
Montr og spnd fastgrelsesskruerne, der er forsynet med spndeskiver.
Fjern forsigtigt beskyttelsesplasten. Eventuelle limrester fjernes med et egnet oplsningsmiddel.
Stegepanden er ved levering rustbehandlet med rustbeskyttelsesol ie. Rengr panden samt de vrige dele
og tilbehr med varmt vand og et neutralt opvaske-/
rengringsmiddel. Skyl derefter alle dele grundigt af.

Hvis forskrifter i dette og udstyrets vrige dokumenter ikke flges, kan dets sikkerhed sttes over styr
og leverandrens garanti- og produktansvar ophrer.

Ls forskrifterne I dette dokument omhyggeligt igen


da det indeholder vigtige sikkerhedsoplysninger med
hensyn til installationens driftssikkerhed, brug og
vedligeholdelse af produktet. Opbevar vejledningen
sledes, at den er tilgngelig for alle brugere.
Installation og test skal udfres af specialuddannettekniker og i henhold til producentens instruktioner.
Se nedenfor samt installationsanvisningen.
Installation af produktet skal udfres i henhold til
gldende normer og forskrifter.
Al service, vedligeholdelse samt reparation skal udfres af en specialuddannet tekniker.
Kun originalreservedele m benyttes ved udskiftning.
Se Serviceanvisning* og Reservedelskatalog*.
Hndtering og pleje m kun udfres af specialuddannet personale (operatr).
Inden udstyret tages i brug, skal operatren
- skaffe sig gode kundskaber i hndtering og pleje.
- meget omhyggeligt g igennem sikkerhedsinstruktioner og advarselstekster.
Medleveres ikke. Kan bestilles hos producenten eller via producentens reprsentant.

Installationsanvisning
CE direktiv
stegebordet er fremstillet i overensstemmelse med EU
direktiv LVD 73/23/EF, EMC 89/336/EF og er som
enkeltenhed CE-godkendt og CE-mrket.
Fr opstilling
Rengr nedstbningsrammen for betonrester. Rens de
fire skruehuller med en M10 gevindtap.
16

Justering af hldning

Kontrollr, at stegebordet str plant.


Hldning til siden justeres med to insexskruer. Disse
er placeret under ophngningsbjlken, der holder
stegepanden, p hver side af ophngningsbjlkens
fastgrelse i sjlen.
Hldning fremad eller tilbage justeres som flger:
Fjern venstre sideplade. Stegebordets vandrette position reguleres med stilleskruen ved ophngningsbjlken.

Elektrisk tilslutning
Den elektriske tilslutning skal udfres i henhold til alle
gldende normer og forskrifter.
Effektledning 3-faset + jord tilsluttes i koblingsdsen i
sjlen af en aut. tekniker.
Kontrollr p stegebordets typeplade, at der er den
korrekte effektspnding. Stegebordets tilslutning skal
best af en fast installation.
Stegebordet tilsluttes nettet gennem tilkobling via anlggets central.
Kontrollr, at nettet er forberedt for eller kan belastes
med den aktuelle strm, og at det er udstyret med en
passende beskyttelsesjordledning.
Bde effekt- og styrestrm skal vre forsynet med
sikringer. Sikringernes mrkestrm skal vre hj nok
til at kunne levere den forndne kraft til stegebordet.

stegebordet br tilsluttes elnettet via en flerpolet afbryder (leverandrens anbefaling), hvormed strmtilfrslen til stegebordets effekt- og styreledning kan
afbrydes.
Stegebordet er udstyret med en ydre kvipotential
jordklemme, der er placeret p bagsiden af sjlen.

lukke lget. Er dette ikke tilstrkkeligt, slukker man for


stegebordet og dkker sprkkerne mellem grill, lg og
rr med brandfilt. Ved dette slukningsarbejde skal der
anvendes beskyttelseshandsker med hndledskrave.
OBS! Brug aldrig vand i tilflde af brand.

Tekniske data
Tilbehr
Model
16 78 00
16 78 01
GGS 460
GGM 460
GGP 460

Benvnelse
Indstbningsramme til model 16 80 32
Indstbningsramme til model 16 80 33, -34,
-35
Gulvbrnd til stengulv
Gulvbrnd til stbt gulv
Gulvbrnd til plasttppe

Brugsanvisning
Anvendelsesomrde
Stegebordet er beregnet til brug ved madlavning i storkkkener af enfiver art. Andet anvendelsesomrde er ikke
tilladt. Stegebordet m ikke anvendes som friturekar.

Produktbeskrivelse
Stegebordet har en jvn stegetemperatur over hele stegefladen, stor kapacitet, god konomi, er arbejdsbesparende og kan vippes. Stegepanden er fremstillet af frsteklasses stbejern. Stegebordets udvendige sider, sjler samt lg er fremstillet af slebet rustfri plade. Stegebordet er omhyggeligt varmeisoleret. Lget kan vippes
op og er godt afbalanceret. Reguleringsudstyret bestr af
en kombineret afbryder og termostat i kombination med
en kontaktor. Kontaktoren er placeret i sjlen. En signallampe viser, nr stegebordet tilfres strm. Med termostaten reguleres varmen p stegefladen trinlst fra 100C
op til 300C.
Foran stegebordet kan der placeres et gulvaflb med rist.
Dybde mindst 150 mm for s vidt muligt at eliminere risikoen for stnk og overskylning ved en for hurtig tmning
af stegebordet. Gulvrist med ramme eller gulvaflb komplet med ramme, beregnet til indstbning i gulvet, kan
leveres efter srlig ordre. Risten er specielt udformet til
at vre skridsikker.

Sikkerhedsinstruktioner
Spndingsfrende dele ! Der m ikke rettes en vandstrle direkte mod betjeningspanelet eller i nrheden
heraf. Vand i kontakt med spndingsfrende dele medfrer direkte livsfare. Lad aldrig vand komme i kontakt
med det opvarmede stegebords grill. Dette kan forrsage
dannelse af revner i stbegodset med kortslutning til flgeHje temperaturer! Bordets stegeflade kan med termostaten reguleres trinlst fra 100C op til 300C. Ved disse
hje temperaturer skal der anvendes en paletkniv ved
nrkontakt med de fdevarer, der tilberedes.
Brand ! Stegetilstninger med et lavt flammepunkt kan
forrsage brand. Brug altid godkendte stegetilstninger.
Hvis der opstr brand, minimerer man lufttilfrslen ved at

En dataplade med stegebordets tekniske oplysninger er


placeret p sjlens nederste venstre del (fig. 3).

Hvis udstyret ikke er i brug


Hvis udstyret ikke skal anvendes i lngere tid, skal flgende instrukser flges:
Afbryd effekt- og styrestrmmen til stegebordet p
hovedafbryderen eller i anlggets central.
Rengr stegebordet og alt tilbehr.
Lad lget st bent, s luften kan cirkulere i rummet
og dermed forhindre dannelse af mug og drlig lugt.

Fr brug
Stegebordet skal steges til. Brug et tyndt lag madolie til
dette forml.

Anvendelse (fig. 2)

St termostatknappen (1) p den nskede temperatur. Signallampen (2) tndes.


Prv med en lille mngde stegefedt, at stegebordet
har den rette temperatur. Drej p termostatknappen
efter behov. Srg for at stegefladen er vandret.
Stegebordet er klar til brug.
Skrab stegebordet af efter behov under stegningen,
f.eks, fr ny pfyldning.
Efter afslutettet stegning skal termostatknappen (1)
sttes p 0. Signallampen (2) slukker.

Beredskabsvarme (fig. 2)
Lad termostatknappen (1) st p 5. Stegebordet kan s
hurtigt opvarmes yderligere, nr det skal bruges.
Rengring
Udstyret skal vre slukket og klet af, nr det rengres.
Brug varmt vand og et neutralt opvaske/rengringsmiddel. Brug ikke stluld eller rengringsartikler med slibemidler ved rengring af rustfrie overflader. Hvis der er
brugt rengringsmidler indeholdende klor (f.eks, klorin),
skal skylningen gres ekstra omhyggeligt. Klor og klorforbindelser i kontakt med rustfrit stl kan forrsage rustangreb. Fastbrndte stegerester p stegegrillen skal skrabes af med en stlbrste, pimpsten eller i vanskeligere
tilflde med en stlspartel.
OBS! Der m ikke rettes en vandstrle direkte mod
kontrolpanelet eller i nrheden heraf. Vand i kontakt
med spndingsfrende dele medfrer direkte livsfare. Lad aldrig vand komme i kontakt med det opvarmede stegebords grill. Dette kan forrsage dannelse
af revner i stbegodset med kortslutning til flge.
Hvis anlgget omfatter mere end et stegebord, br disse deles op mellem kd og fisk for at undg besvrlig og
tidskrvende rengring. Er der kun et stegebord, skal
det rengres omhyggeligt mellem disse madtyper, da de
ellers kan f en eftersmag.
17

vrige dokumenter:
Reservedelsliste (medleveres ikke)
EU-forsikring (medleveres ikke)

Serviceanvisning
Fejl, rsager, udbedring
Ujvn stegning
1. Stegebordet str ikke plant.
Flg instruktionerne for justering af hldning i installationsanvisningen.
2. Fastbrndte madrester.
Se Brugsanvisning: Rengring.
Ujvn eller svag varme
1. Defekte sikringer.
2. Defekte elledninger.
3. Elementet fungerer ikke.
Kontrollr, at pressepladerne ligger tt mod elementet, og at skruerne ikke sidder ls.
Flg serviceinstruktionerne for udskiftning af element.
4. Termostaten fungerer ikke.
Flg serviceinstruktionerne for udskiftning af element.

Serviceinstruktioner
Udskiftning af element
Ved udskiftning og bestilling af element, ls frst pkt. 8.
1. Srg for at der er slukket for stegebordet.
2. Afbryd effekt- og styreledningen til stegebordet.
3. Lsn effekt- og styrekablerne, der gr mellem sjlens koblingsdse og stegebordets koblingsdse, fra
kontaktoren og klemrkken. Vip bordet. Lsn spiralslangen i bjlken og trk de allerede lsnede effektog styrekabler ud. Vip bordet tilbage i arbejdsstilling.
4. Fjern stegebordets lg og konsollen.
5. Lsn sidepladerne og de fire skruer p hver side af
sjlen ved ophngningsbjlken. Panden kan nu lftes af sjlen. OBS! Der skal vre 2 personer om dette lft. Lg panden p et underlag, s grebet kan
bevge sig frit over gulvet, s hverken gulv eller pande beskadiges. Ophngningsbjlken kan nu placeres, hvor den er mindst i vejen, ved at dreje p grebet.
6. Lsn bundpladen. Lgen i pladen skal Ikke fjernes.
Fjern forsigtigt den isolering, der ligger under bundpladen og gem denne.
7. Under isoleringen ligger der nogle presseplader, der
har til opgave at holde elementerne p plads.
Lsn elledningerne, der kommer ud af pressepladens
hul,
ved koblingsdsen. OBS! Gem steatit-perlerne til de nye elementer. Lft pressepladen (pressepladerne) af og skrab den/dem rene.
8. Under pressepladen liggeren keramisk fiberplade, der
ikke kan genbruges. Rens stegepanden for denne og
smid den bort. En ny isoleringsplade br bestilles sammen med elementerne fra leverandrens reservedelslager.
18

9. Lft elementerne af. OBS! Glimmerbrikkerne, der er


placeret for enden af elementet, skal bruges igen.
Brst elementrillerne rene.
10. Kontrollr, at der tilfres den rette elementspnding.
Elementerne monteres iflge ilgningsskemaet. I
nogle tilflde er det ndvendigt at justere med ca.
plus/minus 3 perler.
Er spiralen for lang, knuser man et passende antal
perler. Spiralen fjedrer s tilbage af egen kraft og
bliver kortere.
Er spiralen for kort, lsner man endesteatitten og
supplerer med perler fra de gamle elementer.
OBS! Glem ikke glimmerbrikkerne.
Elementenderne forsynes med de gemte perler og
tilpasses koblingsboltene. OBS! Vr omhyggelig ved
fastspnding af koblingsboltene.
11. Delene monteres igen i omvendt rkkeflge.
OBS! Spnd ikke pressepladerne for hrdt, da dette
kan f elementperlerne til at revne.
Udsl(iftning af termostat
Srg for at der er slukket for stegebordet.
Afbryd effekt- og styreledningen til stegebordet
Lsn termostatknappen og den bagved liggende frontplade. Skru termostaten ls. Fjern elledningerne og
trk termostaten en smule frem - kun en kuglelngde. Klip flertrden af s tt p termostathuset som
muligt. Vikl flertrden om, st den i og tape den
godt fast om den nye termostats kugle, s flertrden kan anvendes som trktrd.
Vip stegepanden s meget som muligt. Lsn lgen i
stegebordets bundplade og det lille isoleringsstykke,
s termostatkuglen bliver synlig. Lsn kuglen og trk
forsigtigt den nye frem.
Montr delene igen i omvendt rkkeflge.
Generelt
Srg for at stte lseskiverne tilbage p deres rigtige
pladser eller udskift dem med nye. Nogle mtrikker kan
vre blevet brndt og dermed slidt ned. Udskift disse
med nye. Det er ogs vigtigt at rengre alle dele omhyggeligt for fastbrndt fedt. Der hvor der har siddet popnitter, kan man stte skruer for at gre senere indgreb lettere.

GB]

Technical specifications
Model

168032

168033

168034

168035

Frying area (mm)

500x450

700x560

1000x560

700x560

Depth of frying pan (mm)

60

90

90

180

Max. phase load (A)

10

16

25

16

Output (kW)

5,5

10,0

14,0

10,0

Weight (kg)

165

180

200

190

Supply voltage 1680320801 (V, Hz)

400 3-50

Supply voltage 1680320501 (V, Hz)

440 3-60

Enclosure class

IPX4

General instructions
If the instructions in this and the equipment's other
documents are not followed, its safety could be jeopardised, and the supplier's guarantee and product
responsibility will become invalid.

Read the instructions in this document carefully, as it


contains important safety information concerning in
stallation, operational safety, usage and maintenance. Keep it in a place which is accessible to all users.
Installation and test running must be carried out by a
qualified technician and according to the
manufacturer's instructions. See below as well as in
stallation instructions.
Installation and connection of the product must be
carried out according to applicable standards and directives.
All servicing, maintenance and repairs must be carried out by qualified technicians. Only original spare
parts may be used. See Servicing Instructions* and
Spare Parts Catalogue*.
Maintenance and operation may only be carried out
by personnel specially trained for this purpose (operator).
Before the equipment is put into use, the operator
must:
Acquire a good knowledge of operation and maintenance.
Study the safety instructions and warning notices very
carefully.
Not included. Can be ordered from the manufacturer
or via the manufacturer's representative.

Installation instructions
CE Directives
The frying table has been manufactured in accordance
with EU directives LVD 73/23/EEC, EMC 89/336/EEC and
has been CE approved and marked as an individual unit.

Before placement
Remove any concrete remains from the frame in the floor.
Clean the four screw holes with an MIO screw tap.

Placement

Remove the packaging.


Good air circulation around the table is important. Place the table according to fig. 1.
Make sure the table is perfectly level.
Fit and tighten the retaining screws with washers.
Remove the protective plastic carefully. Any traces of
adhesive can be removed using a suitable solvent.
The cooking surface is protected by anti-corrosive oil.
Clean the surface, the other parts of the unit and accessories using warm water and a neutral detergent.
Rinse thoroughly.

Adjusting the tilt

Check that the frying table is level.


Sideways tilt can be adjusted by means of the two
hexagonal screws. These are located underneath the
suspension beam which holds the frying pan, on each
side of where the suspension beam is fixed to the
column.
Fonward or backward tilt can be adjusted as follows:
Remove the metal plate on the left-hand side. The
horizontal position can be adjusted by turning the adjustment screw next to the suspension beam.

Electrical connection
Electrical connections must be carried out in accordance with all applicable standards and directives.
Power cable 3-phase + earth to be connected to the
distribution box in the column by a qualified technician.
Check on the table's rating plate that the power supply is correct. The frying table's connection must be a
fixed installation.
The frying table is connected to the grid via the main
distribution box.
Check that the grid is able to carry the appropriate
current, and that it is equipped with a proper protecti19

ve earth.
Both the power supply and the operating current must
be fused. The fuse must have sufficient rated current
to be able to supply the frying table with the necessary power.
The frying table should be connected to the mains via
a multi-pole safety switch (manufacturer's recommendation) which can be used to switch off the electrical
supply to the table.
The table is equipped with an outer equipotential earth
terminal connection located on the back of the column.

Accessories
Model
16 78 00
16 78 01
GGS 460
GGM 460
GGP 460

Designation
Frame for cementing into the floor. Fits model 16 80 32
Frame for cementing into the floor. Fits model 168033, 34, 35
Drain for stone floors
Drain for compound floors
Drain for plastic carpeted floors

Instructions for use


Areas of application
The frying table is intended for food preparation in all types of catering kitchens. Use of the table for any other
purpose than food preparation is not permitted. The frying table may not be used as a deep fat fryer.

Product description
The frying table has an even frying temperature over the
entire cooking surface, large capacity, is labour-saving,
economical and can be tilted.
The frying pan is made from top quality cast iron. The
outer sides, column and cover are made from polished
stainless steel. The frying table is thoroughly heat insulated. The cover can be lifted up, and is well-balanced.
The controls consist of a combined switch and thermostat in combination with a relay, which is located on the
column.
A pilot light indicates when the power is switched on. The
thermostat is used to regulate the temperature of the cooking surface from anywhere from 100C up to 300C.
A recessed floor drain covered by a grid can be installed
in front of the frying table. It must be at least 150 mm
deep in order to avoid as far as possible the risk of splashing and overflowing if the table is emptied too quickly.
The floor grid with frame or recessed floor drain complete
with frame for cementing into the floor can be specially
ordered. The frame has a special anti-slip design.

High temperatures! The cooking surface of the table can


be regulated by means of the thermostat from 100C up
to 300C. A spatula must be used when handling food
being cooked at these high temperatures.
Fire! Flavouring ingredients with a low flash-point could
catch fire. Always use approved flavouring ingredients.
If the food does catch fire, minimise the oxygen supply by
closing the cover. If this does not extinguish the fire, switch
off the frying table and cover the openings between the
cooking surface, the cover and the pipe with a fireproof
blanket. Protective gloves which cover the wrists must be
worn during fire-fighting operations.
N.B. In the above situation: Never use water!

Technical data
A rating plate stating the frying table's technical details is
located on the lower left-hand section of the column (fig.
3).

If the equipment is not being used


If the equipment will not be used for a long period of time,
the following instructions must be followed:
Disconnect the frying table's power supply and operating current by means of the main circuit breaker or
the main distribution box.
Clean the frying table and all accessories.
Leave the cover open so that air can circulate, thus
preventing mould and unpleasant smells from developing.

Before use
Before using the frying table, it must be seasoned with a
thin layer of cooking oil.

Use (fig. 2)

Set the thermostat (1) to the required temperature.


The pilot light (2) will light up.
Check if the correct temperature has been reached
by adding a small amount of fat to the frying pan. If
necessary, alter the thermostat setting. l\/lake certain
that the surface of the pan is horizontal.
The frying table is ready to use.
If necessary, scrape the frying surface while frying
e.g. before adding a new batch of food.
Twist the thermostat knob (1) to 0 when frying has
been completed. The pilot light (2) will switch off.

standby heat (fig. 2)


Leave the thermostat (1) on setting 5. The frying table
can then be quickly heated up when it is to be used.

Cleaning
The product must be switched off and have cooled down
before cleaning. Use warm water and a neutral dish-washing detergent or cleanser. Do not use steel wool or abrasive cleaning material when cleaning stainless steel surSafety instructions
faces.
If using detergent containing chlorine,rinseextreLive parts! Water may not be directed towards the conmely
thoroughly.
Chlorine and chloride compounds which
trol panel or its vicinity. Water coming into contact with
come
into
contact
with stainless steel can cause corrosilive parts carries a direct safety risk. Never allow water to
come into contact with the hot cooking surface. This could on. Remains of food burnt onto the cooking surface can
be scraped off using a steel brush, pumice-stone, or in
lead to cracking, and consequent short circuiting.

20

severe cases, a steel spatula.


the pan on a raised base so that the knob is well clear
N.B. Water may not be directed towards the control
of the floor, and neither the floor nor the pan will be
panel or its vicinity. Water coming into contact with
damaged. By twisting the knob, the suspension beam
live parts carries a direct safety risk. Never allow water
can now be placed in a position where it is least in the
to come into contact with the hot cooking surface.
way.
This could lead to cracking, and consequent short 6. Remove the bottom panel. The hatch in the panel must
circuiting.
be left in place. Carefully remove the insulation lying
on the bottom panel, and save it.
If there is more than one frying table on the premises, 7. The presser plates are located under the insulation.
these should be used for frying meat and fish respectiveThese are for holding the elements in place. Disconly, in order to avoid time-consuming cleaning routines. If
nect the electrical cables protruding from the holes in
there is only one frying table, it must be thoroughly cleathe presser plates, next to the distribution box. N.B.
ned between cooking these different types of food, or the
Save the steatite beads for the new elements. Remtastes could be transferred to one another.
ove and scrape the presser plate/s clean.
8. Under the presser plates, there is a ceramic fibre plate which cannot be reused. Remove it from the frying
Other documentation
pan and discard it. A new insulation plate should be
Spare parts list (not supplied)
ordered from the suppliers' spare parts division at the
EU-assurance (not supplied)
same time as the elements.
9. Remove the elements. N.B. The mica discs located
at the end of the elements are to be reused. Clean
the element recesses with a brush.
10. Check that the voltage for the elements is correct.
Problem, cause, what to do
The elements are to be installed according to the installation plan. In certain cases the elements could
Uneven frying
need adjusting by approximately three beads. If the
1. The frying table is not level.
spiral is too long, break off the appropriate number of
Follow the instructions for "Adjusting the tilt" in the
beads. The spiral will then automatically spring back
installation instructions.
and become shorter. If the spiral is too short, loosen
2. Burnt-on remains of food
the end steatite beads and complement with beads
See instructions for use: Cleaning
from the old element. N.B. Do not forget the mica
discs. Fit the beads saved to the ends of the elements
Variable or weak heat
and adjust to the coupling bolts.
1. Defective fuses.
N.B. Be careful when tightening the coupling bolts.
2. Defective electrical connections.
11. Reverse the procedure to reassemble.
3. The heating elements are not working.
N.B. Do not tighten the presser plates top much, as
Check that the presser plates are properly pressed
the element beads could break.
against the elements, and that the screws are not
loose.
Replacing the thermostat
Follow the servicing instructions, "Replacing the ele- Make sure that the frying table is switched off.
ment".
Disconnect the power and operating cables.
4. The thermostat is not functioning.
Remove the thermostat knob and the front panel be Follow the servicing instructions, "Replacing the elehind it. Unscrew the thermostat. Remove the electrimenf.
cal cables and pull the thermostat forward by just one
bulb length. Cut off the sensor wire as near to the
Servicing instructions
thermostat housing as possible. Bind, loop and tape
the sensor wire firmly around the bulb of the new therReplacing the elements
mostat so that the sensor wire can be used to pull.
When replacing and ordering elements, read point 8 first. Tilt the frying pan as far as possible. Remove the hatch
1. Make sure the frying table has been turned off.
and the small piece of insulation in the bottom panel
2. Switch off the power and operating current to the fryof the frying table, so that the thermostat bulb is viing table.
sible. Remove the bulb and carefully pull the new one
3. Disconnect the power and operating cables, which
into place.
run between the column's distribution box and the fry- Reverse the procedure to reassemble.
ing table's connection box, from the contactor and
the terminal block. Tilt the table. Disconnect the spiral General
hose in the beam and pull out the loosened power Be careful to replace the locking washers correctly, or
and operating cables. Return the table to its working exchange them for new ones. Certain nuts could be burnt,
position.
and have deteriorated in quality. Replace these with new
ones. It is also important that all parts are cleaned tho4. Remove the cover and the console.
5. Loosen the side panels as well as the four screws on roughly, and all burnt fat removed. Where there were preeach side of the column next to the suspension beam. viously blind rivets, these can be replaced with screws in
The pan can now be lifted off the column. N.B. It is order to simplify future work on the equipment.
recommended that two persons lift off the pan. Place

Directions for servicing

21

H] Electrolux

Reservdelskatalog
Spare Parts Catalogue
Ersatzteilliste

FP50T, FP70T, FP100T. FP70TD


168032XXXX, 168033XXXX, 168034xxxx, 168035xxxx
168032xxxxS, 168033xxxxS, 168034xxxxS, 168035xxxxS
Stekbord
Frying table
Kippbratpfanne

3-563
D O C . N O . 47813 36-17

EDITIONS

01.01

2M

-117

,101

102

-103

-104

105

ILLUSTRATION 202 10

Stekbord modeil 168032

Antal
Pos. Quantity
Anzahl
101
102
103
104
105

Art.nr
Art. no
Art. Nr

Utgva
Edition
Ausgabe
3

Illustration 20210
Benmning

520 41 46-00 Kolviager


520 41 65-00 Gasfjder
467 76 54-00 Axel
461 45 61-70 Konsol
520 39 76-00 Anslutnings plint

Description

Bezeichnung

Piston bearing
Gas spring
Shaft
Bracket
Ternninal block

Kolbenlagerung
Gasfeder
Achse
Konsole
Klemmleiste

Mnad
Month
Monat
01

r
Year
Jahr
01
Anm.
Notes
Anin.

107
108
109

767 51 12 -09
767 51 11 -09
467 89 02-00
467 88 74-00
467 88 72-00

Kontaktor
Kontaktor
Axel
Draglnk
Axel

Contactor
Contactor
Shaft
Brake rod
Shaft

Kontaktor
Kontaktor
Achse
Zuggelenk
Achse

110
111
112
113
114

467 88 73-00
467 89 82-00
467 90 16-02
467 89 03-00
461 44 41-02

Lagring
Hylsa
Ratt
Lagerfste
Lager

Bearing
Sleeve
Knob
Bearing holder
Bearing

Lagerung
Hlse
Drehkopf
Lagerbefestigung
Lager

115
116

520 53 40-00 Transformator


552 22 21-03 Automatskring

Transformer
Automatic fuse

Transformator
Automatsicherung

1).
1).

117

520 49 74-00

Lock for lid

Marin Schnappschloss

2).

106

Locklsning

1). Marin utfrande 400, 440 V / Marine execution 400, 440 V / Marine Ausfhrung 400, 440 V
2). Marin utfrande / Marine execution / Marine Ausfhrung
Fet Stil = ndring
Bold print = Change
Fettdruck = nderung

1).

ILLUSTRATION 202 11

Stekbord modell 168032

Antal
Pos, Quantity
Anzahl
101
102
103
104
105

1
2
1
1
1
1

106
107
108
109
110

1
1
1
12
2

111

Art.nr
Art. no
Art. Nr
467 89
461 45
477 64
477 64
476 09
476 09

Utgva
Edition
Ausgabe
3

Illustration 20211
Benmning

98-00 Look
67-01 Axel
70-00 Isoierpiatta
96-00 Isoierplatta
69-23 Element
69-25 Element

Description

Bezeichnung

Lid
Shaft
insulation
insulation
Heating element
Heating element

Decl<el
Achse
Isoiierplatte
Isoiierplatte
Heizl<rper
Heizkrper

464 29 61-13
462 41 72-01
467 80 41-00
463 92 69-01
477 64 20-00

Vred
Giimlampa
Termostat
Glimmer
Klmma

Knob
Glowing lamp
Thermostat
Glimmer
Clamp

Drehknopf
Glimmlampe
Thermostat
Glimmer
Klammer

467 89 97-00

Handtag

Handle

Handgriff

Fet Stil = ndring


Bold print == Change
Fettdruck = nderung

1). Marin utfrande 440 V / Marine execution 440 V / Marine Ausfhrung 440 V

Mnad
Month
Monat
01

r
Year
Jahr
01
Anm.
Notes
Anm.

stekbord modell 168033, -34, -35

Antal
Pos. Quantity
Anzahl

Art.nr
Art. no
Art. Nr

Benmning

101
102
103
104

105
106
107

108
109

1
1
1
2 2
1 1
2

Bezeichnung

467 76 52-00
467 76 51-01
477 77 09-02
477 77 09-00
477 77 09-03
477 77 09-01

Koivlager
Gasfjder
Konsol
Konsol
Konsol
Konsol

Piston bearing
Gas spring
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket

Kolbenlagerung
Gasfeder
Konsole
Konsole
Konsole
Konsole

467 76 54-00
461 42 68-70
520 39 76-00
767 51 12-09
767 51 11-09

Axel
Anslutnings plint
Anslutnings plint
Kontaktor
Kontaktor

Shaft
Terminal block
Terminal block
Contactor
Contactor

Achse
Klemmleiste
Klemmleiste
Kontaktor
Kontaktor

Axel
Draglnk
Draglnk
Axel
Faste

Shaft
Brake rod
Brake rod
Shaft
Attachement

Achse
Zuggelenk
Zuggelenk
Achse
Befestigung

Lagring
Hylsa
Ratt

Bearing

Transformator

Knob
Bearing
Transformer

Lagerung
Hlse
Drehknopf
Lager
Transformator

Automatskring

Automatic fuse

Automatsicherung

467 89 02-00
467 88 74-01
1 467 88 74-03
1 467 88 72-01
1 467 89 03-00

110
111

117

Description

Mnad
Montti
Monat
01

r
Year
Jahr
01
Anm.
Notes
Anm.

16 80 33
16 80 34
16 80 35

112
113
114
115
116

Utgva
Edition
Ausgabe
3

Illustration 20212

467 88 73-00
467 89 82-00
467 90 16-02
461 41 62-02
520 53 40-00

2 552 22 21-03

Fetstil= Andring
Bold print = Change
Fettdruck = nderung

Lager

Sleeve

1). Marin utfrande 400,440 V / Marine execution 400,440 V / Marine Ausfhrung 400,440 V

1).

Stekbord modell 168033, -34, -35

Antal
Quantity
Anzahl

Art.nr
Art. no
Art. Nr

Utgva
Edition
Ausgabe
3

Illustration 20213
Description

Bezeichnung

Locl<
Locl<
Lager
Axel
Distans

Lid
Lid
Bearing
Shaft
Distance

Deckel
Deckel
Lager
Achse
Distanz

461 45 98-01
461 46 84-01
477 64 68-00
477 64 69-00
477 64 20-00

Lagring
Gasfjder
Klmma

Bearing
Gas spring
Insulation
Insulation
Clamp

Lagerung
Gasfeder
Isolierplatte
Isolierplatte
Klemme

467 80 41-00
464 29 61-13
462 41 72-01
476 09 69-15
476 09 69-19
476 09 69-17
476 09 69-21

Termostat
Vred
Glinnlampa
Element
Element
Element
Element

Thermostat
Knob
Glowing lamp
Heating element
Heating element
Heating element
Heating element

Thermostat
Drehknopf
Glimmlampe
Heizkrper
Heizkrper
Heizkrper
Heizkrper

467 76 14-00
477 64 77-00
114 24 24 24 463 92 69-01
115 1 1 1 467 89 97-00

Isolerplatta
Isolerplatta
Glimmer
Handtag

Insulation
Insulation
Glimmer
Handle

Isolierplatte
Isolierplatte
Glimmer
Handgriff

Pos.

Benmning

16 80 33
16 80 34
16 80 35

101

461
461
461
461
477

102
103
104
105
106
107
108

2
2
1
2

2
2
1
2

109
110
111
112

1 1
1 1
1 1
1 -

2
2
1
2

113

Fet Stil = ndring


Bold print = Change
Fettdruck = nderung

46
44
45
45
80

36-71
20-71
95-01
84-01
93-00

Isolerplatta
Isolerplatta

1). Marin utfrande 440 V / Marine execution 440 V / Marine Ausfhrung 440 V

Mnad
Month
Monat
01

r
Year
Jahr
01
Anm.
Notes
Anm.

Dataskylt
Rating plate
Kennschild

1
1
1

r ' J ' l 1 Model:


k ^ \ J 1 Model;
ISer.No.

1
Max phaseload:

Produktnummer
Product number c;^^
Produktnummer

Tot.

KW

XM^

KW 1

Tot.

KW

XMK

KW 1

A 1

V\ter pressure:
1 Prod Nr.
MADE IN

Wiring diagram:

16803xxxxx(S) = Marin utfrande / Marine execution / Marine Ausfiirung

Notes:

Ledningsdiagram
Wiring diagram

Etschema
Shkkaavio
Elskjema

[SE]
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

16 80 32

13 L2 LI

Kontakter
Element
Termostat
Signallampe
Transformator
Skring

^_ali

zr

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Kontaktori
Lmpelementti
Termostaatti
Merkkivalo
Muuntaja
Sulake

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Kontaktor
Element
Termostat
Signallampe
Transformator
Sikring

A.
B.
C.
O.
E.
F.

Kontaktor
Varmeelement
Termostat
Signallampe
Transformator
Sikring

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Contactor
Heating element
Thermostat
Signal lamp
Transformer
Fuse

16 80 33
16 80 34
16 80 35
^

L2 11

(T
fig.4

206991^

,fk

-SO

,A

c=A
c==A,

=A.

=A

v"^!*^*

^:ltilMia

- ^

=A.

H Electrolux
Refrigerators,
ER25M/45M/55M/75M

'

Model ER25M - interior

Model ER25M

ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL AB
MARINE DIVISION
SE 441 82 Alingss, Sweden
Phone
+46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
pa.marineinfo@electrolux.se

DOMESTIC TYPE REFRIGERATOR

CFC-FREE REFRIGERATION
SYSTEM AND INSULATION

5, 7, 9 AND 13 L FREEZER
COMPARTMENT

MANUAL DEFROSTING
(ER25M/45M/55M)

PUSH-BUTTON DEFROST
THERMOSTAT (ER75M)

ADJUSTABLE INTERIOR SHELVES

LAMINATED WORK TOP

FOUR MODELS- FOUR SIZES

These free standing refrigerators are suitable


for all fresh and frozen food products in all
shipboard installations. All models are supplied with deck bearer fittings and door
catches.
The refrigerators have white enamelled housing and the top is provided with a laminated
table top giving an extra working space.
Interior is equipped with storage shelves and
egg tray. Models ER45M, ER55M and
ER75M are also equipped with salad drawer
and internal light.
Model ER25M is supplied with a drip tray
which should be located on the top shelf, all
the other models are supplied with a drip tray
which should be located on runners immediately below the freezer compartment.
The refrigerator is equipped with reversible
hinge type and delivered with lockable door
for right or left hand hanging.
Forfirrtherspecifications, please see overleaf.

11-859
DOC.NO.

EDITION 2

11-859BM

10.02

REFRIGERATORS ER25M, ER45M, ER55M, ER75M


Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm

1. Rear deck bearer


2. Front deck bearer
3. Elearic cord

Specification - dimensions
Dimensioner mm
Model/Type
W

ER25M
ER45M

636
457

515

500

135

850

ER55M
ER75M

590
533.5

630

1230

Capacity
litres
(gross)

Freezer
mpartment
litres

82

113

142

215

13

530

150

INSTALLATION
Electrical
The unit is delivered withal.Smlong earthed 3-wire cord
provided with an European (Schuko) plug.
General
This is a domestic type refrigerator. In many cases the unit
can be left freestanding and be secured from moving ace.
to the instruaion for shipboard installation.

Specification
Model/Type
Number
of
shelves

ER25M
ER45M
ER55M
ER75M

11-859
Subject to changes without notice.

Weight kgs
Refrigerant

R 134a

Voltage V

110-115 1-50/60
230 1-50/60

Loading
kW

0.1

net

gross

Shipping
volujne
m'

20

25

0.210

25

30

0.270

31

36

0.330

39

44

0.430

Fuse
slow A

10

Operation and
IVIaintenance for

Technical Appliances
ER-series

12024 lss.2 Nov'01

Bognor Regis
West Sussex

P022 9Na
Great Britain

Tel+44 (0)1243 863161


Fax i-44 {0)1243 825440

mail: techprod@lec.co,uk

CONTENTS

BEFORE STARTING
POSITIONING
INSTALLATION

2
2

OPERATION
BEFORE SWITCHING ON
STARTING
CLEANING YOUR APPLIANCE
STORAGE
DOORS
USEFUL HINTS
WALL MOUNTING

2
2
2
2
2
3
3

OPTIONAL EXTRAS
DATA LOGGER
CHART RECORDER
MAINS FAILURE ALARM

3
3
3

SAFETY AND SERVICING


ELECTRIC PLUG WIRING (UK ONLY)
EUROPEAN VARIANTS
SAFETY NOTES
HANDLING
AFER SALES SERVICE
BEFORE SERVICING
DISPOSAL

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

J\BORATORY REFRIGERATORS
.R202LR502LR902LR1602
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DEFROSTING
-ABORATORY FREEZERS
SU25 ISU55 ISU95 ISU1605 ISF15
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DEFROSTING
-ABORATORY REFRIGERATOR / FREEZERS
SR25 ISR55 IST45 IST55
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DEFROSTING
.OW TEMPERATURE LABORATORY FREEZERS
.Fl 21 LS381 LC200LX200
OPERATION
TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LF121 LS381 LC200)
TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LX200)
DEFROSTING

6
6
7
7

VIARINE REFRIGERATORS AND FREEZERS


^25(t)M(E) R45(t)M(E) R55(t)M(E) R75(+)M(E) U25(t)M(E)
ER25(t)M(E) ER45(t)M(E) ER55(t)M(E) ER75(t)M(E)
EU25(t)M(E)
FITTING THE DECK BEARERS
8
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
8
DEFROSTING
8
DOOR ORIENTATION
8

Page 1

BEFORE STARTING

STARTING

Please read these instructions thoroughly before operating


your cabinet.

When unpacking and cleaning is complete allow the cabinet to


stand for 2 hours for the refrigerant to settle. Plug the mains
lead of your appliance into a suitable earthed socket and
switch on.

POSITIONING
In order to ensure optimum performance, do not put your
appliance near a source of heat, such as a cooker, boiler or
radiator. Also try to avoid locations where the sun shining
through glass can raise the room temperature.
A cold location is undesirable as it may cause slow defrosting.

When using for the first time, run the appliance for 24 hours
before loading with products to make sure it is operating
correctly.

INSTALLATION

Your cabinet is easy to keep clean. Regular cleaning is


important for health reasons.

It is important to install your appliance with a minimum 50mm


clearance at the sides and the top and 75mm clearance at the
back to allow free circulation of air. A spacer for the
recommended gap at the back is provided with these
instructions and is fitted as shown in the diagram. Remove the
electrical plug at the rear of your cabinet from part 'A' and
slide on part 'B'.

~J|iB

CLEANING YOUR APPLIANCE

Exterior:
Use a good wax polish which will clean and polish the cabinet
in one easy application. Do not use an aerosol polish as the
spray may damage plastic parts.
Interior:
Before using for the first time, and after defrosting, the interior
of your appliance should be cleaned. Switch off and unplug
from the mains supply. Remove all the shelves and baskets.
Wipe the inside with a soft cloth dampened with a weak
solution of washing-up liquid, one without a fragrance is
recommended. Rinse with clean warm water and dry
thoroughly. Avoid water getting into any electrical fittings,
switches, lights etc. as this may cause serious electrical
damage.
Do not use detergents to clean the magnetic door seal, this
may be cleaned using warm soapy water and then dried
thoroughly.

The above spacer instructions do not apply to the 1602 size of


cabinets and the low temperature laboratory freezers. The
1602's have an integral spacer fitted while the hinges of the
low temperature laboratory freezers ensure the necessary
spacing.
Stand the appliance on a hard smooth surface (not on carpet)
in order to maintain the necessary ventilation under and
around the cabinet. Your appliance should stand level or with a
slight tilt backwards. If it tilts forwards it could stop the door
closing and sealing properly. On front opening cabinets there is
one (or on larger models two) adjustable feet underneath the
front corners which you can adjust until your appliance stands
firm and level. On top opening models check that the cabinet
stands firmly on the floor to prevent rocking and to ensure
correct sealing of the lid.

Do not use wire wool, scouring powders or disinfectants of any


kind.
STORAGE
A wide variety of products can be stored but you must take
care to store them correctly. Air has to circulate freely around
the interior of the cabinet, so shelves must not be covered with
paper. Wherever possible leave spaces between packages and
containers. Warm products must be allowed to cool before
storing in the refrigerator and to prevent transfer of odours
and drying out, items should be separately packaged or
covered.
DOORS
To close the door, apply a gentle pressure until the magnetic
door gasket seals against the cabinet face. Do not 'slam close'.
Check periodically to see that there are no gaps between the
gasket and the cabinet face.

OPERATION
BEFORE SWITCHING ON
Remove all packaging materials, external and internal.
Clean the interior of your appliance (See the section "Cleaning
your Appliance").
Check that the voltage indicated on the data plate at the rear
of your cabinet conforms with your electricity supply.
Ensure that the appliance is earthed.
Page 2

If the door is fitted with a lock, this is secured by turning the


key a quarter turn. It is recommended that a note is made of
the key number and kept in a secure place, in the event that
the key is lost.
On some of the models the doors are reversible, i.e. a right
handed door can be turned into a left handed door. To do this
proceed as follows:

Remove shelves and containers from within the cabinet.


Carefully lay the cabinet onto its back, preferably onto
something soft such as a dust sheet, to prevent scratching to
the floor and the cabinet.
Unscrew the adjustable foot (if applicable). Remove the two
screws from the lower front hinge and the front foot or the
adjustable foot plate. Remove the lower hinge from the door.

When the standard mains lead is used, the bottom of the


cabinet should not be more than 1 m above the electrical
supply socket.
Mark out and drill the wall according to the dimensions given
in the following diagram. Insert the rawl plugs. Align the
cabinet mounting holes to the rawl plugs and hold the cabinet
in position e.g. by standing it on a table. Screw in the four
screws to fix the cabinet

Slide the door towards the base of the cabinet, thus


disengaging the top hinge pin from the location hole in the top
of the door.

513 mm

If the cabinet has a door handle, unscrew the two screws


holding it in place. Locate the two hole blanking screws on the
other side of the door and remove. Re-attach the handle and
the hole blanking screws in their new positions.
Unscrew the two screws holding the top hinge bracket, swap
the position of the bracket to the other side of the cabinet and
re-attach (on some models the upper hinge pin simply pushes
into a hole in the front fascia).
Slide the door onto the top hinge pin. Insert the lower hinge pin
into the door. Screw the hinge in place together with the front
hinge foot (if applicable) which should be fixed so that the
screw is towards the back of the cabinet. Attach the front feet
or the adjustable foot plates and adjustable feet. Stand the
cabinet upright and check that the door is correctly aligned
and that the magnetic seals fit snugly all round and that there
are no gaps. If adjustments are necessary, lay the cabinet onto
its back and alter the position of the lower hinge.
To close the door apply a gentle pressure until the magnetic
door gasket seals against the cabinet face. Do not "slam close".
Check periodically to see that there are no gaps between the
gasket and the cabinet face.
USEFUL HINTS
If your appliance is to be out of service for any length of time
ensure that the interior is carefully cleaned and dried. Leave
the door open and disconnect the plug from the mains socket.
Carry out regular cleaning according to instructions.
See that vibration noises are not caused by objects in contact
with your appliance and each other.
Don't pack shelves too tightly or obstruct the even distribution
of cold air.
Don't leave the cold control at its coldest setting longer than
necessary, freezing of the contents may occur.

WALL MOUNTING
The LR202, ISU25 and ISR25 models can be supplied with wall
mounting brackets.
Before wall mounting the cabinet ensure that the wall is sound
and will take the weight of the cabinet and its contents. Use
suitable securing screws. No lOx IV2" round head screws are
recommended and, if necessary, use suitable rawl plugs.
Pages

OPTIONAL EXTRAS
DATA LOGGER
If a data logger is fitted, instructions for its use and
maintenance is supplied in a separate leaflet.
CHART RECORDER
Instructions for the use and maintenance of the chart recorder,
if fitted, are supplied in a separate leaflet. A rechargeable NiCd
AA size battery is fitted to the recorder. The door is closed with
a key and a note should be made of its number, in case it is
lost.
MAINS FAILURE ALARM
The alarm circuit is powered by a 12Vdc rechargeable battery,
it is continuously recharged when the cabinet is in operation
and is maintenance free.
To activate the alarm circuit, operate the orange push button
switch located on the control panel which will illuminate. The
alarm circuit is now operational and should a failure occur to
the electricity supply a buzzer will sound and a red warning
light will come on. The alarm can be silenced by pressing the
switch to disconnect the alarm.
The battery can activate the alarm circuit for 24 hours. After
this time the battery will require 48 hours of normal cabinet
running before it is fully recharged.
During periods when the cabinet is not in use, the battery may
lose its charge. As previously stated, it will require 48 hours to
fully recharge.

SAFETY AND SERVICING

EUROPEAN VARIANTS

THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED


If this appliance is fitted with a non-rewirable plug for which
your socket is unsuitable the plug should be cut off and an
appropriate plug fitted. The removed plug must be disposed of
as insertion of the plug into an electrical socket is likely to be
dangerous.

If the model code ends with an 'E' (e.g. ER452ME instead of


ER452M) the cabinet will have been built for the continental
european market and will have a european plug fitted.

Ensure that the appliance is earthed.


Ensure that the appliance is disconnected from the mains
supply before attempting to remove light covers (if fitted).

ELECTRIC PLUG WIRING (UK ONLY)


The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with
the following code:
GREEN AND YELLOW - EARTH
BLUE - NEUTRAL
BROWN - LIVE
QREEN& YELLOW

Ensure that the appliance is disconnected from the mains


supply before cleaning internally or defrosting.
Do not store flammable or explosive substances in the
appliance.
HANDLING

13AMP
FUSE

BROWN
BLUE

SAFETY NOTES

CORD
CLAMP

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of your appliance


may not correspond with the coloured marking identif/ing the
terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
CONNECT GREEN & YELLOW coloured wire to plug terminal
marked 'E' or earth symbol 4^ or coloured green or green and
yellow.
CONNECT BLUE coloured wire to plug terminal marked 'N' or
coloured black.
CONNECT BROWN coloured wire to plug terminal marked 1 ' or
coloured red.
Do not push excess mains lead into the compressor
compartment.
If it is necessary to change the fuse in a moulded plug and the
fuse cover is detachable, it must be refitted after the fuse has
been changed. If the fuse cover is lost or damaged the plug
must not be used until a replacement is gbtained.
It is important that the colour of the replacement fuse cover
corresponds with the coloured insert or as indicated in
embossed words on the base of the plug. Replacement fuse
covers are available from the Spares Department, Lee
Refrigeration pic. at the address on the rear cover of this
leaflet.
When a non-rewirable plug or a rewirable 13 Amp (BS 1363)
plug is used it must be fitted with a 13 Amp ASTA approved
(BS 1362) fuse. If any other type of plug is used it must be
protected by a 15 Amp fuse either in the plug or at the
distribution board.
RADIO INTERFERENCE: This appliance complies with current
British and European Standards and CE Directives.

Your appliance may use isobutane (R600a) gas as its


refrigerant. This gas has a high environmental compatibility
but it is also combustible. When transporting, installing or
disposing of the appliance, care should be taken that no parts
of the refrigerating circuit are damaged. In order to avoid
hazardous mixtures of gas and air in the event of a refrigerant
gas leak, the appliance should be sited in a room having a
minimum volume of 1m^ for every 8 grams of R600a, a room
measuring 4m long x 3m wide x 3m high will have a volume of
36ml
If the appliance contains R600a it will be stated on the 'DATA
PLATE' label along with the quantity used.
AFTER SALES SERVICE
If service should be required please contact the retailer who
supplied the appliance. Give them the date of purchase, the
model and serial number (found on the 'FOR SERVICE QUOTE' or
'DATA PLATE' label) and state the nature of the fault.
BEFORE SERVICING
If something appears to be wrong, before calling the Service
Engineer, which could be expensive, check the following: The plug on the mains lead fits securely into the electrical
socket.
Check that the fuse is intact.
Check that the mains switch is'ON'.
See that the cold control is correctly set.
Ensure that the door closes firmly and check gasket sealing.
DISPOSAL
If you are disposing of an old cabinet, break off any latches and
hinges as a safeguard against small children trapping
themselves inside.
The refrigerant used in your appliance and the insulation
materials require special disposal procedures. Ensure that none
of the pipes on the back of the appliance are damaged prior to
disposal.
Up to date information concerning options for disposal can be
obtained from your retailer or local council office.

Page 4

LABORATORY REFRIGERATORS
LR202 LR502 LR902LR1602
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The temperature control thermostat may be found under the
front fascia at the top of the refrigerator. On the model
LR1602 the temperature control is located in the lower front
panel. These are fully adjustable, with position 1 being the
warmest and position 6 being the coldest. Adjust the
thermostat to your required temperature in conjunction with a
thermometer.
The recommended storage temperature for general laboratory
products is considered to be +2C to +10C
Prolonged use of the coldest setting may freeze some products
stored inside the refrigerator. Location, room temperature, the
number of times you open and close the door and the
frequency of defrosting will all effect the temperature in your
refrigerator. The control setting may have to be varied to allow
for these.
DEFROSTING

A rise in temperature of frozen items during defrosting will


shorten the storage life. It is best to carry out a full defrost
when stocks are at their lowest. Ensure that areas out of sight
are completely defrosted.
On certain models a defrost tray is provided, with the small
basket removed, this should be slid into position under the
bottom freezing shelf. A suitable container should then be
placed under the hole in the shelf to collect the defrost water.
Defrosting should be carried out as quickly as possible and can
be assisted by placing a bowl of hot water in your appliance
and closing the door as far as possible.
NEVER use electrical heaters such as hair driers, fires or hot air
blowers.
When defrosting is complete, wipe the inside of the cabinet
with a weak solution of washing up liquid, one without a
fragrance is recommended. Dry the cabinet and replace shelves
and baskets.
Restart the appliance. Don't replace frozen items until the
appliance has reached its operating temperature.

LABORATORY REFRIGERATOR / FREEZERS


ISR25 ISR55 IST45 IST55

The appliance has an automatic defrost system which requires


no special operation on the part of the user. When the cold
control has been correctly set the appliance will periodically
switch off. It will not switch on again until all the frost that
has accumulated on the cold plate in the fridge compartment,
has melted. The defrost water will fall into the trough
underneath the bottom edge of the cold plate and run down
the drain into the plastic defrost water evaporation tray sitting
on top of the compressor.
It is important that the drain does not become blocked. If the
drain does become blocked it can be cleared with a piece of soft
wire such as a pipe cleaner. Service calls to unblock drain holes
are chargeable.
LABORATORY FREEZERS
ISU25 ISU55 ISU95 ISU1602 ISF5

TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The temperature control thermostat may be found under the
front fascia at the top of the refrigerator. This is fully
adjustable, with position 1 being the warmest and position 6
being the coldest.
The recommended storage temperature for general laboratory
products is considered to be +2Cto +10C in the refrigerated
compartment, -IS'C in the freezer.
DEFROSTING
MODEL ISR25 and ISR55
These models are supplied with a drip tray which is located on
runners immediately below the freezing compartment. Its
function is to collect water during defrosting.
On the ISR 55 a baffle plate is provided at the rear of the tray
and this should be positioned as follows:

TEMPERATRE CONTROL
The temperature control thermostat may be found under the
front fascia at the top of the refrigerator. This is fully
adjustable, with position 1 being the warmest and position 6
being the coldest. The recommended storage temperature of
the freezer is-18C.
DEFROSTING
A heavy frost deposit on the inside of the freezer compartment
is undesirable because ice acts as a form of insulation and
affects freezing performance. To maintain performance the ice
must be removed whenever a heavy layer has built up.
Scrape off the soft residue of surface frost with a wooden or
plastic spatula. Collect the removed frost and throw it away. Do
not use sharp instruments to remove frost. It may cause
damage.
For a complete defrost, unplug the appliance, remove all items
and transfer them to another freezer.
Page 5

a) In the extended position, i.e. sloping outward and backward


for normal refrigeration use and during defrosting.
b) Lying flat in the tray for colder main cabinet temperature
and to reduce internal humidity.
There is also a loose plastic panel in the base of the drip tray.
This panel is necessary to ensure the correct operation of the
cabinet and must be replaced after cleaning and defrosting.
To defrost:
1) Remove all items and transfer them to another freezer.
Extend the flap on the drip tray.
2) Disconnect the mains supply. Do not reconnect until
defrosting is complete.
3) When defrosting is finished, remove the drip tray, empty the
water out, wipe dry, put the baffle to its normal position and
replace the drip tray under the freezing compartment.
Reconnect to the mains supply and replace items in the
freezing compartment.

MODEL IST45 and IST55


There is a defrost tray stored on the top shelf of the freezer
compartment. Remove this tray and place it on the runner
where the freezer basket is normally stored. A suitable
container should be placed under the hole in the tray to collect
the defrost water. Any loose frost or defrost water will fall onto
the tray and when defrosting is complete the tray can be
removed and the contents thrown away.
When defrosting is complete, replace the tray and basket and
restart the appliance. When the freezer has reached its
operating temperature, replace the frozen items.
The fridge compartment has an automatic defrost system
which requires no special operation on the part of the user.
When the cold control has been correctly set the appliance will
periodically switch off. It will not switch on again until all the
frost that has accumulated on the cold plate in the fridge
compartment, has melted.
The defrost water will fall into the trough underneath the
bottom edge of the cold plate and run down the drain into the
plastic defrost water evaporation tray sitting on top of the
compressor.
It is important that the drain does not become blocked. If the
drain does become blocked it can be cleared with a piece of soft
wire such as a pipe cleaner. Service calls to unblock drain holes
are chargeable.
LOW TEMPERATURE LABORATORY FREEZERS
LF121 LS381 LC200LX200
OPERATION
The recommended operating temperature of the cabinets is as
follows:
LF121:-20Cto-40C.
LS381:is-20Cto-35C.
LC200: is -20C to -50X.
LX200: is -50C to -80C.
In order to achieve these low temperatures the cabinet should
be sited in such a way that it has at least 150mm clearance all
round to allow for adequate ventilation and the ambient
temperature should not exceed 25C.

Dixell

Press and hold the SET key for at least 2 seconds. The set
point will be displayed and the LEDs of the first and digits
will flash.
Use the @ and S rocker key to alter the set point.
Store the new value by pressing SET key or by waiting for
15 seconds.

LED
*
#

MODE

ON
FLASHING -

LED2

FLASHING -

ON
-

FUNCTION
Compressor running
Programming phase
(flashing with LED2)
Anti-short cycle delay
enabled
Programming phase
(flashing with ^ )
Alarm signal
In Pr2 indicates the
parameter is also
present in Pri

Function and Parameters Menu


Alterations to parameters should only be done by qualified
personnel.
To access the function menu press the SET and ra keys for
3 seconds, the label of the first function is displayed. The
and @ are used to scroll through the menu. By pressing the
SET key the currently displayed function is enabled.
List of Functions
Pri includes all user accessible parameters.
Pr2 includes all instrument parameters (at installer level). It
can be accessed through a security code. It is possible to
modify all parameters and to add or remove parameters
from Pri by pressing SET + @. When a parameter is
enabled at user level LED UM is on.
LOC Keyboard lock. When enabled the 'POP flashing message
is displayed for a few seconds and then the keys are
locked. Only the set point display is enabled. The key board
is unlocked by pressing the @ and @ keys together.
Out exits the menu.
If no key is pressed for 15 seconds the instrument switches
back to temperature display mode.

TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LF121 LC200 LS381)


These cabinets are supplied with
electronic temperature controllers.

To display the temperature set point press the SET key, the
value will be displayed for 5 seconds. The temperature set point
is modified as follows:

model XRl IOC

The controller is located on the front of the cabinet along with


a green power indication light, which will illuminate when
there is power to the cabinet.
LED2

To access parameters in Pr2 a security code is required. Enter


the function menu, select label Pr2 and press the SET key. The
'PAS' flashing message will be displayed, shortly followed by
'0 - -' with a flashing zero. Use the @ a n d @ keys to input the
security code, confirming each digit with the SET key.
The security code is 321.
Thefactory settings for user accessible parameters (Pri) are:

The controller has been factory set and generally the settings
will not require modification.
Page 6

Set

(set point)

Hy

(hysteresis)
(0.2C...+12.0C)

LS381
LF121
LC200

-35
-40
-50

ALC (alarm configuration)


(O = related to set point
1 = fixed to absolute value)

TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LX200)


These cabinets are supplied with CAL 9900 PID temperature
controllers.

ALU (alarm band upper)


10
(O to 50C degrees above set point)

The controller is located on the front of the cabinet along with


a green power light and a red alarm switch. Full details of its
operation and setting can be found in the manufacturers
leaflet. The set point of the controller is factory set at -80C.

ALL (alarm band lower)


10
(0 to 50C degrees below set point)
Aid (alarm delay)
5
(0 to 120min. between alarm
condition and alarm signalling)
The factory settings for non-user accessible parameters (Pr2)
are:
LS

minimum set point)


- 57C... SET)

-57

US

maximum set point)


SET... + 99C)

-20

AC

anti-short cycle delay)


p... 30 min.)

dAO alarm delay at start-up)


0... 720 min.)
OdS outputs delay at start-up)
0 ... 120 min.)

DEFROSTING
Before defrosting, remove al items and transfer them to
another freezer.

Carefully scrape off any frost build-up with the plastic scraper
provided or with a wooden or plastic spatula. Collect the
removed frost in a clean dustpan and throw it away. Do not use
sharp instruments to remove frost, they may cause damage.
If a more thorough defrost is required, switch off and unplug
the appliance, proceed as above and when the loose frost has
been cleared, place a bowl of hot water inside the freezer and
close the lid. Any remaining ice will melt and the water should
be removed with a sponge or something similar. When
defrosting is complete, clean and dry the inside as described in
'Cleaning Your Appliance' and switch on. When the freezer has
reached its operating temperature, replace the items previously
removed.

120

Ot

probe calibration offset)


-12to+12C)

CF

measurement unit)
0 = Celsius, 1 = Fahrenheit)

During the initial pull-down the cabinet temperature is likely to


be in alarm condition and will remain so until the freezer
temperature is within the designated alarm band.
To mute the alarm, press the red alarm switch. The alarm will
be muted but will remain illuminated until the freezer is down
to temperature. Upon reaching the set point temperature the
alarm light will go out and the audible alarm will recommence
to sound. De-activate the alarm switch to return to the normal
monitoring mode of the controller.

COn freezer on with faulty probe) 45


0... 120 min.)

A rise in temperature of frozen items during defrosting will


shorten the storage life. It is best to carry out a full defrost
when stocks are at their lowest. Ensure that areas out of sight
are completely defrosted.

COF ^freezer off with faulty probe) 15


0... 120 min.)
The controller is fitted with an audible alarm and remote alarm
outputs. These can be muted by pressing any of the keys
although LED So will remain on until the alarm condition is
rectified

Page 7

NEVER use electrical heaters such as hair driers, fires or hot air
blowers.

MARINE REFRIGERATORS
R25(t)M(E) R45(t)M(E) R55(+)M(E) R75(t)M(E) U25(t)M(E)
ER25(t)M(E) ER45(t)M(E) ER55(t)M(E) ER75(t)M(E)
EU25(t)M(E)

Position the cabinet to the rear deck bearer so that the deck
bearer is against the compressor mounting plate as figs.2 and
4.

Where (t) represents 1, 2, 3 or 4:


1
110 - 1 1 5 V, 50/60 Hz, right hand hung door.
2
220 - 240 V. 50 Hz, right hand hung door.
3
110 - 1 1 5 V, 50/60 Hz, left hand hung door.
4
220 - 240 V. 50 Hz, left hand hung door.
Where (E) represents a european model.
FiniNG THE DECK BEARERS
The cabinets are supplied with deck bearers whose function is
to prevent movement of the cabinet.

onyeeiONA'SSTBtiiBi

They are fitted as follows:


Attach the rear deck bearer to the deck as shown in figs.1 and
2.

S7iTini

MINIMUM
Fig.4 DECK BEARER FIXING
Fix the front deck bearer to the deck.
The distances of the deck fixing holes indicated in Fig.4 are
shown in Table 1.
MODEL

OVERALL
DEPTH
515mm

DIMENSION 'A'

R&ER25C)
R&ER45n
R&ER55(*)
590mm
R&ER75(*)
630mm
Where (*) denotes 1, 2,3 or 4

457mm
534mm
573mm

TEMPERATURE CONTROL
280inmCRS.
The temperature control thermostat may be found on the
underside of the front fascia, just above the door. This is fully
adjustable, with position 1 being the warmest and position 6
being the coldest. The recommended storage temperature for
refrigerators +0C to +5C and for freezers is -18C.

Fig.1 REAR VIEW SHOWING DECK BEARER FIX

Prolonged use of the coldest setting may freeze some products


stored inside the refrigerator. Location, room temperature, the
number of times you open and close the door and the
frequency of defrosting will all effect the temperature in your
appliance. The control setting might have to be varied to allow
for these.

B7tnin
MINMUM
Fig.2 REAR DECK BEARER FIXING
Attach the front bearer to the cabinet as shown in fig.3 using
two M5 X 16mm bolts and serrated washers.

DEFROSTING
The method of defrosting of refrigerators is the same as that
for Laboratory Refrigerators ISR25 and 55.
The method of defrosting of freezers is the same as that for
Laboratory Freezers.

FROMT
DOOR ORIENTATION

DECK
BEARER

The doors on the 'ER' and 'EU' models can be changed from
right to left hand hanging and vice-versa, refer to the section
on 'Doors'.
The doors on the 'R' and 'U' models are either left or right
handed and can not be changed.

Fig.3 FRONT DECK BEARER FIXING

Pages

SPARES MANUAL

ER452yE

Reffigeration pic

lustration No. Description

Part No

WORKTOP FRONT COVER

A 4536

DOOR ASSEMBLY

EV 14740

HINGE PIN

S 1049

DAIRY DOOR

A 4460

DAIRY SHELF

A 2677

PACKAGE SHELF

A 2675

EGG TRAY

A 2683

BOHLE SHELF

A 4379

LIGHT SWITCH

E2735

10

LIGHT HOUSING

A 4389

11

LIGHT BULB HOLDER

E 1426

12

LIGHT BULB

E767

13

LIGHT COVER

A 4388

14

EVAPORATOR DOOR

91235

15

EVAPORATOR DOOR HINGE PIN

D348

16

EVAPORATOR SHROUD

91234

17

EVAPORATOR SHROUD FIXING RIVET

A 988

18

EVAPORATOR DOOR SPRING

D345

19

EVAPORATOR

EL 2635

20

ICE TRAY

A4138

21

THERMOSTAT PHIAL RETAINING CLIP

7962

22

CONVECTION BAFFLE PLATE

91023

23

DRIP TRAY

91306

24

DRIP TRAY PANEL

91305

25

SHELF

103013

26

SALAD BIN LID

A 2853

27

SALAD BIN

A 2852

28

LOWER HINGE ASSEMBLY

S 1058

29

FRONT HINGE FOOT

A 4391

30

REAR FOOT

A 4390

31

ADJUSTABLE FOOT

A 2767

32

ADJUSTABLE FOOT PLATE

51677

33

THERMOSTAT

E2764

34

THERMOSTAT KNOB

A 4386

Page 1 of4

SPRES MANUAL

ER452ME

PRISUSI

MARINE Refriger-stor

Reffigeraticrs p!ir

illustration No . Description

Part No

35

RELAYP.T.C. 103N0016

E2625

36

TERMINAL BLOCK COVER

E 1645

37

COMPRESSOR, DANFOSS TL4G, 220-240V, 50/60Hz

C1016

38

COMPRESSOR MOUNTING RUBBER

19296

39

COMPRESSOR SECURING BOLT, M6 x 25

B 1104

40

PLAIN WASHER, M6 x 20mm O.D.

B 1106

41

MOUNTING SLEEVE

19297

42

SPRING WASHER, M6

B 1107

43

NUT, M6

B1105

44

MAINS LEAD

E2504

45

UNIT BEARER

41479

46

CONDENSER

N 1202

47

DRIER lOg

N 1184

48

WALL SPACER

S 843

49

WALL SPACER CARRIER

S 842

50

REAR DECK BEARER

EV 14666

51

FRONT DECK BEARER

EV 14665

52

FRONT DECK BEARER SECURING SCREW, M5 x 16

B 1076

53

SERRATED WASHER, M5

B1077

Page 2 of4

iWmImlA
Mw:m

Page 3 of4

yAlteefnaerster

;PARES MANUL
mwmGS

Refrigeration pic

ER452ME
MARINE Refrigerator

sumy

SCHBMTIC WIRINQ DIAQRAM


OHK

COUXJR

BIAOC

BL

BUIE

BR

BROWN

9ff

ORSlANDYHlflW

COMFKESSOR

ON

8/Y

LIQHT SWITCH

BL

BR

BL

BR

m.

BR
THEHMOSIAT

SUPPLY

LIGHT SWITCH

<r^
tew LAMP
COMPRESSOR

Page 4 of4

BL

UUMP

aRCUIT DIAGRAM

BR\

BR BL

BR

<r^

SO

N L

1EW

7w

^A.

r-Jk

C=L

c = &

0^

!?!?''*-.-(

=JV.

"Ji-^'''^'^'

c=Jk

c=A

* WA:L

Ol

S] Electrolux
Washer-extractors EW402E60, EW 1030F;
Washer-dryer EW 1289W

Model EW 402F.60
"-..
I",

Model EW 1289W

Model EW 1030F

ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL AB
MARINE DIVISION
SE 441 82 Alingss, Sweden
Phone +46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
pa.marineinfo@electrolux.se

STAINLESS STEEL DRUM

ZINC COATED STEEL CABINET

EASILY OPERATED CONTROLS

NO-SPIN BUTTON FOR DELICATE


COTTON OR LINEN ITEMS

REDUCED COMSUMPTION OF
WATER, ENERGY AND DETERGENT

BUILT IN WATER DRAIN FILTER

The washer-extractors EW 402F.60, EW


1030F and washer-dryer EW 1289W are
domesdc type machines for reliable light duty
washing on board.
On models EW402F.60 and EW 1030F is
the program selected by a program selector
dial, located on the control panel. The control
panel is also provided with a temperature
selector dial, an ON/OFF button, several
options buttons and pilot lamp. The detergent dispenser drawer, located in the front of
the machine, has different compartments for
pre-wash, main wash, softener and bleaching
agent.
On model EW 1030F are the program, temperature and special program selected by one
selector dial located on the control panel. The
control panel is also provided with several
options buttons and pilot lamps. The detergent dispenser drawer, located in the front of
the machine, has different compartments for
pre-wash, main wash and softener.
The machines are delivered with clear installation instructions, easy to follow manual and
technical documentation.
The design facilitates disassembly and ease
service on board.
For further specifications, please see overleaf

19-006
DOC.NO.

EDITION 4

19-006BM

04.04

WASHER-EXTRACTORS EW 402E6O AND EW 1030F, WASHER-DRYER EW 1289W


Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm

1. Water inlet hose 1.3 m with 3/4" gas


thread spout
2. Electrical cord 1.3 m with earthed plug
3. Water drain hose 1.75 m (int. diameter
16.5 mm, ext. diameter 21.5 mm)

Specification - dimensions in mm
Model/Type

408

50

523

38.5

552

24

415

75

552

24

520

40

EW 402R60
540
EW 1030F

600

EW 1289W

850
620

Specification
Model/Type

EW 402F.60

Spin
rpm

Drum
volume, Itrs

42

Max rated
washing
capacity/load
kgs

Max rated
drying
capacity/load
kgs

4-5

400

EW 1030F

46

700-1000

EW 1289W

54

1200

Voltage V

Loading
kW

Weight kgs
Fuse A

230 1-60

3.5

gross

66

70

68

72

81

84

2.2
230 1-60

0.380
10

230 1-50
7

net

2.1

Installation
The washer-extractor is delivered with adjustable metallic feet covered with rubber. The feet are fixed in brackets.
To remove feet during installation the brackets around the feet must be unscrewed also.
For keeping it positioned and secured use Deck mounting kit STO 02 69 (available as optional accessories).

Deck mounting kit STO 02 69 - position ofholes (models EW402F.60 and EW1030 only):

dk

Jt
^
20.

42 J I ^ J ^

^
77

523-

77K20.

0 12(10x)
80.5

150

I 465
150

t
fi2^

80.5,
552677-

19-006
Subject to changes without notice.

62

Shipping
voliune
m

0.420

WASHING MACHtNE

INSTRUCTION BOOKLET

W 402 F

124 972 570

Electrolux

YOUR NEW WASHING MACHINE


This new washing machine meets all
requirements for a modern washing of laundry
with reduced consumption of water, energy and
detergent.
The temperature selector dial allows you to
choose personally the suitable washing
temperature for your laundry.
The automatic cooling of the washing water
from 95C to 60C before draining will
prevent plastic pipes of your drainage system
from being deformed.

A Ecological hints
In order to obtain water and energy savings and
to protect the environment, we advice you to
follow these instructions:
Whenever possible, wash the maximum load
for the selected programme, without
overloading the drum.
Use a programme with prewash only for
heavy soiled items.
Measure out detergent according to the water
hardness, degree of soiling and quantity of
laundry being washed.
With adequate pre-treatment, stains and
limited soiling can be removed; the laundry
can then be washed at a lower temperature.
Select "Quick wash" for lightly soiled laundry.

v& Environment protection


Packaging recycling
Materials marked with the t^) symbol are
recyclable. To enable them to be recycled, they
must be placed in the appropriate collection
areas (or containers). Check with your local
authorities.
>PE<= polyethylene
>PS<= polystyrene
>PP<= polypropylene

Washing machine scrapping


When the appliance is to be scrapped, cut off
the power supply cable and make the door
closing device inoperative to avoid it becoming a
death trap for a child.
Use authorised disposal sites for your old
appliance.
Help to keep your country tidy!

The symbols you will see on some paragraphs of this booklet have the following meaning:

A
CD

Important information concerning the


safety in the use of your machine.
Disregarding this information might
lead to damages.
Information for correct use of your
machine and to obtain the best
performance.
Important information concerning
environment protection.

Our contribution to the protection of the


environment: we use recycled paper.

CONTENTS
Important information

Description of the appliance

Detergent dispenser drawer


and programme chart

Technical specifications

Installation

6
6
7
7
7

Unpacking
Positioning
Water inlet
Water drainage
Electrical connection

Use
Control panel
Washing hints
Sorting the laundry
Temperatures
Before loading the laundry
Maximum loads
Laundry weights
Removing stains
Detergents and additives
Quantity of detergent to be used
International wash code symbols
Washing programmes
Operating sequence

8
8
.9
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
11
12-13
14-15

Maintenance

16

16
16
16
17
17
17

Bodywork
Detergent dispenser drawer
Water inlet filter
Drain filter
Emergency emptying out
The dangers of freezing

Something not working

18-19

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

It is important that this instruction book be kept with the appliance for future reference. If you sell or
give the appliance away, make sure that the book is passed to the new owners so that they can
familiarise themselves with its operation and relevant warnings.
The following warnings are provided in the interests of overall safety. You must read them carefully
before installing or using the appliance.

Installation
When unpacking the appliance, check that it
is not damaged. If in doubt, do not use it and
contact the Service Centre.
All internal packing must be removed before
using the appliance. Serious damage may be
caused to the machine or adjacent furniture if
the protective transit devices are not
removed or are not completely removed.
Refer to the relevant paragraph in the
instruction book.
Any electrical work required to install this
appliance must be carried out by a qualified
electrician.
Any plumbing work required to install this
appliance must be carried out by a qualified
plumber.
After having installed the machine, check that
it is not standing on its electrical supply cable.
If the appliance is placed on a carpeted floor,
ensure that air can circulate freely between
the adjustable feet and the floor.

Use
This appliance is designed for domestic use.
It must not be used for purposes other than
those for which it was designed.
Do not overload the appliance. Follow the
instructions in the instruction book.
Only wash fabrics which are designed to be
machine washed. Follow the instructions on
each garment label.
Make sure that all pockets are empty.
Objects such as coins, safety pins, pins and
screws can cause extensive damage.
Do not machine wash garments saturated
with petroleum, methylated spirits,
trichlorethylene, etc. If such fluids have been
used to remove stains prior to washing, wait
until they have completely evaporated from
the fabric before placing garments in the
appliance.
Place small items such as socks, belts, etc. in
a cloth bag or pillowcase to prevent them
getting trapped between the drum and the tub.

Use only the recommended quantities of


fabric softener. An excessive amount could
damage the laundry.
Leave the porthole door slightly ajar when
the appliance is not in use. This preserves
the door seal and prevents the formation of
musty smells.
Always check that water has emptied out
before opening the door. If not, drain the
water following the instructions in the
instruction book.
Always unplug the appliance and shut the
water tap after use.

Service/repair
In the event of a fault, do not attempt to
repair the appliance yourself. Repairs carried
out by inexperienced persons may cause
damage.
If repairs are needed, contact an authorised
service centre and ask for genuine spare
parts.

Safety
This appliance is designed to be used by
adults. Children must not be allowed to touch
the controls or play with the product.
During high temperature wash cycles the
glass door becomes very hot. Do not touch it.
Pets sometimes climb into washing
machines. Check the drum before each use.

DESCRIPTION OF THE APPLIANCE


1
2
3
4
5
6

Detergent dispenser drawer


Programme chart
Control panel
Door handle
Drain filter
Adjustable feet

Detergent dispenser drawer and


programme chart

|Mj m L ^

Symbols
I II

Prewash

1111

Main wash

V ^**^?^<^

Fabric softener
There is a programme guide in the interior part
of the detergent dispenser drawer.

1 \' 71^

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS

Height
Width
Depth

85 cm
60 cm
54 cm

POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE/FREQUENCY


TOTAL POWER ABSORBED
MINIMUM FUSE PROTECTION

220-230V/60 Hz
2250 W
10A

WATER PRESSURE

Minimum
Maximum

5 N/cm^
80 N/cm^

MAXIMUM LOAD

Cotton
Synthetics, delicate fabrics
Woollens

5
2
1

SPIN SPEED

kg
kg
kg

400 rpm

C V This appliance complies with the following EEC Directives:


73/23/EEC of 19/02/73 relating to low voltage
89/336/EEC of 03/05/89 relating to electromagnetic compatibility

INSTALLATION
Unpacking

All transit bolts and packing must be


removed before using the appliance.

You are advised to keep all transit devices so


that they can be refitted if the machine ever has
to be transported again.
1. Using a spanner, unscrew and remove the
rear right-hand bolt and lay the machine on
its back, taking care not to squash the hoses.
This can be avoided by placing one of the
corner packing pieces between the machine
and the floor.

Remove the polystyrene blocks from the


bottom of the machine and release the two
plastic bags.
Carefully remove the right-hand bag (1) then
the left-hand bag (2) by pulling them towards
the centre of the machine.

4. Set the machine upright and remove the two


remaining bolts from the back.
5. Pull out the three plastic spacers from the
holes into which the bolts were fitted.
6. Plug the open holes with the plugs which you
will find at the back of the appliance.

Positioning
Install the machine on a flat hard floor.
Make sure that air circulation around the
machine is not impeded by carpets, rugs etc.
Check that the machine does not touch the wall
or other kitchen units.
Carefully level by screwing the adjustable feet in
or out. Never place cardboard, wood or similar
materials under the machine to compensate for
any unevenness in the floor.

^:2^^

/^

Tojll
?020-<

^ ^ ^ ^

J^ ^

Wj

Water inlet
Connect the water inlet hose to a tap with a 3/4"
thread after having inserted the small filter "A"
supplied with the machine.
The other end of the inlet hose which connects
to the machine can be turned in any direction.
Simply loosen the fitting, rotate the hose and
retighten the fitting, making sure there are no
water leaks.
The inlet hose must not be lengthened. If it is
too short and you do not wish to move the tap,
you will have to purchase a new, longer hose
specially designed for this type of use.

Water drainage
The end of the drain hose can be positioned in
three ways:
Hooked over the edge of a sink using the
plastic hose guide supplied with the
machine. In this case, make sure the end
cannot come unhooked when the machine is
emptying.
This could be done by tying it to the tap with a
piece of string or attaching it to the wall.
In a sink drain pipe branch. This branch must
be above the trap so that the bend is at least
60 cm above the ground.
Directly into a drain pipe at a height of not
less than 60 cm and not more than 90 cm.
The end of the drain hose must always be
ventilated, i.e. the inside diameter of the drain
pipe must be larger than the outside diameter of
the drain hose.
The drain hose must not be kinked. Run it along
the floor; only the part near the drainage point
must be raised.

Electrical connection
This machine is designed to operate on a
220-230 V, single-phase, 60 Hz supply
Check that your domestic electrical installation
can take the maximum load required (2.25 kW),
also taking into account any other appliances in
use.
Connect the machine to an earthed socket,
in accordance with current wiring regulations.

The manufacturer declines any


responsibility for damage or injury through
failure to comply with the above safety
precaution.
Should the appliance power supply cable
need to be replaced, this should be
carried out by our Service Centre.

USE
Control panel
iS(

l<^ ts)

^rr^^rr^

ooo o
2 3 4

5 ON/OFF button

1 Programme chart
It will help you to choose the most suitable
washing programme for your laundry.

2 Spin suppression button 1^


Depress this button when you have to wash
particularly delicate cotton or linen items in order
to exclude all the spinning phases.

3 Half load button iV3)


Select this button to reduce water consumption
on the rinse cycle when washing a half load of
cottons or linens.

4 Intensive rinse button

5 6

By depressing this button on programmes for


cotton and linen the machine will perform the
rinses with high water level.
To be used in areas where the water is very soft
or for people allergic to detergents or who have
very delicate skin.

Depress this button to start the programme.


Depress it again to stop the programme or to
switch the machine off.
Before selecting or changing an ongoing
programme the machine must be switched off.

6 Operating pilot light


This light is on whilst the machine is operating
and goes out at the end of the programme.

7 Temperature selector dial #


Turn this dial to select the washing temperature.
Position -)f= cold wash.

8 Programme selector dial


To select the required programme, turn this dial
cloclowise until the programme letter is exactly
opposite the pointer.

(3 Washing hints
Sorting the laundry
Follow the wash code symbols on each garment
label and the manufacturer's washing
instructions.
Sort the laundry as follows:
whites, coloureds, synthetics, delicates, woollens.

Temperatures
95=

for normally soiled white cottons and


linen (e.g. tea cloths, towels,
tablecloths, sheets...)

60

for normally soiled, colour fast


garments (e.g. shirts, night dresses,
pyjamas....) in linen, cotton or
synthetic fibres and for lightly soiled
white cotton (e.g. undenwear).

-)f (cold) for delicate items (e.g. net curtains),


mixed laundry including synthetic
30-40 fibres
and woollens bearing the label
pure new wool, machine washable,
non-shrink

Before loading the laundry


Never wash whites and coloureds together.
Whites may lose their "whiteness" in the wash.
New coloured items may run in the first wash;
they should therefore be washed separately the
first time.
Make sure that no metal objects are left in
the laundry (e.g. hair clips, safety pins, pins).
Button up pillowcases, close zip fasteners,
hooks and poppers. Tie any belts or long tapes.
Remove persistent stains before washing. Rub
particularly soiled areas with a special detergent
or detergent paste.
Treat curtains with special care. Remove hooks
or tie them up in a bag or net.

Maximum loads
Recommended loads are indicated in the
programme charts.
General rules:
cotton, linen: drum full but not too tightly
packed
synthetics: drum no more than half full

delicate fabrics and woollens: drum no more


than one third full.
Washing a maximum load makes the most
efficient use of water and energy.
For heavily soiled laundry, reduce the load size.

Laundry weights

The following weights are indicative


bathrobe
1200 g
napkin
100 g
quilt cover
700 g
sheet
500 g
pillow case
200 g
tablecloth
250 g
towelling towel
200 g
tea cloth
100 g
night dress
200 g
ladies' briefs
100 g
man's work shirt
600 g
man's shirt
200 g
man's pyjamas
500 g
blouse
100 g
men's underpants
100 g

Removing stains
Stubborn stains may not be removed by just
water and detergent. It is therefore advisable to
treat them prior to washing.
Blood: treat fresh stains with cold water. For
dried stains, soak overnight in water with a
special detergent then rub in the soap and
water.
Oil based paint: moisten with benzine stain
remover, lay the garment on a soft cloth and dab
the stain; treat several times.
Dried grease stains: moisten with turpentine,
lay the garment on a soft surface and dab the
stain with the fingertips and a cotton cloth.
Rust: oxalic acid dissolved in hot water or a rust
removing product used cold. Be careful with rust
stains which are not recent since the cellulose
structure will already have been damaged and
the fabric tends to hole.
Mould stains: treat with bleach, rinse well
(whites and fast coloureds only).
Grass: soap lightly and treat with bleach (whites
and fast coloureds only).
Ball point pen and glue: moisten with acetone
(*), lay the garment on a soft cloth and dab the
stain.

Lipstick: moisten with acetone as above, then


treat stains with methylated spirits. Remove any
residual marks from white fabrics with bleach.
Red wine: soak in water and detergent, rinse
and treat with acetic or citric acid, then rinse.
Treat any residual marks with bleach.
Ink: depending on the type of ink, moisten the
fabric first with acetone (*), then with acetic acid;
treat any residual marks on white fabrics with
bleach and then rinse thoroughly.
Tar stains: first treat with stain remover,
methylated spirits or benzine, then rub with
detergent paste.
(*) do not use acetone on artificial silk

Quantity of detergent to be used


The type and quantity of detergent will depend
on the type of fabric, load size, degree of soiling
and hardness of the water used.
Water hardness is classified in so-called
"degrees" of hardness. Information on hardness
of the water in your area can be obtained from
the relevant water supply company, or from your
local authority.
Follow the product manufacturers' instructions
on quantities to use.
Use less detergent if:
- you are washing a small load
- the laundry is lightly soiled
- large amounts of foam form during washing.

Detergents and additives


Good washing results also depend on the choice
of detergent and use of the correct quantities to
avoid waste and protect the environment.
Although biodegradable, detergents contain
substances which, in large quantities, can upset
the delicate balance of nature.
The choice of detergent will depend on the type
of fabric (delicates, woollens, cottons, etc.), the
colour, washing temperature and degree of
soiling.
All commonly available washing machine
detergents may be used in this appliance:
- powder detergents for all types of fabric,
- powder detergents for delicate fabrics (BO^C
max) and woollens,
- liquid detergents, preferably for low
temperature wash programmes {60C max)
for all types of fabric, or special for woollens
only
The detergent and any additives must be placed
in the appropriate compartments of the
dispenser drawer before starting the wash
programme.
If using concentrated powder or liquid
detergents, a programme without prewash must
be selected.
Pour liquid detergent into the dispenser drawer
compartment marked QiJ just before starting
the programme.
Any fabric softener or starching additives must
be poured into the compartment marked ^
before starting the wash programme.
Follow the product manufacturer's
recommendations on quantities to use.

10

Degrees of water hardness


Degrees
Level

Characteristic

1
2
3
4

soft
medium
hard
very hard

German
dH

French
T.H.

0-15
0- 7
16-25
8-14
26-37
15-21
more than 21 more than 37

S) International wash code symbols


These synnbols appear on fabric labels, in order to help you choose the best way to treat your laundry
Energetic wash

Xas7

Km/

\327

Max. wash
temperature
95C

Max. wash
temperature
60C

Max. wash
temperature
40C

Delicate wash

\g7

Bleaching

w
Max. wash
temperature
30C

X^^MJ

Hand wash

Bleach In cold water

Do not bleach

Hot iron
max 200C

Warm iron
max 150C

Lukewarm iron
max 110C

Dry cleaning

Dry cleaning
in all solvents

Dry cleaning in
perchlorethylene,
petrol, pure alcohol,
R 111 & R 1 1 3

Dry cleaning
in petrol,
pure alcohol
andR 113

Drying

H
Flat

n a

On the line

Do not
wash
at all

\30/

Ironing

l^

On clothes
hanger

Do not iron

Do not
dry clean

K?5| higti
l^c^ temperature

1 ^ 1 '
uUJi temperature
Tumble dry

Do not
tumble dry

11

Energetic programmes for cotton and linen


Maximum load: 5 kg

Progr.

Temp.

Type of laundry
Whites
with prewash
(heavy soiled)

60-95

60-95 without prewash

Whites
(normally soiled)
Coloureds
with prewash
(heavy soiled)

40-60

40-60 without prewash

30-40 lightly soiled laundry

Coloureds
(normally soiled)

Quick wash

Cycle description

Possible
options

Prewash
Wash at 60-95C
4 rinses
Long spin
Wash at 60-95C
4 rinses
Long spin
Prewash
Wash at 40-60C
4 rinses
Long spin

WW

Wash at 40-60C
4 rinses
Long spin
Wash at 30-40C
4 rinses
Long spin

Rinses

4 rinses with liquid


additives, if required
Long spin

Short spin

Drain and short spin

mm
1^

The temperatures indicated are the optimum temperatures for each programme and depend on the
type of laundry and degree of soiling.

12

Gentle programmes for synthetics, mixed fabrics, delicates and wool


Maximum load: 2 kg, wool: 1 kg

Progr.

Type of laundry

Temp.

Synthetics
with prewash
(heavy soiled)

Cycle description
Prewash
Wash at 40-60C
3 rinses
Water left in tub

40-60

40-60 without prewash

30''-40 Delicates

Wash at 30-40C
3 rinses
Water left in tub

30-40 W o o l ^

Wash at 30-40C
3 rinses
Water left in tub

Synthetics
(normally soiled)

Possible
options

Wash at 40-60C
3 rinses
Water left in tub

Rinses

3 rinses with fabric softener


Water left in tub

Drain

Draining of water

The temperatures indicated are the optimum temperatures for each programme and depend on the
type of laundry and degree of soiling.
The water of the last rinse of these programmes is not emptied out to avoid any creasing in the
clothes. To drain water, select programme M or F.

13

CD Operating sequence
Before washing your first ioad of iaundry, we
recommend tfiatyou run a cotton cycle at 60C,
with the machine empty, in order to remove any
manufacturing residue from ttie drum and tub.
Pour lialf a measure of detergent into the main
wash compartment and start up the machine.

1. Place the laundry In the drum


Open the door.
Place the laundry in the drum, one item at a
time, shaking them out as much as possible.
Close the door.

2. Measure out the detergent


Pull out the dispenser drawer until it stops.
Measure out the amount of detergent
recommended by the manufacturer in a
graduated cup and pour it into the main wash
compartment LOJ. If you wish to carry out a
prewash, pour detergent into the appropriate
compartment marked |_!J.

1
RiH?

3. Measure out the additive


if required, pour fabric softener into the
compartment marked without exceeding the
MAX mark.

4. Select the desired option


Depress SPIN-SUPPRESSION 18 and/or HALF
LOAD IV2) and/or INTENSIVE RINSE W button,
if required.

5. Select the temperature


Turn the selector dial to the required
temperature setting.

14

JSl

IV2) t ^

ooo

6. Select the programme and start it


Turn the programme selector dial clockwise to
the required wash programme and depress the
ON/OFF button: the operating pilot light comes
on and the machine starts to operate.

B~~~-

'^

'flj ) ) !
M0043^_

--*"*-^-_

7. At the end of the programme


The machine stops automatically, the operating
pilot light goes out.
If you have selected a gentle programme which
ends with water in tub, drain the water before
opening the door.
It is normal to have to wait for about 2 minutes
before being able to open the door to allow the
safety lock to release.
Depress the ON/OFF button again to switch the
machine off.
Remove the laundry.
Turn the drum by hand to make sure it is
completely empty, so as to avoid any forgotten
items being damaged in a subsequent wash
(e.g. shrinking) or their colour running into a
load of whites.
Release any button which has been depressed.
Turn the water tap off and unplug the machine.
Leave the door ajar to air the machine.

15

MAINTENANCE
1. Bodywork
Clean the outside of the machine with warm
water and a neutral, non-abrasive household
detergent. Rinse with clean water and dry with a
soft cloth.
Important: do not use methylated spirits,
solvents or similar products to clean the
bodywork.

2. Detergent dispenser drawer


After a while, detergents and fabric softeners
leave deposits in the drawer.
Clean the drawer from time to time by rinsing it
under a running tap. To remove the drawer from
the machine, press the button in the rear lefthand corner.
To facilitate cleaning, the top part of the additive
compartments can be removed.
Detergent can also eventually accumulate inside
the drawer recess: clean it with an old
toothbrush. Refit the drawer after cleaning.

3. Water inlet filter


If you notice that the machine is taking longer to
fill, check that the filter in the water inlet hose is
not blocked.
Turn off the water tap.
Unscrew the hose from the tap and remove the
filter.
Clean it with a stiff brush.
Refit the filter and screw the hose back onto the
tap.

16

4. Drain filter
The drain filter collects threads and small
objects inadvertently left in the laundry. Check
regularly that the filter is clean.
Open the filter door.
Place a container under the filter and unscrew it.

Pull out the filter.


Clean the filter under a running tap, then refit it,
screwing it fully in.

P0133

5. Emergency emptying out

6. The dangers of freezing

If the water is not discharged (drain pump is


blocked, filter or drain hose are clogged),
proceed as follows to empty out the machine:
pull out the plug from the power socket;
close the water tap;
if necessary, wait until the water has cooled
down;
place a bowl on the floor;
put the drain hose end into the bowl and let
the water come out.
Should it not be possible to have access to the
drain hose because, for example, the appliance
is built in the kitchen furniture, slightly loosen the
drain filter after placing a bowl on the floor, to let
the water come out slowly.
At the end screw the filter again.

If the machine is exposed to temperatures below


0C, certain precautions should be taken.
Turn off the water tap.
Unscrew the inlet hose.
Unhook the drain hose from the rear support
and position the end of this hose and that of
the inlet hose in a bowl. Run the draining
programme until the selector dial is in the
"Stop" position.
Switch the machine off.
Screw the inlet hose and reposition the drain
hose.
When you intend to start the machine up
again, make sure that the room temperature
is above 0C.

17

SOMETHING NOT WORKING


Problems which you can resolve yourself

m Problem

. Possible cause

The machine does not start up:

Check that the door is firmly closed.


Check that the machine is plugged in and
that there is power at the socket.
Check that the main fuse has not blown.
Check that the programme selector dial is
positioned correctly and the ON/OFF button
depressed.

The machine does not fill:

Check that the water tap is open.


Check that water is coming out of the tap.
Check that the inlet hose is not squashed or
kinked.
Check that the filter in the inlet hose is not
blocked.
Check that the door is closed.

The machine fills then empties


immediately:

The end of the drain hose is too low. Refer to


relevant paragraph in "water drainage"
section.
Check that the drain hose is not squashed or
kinked.
The drain filter is blocked. Clean it.
A gentle programmawhich ends with water in
the drum or option has been selected.

The machine does not empty


and/or does not spin:

There is water on the floor:

Too much detergent or unsuitable detergent


(creates too much foam) has been used.
Check whether there are any leaks from one
of the inlet hose fittings. It is not always easy
to see this as the water runs down the hose;
check to see if it is damp.
Check that the drain hose is not damaged.
Check that the drain filter has been refitted
correctly after cleaning.

Unsatisfactory washing results:

Too little detergent or unsuitable detergent


has been used.
Stubborn stains have not been treated prior
to washing.
The correct temperature or programme was
not selected.

18

Problem

. Possible cause

The machine vibrates or is noisy:

Check that all the transit bolts and packing


have been removed.
Check that the machine is not resting against
anything.
Check that the support feet are resting firmly
on the ground.
Check that the laundry is evenly distributed in
the drum.
Maybe there is very little laundry in the drum.

The door will not open:

The programme is still running.


The door lock has not yet been released.
There is water in the drum.

Water is not visible in the


machine:

The machine, which is the result of modern


technology, runs in a very economical way
with low water consumption. Performance is
nevertheless excellent.

If you are unable to identify or solve the


problem, contact our service centre. Before
telephoning, make a note of the model, serial
number and purchase date of your machine: the
Service Centre will require this information.

rV
Mod.
Prod. No.
Si

19

s Electrolux

SPARE PARTS LIST


Household washing machines

iisifiipifs V ^

2520

PNC

Brand

Model

Market

914789667

Electrolux

EW402F

SG

Washing machines,
front-loaded
Electrolux-Zanussi
Corso Lino Zanussi
1 - 33080 Porcia
Italy
Fax +39 (0)434 394096

Pubi.No.
599342598
2000/6/1
ZP

300A

530

9143003528

page 1

Exploded view no. :P09143003528


PNC
914789667

Pos
300
300A
303
308
310
312
323
323A
330
514
521
523
530
586
597
597A
999

Model
EW402F

Description

Part No.
50262 08 000 / 0
1246 80 5 1 8 / 6
1248 87 5 3 0 / 2
1240 13 6 0 0 / 0
1242 75 801 11
1240 20 801 / 5
1240 12 2 1 3 / 3
1242 06 1 1 0 / 7
50226 26 200 / 9
1247 84 2 0 0 / 6
1246 44 5 0 0 / 9
1246 58 6 0 4 / 2
50252 03 500 / 6
1240 00 7 0 0 / 3
1247 12 1 0 0 / 5
1247 12 1 1 0 / 4
1249 72 5 7 0 / 4

A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

kit,cabinet,front,P61/5/S V/B
cabinet,back,wliite,P62/3/5/ Z-V/B
stand, P65
Hinge,bull's eye
sieve flap
glass,porthole
FRAME FLAP-,INNER
Frame,in front
kit,Foot,ferrule
locking bush,Foot,back
Bung,clamp,cabinet
Bracket, Hose,electric cable,JS/WD
kit,Handle,porthole
Fixing angle,foot,in front
lock,Foot,front
lock. Foot, back
user's guide,(en)

page 2

page 3

Exploded view no.:P09143004106


PNC
914789667

Pos
001
003
004
005
006
007
010
Oil
012
013
013A
019
037
110
125B
130
531C
540
550
550A
597
999

Model
EW402F

Part No.
1243 09 6 0 0 / 3
1245 80 7 3 0 / 8
1246 30 3 0 0 / 0
50234 43 800 / 5
1242 52 8 0 0 / 6
50226 73 500 / 4
1247 26 5 0 0 / 0
1240 34 4 0 0 / 0
1247 32 7 9 0 / 9
1249 27 1 0 0 / 6
1249 27 1 1 0 / 5
50228 67 600 / 8
1240 20 9 0 0 / 5
1240 83 4 0 0 / 0
50221 74 700 / 4
1240 15 2 0 3 / 1
1240 22 2 0 0 / 8
1240 39 4 0 0 / 5
1240 07 5 0 8 / 3
1245 89 5 0 0 / 6
1240 06 2 0 0 / 8
1241 34 201 / I
1243 36 9 5 0 / 9

Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

timer,(F50/1J)RID. ELBI
adjustable thermostat
main motor,2/12 400 SOLE
Valve,enema
PUMP.DRAIN
kit,delayer,porthole
heater
CAPACITOR
Pressure switch,2-Niveau,certainity
Calipers
Key board
Signalling lamp.green
Connection block
Hose,pressure switch
locking ring,o-ring,pump,(29,82)
gasket.Thermostat, Probe
Screw, main motor, bob
clamp
Protection,delayer.Door
guard,drain pump
stopper, Capacitor,cable
Harness, 124.13420/
harness,main

page 4

page 5

691-9017^6

Exploded view no.:P091405169


PNC
914789667

Pos
115
125
125A
130
130X
150
150A
250
251A
253
255X
257
257A
260
260B
262
264
531
531B
531C
531D
563
591
999

Model
EW402F

Part No.
1240 16 7 4 0 / 1
50068 76 300 / 7
50097 07 200 / 8
1240 15 9 0 3 / 6
50063 24 800 / 4
1245 11 001 / 8
1246 71 1 1 0 / 3
1240 29 0 0 8 / 8
1240 1 7 2 1 0 / 4
1240 21 1 0 0 / 1
50061 78 200 / 4
1240 18 201 / 2
1240 29 9 4 0 / 2
1240 19 501 / 4
1247 82 5 0 0 / 1
50252 27 1 0 0 / 7
1240 21 4 0 0 / 5
1240 21 8 1 0 / 5
1242 72 5 0 0 / 8
1240 22 3 0 0 / 6
1249 27 3 0 0 / 2
1240 04 121 / 8
50097 58 600 / 7
1240 22 0 0 0 / 2
1240 25 7 0 0 / 4

Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

rubber bellow
connection ring,rubber be!low,tub
lock ring,rubber bellow,cabinet
gasket,tub
GASKET
Trog,in front
DRUM,OUTER,REAR
Drum,complete
Shock absorber
drive belt, 1217J4
BEARING
Ballast, rear,
bob,front,13,5Kg Gl8/19
Spring,suspension,tub
retaining spring,heater
kit,drum paddle,45L
Pulley
Screw,clamp,pulley,M8X24
Screw,lock,tub
Screw
Screw,bob,front
bolt,cushion
lock washer.pulley
Screw.bearing spider
CROSS PIECE DRUN

page 6

111

page?

Exploded view no.:P09143000539


PNC
914789667

Pos
106
109
110
110A
HOB
HOC
HOG
111
112
114
118
120
130
130F
140
143
145
148
260
307
338
509
509A
521
540C
541
541A
563

Model
EW402F

Part No.
1246 23 1 1 0 / 2
1246 24 6 0 0 / 1
1240 83 1 0 3 / 0
1240 16 0 2 0 / 8
1240 1 6 2 1 0 / 5
1246 60 4 1 2 / 6
1247 34 2 3 0 / 4
1245 07 8 4 0 / 5
1240 88 1 1 0 / 0
1240 83 2 3 3 / 5
1246 24 5 1 0 / 2
1240 08 8 0 2 / 9
1240 14 9 0 0 / 3
1240 15 1 0 0 / 9
1246 23 311 / 6
1240 10 1 0 0 / 4
1248 47 9 6 0 / 0
1246 24 2 0 0 / 0
1240 14 8 0 0 / 5
1246 24 3 1 0 / 7
1242 91 6 0 0 / 3
1247 42 8 0 0 / 4
1240 04 4 0 0 / 6
1240 08 6 1 0 / 6
1246 64 6 0 0 / 2
1246 08 6 0 8 / 4
1247 34 1 0 3 / 3
1240 04 2 0 0 / 0

Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

jet,solenoid valve
conveyor.Container cup.detergent
drain hose,tub,manifold
Pipe
Breather hose
Pipe
Pipe,l=230mm
inlet hose,water
Draining hose
air chamber.air
water distributor
Fluff strainer
sieve seal
sealing
Container cup,detergent
adjuster,distributor, water
Filter case
syphon
Spring,distributor,Container cup
detergent drawer,3SC/RID
end piece. Drainage hose
lever,water distributor
Cam lever
stopper,closure,fluff filter
Tube clip
Holder.piple
Holder,solenoid
bolt,distributor

pages

SUPPLIED TOGETHER
LIVRES ENSEMBLE
ZUSAMMEN GELIEFERT
FORNITI INSIEME

520

^^500*

500A*

510*

page 9

Exploded view no.:P09143004109


PNC
914789667

Pos
042
313
500
500A
502
510
51OA
519
520
523
525
525B

Model
EW402F

Part No.
1247 63
50237 27
1249 25
1249 25
1247 36
1243 09
1248 21
1247 10
1240 37
1246 03
1247 36
1247 98

510/3
100/7
760/9
810/2
800/2
370/3
640/8
001 n
003/9
556/0
000/9
403/0

Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

Lampholder.complete.green
TOP
Knob.timer
KNOB THERMOSTAT
Toggle bottom piece,(timer)
control panel.complete.silkscreened
programme card.(en)
cam,brown
Flange.bracket.thermostat
Bracket.command
Push button.keyboard
Push button.white.ON/OFF

page 10

Motor

124 871833b
Blue
Brown
Bloct
Pink
I ight-blue

Violet

Oronge

Door s a f e t y
i n t e r lock
124,33695/
White

CL) cn
d

Blue

r r r B>'

Violet
Violet
Blue

Drain

pump

3
Pilot
Pressure swi tch

lamp

11

( A i r chamber on t u b )

^^

Adjustable
ttiernostot

Light-blue

Hhile

-OFF button

, a

Orange

Blue

Copaci t o r

0:

Wtiile

Super rinsing button

Brom
Brown

3 lack

"srar

?BtACK:

J u n c t i o n box

Half load button

Earth*^
(>>

Viole
Violet

Hi'
Tub eart

Heating element eortti

tor eortti

While
White

Cold water inlet valve

! RED

No-spin button
Grey
Grey

P00ZP300000844
Adjustable thermostat Adjustable thermostat
Air chamber on tub
Air chamber on tub
Capacitor
Capacitor
Cold water inlet valve
Cold water inlet valve
Door safety interlok
Door safety interlok
Drain pump
Drain pump
Earth
Earth
Heating element earth Heating element earth
Heating elements (washing)
Heating elements (washing)
Half load button
Half load button
Junction box
Junction box
Motor
Motor
Motor earth
Motor earth
No-spin button
No-spin button
ON/OFF button
ON/OFF button
Pilot lamp
Pilot lamp
Pressure switch
Pressure switch
Super rinsing button
Super rinsing button
Timer motor
Timer motor
Tub earth
Tub earth
Violet
Violet
White
White
Red
Red
Pink
Pink
Orange
Orange
Light-blue
Light-blue
Grey
Grey
Brown
Brown
Blue
Blue
Black
Black

page 12

Heat i ng elements
(wash!ng'

^7^-

ON/OFF button

(,9),S'Z

dOlS
Nivua
(SSW-AS) dOlS

kJ

09
69

89

1
II
II

i9
a

.S'2+td
.fi'3

99

Nivua

99

.9'3+ld
.fi'Z

1.9

Z9

m-08

.S'Z+ld

(3+a)3

(S).S'Z+ld

3-a

.9+ld

3-a

.9+Id

3-a

.9+Id

_l

09
6

m-tt

.S+td

3-a

.9'3

1
1
1
1
1

m-08

S+td

Nivua

3-a

.S* I d

^t-

62

9Z

3-0

NIdS

,9+Id

NIdS

'
\_

m-oe

Hi

Zl

3-0

.9+Id

3-0

.9+Id

3-0

.9+Id

3-0

,9* Id

3-0

,9+Id

EL

II

11

fCO

CD

LO
UO

1 \
<: i
1
J

CO

CO
CO
CNJ
CO

CO

II
1

1 t1
1

CO

s
s

1
il

CM
CO
CNJ

!
1

CM
CM
i-O
CM

CM

CO
CM
CM
CM

.w.

CM
CM
CJJ

1
1

CO

CD

CO

ii

_ c
T

t^

LO

t o
CO

.1 1
1 1

t o
LO

CM

ZL

LL
OL

CD

f--

UJ
116-OE
a.
E
08-06
LU

1
06-OC

c
0

II

CO
LO
csj

1
1

CD
LO
OJ
CO

II

III

II

CO

11

1
1

LO
CO

1 1
1 1

[I

II
1
1
II

CNJ

^3-

C3

CO
CO
CO

II
II
II

[ ]1 1 . 1
Y
1. 1-[I
[ ]1 1 . 1
T
-
1.i[J
1 .. 1111 1
[ ]I

1 II
II 1

11

II

^3-

-J

o
u.

II
1
1

VI

3-0

.9+Id

o
lO
CO
"-0

1[ ] 1
1 [ \_] 1
1\_ 1
i-i
1[ ] 1
1 [J
1
II 1

*
CO
LO

co

09-OG

1
1
1

Lt
9E

ze
L

8Z

3-0

3-0

NIVUQ

,9'Z

3-0

.9+Id

1
u
z

1
1
1
1

CO

8L

L\.
91
9L

3-a

,9+Id

Q
oe-OE

i,N

_!_

co
LO

-r

\ <

II
- 1

u
4

eo
OUJ

1
1

CD

CSJ

1-

U-

111

1 '

0
30

61.

3-0

3-0

3-0

.S+|.d

NIVUQ

3-0

.9+td

1
1

n ^
a

ot-oc

m
ee

09-oe
09-oe

1 19

]}

,.U

II

*9
9

NIVUQ

.S'J

.S'2+Id

.S'Z+ld

w-oe

.9'Z+W

Sfr

.S'Z+ld

3-0

,S+ld

.S'Z+ld

.9+Id

.9
9 .C

Cj-j

3-a

.S+|.d

U
Nivua

..iL

9Z

NIdS

.9'Z+U
.9+Id

n
ez

dOlS

.9+Id

3-0

.9+Id

Nivua

,9+Id

Nivua

,9'J

oe

9 ,C

,9+Id
..9 ,e

.9+W
..9 ,e

NIVUQ
NIdS
Nivua
NIdS

3-0

.9+Id

3-0

.9+Id

(3+0)3

(.9).9'2+td

3-Q

.9+kd

UJ

CO

z
o

li

r-

1i

CM
CO
e>^
CC

CO

1 ^7
. to

T-

i r9

ea c9
CO
CD

^
c3

CO
O
cil

c
C
T--

> 2
CO

3 O

(O

i n
O
CO
O

1
1
" 3

CM

tr

CM 1 Q
C
t o
Q

C^
C

^
UJ

..

1
t o
CO

lO
UJ

CM
U-

e CO

L^

lO

CO

pi

CO

CO

ob

1 Q
r i - r--

ca
<D

- ^
r

! 5

CO
UT^

^
U
LL. L
C O c9

u- u- u

^ a

06-OS
08oe
os-oe
06-OE

-X-

iI

06-oe
( | 3 A a | | S | . ) B i u | | ( l n | | 06-oe
|j = td

0 8 0=
S3
Buiiquini snoioBiA

06-oe
Guiiqiuni iem-euQ
=n

o
LU

o
m

S.
m

c
c

ii 1
il ! i

TO

Ol

r =-1; *
o . "C:

a>

T3
C

LU
CO

0)
(O

k_

= 5.:

Ml

it E

Ot-OE

Z.'

= ^
-;

Buiiquini eieoiiSQ
OS-OE
=Q

Ot-OE

124\309600.en

' s
~
^

^\

S I

1.

to

1 1
i

c= o

(S

_c CD
"o
> o 1
- CJ CO r g

(O

j5

e i l 1.=
s n <

o
CC

Q .
CO
CJ

e
cJ
c

CO

i5
,v

_o o
o o

Motor

124 8 7 1 8 3 3 b
Blue

BlacI:
Pink
Lighl-blue

Violet
Orange

Door sofet
i nterlock
124.33695/

WTF
3lue

DU
Violet
Violet
Blue

D r a i n pump
5^^

3
Pilot lamp
Pressure swi tcti

31

( A i r chamber on t u b )

TE

Blank

Adjustable
thermostat

a
a

tiqtil-blue

Vfliile

-OFF button

Orange

Blue

Capoci t o r

0:

White

Super rinsing button


Black

"rar

2BIACK:

Junct i o n box

Half load button


Violet
Violet

Eartti'

RED

Hi'

@>-"

lub eartti

No-spin button
Grey
Grey

tor eartti

Heat ing element eartti

Wtiite
Wtiite

Cold water inlet valve

, CL

P00ZP300000844
Adjustable thermostat Adjustable thermostat
Air chamber on tub
Air chamber on tub
Capacitor
Capacitor
Cold water inlet valve
Cold water inlet valve
Door safety interlok
Door safety interlok
Drain pump
Drain pump
Earth
Earth
Heating element earth Heating element earth
Heating elements (washing)
Heating elements (washing)
Half load button
Half load button
Junction box
Junction box
Motor
Motor
Motor earth
Motor earth
No-spin button
No-spin button
ON/OFF button
ON/OFF button
Pilot lamp
Pilot lamp
Pressure switch
Pressure switch
Super rinsing button
Super rinsing button
Timer motor
Timer motor
Tub earth
Tub earth
Violet
Violet
White
White
Red
Red
Pink
Pink
Orange
Orange
Light-blue
Light-blue
Grey
Grey
Brown
Brown
Blue
Blue
Black
Black

page 12

Heat i n g e l e m e n t s
Iwosh i n g '

ON/OFF button

TliViE

lmnihinhhhii

(minutes)

FUNCTIONS
O) a

a
o
_

1 i! ii ii ills 1

B ^ = ^

S A -a ^
E E E

1 1 1 III

1 H S E
=

<=>

TUMBLING

S S a l s S S S i S S S S S S S S i S o

2 2? =
= a 0 =
Q =
^

TEMPERATURE

WATER

LEVEL

LU 3

OL

11

Rinse hold

A1-A2

13-T

Recirculation pump :4:


Drain (half load)

B3-B4
B3-B5

12-T
12B

Direct timer (esding


Healing

B3-B2
B3-B1

11-T
11-B

Motor (wasli)
Drain pump
1sl-2nd level

C4-C5
C2-C3

8-B
7-T

C1-C3
D3-D4

7-B
6-T

Cooling *
Super rinse -i-

So

So

1 ill 1
M M

\/\

LI
A

So

uumuuu

STEPS
Program start

So

no

rI

__[

UU
r Tt n"7:1
U-U-LJ
-Y_-_

SKSS55!S?S!?S!55S5a5SSSSSS
D_. _ E_
G H J- K k M
S
i m

1 E

E E
E
E E E E EE E EE E EE E
m
m m m
mm m m m m

m 1 m m m m m


H H
m H
m

m mH


H
m
m

1
B

"

_ B C _ _

mm4 m

mm

Sm

D3-D5

6-B

2nd level
Motor (spin)

D3-D2
D3-D1

5-T
5-B

Motor (wash)
Motor (spin)

E3E4

4-T

B H H H Hi IB H H

E3E5

4-B

Reversing
Reversing

F1F2

36T

F1F3

36-B

Capacitor (spin)

F3F4
F3F5

37-T
37 B

Spin

D3-D1

38-B

H IB H H H H H

IP H B H

^_ ^_ ^_ ^ ^_ ^_ ^_
^_ ^M ^_ ^_ ^_ ^^ ^_ ^_ ^^ ^_ ^^M ^_
^^ ^^ ^^ ^^ ^ ^^ ^^ ^ B ^* ^^ ^* ^^ ^^ ^* ^* ^* ^^^^ ^ ^*^^

B n

~ i

[H B

B H

H H H H n ^ B B H

H H ai H

mm

H H

"

H H

4-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 45 47 48 49 50 51 62 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
H


I
I

- ~

- I
=
s
H i 5 m 5 m i "
m
1
m 1

m-

'

5 sec

*NotforF50andF51
^

m E
m

300 se

''

- - - ! 5 - 5 5
m m E ii m m E m 5 E i i ii
m 1 m 1 m m 1m

n As 5
fi E m r

L
-l

1
124 309600C.EN

'

rr-.. - ^

c==A

> om

c=JV.

c=A.

= J V .

c==A
c=!V.

,ly

cn

4^

B] Electrolux
Tumble dryers,
EDE 425 M.60, EDE 41 IM

Type EDE 425 M.60, model 16 70 49

ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL AB
MARINE DIVISION
SE 441 82 Alingss, Sweden
Phone +46 322 74 000
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail pa.marlneinfo@electrolux.se

TWO TEMPERATURE SETTINGS,


COTTON AND SYNTHETIC

ZINC COATED STEEL CABINET

LARGE CAPACITY DRUM IN


STAINLESS STEEL

EASILY OPERATED CONTROLS

FILTEREASYTO REMOVE FOR


CLEANING

The EDE 425 M.60 and EDE 41IM are


domestic type tumble dryers.
The machines are of simple and reliable
constrution and are easy to operate.
The drying time is selected by a time selector
knob located on the control panel.The control panel is also provided with program
chart, push buttons for low temperature
and cool tumbling and pilot lamp.
For further specifications, please see overleaf

19-022
DOC.NO.
EDITION 6

19-022BM
12.01

TUMBLE DRYERS, EDE 425 M.60, EDE 41 IM


Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm

1=MI

oo

"(1))

cI
'

-^

850

H-

51080

-440-

170
570
1. Rear exhaust 0 100 mm
2. Alternative exhaust - left or right side
3. Electrical cord 1.6 m with earthed plug
45.

510

H 4^

600

Specification
Model

16 70 49
EDE411M

Type

Max rated
capacity/load
kgs

230 1-60

EDE 425 M.60


EDE411M

Voltage V

net

gross

Shipping
volume
m3

28

32

0.400

Weight kgs

Loading
kW

Fuse A

2.2

10

230 1-50

Optional extras:
Model

ST00270

Description

Stacking kit ST00270:

Stacking kit for mounting on top of washer extractor EW 401F or EW 643F


(separate instruaion delivered with machine)

Installation:
The tumble dryer is to be secured. Use angle bars or similar (not included in delivery)
to keep it positioned. Leave air gap underneath to allow air to circulate freely.

19-022
Subject to charges without notice.

Bracket (2 pes.)
/

Round bar 0 6 (4x)

UJ

60

TUMBLE DRYER

INSTRUCTION BOOKLET

EDE 425

^25 996 631

iectrolux

YOUR NEW TUMBLE DRYER


This tumble dryer will give your wash that soft, relaxed feel whatever the weather.
Extremely high quality standards both during development and manufacturing guarantee a long
service life for your appliance.
Maximum economy in the operation of your dryer is achieved through very frugal electricity
consumption and short drying times.

Energy saving tips

^ In the interest of tlie


environment

To save energy we recommend that you follow


these hints:
Try to load the maximum capacity of the
machine as small loads are uneconomical.
Always load well spun laundry. The higher the
spin speed, the lower the electricity
consumption and the shorter the drying times.
Do not over-dry laundry, this avoids creasing
and saves energy.
Clean the filter regularly to avoid excessive
drying times and high electricity consumption.
Ventilate the room well. The room temperature
should not exceed +35C during drying.

Materials marked with the symbol O are


recyclable.
Check with your local Council or
Environmental Health Office to see if there
are facilities in your area for re-cycling this
appliance.
When the appliance is to be scrapped, cut off
the power supply cable and make the door
closing device unusable to prevent young
children from being trapped inside.
Help to keep your country tidy - use
authorised disposal sites for your old
appliance.
How do we help to protect the environment?
We use recycled paper!

Guide to use the Instruction Book


The following symbols will be found in the text to guide you throughout the instructions:
Safety instructions
LLI Hints and tips
A Environmental information

CONTENTS
Warnings

Page

Description of tlie appliance

Page

Installation

Page

Positioning

Page

Fitting the vent iiose

Page

6-7

Door reversal

Page

Electrical connection

Page

Stacking kit (optional accessory)

Page

Use

Page

Control panel

Page

Use of controls

Page

Drying Times

Page

10

Drying sequence

Page

11

Useful hints

Page

12

Maintenance

Page

i3

External cleaning

Page

13

Cleaning the door

Page

13

Cleaning the filter

Page

13

Servicing

Page

14

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS

Height
Width
Depth

85 cm
60 cm
57 cm

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Voltage/Frequency
Max. power absorbed

220-230 V/60 Hz
2200 W (1OA)

DRYING CAPACITY

Cotton, linen
Synthetics

5 kg
2.5 kg

WARNINGS

It is most important that this instruction book


should be retained with the appliance for
future reference. Should the appliance be
sold or transferred to another owner, or
should you move house and leave the
appliance, always ensure that the book is
supplied with the appliance in order that the
new owner can get to know the functioning of
the appliance and the relevant warnings.
These warnings have been provided in the
interest of safety. You MUST read them
carefully before installing or using the
appliance.

INSTALLATION
Any electrical work required to install this
appliance should be carried out by a qualified
electrician or competent person.
Make sure that the appliance does not stand
on its electrical supply cable.
If the machine is situated on a carpeted floor,
please adjust the feet in order to allow air to
circulate freely.
This tumble dryer is designed to be vented
through to the open air. It should have its own
ventilation system which should not be joined
with any other ventilation system connected to
any other appliance.

USE
Always unplug the appliance after use.
Clothes which are dripping wet should not be
placed in the dryer.
Never tumble dry items that have been in
contact with chemicals such as dry
cleaning fluid. These are of a volatile
nature and could cause an explosion.
As some bulky items such as duvets and
eiderdowns should be dried in large
commercial machines because of their bulk,
check with the manufacturer of the item if it is
suitable for drying in a domestic machine,
even if the dry weight of the item is within the
limit advised.
Always check that no cigarette lighters have
been left in pockets.
Leave the porthole door slightly ajar when not
in use to preserve the door seal.
The fluff filter must be cleaned after every use.

Do not operate the appliance with a damaged


filter as this may cause a fire.
Do not overload the appliance.
Do not allow fluff to accumulate around the
dryer.

SERVICE/REPAIR
Under no circumstances should you attempt to
repair the machine yourself. Repairs carried
out by inexperienced persons may cause
injury or serious malfunctioning. Refer to your
local Electrolux Service Centre. Always insist
on genuine Electrolux spare parts.

GENERAL SAFETY
It is dangerous to modify or try to modify the
specifications of this appliance in any way.
This appliance is designed to be used by
adults. Children should not be allowed to
touch the controls or play with the product.
Pets and small children may climb into tumble
dryers. Check your appliance each time before
use.
Keep all packaging well away from children.

DESCRiPTiON OF THE APPLIANCE


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Worktop
Programme chart
Low Temperature Button
Cool Tumbling Button
Drying Time Selector Dial
IVIains-On Light
Rating Plate
Door Handle
Fluff filter
Adjustable feet

11 Side vent outlets


12 Ringnut
13 Rear vent outlet

INSTALLATION
Positioning
It is recommended that, for your convenience, the
machine is positioned close to your washing
machine.
Whilst drying, the tumble dryer will expel a certain
amount of warm, very moist air, and this should
be removed from the room as quickly as possible
to prevent condensation. In an extremely well
ventilated room or close to an open window, this
may occur naturally.
However, in general, it is better to carry the
dryer's exhaust outside via the 100 mm diameter
flexible hose supplied with the appliance; ending
either temporarily at an open window, or
permanently at a fixed ventilation grille, fitted to
an exterior wall or window.
The tumble dryer must be installed in a clean
place, where dirt does not build up.
Make sure there are no obstructing items or
material near the air-intake louvres provided at
the back (e.g. paper, rags etc.).
To keep vibration and noise to a minimum when
the dryer is in use, it should be placed on a firm,
level surface.
Once in its permanent operating position, check
that the dryer is absolutely level with the aid of a
spirit level. If it is not, raise or lower the two
adjustable feet at the front of the machine until it
is.
The feet must never be removed.
Do not restrict the floor clearance through
deep-pile carpets, strips of wood or similar.
This might cause heat build-up which would
interfere with the operation of the appliance.
Important
When operating the tumble dryer, the room
temperature must not exceed 35C, as it may
affect the performance of the appliance.

Fitting the vent hose


To simplify the installation, there is a choice of
vent outlets: one at the back, the others in the left
and right-hand side.
Connect the hose to whichever is the more
convenient by pulling the ring nut (A) from the
vent outlet at the back, screwing it on to the hose
and pushing it firmly back into place.
The unused vents should now be sealed with the
special snap covers provided.

Advice: If the hose is long and the room


temperature low, the moisture might condense to
water inside the hose. This is an unavoidable
natural phenomenon. To prevent this water from
lying in the hose or flowing back into the tumble
dryer, it is advisable to drill a small hole (dia.
3 mm) in the lowest point of the hose and to
place a small container below it.(See picture,
point A).
Once connected to the dryer, run the vent hose to
the desired outlet point, ensuring that the run's
overall length is less than 2 m, and that it
contains no more than two bends. As to the outlet
itself, if you have decided on a fixed wall/window
grille, a good local builder's merchant should be
able to supply you with the necessary fittings and
installation advice.

It is important not to connect the


vent hose to, for example, a cooker
hood, or a chimney or flue pipe
designed to carry the exhaust from
a fuel burning appliance.

Note that to avoid condensation problems, it is


essential that the dryer be fitted with the flexible
hose to carry its "exhaust" at least beyond the
kitchen units; preferable outside the kitchen.
In order to prevent the appliance from
overheating, it is important that the steam
exhaust is unobstructed.
Therefore, in case of a permanent hose fitted to
an exterior wall or ceiling, it must be ensured an
exhaust capacity of at least 150 m^/h.
If the dryer is fitted next to kitchen units,
make sure that the vent hose is not squashed.
If the hose is partially squashed, drying
efficiency will be reduced, resulting in longer
drying times and higher energy consumption.
If the hose is completely squashed, the safety
cut-outs with which the machine is fitted may
operate.

Door reversal
To make it easier to load or unload the laundry
the door can be reversed.
This operation must be carried out by
qualified personnel.

*
/ ' ^

C3

^\,^

r ^

Operate as follows:
- Remove the door by unscrewing the two screws
(1) fastening the hinge to the cabinet (Fig. A).
- Remove the safety catch (2) and the plug (3) by
bending the two fastening tags (Fig. A).
- Refit the safety catch (2) and plug (3) on the
door by reversing their positions (Fig. B).
- Remove the plastic plate (4) by unscrewing the
two fastening screws (Fig. A).
- Refit the plastic plate (4) on the opposite side
(Fig. B).
- Refit the door by screwing in the two screws (1)
which fasten the door to the cabinet (Fig. B).

f PK

3 J

[ill r>i

mm

y-'"^

CD ^ \ ^

/ 2 \ \ \

''"ini

^/fv^V

M?!

Electrical connection

Stacking kit

This machine is designed to operate on a 220230 V, single-phase, 60 Hz supply.

A special stacking kit is available through your


dealer, to enable the mounting of the dryer on
top of your washing machine.

Check that your domestic electrical installation


can take the maximum load required (2.2 kW),
also taking into account any other appliances in
use.
Connect the machine to an earthed socket, in
accordance with current wiring regulations.
Important
If the socket in your house is not earthed, you
have to do a separate earth connection using the
special green and yellow ground wire which you
can find on the back of your appliance. This wire
has to be connected to an efficient earth.
If, instead, your domestic wiring system is
already earthed, this wire must not be used and
we suggest you to simply cut it off and to throw it
away.

The manufacturer declines any


responsibility for damage or injury
through failure to comply with the
above safety precaution.

USE
Control panel

ir

f=^>v o

s Electrolux

OO

j]

23

))1

1 Programme Chart

4 Drying Time Selector Dial

This will help you to select the correct time for


drying.

The selector dial incorporates two drying cycles,


one of up to 120 minutes at a high temperature
for cotton and linen, and one of up to 80 minutes
at a low temperature for synthetic fabrics.
To set the machine to the selected time, turn the
dial clockwise until the time you want coincides
exactly with the pointer.
NEVER attempt to turn the dial in an
anticlockwise direction.
When selecting the drying time, you should
remember that it includes a 8 minute cooling
phase (position ^ on the dial).
This phase should not be shortened, stopped or
avoided, as this could cause skin burns or
damages to the laundry.

2 Low Temperature Button V'


Press this button to reduce the temperature when
drying particularly delicate cotton or linen items.
In this case you should select a longer drying
time.
On the programmes for synthetics the
temperature is automatically reduced.
Therefore it is not necessary to depress this
button.

3 Cool Tumbling Button %,


By depressing this button the heat is cut off. This
is particularly useful to freshen the laundry (e.g.
to remove a persistent odour of moth-balls).

Additional drying
If at the end of the programme the laundry is still
too damp, set the dial for a further period of
drying (remembering to take into account the
cooling period).

5 Mains-On Light
This lights up when the machine starts operating
and goes out at the end of the programme.

Drying Times
Cottons
Selector dial: up to 120 minutes
Degree of drying required

Degree of spin given


rpm
800-1000

Quantity
kg

Drying times
mins

85-105

2.5

60-75

80-100

2.5

55-70

75-95

2.5

40-55

70-90

2.5

35-50

Quantity
kg

Drying times
mins

2.5

50-60

30-35

0.5

25-30

2.5

40-50

Store dry
1200

800-1000
Iron dry
1200

Synthetics
Selector dial: up to 80 minutes

Degree of drying required

Store dry

Iron dry

Degree of spin given


rpm

650

650

Never overfill the drum (do not load large quilts, for example).
The laundry must be suitably spin dried in your washing machine before being placed in the tumble
dryer (500rpm minimum).
Drying times vary according to:
- The type of laundry
- The size of the load
- The degree of spinning prior to drying
Drying times are given as a guide only. Experience will soon enable you to estimate the drying time
needed for your usual laundry loads.
Do not start by selecting a long drying time. It is better to determine the required degree of dryness by
gradually increasing the drying time.
For a mixed load (cotton and resistant synthetics, for example) select the time for the most delicate
fibres and increase it by 10 mins.
10

T] Drying sequence
Before starting up for the first time it is advisable
lo load a few moist cloths into the dryer and to let
it run for about 20 minutes. This ensures that no
dust and dirt is left in the drum.

1. Load the laundry


Open the door by pulling the catch fonwards.
Load the items one at a time, shaking them out
loosely and close the door.
Please check the laundry does not get caught
between the door and filter.

2. Select the required option


Depress Cool Tumbling or Low Temp. Buttton, if
desired.

3. Select the drying time


Turn the selector dial clockwise to the desired
time, in the high or low temperature section,
depending on the laundry: the mains-on light
illuminates and the machine starts operating.

4. When drying is completed


The machine stops automatically, the mains-on
light goes out.
If the laundry is still too damp, select a further
brief drying time, bearing in mind that during the
last 8 minutes the dryer carries out the cooling
and anti-crease treatment phase.
Clean the filter after every drying programme.
A clean filter ensures correct functioning of
the appliance.

11

Useful hints
Try to load to the maximum capacity of the
machine as small loads are uneconomical.
For information, here is a list of the average
weights of some common laundry items.
Sheet
700-1000 g
Tablecloth
400 - 500 g
Kitchen towel
70-120 g
Table napkin
50-100 g
Towelling hand towel
150-250 g
1000-1500 g
Bathrobe
Man's shirt
200 - 300 g
Pillowcase
100-200 g
Man's pyjamas
400 - 500 g
Ladies' nightdress
200 - 250 g
Never tumble dry the following:
Particularly delicate items such as net curtains,
woollen, silk, fabrics with metal trim, nylon
tights, bulky materials such as anoraks,
blankets, eiderdowns, sleeping bags, feather
quilts and any items containing rubber foam or
materials similar to rubber foam.
Always follow the instructions on garment
labels.
O

normal drying (high temperature)

delicate drying (low temperature)

do not tumble dry

Close pillowcases and covers with fasteners to


prevent small laundry items getting tangled
inside them. Close press studs, zips and hooks
and tie belts and apron strings.
Sort laundry according to type and degree of
drying required.
Do not over-dry laundry, this avoids creasing
and saves energy.
Avoid drying dark clothes with light coloured
fluffy items such as towels as they could attract
the fluff.
The laundry must be thoroughly spun before
tumble drying.
Easy-care items, too, e.g. shirts, should be
briefly pre-spun before drying (depending on
crease resistance approx. 30 seconds or using
the special brief spin programme of your
washing machine).

12

Knitted textiles (knitted undenwear) may shrink


a little during drying. Please do not overdry
items of this type. It is advisable to allow for
shrinkage when choosing the size of new
purchases.
You can also put starched items into your
dryer. However, to achieve the desired
starched effect, choose the programme "iron
dry". To remove any starch residues, wipe out
the internal drum after drying with a moist cloth
and then rub it dry.
To avoid a static charge when drying is
completed, use either a fabric softener when
you are washing the laundry or a fabric
conditioner specifically for tumble dryers.
Remove the laundry when the dryer has
finished drying.
If individual items are still damp after drying,
set a brief post-drying time, but at least 20
minutes. This will be necessary particularly for
multilayered items (e.g. collars, pockets, etc.).

MAINTENANCE
You must disconnect the appliance from the
electricity supply, before you can carry out any
cleaning or maintenance work.

External cleaning
Use only soap and water and then dry
thoroughly
From time to time, apply a little wax furniture
cream with a soft cloth.
Important: do not use methylated spirit, diluents
or similar products.

Cleaning the door


Clean periodically the interior part of the door to
remove any fluff.
Accurate cleaning ensures correct drying.

Cleaning the filter


Your dryer will only function well if the filter is
clean.
The filter collects all the fluff which
accumulates during drying and it must therefore
be cleaned at the end of each programme with a
damp cloth.
The filter cannot be removed.
Do not be alarmed by the amount of fluff. It is not
due to excessive wear caused by the dryer. All
fabric loses fluff when drying but it goes unnoticed in the air. In a tumble dryer it simply
collects in the filter.

13

SERVICING
Before contacting your local Electrolux Service Centre, please make the following
checks:

Problem

Possible cause

The dryer does not start up

The door is open.


The plug is not fitted into the wall socket.
There is no electricity supply from the wall
socket.
The time selector dial is not set correctly.

The dryer does not dry properly

The filter is clogged.


Insufficient drying time.
The selected cycle is not suitable for the
laundry.
Excessive laundry load.
The dryer is not correctly installed.

If, after the above checks, there is still a fault, call


your local Electrolux Service Centre.
Please make sure you give the model and serial
number of the appliance.
This information can be found on the rating plate
(see picture).

f\

b
P0307/

14

Mcjd.,.,
Prod. No

Ser. No
'

HI Electrolux

DISTRI

SERVICE MANUAL
TUMBLE-DRYERS

TUMBLE-DRYERS
SERIE P51 NEW
ELECTROLUX ZANUSSI
ELETTRODOMESTICI S.p.A.
VIA GIARDINI CATTANEO, 3
I - 33170 PORDENONE (ITALY)
Fax (0434)394096

Pubiication-No.
599 33 15-85/6
970219
EN/SERVICE/EB

INDEX

Operating principle

page

Constructional features
Cabinet
Drum

page
page
page

5
5
5

Main electronic parts


Heating unit
Themnostats
Timer
Fan motor unit

page
page
page
page
page

7
7
7
8
8

Accessibility & serviceability


Worktop
Timer
Indicator light
Door microswitch
Control panel
Controls support
Cabinet side
Motor
Capacitor
Thermostat
Back panel cover
Heating element
Rear drum support
Back panel
Drum
Sealing felt ring
Door
Filter
Door reversal

page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page

9
9

-3-

9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13

OPERATING PRINCIPLE

1 - Heating unit
2 - Drum
3 - Door
4 - Filter
5- Fan
6 - Exhaust duct

><^^ Cold air


^^

Warm air

This appliance is of the type discharging humid air in the an"


the ambient and forces it through a heating unit (1).
The warm air then passes through the drum (2) in which the laundry to be dried has been placed, thus
removing humidity present in it.
The air then passes through the lint filter (4) and flows out through the discharge pipe (6) into the ambient
from which it was originally taken.
A flexible hose may be connected to this discharge pipe so as to discharge the humid air somewhere else.
The hose mustn't be longer than 2 m.

CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
-4-

CABINET

1 - Base
2 - Flexible hose
3 - Ring nut
4-Cap
5 - Back panel cover
6 - Back panel
7 - Side panels
8 - Cross piece
9 - Duct
10 - Front panel
11 -Joint
12 - Filter

Cabinet/Side panel/Back panel/I


1Parts made of painted sheet metal fastened together by means of self-threading screws and hooked to the
base.
The base is made of Carboran material.
DRUM

1 - Front flange
2 - Central band
3 - Back flange
4 - Internal ribs

Parts 1-2-3 are seam-folded together. The tumble rios are lasienea oy means or screws.
Parts making up the dmm may be of sheet steel (AISI 430), of galvanised sheet-iron or may be of both zinc
and steel. The dmm shaft is riveted to the back flange.

-5-

Air tightness at the bacli


1 - Felt ring
2 - Drum
3 - Back panel

Drum back support

4 - Antifrictior) washer
5 - "Benzing" ring
6 - Back panel
7 - Drum shaft
8 - Support provided with
a bushing fitted on the back panel

Front support and drum seal

9 - Supporting flange
10 - Felt ring
11 -Drum

Drum drive system

^
-

Motor-to-drum belt drive (1)


Motor (2) fastened at the bottom to the side
Belt stretcher (3) to increase the belt's winding angle
Fan blade-assembly directly mounted to the motor shaft
Drum reversibility on some models. The heating element in
this case is excluded during the anticlockwise rotation phase
due to the reduced ventilation

j/f

1
V.
VV

i)

y^

23

MAIN ELECTRICAL PARTS


HEATING UNIT

1 - Filament heating element


2 - Safety thermostat
3 - Manually resettable thermostat
4 - Ceramic boards
5 - Casing

Double-filament heating element provided with ceramic boards and galvanised sheet iron frame. The heating
element power can be, according to the models, 1400 + 600 or 1400 + 1000 W.
Two overheat protection thermostats are fastened to the casing.
Safety thermostat
Two thermostats are used to cut out the heating elements in case of ventilation failure.

Safety thermostat cut-out in case of ventilation failure (automatically resettable)


Safety thennostat cut-out In case of ventilation failure (manually resettable) by depressing the button

CYCLING THERMOSTAT

Automatically resettable cycling thermostat to limit maximum air temperature. Manually resettable cycling
thennostat to limit maximum air temperature .
Usually closed , opens at 54C.

-7

TIMER

- Electromechanical timer Including two timing sections for the drying time.
The first from 0 to 120 min. for drying fast fabrics.
The second from 0 to 80 min. for drying delicate fabrics. When the delicate fabrics section is selected one of
the heater branches is excluded.
It also includes fast cams for drum tumbling reversal and to exclude the heating function.
Manual rotation must always be clockwise.

FAN MOTOR UNIT

Single-phase asynchronous motor provided with an overload cut out.

ACCESSIBILITY & SERVICEABILITY


FROM THE WORKTOP
- Disassemble the worktop by unscrewing the two back screws and sliding it out towards the back of the
machine

1 - Timer
2 - Indicator liglit
3 - Door microswitcli

TIMER
Remove the knob (see figure), remove the knob flange (see figure);
undo the two fastening screws. On some models remove the control
panel before removing the knob.

INDICATOR LIGHT
Widen out the conveyor's back tags and
slide out the lamp.

DOOR MICROSWITCH
Disconnect leads from the microswitch, widen fastening tags and
slide it out upwards and then inwards

CONTROL PANEL
Disengage it from the controls support interior (fastening teeth)

CONTROLS SUPPORT
Unscrew the two top screws and slide it out upwards

FROM THE RIGHT HAND SIDE


- Disassemble the worlctop
- Disassemble the right hand side by unscrewing the two top screws fastening it to the front panel and to the
back panel and then slide it out upwards and then outwards.

4
5
6
7

- Motor/fan unit
- Capacitor
- Tension spring
- Cycling thermostat

MOTOR
Disengage the tension spring, remove the belt from the pulley, disconnect the leads from the tenninal board
and from the condenser, disengage the tags fastening the front and back motor supports and rotate them
outwards until they slide out of their seatings.

CAPACITOR
Disconnect leads, lower the engaging tags and slide the capacitor out of its seating by pulling it towards the
machine's back panel.

CYCLING THERMOSTAT
Widen the fastening tags and remove it from its seating.

10-

FROM THE BACK PANEL COVER


Undo the screws fastening the back panel

9 - Heating element
10 - Back drum support

HEATING ELEMENT
Remove the two screws fastening it to the back panel, disconnect wiring.

SSAFETY THERMOSTATS
In case of failure, replace the whole heating unit.

REAR DRUM SUPPORT


Remove the "Benzing" ring and the spacer ring from the drum's shaft, remove the three screws fastening the
support and pull outwards.

11 -

FROM THE BACK PANEL


After having removed the back panel cover, remove the worktop, undo the screws provided at the top and
fastening the back panel to the cross bar and to the sides, and at the back undo the screws fastening the
back panel to the base, disengage the tags provided on the base and slide out the back panel.

3 - Door microswitch
4 - Motor
5 - Capacitor
7 - Cycling thermostat
14 - Front sealing felt ring

DRUM AND DRIVE BELT


They may be removed after having removed the back panel.

FRONT SEALING FELT RING


It may be removed after having removed the back panel.

BACK SEALING FELT RING


Widen out the back panel tags and slide out the back sealing felt ring

WARNINGI
Do not damage the felt ring when refitting it
The seam of the back sealing felt ring must tie turned towards the bottom of the black panel.

12

ACCESS FROM THE DOOR


DOOR
To accede to the door undo the screws fastening the hinge

.-^-'^k.t..

FILTER
To replace the filter screen, without disassembling the
front panel and the duct, operate as follows:
- take out the filter screen by means of pliers as shown
in figure. Make sure that the plastic supports are not
being damaged.
- fit the new filter
Q

DOOR REVERSAL

k#'%

On some models it is possible to reverse the door


opening.
Operate as follows:

'y.

1 Remove the door by unscrewing the two screws


fastening the hinge to the cabinet
2 - Remove the safety catch and the plug by
bending the two fastening tags by means of a
screwdriver
3 - Remove the plug with a screwdriver by bending
the two fastening tags
4 - Remove the plastic plate by unscrewing the two
fastening screws
5 - Refit the plug on place of the safety catch
6 - Refit the safety catch
7 - Refit the plastic plate on place of the hinge
8 - Refit the door and fasten the hinge to the cabinei
with the two screws.

v'^^--4'
rT
-.---

x?^-

r
' \

5
6

' ^ ~ -

" ' - - . .

13

-4

-"

SPARE PARTS LIST

s Electrolux

Household drying equipment

D I S T R I P R T S 0^

4545

PNC

Brand

Model

Market

916092013 03

Electrolux

EDE425M

KR-PH

Electrolux-Zanussi
Corso Lino Zanussi
1 - 33080 Porcia
Italy
Fax +39 (0)434 394096

Publ.No.
599354648
2002/9/24
PLY

Tumbler
driers
(excl
condense driers)

^^^ I12OB
20J
120A'1

523 A J

120c

255A

130

9163005230

Exploded view no. :P09163005230


PNC
916092013 03

Pos
120
120A
120B
120C
130
130A
250
253
255A
262
520
520A
523
523A
538
550

Model
EDE425M

Part No.
1253 00 501 / 9
1253 00 401 12
1253 06 101 12
1253 01 301 / 3
1250 02 8 0 5 / 5
1250 12 9 2 0 / 0
1255 12 101 12
1255 02 8 1 0 / 0
125013411 / 9
1255 1 2 7 1 0 / 0
1254 03 401 / 8
1250 23 2 0 3 / 8
1253 06 001 / 4
1253 00 801 / 3
50099 25 000 / 8
1255 06 1 0 7 / 7

Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

Filter.upper
Filter, lower
Assembly,filter,upper
Assembly,filter,bottom
Sealing,drum,in front
Gasket.back, basket
Storage basket,complete,inox,ZK SM/DOOR NEX1 (3R)
Drive belts, 1=1884
Bearing,back,complete
Drum paddle
Flange, reinforcement, bearing
Assembly,flange,bolt
Bracket,filter,upper
Carrier,filter,bottom
Spacer washer
Coat, bolt, basket

-309

9163005195

Exploded view no.:P09163005195


PNC

916092013 03

Pos
110
130
130A
135
260
260A
303
308
309
312
322
323
324
325
326
330
334
520
520A
521
521A
523
527
530
550A
563A
563C
999

Model
EDE425M

Part No.
1250 22 0 1 0 / 8
1250 00 1 0 3 / 7
1250 97 8 1 0 / 1
1254 02 2 0 9 / 6
1240 13 9 0 0 / 4
1250 20 2 0 0 / 7
1254 27 1 2 0 / 6
1250 07 8 0 0 / 1
1254 00 3 0 0 / 5
1250 06 7 0 0 / 4
1250 09 3 0 4 / 2
1250 24 9 1 0 / 7
1254 02 1 1 0 / 6
1250 07 0 0 0 / 8
1254 26 4 0 2 / 9
1254 26 4 1 2 / 8
1250 11 9 0 2 / 9
1254 26 5 1 2 / 5
1250 03 901 / 1
1250 06 8 0 0 / 2
1250 07 2 0 0 / 4
1250 09 0 0 0 / 6
1254 16 0 0 0 / 3
1250 09 1 0 0 / 4
1242 06 0 0 0 / 0
1254 30 4 0 5 / 6
1240 13 8 0 0 / 6
1250 07 1 0 0 / 6
1259 96 6 3 0 / 5

Description
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

Steam exhaust hose,flexible,2.5 m.


Sealing
Sealing,conductor
Channel drainage,SOFT
Spring,Catch,porthole
Spring
Stand,NX1
Hinge,buirs eye
Cover,Back panel.NEXUS 1/4
Bull's eye
Cross girder,upper
Frame,bull's eye
Front panel.white.
Hook,bull's eye
Side panel,left,Z V/B NEXUS4 VENT.
Side panel,right,Z V/B NEXUS VENT.
Foot
Back panel,NEXUS4
Flange,Catch
Flange.buH's eye,behind
Feed plunger
Lid
Bracket,Harness,NEX/4 COND.
Ferrule,DX 0502B
Handle,porthole
Coat,Back panei.NXI
Bolt, Catch, porthole
Peg,mikroswitch
Instruction book,(GB)

SUPPLIED TOGETHER
LIVRES ENSEMBLE
ZUSAMMEN GELIEFERT
FORNITI INSIEME

502

510*

500*

9163003972

Exploded view no.:P09163003972


PNC
916092013 03

Pos
042
313
500
502
510
51OA
523
525

Model
EDE425M

Description

Part No.
1247
1250
1254
1254
1254
1254
1254
1247

63
34
11
02
11
16
02
36

410/6
400/7
311 / 9
901 / 8
170/9
302/3
013/2
000/9

A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

Lampholder,assy,green
Table top,P5IS ALFA
Dial,siikscreened
Toggle bottom piece
Control panel,complete,silk-screened
Programme plate,(en)
Bracket,command,SOFT
Push button,keyboard

523A

9163005233

Exploded view no. :P09163005233


PNC
916092013 03

Pos

001
003A

004
010
Oil
013
016
019A

037
159
260A

523
523A

999

Model
EDE425M

Description

Part No.
1251 10 621 /5
1250 02 420/3
1252 05 707/8
1254 36 500/8
1250 02 032/6
1249 27 100/6
50220 74 700 / 5
50252 51 500/7
1254 22 720/8
1250 01 911/2
1250 01 500/3
1250 36 200/9
1254 03 503/1
1254 37 000/8
1254 37 100/6
3792 81 700 / 3

A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

Timer.RID 150 ELBI TB


Thermostat,54c
Assembly,main motor,+RIDUTT.SOLE 60HZ
Heater,230/1400+600 I RCA
Interference capacitor,8MF DUCATI
Keyboard, I D ROLD
Switch,bull's eye
Pilot light
Connection box,ITW
Fan wheel
Spring
Assembly,motor holder,front
Assembly,motor holder
Harness
Harness
Supply cable,3X1 XI600

Product specification 91609201303 EDE425M

General data
Power supply:
Dinnensions (HxWxD):
Cavity volume:
Rotary speed:
Absorbed power:

220 / 60 V/Hz
85x60x57 cm.
108 dm3
55 g/m
2200 W

General features

Timer
Type:

125 110621

Cycling thermostat
Temperature:

54 C

Heating element
Absorbed power:
Resistance:
Absorbed power:
Resistance:
Heating thermostat:
Safety thermostat:

1400W
33,5 Ohm
600 W
78 Ohm
92 C
160 C

Main motor
Insulating class:
Absorbed power:
Rotary speed:
Absorbed current:
Running/starting winding res.:
Start capacitor:

F
140 W
2600 g/m
1,2 A
29 / 29 Ohm
400 / 8 y/\xF

(/i
z
Q
1

C 5 C 5 I O C 3 0 0 O C 3 C J C 5 C J C 3 0 J C C 3 O
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z

Q.

Heating

B3-B2(b4)

Heating
Line

C4-C1(b2)
A1-A2(t5)

Motor
Motor

D4-D1(t32)
D4-D2(b32)

Heating element

D4-DS(b31)

125 110621

L D m m u J L U u J i J U u j m L O m u J i i j m L u a l m m L i J L i j m L D m L D m i i J u j m O

1
M

1 1
300sec

125 110621 .EN

125 433600b

Motor capaci tor

hieat ing element

Junction box +
Anti-interference f i Iter
TT

Motor

nMJl

P0PLY300000042
Anti-interference filter Anti-interference filter
Cool button
Cool button
Door switch
Door switch
Earth
Earth
Heating elements
Heating elements
Junction box
Junction box
Low temperature button Low temperature button
Mains-on light
Mains-on light
Motor
Motor
Motor capacitor
Motor capacitor
Overheat protection thermostat
Overheat protection thermostat
Thermostat
Thermostat
Timer motor
Timer motor
Violet
Violet
Transparent
Transparent
Red
Red
Green-yellow
Green-yellow
Grey
Grey
Brown
Brown
Blue
Blue
Black
Black

125 433600c

A-2

Q.A-3
o

<?--

oo-

Door swite

A-1

Tiiermostat

IB-4(C4)

C-1
CD

.B-3

Ant i-interference
^[er

^
Eortti

Moins-on I ight

3-4

Timer motor

^6-2

M
. .

N! dearth onl

Motor copocitor
Cool b u t t o n

:i

\i
Il00+600h

i 1400 W H

Overheat protection
thermostats
Thermostat

D-4

D-5

3.

Door

sw i I c h
] KOMM 1

=^

c=A

=A

^^jy

=A

=-^

era

LOiPART
Washer extractor, W455H

j j)ffgig-gBaipwgr'"ife
^yseoSy

"^^

""fiiHIIIIHIIIIHIIIH. ,t9s.,.jiMt/

Model W455H

LOfPART B
P.O. Box 694
SE 441 18 Alingss, Sweden
Phons
+46 322 66 83 60
Telefax +46 322 63 77 47
E-mail
ioipartioipart.se

Exclusive Sales of
HI E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment

COMPASS CONTROL
MICROPROCESSOR

AWS SYSTEM FOR PRECISE WATER


DOSAGE

HIGH EXTRACTION FORCE

STAINLESS AND GALVANIZED


STEEL IN ALL VITAL PARTS

POWDER PAINTED CABINET

ENAMELLED FRONT PANEL

SLIP-LOCK DOOR HANDLE

WATER-OPERATED DRAIN VALVE

Washer extractor W455H with Compass


Control microprocessor offers fast efficient
wash programs for normal textiles, mixed
fabrics and wool. The start and programs are
selected by a control knob fitted on the
control panel together with a large and clear
display. The display presents the available
washing programs, options and addiuonal
functions. The machine is fitted with two
Quick Start buttons for choosing two preset
washing programs.
Thanks to the Automatic Weighing System
(AWS) the machine works with precise water
dosage. The high extraction force guarantees
an efficient dewatering. The machine is
equipped with front moimted four compartment soap box.
The door is with gasket and strong hinges is
built for heavy duty operation and provided
with slip-lock handle for easy operation and
immediate opening and unloading.
The washer extractor W435His designed for
connection to cold and hot water and
equipped with an industrial motor with three
speeds for gende wash, normal wash and
extraction.
The drain valve is operated by water pressure.
A right-angle drain hoseisapart of delivery.
The machine must be secured to the floor.
For fiirther specifications, please see overleaf.

19-113
DOC.NO.
EDITION 1

19-113L
11.05

WASHER EXTRACTOR W455H

Scale 1:20
Dimensions mm

gi=]0

595-

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Drain hose, dimensions:

Control panel
Three compartment soap box
Door opening 0 255 mm
Cold water conneaion R 3/4" (DN 20), rec. water pressure 200-500 kPa
Hot water conneaion R 3/4" (DN 20), rec. water pressure 200-500 kPa
Drain outlet 0 50 mm ext., capacity 160 1/min.
Elearical connection, cable 1.5 m

Positioning of machines:

480-

(Attach the drain hose to the machine's drain


outlet and install so it empties min 25 mm
above the floor drain or waste water channel.)

Marine installation:
M 10
Marine installation (see below):
NOTE!
The maximtmi value for rolling is 15 and for
stamping 8.
The machine should be bolted to the foundation ace. to instructions in Installation manual, Marine installation.

min. 20*

680

20

20

-595-

* rec. 500

Specification
Model/Type

Capacity,
filling factor
1:10 kgs

W455H

Inner drum
volume litres

5.5

diameter mm

Total rating
kW

440 3-60

4.5

400 3-50

4.9

Weight kgs

332

Shipping
volume m^

Fuse A

depth mm

452

53

Voltage V

10 slow

net

gross

99

109

0.470

*other voltages available on request


Specification
Type

Specification - consumption data for program "Normal"\60/ *


Drum speed rpm
wash

G-tactor

extraction

Max floor load


at extraction
IcN

W455H
35*/54
1300
1.20.3
425
* extra gentle speed on Mild and Wool programs

Frequency of the
dynamic force
Hz

Type

Total time minutes

W455H

46

20

Water consumption
litres

Energy
consumpdon kWh

cold/hot

motor/heating

52/9

0.2/0.35

* at water temperature: cold water 15 C, hot water 65 "C


Specification sound levels
Type

Solid sound level


in dB (A)

Airborne sound
level dB (A)*

Vibration level
m/sec^

Vibration speed
mm/sec

W455H

74

51/71

0.36

57

* wash/extraaion

19-113
Subject to chang6$ without notice.

Installation manual
W450H, W455H
438 9067-51
05.03

Contents

Contents
Technical data
Installation
Siting
Mountings
Mechanical installation
Water supply
Drain
Electrical installation
Machine connection options
Connection of external liquid supplies
Function checks
Marine installation

3
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
17
18

The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes to design, material and/or
specifications without notice.

!\

Safety

/\

This machine can only be used with water. Never use dry cleaning
agents.
Do not allow children to operate the machine.
Do not hose down or spray the machine with water.
All mechanical and electrical installation must be carried out by
qualified personnel.
Do not bypass the door locking device.
Should the machine malfunction, please report the fault to the
technician responsible for the machine.

Technical data
Technical data

Innerdrum, volume
diameter
depth
Drum speed
wash
extraction
Heating
electricity
steam
hot water

W450H

W455H

litres
mm

53
452

53
452

mm

332

332

rpm

35/54
1100

35/54
1300

4.4

4.4

305
102

425
102

G-factor
Weight, net

kg

Connections
Water valves

connection
BSP

DN20
3/4"

Capacity at 300 kPa


Drain valve

l/min

17

outer 0 mm

50

Draining capacity

l/min

160

Technical data
1
2
3
4
5

e
7
8

Control panel
Soap box
Door opening 255
Cold water
Hot water
Drain, valve
Drain, pump
Electrical connection

&

Gi

595

680

850/875*

305

660

80

195

60

90

80

650

' Adjustable height, 25 mm

H-H=^
/

c
F
;

r^

8
^

,,

n
H /

(oT^

^ 5

\ ^J

^ \

if

'

1 ^

p\

r _t
*

^
".

Technical data

Frequency of the
dynamic force

Hz

20

Max floor load


at extraction

kN

1.20.3

Sound levels

Solid sound level in dB (A)


re 10-3 mm/sec (44-707 Hz)
Airborne sound level
dB (A) re 2x105 Pa
Vibration level
(m/sec^)
Vibration speed
(mm/sec)
A = Standard
B = With insulation
* = Wash/extraction

76

62

51/71*

45/59*

0.36

0.66

57

83

Installation
Installation
Leave the machine on the pallet on which it was
delivered until the installation site has been
prepared to receive it.

Siting
Install the machine close to a floor drain or open
waste water channel.
The following clearances are recommended for
easier installation and servicing:
Fig.

at least 500 mm between the machine and the


wall behind it.
at least 50 mm on each side of the machine,
whether it is next to a wall or to other
machines.
A clearance of 70 mm may be required
between the machine and the 130-litre tumble
dryer depending on which way the dryer's door
opens.

r(^
Rec.
500 mm

Installation
Mountings
In transit the machine's drum is locked in place
by three locking devices between chassis and
drum.
Instructions for installing machine and removing
transit locking devices, step by step:
Remove the packaging.
Remove the components shipped inside the
drum.
Fig.

Remove the front panel by undoing the two


screws on its bottom edge.
Remove the rear panel by undoing the
screws.

Fig.

Remove the three transport securities, one at


the front and two at the back. Save the
transport securities if the machine needs to be
moved sometime in the future.
The machine can be lifted in bottom frame.

r<^

Installation
Mechanical installation
Mark and drill 2 holes (0 8 mm) about 40 mm
deep in the positions shown.

530 490

C
35

125 290 150 40

H
50

= position of feet

O = drilling points for expander bolts


The machine shall be lifted in the bottom
frame.
Place the machine over the two drilled holes.
Check that the machine is placed in level.
Adjust with the feet.

It is of utmost importance that the machine


is placed in level, from side to side as well
as front to rear. If the machine is not
properly leveled, It may result in out-ofbalance without a real out of balance in the
drum.
Insert the expansion bolts supplied in the
holes drilled in the floor. Fit the washers and

Installation

10

Water supply

XT)

Each water supply line to the machine should be


fitted with a manual shut-off valve and debris filter
to facilitate servicing. Check the local regulations
to determine whether non-return valves are
required.
Connection hoses should be of the quality
required according to regulations in the country of
use.
Water pressures:
minimum: 60 kPa (0.5 kp/cm2)
maximum: 0.5 MPa (5 kp/cm2)
recommended: 0.2-0.5 MPa (2-5 kp/cm2)
Hoses and pipes should be flushed through
before being connected to the machine. Make
sure the hoses have no sharp bends or angles.

r<2>

The machine can have one or two supply hoses,


DN 20 (R 3/4").
Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Machine with cold water intake only.


Machine with hot and cold water intake.
Machine with hot and cold water intake, but
plumbed for cold only because hot not available.
Both valves must be connected even if there is
only one water supply present.

r(2>

Installation
Drain

11

r<i>

Direct discharge
Fig- Attach the drain hose to the machine's drain
(T) outlet and install so it empties (min 25 mm)
above the floor drain or waste water channel.
Pump drain
F'9- Position the highest part of the drain hose
(2) 65050 mm above the lowest part of the
machine.
Make sure that there are no kinks in the hose.

r<^

650

+50 mm

Installation

12

Electrical installation

Electrical installation must be carried out by an authorised electrician.


Install a multi-pole switch for the machine's electrical supply.
Connect the machine's cable to the switch.
Checl< that the earth has been connected in the correct way.
Fig.

Fuse ratings are given in the table.


For the rating of the supply cable, check the local regulations.
Min. outer diameter for supply cable 0IO mm.

r<^
Heating type
type

Voltage
type

Total rating
kW

Fuse
A

El. 4.4 kW

400-415V 3NAC 50 Hz

10
20
25

208-230V 1 AC 50 Hz

4.7
4.8
4.8
2.7

El. 4.4 kW

230V 3AC 50/60 Hz

El. 4.4 kW

230-240V 1 AC 50/60 Hz

El. 2,2 kW
El. 3.0 kW

380V 3AC T 50/60 Hz

3.5

El. 3.3 kW

400V 3AC T 50/60 Hz

EI. 3-3 kW

200V 3AC 50/60 Hz

aa
as

EL 4.0 kW

44QV 3AC T 50/60 Hz

4.5

El. 2,2 kW

208-240V1 AC 50/60 Hz

Non heated

208-240V 1 AC 50/60 Hz

2.7
0.9
1.1

200V 1AC 50/60 Hz

16
10
10
16
10
16
10
10

Installation
Machine connection options

13

Xi>

301

302

303

Switchover or reconnection of the machine


may only be performed by qualified,
authorised personnel.
Tilis macliine can be switched/reconnected
foilowing the options set out below.

The machine cannot be switched from


50 Hz to 60 Hz or vice versa.

1^

r<i>
f

Reconnection/switchover of this type


cannot be performed on machines fitted
with a transformer.

4AI<W

Fig.

Connection option 400 V 3NAC 4.4 kW

Fig.

Connection option 230 V 3AC 4.4 kW

r<i>-

Fig.

Connection option 230 V 1 AC 4.4 kW

Fig.

Connection option 230 V 1 AC 2.7 kW

In cases where the machine data plate


does not state the new voltage option, this
should be added to the plate.

2a67A

r<^
301. L

302,303, N/L

Installation

14

Connection of external liquid


supplies

r<i>

Machines fitted with connectors.


Connect the pump equipment to connections
Fig.
A and B on the washing machine.
(T)
Connect the signal cable to B and the power
supply to A.
l\/lachines without connectors.
Connect the external pump equipment for
liquid washing detergent to the 1/0 board,
which is located to the right of the incoming
power supply.
The I/O card has edge connectors for
connecting external pumps.

r^

3
2

5
4

7
6

^
O

Fig.

/TN
^-^

Edge connectors on the I/O board can be


loosened for connecting cables.

9
8

11
10

12

13 15
17 19
14 16
18

Installation
Outputs
Fig-

Connect external power supply (e.g. 24V DC)


for pumps to 9 and 10. If an internal power
supply (from the washing machine) is being
used, it can be taken from 1 (N) and connected to 9 and from 2 (L) and connected to 10.
Connection 11 is neutral. Max load on the
outputs 0.5 A.

15

r(3>
si

nS-

Signals for pumps 1 -4 are connected to 12-15


where connector
Washing detergent signal 1
12
Washing detergent signal 2
13
Washing detergent signal 3
14
Washing detergent signal 4
15

-Q-

O-tJ
Coni44ACn>C

Q
S
mQ

Com 1(I0-240AC

II

NQ

lopte Inp-I
l0PI0lw>4iontotnp-t-

Input 1

Opto iflp*r

Input 4

Input 2
Inputs

0^

Inputs

it1

CMQ-

Output2
Outputs

The signal level can be 5-24V DC/AC or 100240V AC. For 5-24V, the signal reference is
connected to 3 and for 100-240V to 4.
Potentials on the inputs cannot be mixed.
NB! The I/O board will be damaged if the
voltage on connection 3 is too high, >24V.
Fig.

Output4
Outputs

Connection 8 can be connected if the washing


program is to pause, e.g. while washing
detergent is being dosed.

r<^
Dosing system

;:^
OV o _
Pause signal

24V DC o -

Com 100-24^.^.

-\\-

n Q

lOpto lnp.h

Input 1

^ Q

lOpto Inp-h

Input 2

lOQ

lOpto lnp.h

Inputs

IO0

lOpto lnp.h

Input 4

NQ^
<MO-

Com

Output 1

Com

Outputs
Outputs
i

Output 4

Installation

16

r-(>
Detergent tank

1 1

\ ]

Interiock out
Com 5-24AC/DC

Com 100-240AC

Ly
4'

Input 1

Fig.

Fig

e
e
e
e
e
e

Input 2
Inputs
O0

lOpto lnp.h

CMQ-

Connection 7. If this is connected, an error


message will be displayed if any of the
chemical tanks are empty. The washing
program will continue, however.
Fit the connecting unions provided and
connect the hoses to the unions.

r(I>

Input 4

Installation
Function checks

17

r<J>

Perform the following checks once the machine is


installed:
@

Open the manual water valves.


Turn on the power at the external switch.
Fig

Put detergent into compartment 2 (Main wash).

Select a 60 program with the control knob (1).


Press the knob.
Check:
Fig

that the drum rotates normally and that there


are no unusual noises.
6217,6179,6182

that there are no leaks in water supply/drain


connections.
that water passes through the detergent
compartment and fabric conditioner
compartments.
that the door cannot be opened during a
program.

r<iy

Installation

18

Marine installation

r<^

This machine can be installed in marine


installation.

The maximum value for rolling is 15 and


for stamping 8.
Fig

Fig

*D

The machine shall be placed as shown in fig.


Mark the two holes (A) on the floor plate on the
site of machine installation.

Fig

Drill the two holes with 8.5 mm.

Fig

Thread the holes with M 10.

r<i>

r-

Installation
Fig

Thread up the four feet of the machine as


much as possible.

19

r<5>

Place the machine at its site.


Place the spacers (B) between machine and
floor.
Fig

Fig

Tighten the machine to the floor with the two


bolts.
Adjust the feet of the machine to the floor and
lock them with the nuts.

S"

B] Electrolux
ELECTROLUX LAUNDRY SYSTEMS
Lundtoftegaardsvej 93A, DK-2800 Lyngby, Denmark
Telephone: +45 4526 4800. Telefax: +45 4526 4801
Internet: www.electrolux.com/laundrysystems
E-mail: els.info@electrolux.com

Operating Manual
W450H, W455H

xxxxxxx-xx
04.50

Contents
Contents
General
Control Panel
Control knob
Display
Preset buttons
Washing Program
Start Menu
Start
Options
Delayed start
Info
Auto restart
Go back
Washing Functions
Start
Rapid advance
Pause
Changing washing program after starting
Detergent Drawer
Display Information

1
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
4
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
10

Handling
Starting With Preset Button
Starting With Control Knob

11
11
11

Error Messages

13

Maintenance

15

The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes to design and


material specifications.

Safety

/ ^

This machine can only be used with water. Never use dry cleaning
agents.
Do not allow children to operate the machine.
Do not hose down or spray the machine with water.
All mechanical and electrical installation must be carried out by
qualified personnel.
Do not bypass the door locking device.
Should the machine malfunction, please report the fault to the
technician responsible for the machine.

General
Control Panel
F'9- The control panel is used to choose the washing program with options and
1) to start and stop the machine. The panel houses a control knob and a display.
Some machines also have two preset buttons.

r<i>

Preset buttons

Alternative 1

Display

Alternative 2

Control knob

Fig.

Fig.

Control knob

r<iy

The control knob is used to select washing


program, options and any other available
functions.
Turn the knob until the required option is shown
on the display.
Confirm your choice by pushing in the knob.
Repeat this procedure until all the required
options have been chosen.

V^

r-

6180

XA)2

General
Display
Fic|. The display presents the available washing
(T) programs, options and additional functions. The
up and down arrows on the right-hand side of the
display indicate that there are more options available in the current menu.

rNORMAL

While in operation, the display also shows other


information intended for the user; refer to the
heading "Display Information".
Note!
If there is not enough room to show all the
text on the display, the first part will be displayed briefly before the text scrolls to the
side to display the second part. This sequence will be repeated as long the text in question is activated.
Preset buttons

Fig- The machine can be fitted with two buttons for


choosing two preset washing programs.
Pushing one of these buttons will activate the
corresponding washing program directly and the
machine will start automatically.
Refer to the section "Programming the Preset
Buttons" in the programming manual for how to
program the preset buttons alternative 2.

X/02

r(5>
Alternative 1

Alternative 2

51-

General
Washing Program
On delivery, the machine is programmed with
a washing program family (e.g. Economy,
Sport, etc.) containing up to 8 different washing
programs adapted to the range of uses to which
the machine is intended. The washing programs
differ depending on the family to which they
belong.
The following washing programs can be
available:

r^Sh
NORMAL 90

r^zh:
60

7) Washing program Normal, max 95C.

NORMAI. 60

Fi(

S Washing program Normal, max 60C.


Fig.

r<iy-.

8} Washing program Normal, max 40C.

HO
NORMAI. 40

Washing program Perma-Press, max 60C.


Half load.
Fig.

Washing program Perma-Press, max 40C.


Half load.

3)

Washing program Delicate, max 30C.


Half load.

Washing program Handwash,


max 30C. Half load.

6183

r<Ih:
FP 60

r^
HO
PP 4 0

r-.
DELICATE 3 0

r^^.

^n
HANCWASH

6187

y
X/02

General
Start Menu
^
@

A start menu will appear on the display once a


washing program has been selected. Here, you
can complement the selected washing program
with up to two options (on certain machines),
sel-ect how the machine is to start and obtain
information on the selected washing program.
Refer to the respective headings for more
information.

START
OPTION
DELAY START
INFO
AUTO RESTART
GO BACK

Start
The washing program starts immediately after
pressing the control knob.
Options
Fig. Before starting, the selected washing program
(u) can be complemented with up to two options.
The activated option is indicated on the display
under the name of the washing program as
"Option 1", "Option 2", etc. The following options
can be available:
"PRERINSES"

The selected washing program is complemented


with two prerinses of 2 minutes each.

HS>Activated
option

IH3N0RMAL 60
OPnoNi

{OPTION
6210^

rSELECT OPTION
PRERINSES

"PREWASH"
Rg. Alt. 1: The selected washing program is comple@
mented with a cold prewash for 6 minutes.
Alt. 2: The selected washing program is complemented with a 40 prewash for 5 minutes.

r^
SELECT OPTION

"HEAVY SOILED"

g)

Alt. 1 The selected washing program is complemented with a cold prewash for 6 minutes,
the time for the main wash is extended for
4 minutes and at temperatures above 41 ,
the temperature is increased by 8.

PREWASH

4
r^g^
SELECT OPTION

HEAVY SOILED

X/D2

General
Alt. 2: The selected washing program is complemented with a 30 prewash for 6 minutes,
main wash extended 4 minutes.
Alt. 3: The selected washing program is complemented with a 30 prewash for 5 minutes,
the main wash is extended for 4 minutes
and at temperatures above 40, the temperature is increased by 5.

r^
SELECT OPTION

t
NO PREWASH
_/

r^
SELECT OPTION

"NO PREWASH"

Ra Prewash will be excluded from the selected


@ washing program.
"LIGHT SOILED"
Fjg- The temperature is lowered 5 and the main
(}y wash shortened by 4 minutes.

"N

LIGHT SOILED
y

r^

>

SELECT OPTION

QUICK WASH

"QUICK WASH"
Ficj. The machine excludes the selected washing
(20) program's prewash and shortens spin drying
by 2 minutes.

r^

"HIGHER LEVEL"

SELECT OPTION

Fig. All the levels for the selected washing program


@ are increased by 5 units.

HIGHER LEVEL

"RINSE STOP"
Fi^ The selected washing program stops before the
(22) final rinse. To fill with water and continue with
the washing program, the control knob must be
pressed in.

r^
SELECT OPTION

t
RINSE STOP

"EXTRA RINSE"
Fjg-

Gives an extra rinse in the selected washing


program.

r%SELECT OPTION

EXTRA RINSES

X/02

General
"GENTLE EXTRACTION"

3)

Alt. 1: Spin drying in the selected washing program is excluded between rinses and the
final spin dry is 20 seconds.

r^
SELECT OPTION
GENTLE

Alt. 2: Spin drying in the selected washing program is excluded between rinses and the
final spin dry is 2 minutes.
"SHORT EXTRACTION"
Fig.
(25)

r^
SELECT OPTION

Final spin dry in selected washing program is


shortened by 4 minutes.

SHORT

"EXTRA EXTRACTION"
^

Final spin dry in selected washing program is


extended by
2 minutes.

r^
SELECT OPTION

"EXTRACTION (TIME)."
Fig@

The duration of the final spin dry in the selected


washing program can be set to 10 seconds, 15
seconds, 30 seconds or 4 minutes.

EXTRA

i
i

Hg^.
SELECT OPTION

t
EXTRACTION

x/02

General
Delayed start
In this menu, you can set a delay of up to 99
hours and 59 minutes before the machine starts
the selected washing program.

S)

The arrow in the menu indicates the column


being adjusted. Turn the l<nob clocl<wise to set
the desired number. Turn the knob anticlockwise
to move to the next column. Press the knob to
confirm after completing the settings.

r^

DELAYED START
HOURtHIITOTES

00:00

r^
NOT
ALLOWED
FUNCTION

The time left to start starts when the setting has


been confirmed.
It will be indicated on the display if the selected
washing program does not allow this function.
Info
This menu presents information on the selected
washing program.

imNQRHAL 6D

r@"
xxxx

Auto restart
Fi(
^1

In this menu, you can set the number of times


the machine will automatically restart the
selected washing program, up to 999 times.
The arrow in the menu indicates the column
being adjusted. Turn the knob clockwise to set
the desired number. Turn the knob anticlockwise
to move to the next column. Press the knob to
confirm after completing the settings.
The machine will start straight away once the
number has been confirmed.

S)

r^
IffiJNORHAL 6D
AUTO RESTARTS

0000

The auto restart function will be zeroed after


using the rapid advance function in the selected
washing program.
It will be indicated on the display if the selected
washing program does not allow this function.

Go back
Return to the program selection menu.

XA)2

General
Washing Functions
START

Activated
option

pS: Turn the control knob to the START row. Press


(32) the knob to start the selected program.
F15- On machines equipped with preset buttons, the
(33) preset washing program can be started with the
respective button.
RAPID ADVANCE

OPHDNl

START

r@>-

Turn the control knob while the washing program


is in progress.
The different steps of the washing program will
be shown on the display. Turn the knob to the
desired program step and press. The machine
will now jump to the selected step and continue
the program from there.

LBSNORMAL 6G

Alternative

r^

PAUSE

3)

Press the control knob to turn on the pause


function. Restart the washing program by
pressing the control knob again.

Note!
The door will be locked and the drain valve
closed during the pause.

r@"
RAPID ADU.

Changing washing program after starting

HAINWASH

p9: Press the control knob to start the pause


(^ function. Turn the control knob to the new
program and press.
The water will be emptied from the machine, after
which it will start from the beginning of the new
washing program.

HAINH&SH 3
DRAIN 1
EXTRACTION 1

r-

r%

K^

i
\

J
yum

General
Detergent Drawer
(M^ \ I /

Pi'ewash, powder or liquid detergent

\ 11 / Main wash. Two compartments, one for


' powder detergent and one for liquid.

Fabric softener, liquid

XA)2

General

10

Display Information
Fig- During the wash, the remaining time for the
selected washing program will be shown at the
bottom of the display. The time is given in minutes.
To calculate the remaining time, the machine uses
a model calculation based on average times.

X/D2

rliSUNORNAL Sn
MAINUA5H1
TIME LEFT 2G

IHandling
Starting With Preset Button
Empty any pockets.

r<i>
\ i i vlly

Add the correct amount of detergent and


softener.
Note!
Refer to the dosages on the detergent
packaging. Do not overdose.

Press the preset button for the desired


program.
If the machine has a slot meter, insert the
correct money/tokens.
Note!
Pushing one of these buttons will activate
the correspondlngwashing program
directly and the machine will start
automatically.

6250

r^

X1/D1

Handling
Starting With Control Knob

Select the desired washing program with the


control knob and confirm by pressing the
knob.

?^

Add any options to the selected washing


program. Select from the list with the control
knob and confirm by pressing the knob.

Fi(

Note!
Max two options can be chosen for
eachwashing program

r<i>
60

r<>
IKINORMAL 6U
DPnONl

If the machine has a slot meter, insert the


correct money/tokens.

t OPTION

Add the correct amount of detergent and


softener.
Note!
Refer to the dosages on the detergent
packaging. Do not overdose.
Select START with the control knob and press
the knob.

rl^NORMAL 6
DPnONl

START
6179/6180

X1/01

Error codes
Error Messages
Fig.
(T)

r<^

A fault in the program or in the machine is


indicated by an error message comprising
an error code and a descriptive text.
The washing program and the error code can
be reset before restarting by holding in the
START button/knob for at least 10 seconds
or turning off the power to the machine.

CodeText

Cause/Action

001 NO WATER

Water level acknowledgement not received in time.


IVIake sure the water cocks are open.

002 DOOR OPEN

Door position acknowledgement not received during


program. Open and close the door.

003 DOOR LOCK FAIL

Door lock acknowledgement not received in time. Open


and close the door.

007 OVERFILLED

Water level above established safety limits during


program. Try to restart the machine.

010 WATER LEFT

Water above established level after drain. Make sure


the drain is not blocked by lint or foam. Try to restart the
machine.

Contact service personnel for other error messages.

X/02

Maintenance
Maintenance
Daily
Clean the door seal from detergent residue.
Make sure the door is not leaking.
Clean the detergent drawer and wipe off the machine with a damp rag.
Make sure the drain valve is not leaking.
Start the machine and make sure the door is locked during the program.
Rapid advance the program to stop and make sure the door cannot be
opened until after the program is complete.
Monthly
Check that valves, hoses and connections are not leaking.
Remove any lint from the drain connection, joints in the drain pipe, etc.
Every three months
When chemicals have collected on the edges of the panels:
Unplug the power cable.
Turn off the water supply and release the pressure from the inlet hoses.
Remove the water inlet hoses from the back of the machine and clean or
change the inlet filter.
Clean the detergent drawer thoroughly.
Take off the top and front machine panels.
Wash away detergent and other chemicals from the panels to stop them
rusting.
Make sure there are no leaks inside the machine. Repair as necessary.
Clean the seal around the door.
Refit the top and front panels.

X1/D1

H] Electrolux
ELECTROLUX LAUNDRY SYSTEMS
Lundtoftegaardsvej 93A, DK-2800 Lyngby, Denmark
Telephone: +45 4526 4800. Telefax: +45 4526 4801
Internet: www.electrolux.com/laundrysystems
E-mail: els.info@electrolux.com

H] Electrolux

Spare Parts Catalogue

ELECTROLUX LAUNDRY SYSTEMS

Reservdelskatalog

W450H, W455H

DOC. NO.
EDITION

438 9021-15
50.2004

Group
Grupp

List of issues
W450H,W455H
Illustration
100797
100799
101178
101906
102234
102235
102236
102237
102238
102239
102240
102241
102242
102243
102247
102248
102249
102250

Page
37
39
29
31
9
11
13
19
41
7
17
15
21
25
23
33
35
27

Table of contents
Inlet valve 3/4", 3-way
Inlet valve 3/4", 1-way
Electric drain valve
Electrical drain valve
Panels
Door and door lock
Control panel
Electric components connection
Inlet valve 3/4", 4-way
Frame
Program mechanism
Outer and inner drum
Motor control
Water connections
Hoses
Detergent container
Liquid detergent
Drain valve

Group
Grupp

Page
Sida
5

W450H,W455H
Table of contents

Innehllsfbrteckning

Frame
Panels
Door and door lock
Control panel
Outer and inner drum
Program mechanism
Electric components connection
Motor control
Hoses
Water coimections
Drain valve
Electric drain valve
Electrical drain valve
Detergent container
Liquid detergent
Inlet valve 3/4", 3-way
Inlet valve 3/4", 1-way
Inlet valve 3/4", 4-way

Stativ
Pltar
Lucka och luckls
Manverpanel
Ytter- och innertrumma
Programverk
Eldetaljer anslutning
Motorstymrng
Slangar
Vattenanslutningar
Avloppsventil
El. avloppsventil
Elektrisk avloppsventil
Tvttmedelslda
Flytande tvttmedel
Tilloppsventil 3/4",3-vgs
Tilloppsventil 3/4",l-vgs
Tilloppsventil 3/4",4-vgs

Page/Sida
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41

102239

Group
Grapp

Page
Sida
7

W450H,W455H
Frame
Stativ
Item

Quantity

Art.No

Pos.

Antal

Art.nr

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
* 28
29
30
* 31
32
33
34
35
36
37

W450H
W455H
1 1
1 1
1 1
RQ RQ
4 4
1 1
2 2
1 1
4 4
1 1
1 1
8 8
8 8
12 12
8 8
1
3

Description

Benmning

472 9901-81
438 5143-01
438 5143-03
471 7864-02
471 8194-01
472 9901-26
438 0027-01
471 8305-04
471 7807-02
732 2118-01
472 9901-25
471 8149-11
471 8149-01
471 8502-25
732 2118-01
471 9746-01

Bottom plate
Bottom plate
Bottom plate
Clip
Foot
Frame
Tensioner
Screw
Tension plate
Locking nut
Spring strut
Rubber buffer
Rubber buffer
Washer
Locking nut
Motor

Bottenplatta
Bottenplatta
Bottenplatta
Clips
Fot
Ram
Spnne
Skruv
Sprmbricka
Lsmutter
Fjderben
Gummibufifert
Gummibuffert
Bricka
Lsmutter
Motor

471 9740-53
438 5123-01
438 5124-01
438 5124-02
471 8356-01
725 2461-51
471 8502-14
732 2118-01
438 5146-01

Sensor
Bushing
Spacer tube
Spacer tube
Screw
Screw
Washer
Locking nut
Cover
Drain valve
Hose clamp
Distance piece
Pump
Bracket
Rubber buffer
Cover
Transformer
Transformer

Sensor
Bussning
Distansrr
Distansrr
Skruv
Skruv
Bricka
Lsmutter
Skydd
Avloppsventil
Slangklmma
Mellanstycke
Pump
Hllare
Gummibuffert
Skydd
Transformator
Transformator

736 2840-51
438 5020-02
438 5175-01
438 5197-01
438 5478-03
438 5478-11

438 5021-01 Connection


438 5025-01 Hose
736 2840-51 Hose clamp
Drain valve

Anslutning
Slang
Slangklmma
Avloppsventil

Illustration
Illustration

Issue
Utgva

102239/1

Month
Mnad

Year
r

2004

Info

Notes

Info

Ainnrkning

3 Incl. insulation
3
3 El. drain valve
3 M5
3
3 Complete
3
3 M8X60
3 18x8,4x2
3 M8
1,2 Set of 4
1
1
3
3 M8
1,2 SOLE
Not used
1,2
3
3 L= 187,5
3 L=22,5
3 M8X220
3 M8X50
3 BRB 8,4X17
3 M8
3
1,2 See illustr. 101082
3 050-63
3
See illustr. 102247
3
3
3 See illustr. 102247
1,2 100-120-200V/230V
1,2 380-400-440-480V/230V
Not used
3
3
3 050-63
See illustr. 101178

Issue
01
102234

Month Year
11
04

Group
Grupp

Page
Sida
9

W450H,W455H
Illustration
Illustration

Panels
Pltar

102234/1

Item

Quantity

Art.No

Pos.

Antal

Art.nr

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

W450H
W455H
1
1
1
1 1
2 2
1 1
1 1
2 2
1 1
4 4
4 4
2
4
1
2
1

2
4
1
2
1

16

17
18
19
20
21

2
1
1
7
1

1
2
1
1
7
1

Description

438 5079-21
438 5079-30
438 5079-70
432 6307-01
471 8196-01
438 5081-16
438 5114-01
471 8341-24
432 6328-01
471 8454-07
438 5109-02
438 5086-03
438 5086-07
471 8196-01
438 5101-01
438 5101-11
471 8196-01
432 6309-02
432 6309-01
432 6314-02
432 6314-01
438 5335-01
432 6311-01
471 2437-15
432 6320-01
432 6310-01

Front panel
Front panel
Front panel

Strip
Plug
Door
Hinged joint
Screw
Panel plate
Rivet
Guide pin
Panel
Side panel
Side panel
Plug
Rear panel
Rear panel
Plug
Brace bracket
Brace bracket
Top panel
Top panel
Guide
Brace
Plug
Clamp
Door

Benmning

Frontplt
Frontplt
Frontplt
List
Plugg
Lucka
Gngled
Skniv
Panelplt
Nit
Styrpiime
Panel
Sidoplt
Sidoplt
Plugg
Bakstycke
Bakstycke
Plugg
Stagplt
Stagplt
Topplock
Topplock
Styming
Stag
Propp
Klamma
Lucka

Issue
Utgva

Month
Mnad

Year
r

11

2004

Info

Notes

Info

Anmikning

1
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

White
Grey
Grey, with pump
Grey
M5X12

Seeillustr. 102236
White
Grey
White
Grey
White
Grey
White
Grey

Issue
01
102235

Month Year
11
04

Group
Grupp

Page
Sida
11

W450H,W455H

Door and door lock


Lucka och lucklas
Item

Qua.

Art.No

Pos.

Ant.

Art.nT

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Description

432 7112-01 Door


472 9904-91 Door
Door
Glass
Gasket
432 1955-01 Knob
Knob
Bushing
Ball
Spring
Screw
472 9913-01 Kit, lock shaft
Lock shaft
Washer
Bushing
Torsion spring
725 2366-61 Screw
432 1956-01 Cover washer
432 2620-09 Logotype
432 6332-01 Trim panel

Benmning

Lucka
Lucka
Lucka
Glas
"Packning
Vred
Vred
Bussning
Kula
Fjder
Skruv
Kit, lsaxel
Lsaxel
Bricka
Bussning
Vrid^der
Skruv
Tckbricka
Logotype
Dekorplt

Illustration
Illustration

Issue
Utgva

102235/1

Info

Notes

Info

Anmrkning

Complete

Complete

1,2

M6SF 6X12

Month
Mnad

Year
r

2004

Issue
01
102236

Month Year
11
04

Group
Grupp

Page
Sida
13

W450H,W455H
Control panel
Manverpanel
Item

Qua.

Art.No

Pos.

Ant

Arl.iir

Description

432 6329-01
432 6328-01
472 5783-02
432 2615-01
471 7781-03
432 6320-01

Panel
Panel plate
Panel sign
Type plate
Sign
Clamp

Benmning

Panel
Panelplt
Panelskylt
Typskylt
Skylt
Klamma

Illustration
Illustration

Issue
Utgva

102236/1

Info

Notes

Info

Anmrkning

Month
Mnad

Year
r

2004

W455H
NEUTRAL
See illustr. 102240

Issue
01
102241

Month Year
11
04

Group
Grupp

Page
Sida
15

W450H,W455H
Outer and inner drum
Ytter- och innertrumma
Item

Qua.

Arl.No

Pos.

Ant.

Art.Tir

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
3
6
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1

Description

438 5058-01
471 9222-59
471 8502-14
732 2118-01
472 9903-78
438 5119-02
472 9901^2
471 8317-06
438 5137-06
438 5115-01
438 5127-01
731 2316-42
438 5117-02
472 9904-83

471 8357-01
438 5061-01
438 5118-01
471 8524-01
471 8358-02
471 8502-26
438 5176-01
471 7700-12
471 9813-01
471 9813-02
471 4494-01
472 9913-22
471 8192-01
471 8502-05
413 2960-01

End piece
Tension strap
Screw
Washer
Locking nut
Drum
Inner drum
Lifter
Lifter
Screw
Outer drum
Bracket
Gasket
Nut
Back plate
Repair kit
Seal
"Ball bearing
Ball bearing
Screw
Shaft
Screw
Gasket
Pulley
Spring washer
Screw
Washer
Bushing
V-belt
Heating element
Heating element
Blind flange
Sensor
Bushing
Washer
Cable set

Bennming

Gavel
Spnnband
Skruv
Bricka
Lsmutter
Trumma
Innertrumma
Valk
Valk
Skruv
Yttertrumma
Hallare
Packning
Mutter
Bakgavel
Renoverings sats
Ttning
Kullager
Kullager
Skruv
Axel
Skruv
Packning
Remskiva
Fjderbricka
Skruv
Bricka
Bussning
Kilrem
Element
Element
Blindflns
Givare
Bussning
Bricka
Ledningssats

Illustration
Illustration

Issue
Utgva

102241/1

Info

Notes

Info

Anmrkning

3
3
3 M8X140
3 BRB 8,4X17
3 MS
1 Complete
1
1 Kit
1
3
3 El. heated
3
3
3 M6
1
1,2

3
1
1
3
3
3
3
1,2
1,2 2,2kW 230V
1,2 2,2kW 240V
3
1,2 Complete
1,2
3 NB 6x22
3 Heating

Month
Mnad

Year
r

11

2004

Issue
01
102240

Month Year
11
04

Page
Sida
17

Group
Grapp

W450H,W455H

Program mechanism

Illustration
Illustration

Issue
Utgva

Programverk

102240/1

Item

Qua.

Art.No

Pos.

Ant,

Art.nr

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

Description

Benmning

Info

Notes

Info

Anmrkning

Programverk
Kretskort
Display
Programvljare
Vred
"Gimimibricka
Fjder
Hylsa
Lock
Programvljare
Fjder
Skruv
Lock

3 Complete
L2 CPU
1,2
1,2 Complete

432 6342-01

Program mechanism
Printed circuit board
Display
Program selector
Knob
Rubber cushion
Spring
Sleeve
Cover
Program selector
Spring
Screw
Cover

471 8346-02
413 3280-01
413 3274-20
432 6325-01
432 6324-01
471 4673-95
413 2901-01
413 3274-02
413 3084-03
413 3274-10
413 3275-01
432 6326-01

Bracket
Screw
Cable set
Cable set
Cover
Cover
Sign
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cable set
Cover

Hllare
Skruv
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Kpa
Kpa
Skylt
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Ledningssats
Skydd

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1,2
3

432 6802-01
432 8701-01
432 8702-01
472 9904-92

471 7848-01
432 6342-01
438 9659-01
432 6341-01

Month
Mnad

Year
r

11

2004

3
1,2 Complete
3
Not used
20-pole
4-pole
Front
Rear
Door lock
4-pole D-bus
4-pole P-bus
4-pole M-com
5-pole Level control

Issue
01
102237

Month Year
11
04

Group
Gnipp

Page
Sida
19

W450H,W455H
Illustration
Illustration

Electric components connection


Eldetaljer anslutning
Item

Qua

Alt.No

Pos.

Anl.

Art.nr

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

*
*

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

1
1
2

Description

423 6308-01 Component panel


432 6805-01 Power supply
471 8750-14 Fuse
Fuse
413 3082-01
413 308